ADINA User Interface Command Reference Manual: Utomatic

UTOMATIC
YNAMIC
NCREMENTAL
ONLINEAR
NALYSIS
ADINA User Interface

Command Reference Manual
Volume V: Display Processing
Report ARD 11-6
ADINA R & D, Inc.
December 2011
ADINA User Interface

Command Reference Manual
Volume V: Display Processing
Report ARD 11-6

December 2011
for the ADINA system version 8.8
ADINA R & D, Inc.

71 Elton Avenue
Watertown, MA 02472 USA
tel. (617) 926-5199
telefax (617) 926-0238
www.adina.com
Notices
ADINA R & D, Inc. owns both this software program system and its documentation.
Both the program system and the documentation are copyrighted with all rights reserved
by ADINA R & D, Inc.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
ADINA R & D, Inc. makes no warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied that the
Program and its documentation including any modifications or updates are free from
errors or defects. In no event shall ADINA R&D, Inc. become liable to the User or any
party for any loss, including but not limited to, loss of time, money or goodwill, which
may arise from the use of the Program and its documentation including any modifications
and updates.
Trademarks
ADINA is a registered trademark of K.J. Bathe / ADINA R & D, Inc.
All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
owners.
Copyright Notice
ADINA R & D, Inc. 1994-2011
December 2011 Printing
PRINTED IN USA
Table of contents
Table of contents
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Program execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Command syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 Input details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5 File input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.6 The AUI database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.7 Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.8 Plotting length units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1.9 Plotting symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.10 Plotting colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.11 Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.12 Tips for writing batch files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.13 New features in AUI 8.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.14 ADINA System documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Chapter 2 Quick index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Chapter 3 Input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Database operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Porthole files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3 Auxiliary files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3.4 Auxiliary commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.5 Program termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Chapter 4 Editing commands and graphics interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Graphics interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Chapter 5 Display control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Screen control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Mesh plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.3 Load plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
5.4 Band plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
5.5 Vector plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
5.6 Element line plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
5.7 Reaction plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124
5.8 Trace plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
5.9 J-integral line contour plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159
5.10 Graph plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163
5.11 Movie frames and animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-226
5.12 User defined plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-241
ADINA R & D, Inc.
iii
Table of contents
5.13 Plotting definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-253

Chapter 6 Display and post-processing definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3 Response data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.4 Response range data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
6.5 Spectrum definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
6.6 Result control definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
6.7 Model points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
6.8 Model lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
6.9 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-137
Chapter 7 Results listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Model information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 Variables listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Chapter 8 Graphics devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Command index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
iv
AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. V Display Processing
Chapter 1
Introduction
Sec. 1.1 Program execution
1. Introduction
This reference manual provides concise descriptions of the command input requirements for
the ADINA User Interface (AUI). This introduction serves to give some background
information and indicate the general command syntax including descriptions of the
conventions used.
This manual only discusses those commands that you use for model display and
postprocessing. Refer to the other AUI Command Reference Manuals for descriptions of the
commands that you use for model definition.
1.1 Program execution

Commands can be entered in the following modes:
Interactive
(a) AUI is running with the user interface displayed you can enter commands into the user
interface command window.
(b) AUI is running in command mode (using the "-cmd" option) you can enter commands
from standard input.
Batch
(a) AUI is running with the user interface displayed you can read commands from a file by
choosing File->Open.
(b) Commands can be read from a given file using the aui startup options -s (UNIX versions)
or -b (Windows version).
You can also read commands from a file using the READ command (see Section 3.3).
1.2 Command syntax

Here is the layout of a typical command reference page:
COMMAND[1] PARAM1 PARAM2[2]...

data1i data2i[3]...
General description of command function.[4]
ADINA R & D, Inc.
1-1
Chap. 1 Introduction
PARAM1
Description of parameter PARAM1[5]. {<input choices>}[7]
PARAM2
Description of parameter PARAM2. {<input choices>}
[<default>][6]
[<default>]
...
data1i
Description of data line entry data1i[5] (ith row, column 1).
data2i
Description of data line entry data2i (ith row, column 2).
[<default>][6]
{<input choices>}[7]
[<default>]
{<input choices>}
...
Auxiliary commands[8]
LIST COMMAND
Brief description of this command.
DELETE COMMAND
Brief description of this command.
Issuing a command allows you to alter the data associated with the command. This data
comprises the values associated with the command parameters and possibly a table, input via
"data lines", associated with the command.
In the above, the command name "COMMAND"[1], given at the top of the reference page, has
the first few characters emphasized to show the minimum number of characters required to be
input to uniquely identify the command. A list of parameters[2] and data lines[3] for the
command then follows. In this list the first few characters in the parameter and data line
names are emphasized to show the minimum number of characters required to uniquely
identify the parameter and data line names.
Following a general outline of the command function[4], a description of the command
parameters and data line entries is given below the relevant keynames[5].
The parameters usually have default values[6] which are assumed if the parameter is not
explicitly specified. The default values are indicated in brackets [ ] a bold value indicates a
default value (number or string) and an italicized string indicates the source of the default
value, which is either (a) a text description of the default, (b) a parameter name from the same
command, or (c) a combination of command + parameter names, indicating that the default is
1-2
Sec. 1.2 Command syntax
taken from the setting of another (different) command parameter.

A parameter for which no default is provided means that there is no default i.e., some
choice must be entered for that parameter.
One important parameter type is that of an entity identifier for which the parameter
keyname "NAME" is normally reserved. If the object identified by NAME has already been
defined, then the other parameter defaults are set to the previous settings for that object. If a
new NAME is given then the defaults, as indicated by the command reference pages herein,
are taken. In the former case, execution of the command redefines the named object.
The choice of parameter values is often discussed within the parameter description, but,
where appropriate, a simple list of choices follows the parameter description[7]. For example,
parameters with simple logical choices will have the list "{ YES / NO }" appended to the
description.
When a table is associated with the command, the command includes data input lines. For
some commands, the table is initially empty, but for other commands the table already
includes data lines.
The columns of a data line can be divided into two types: key columns and data columns.
When a data line has key columns, the key value columns always precede the data value
columns. In this case the values of the key columns uniquely identify the data line, and,
therefore, two data lines cannot have the same key column values for such input, the second
input data line overwrites the data associated with the key column values.
You can delete a data line by preceding the key column values with the DELETE prefix.
When a data line does not have key columns, two or more data lines can have the same values
but you cannot use the DELETE prefix to delete data lines without key columns. However,
you can always delete all of the data lines of a table using the @CLEAR or CLEAR
keywords. This is of course especially useful for those tables in which there are no key
columns.
For data line input, not all the columns need be specified; the ENTRIES keyword, which can
be input as the first data line following the command line, can be used to select a subset of the
data column entries (see below). Then the values you enter in the subsequent data lines are
associated with the columns indicated by the ENTRIES parameters, the other data columns
taking default values whenever possible. Note, however, that key columns are required input,
and should thus be included in the ENTRIES column list.
Many commands have "auxiliary" commands[8] which are entered with one of the following
prefixes:
ADINA R & D, Inc.
1-3
LIST
DELETE
UPDATE
RESET
COPY
SET
SHOW
list object definitions

delete objects from the database
update command defaults
reset command defaults
copy objects
set "currently active" objects
show "currently active" objects
Brief command descriptions are provided for the auxiliary commands.
1.3 Input details

Command input
Please refer to command ZONELIST (which is fully described in Section 7.2) in the
following discussion:
ZONELIST ZONENAME RESULTGRID SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL
RESPOPTION RESPONSE RESPRANGE VARIABLES...
When entering commands, only as many characters as necessary to uniquely specify the
command name need be entered. The same rule applies to the parameters and data line entry
key names within a command. The minimum number of characters necessary are indicated in
bold.
Note that commands and parameters are case insensitive. All commands, parameters, values
are stored in upper case, except for string variables (headings, graph legends, filenames, etc.).
Parameter values can be input in any order if the keynames are used, e.g.,
ZONELIST SMOOTHING=NONE ZONENAME=ZONE1 VARIABLES=STRESS-XX,
STRESS-YY
Some or all of the parameters can be excluded if the positional order of the parameters is
observed, e.g.,
ZONELIST ZONE1 , , NONE , , , , , STRESS-XX STRESS-YY
(the parameters RESULTGRID, RESULTCONTROL, RESPOPTION, RESPONSE,
RESPRANGE have been omitted by the use of the commas).
A mix of keyname parameters and positional input is allowed, e.g.,
ZONELIST ZONE1 , , NONE VARIABLES=STRESS-XX STRESS-YY
1-4
Sec. 1.3 Input details
The above uses of the ZONELIST command are all equivalent. The omitted parameters in
each case take the default values.
Data lines
Many commands require data line (tabular) input, e.g., NODELINE (see Section 6.8):
NODELINE NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE NODE FACTOR
substructurei reusei nodei factori
Use the ENTRIES keyword to select only the data columns that you want to enter (the other
data columns will be given default values):
NODELINE TEST
ENTRIES NODE FACTOR
1 2.0
2 3.0
3 4.0
DATAEND
Most commands that take this form of input also allow for incremental row generation via the
"STEP inc TO" option where "inc" represents an increment in the generation. Here are some
examples:
1)
NODELINE TEST
ENTRIES NODE FACTOR
1 2.0
STEP 2 TO
5 2.0
DATAEND
is equivalent to
NODELINE TEST
ENTRIES NODE FACTOR
1 2.0
3 2.0
5 2.0
@
ADINA R & D, Inc.
1-5
2)
NODELINE TEST
ENTRIES NODE FACTOR
1 2.0
STEP 1 TO
5 2.0
DATAEND
NODELINE TEST
ENTRIES NODE FACTOR
1 2.0
TO
5 2.0
DATAEND
and
NODELINE TEST
ENTRIES NODE FACTOR
1 2.0 / 2 2.0 / 3 2.0 / 4 2.0 / 5 2.0
DATAEND
are all equivalent.
Note that data line input can be terminated either by entering the symbol "@" or the string
"DATAEND" otherwise data line input is terminated automatically by input of the next
command, see below for more details.
Data line rows can be deleted by preceding the key value by the prefix DELETE. This
method of deletion also supports row 'generation' i.e., "DELETE i STEP k TO j" can be
used to delete a range of values.
All the data lines associated with a command can be deleted simultaneously using the
@CLEAR or CLEAR keywords. This is useful when you want to define a table if you do not
know if the table is already defined or not:
NODELINE TEST
CLEAR
ENTRIES NODE FACTOR
1 2.0
STEP 2 TO
5 2.0
DATAEND
In this case, the CLEAR keyword deletes any existing rows defined for nodeline TEST. It is
not an error to use the CLEAR keyword when there are no existing rows defined.
1-6
Sec. 1.3 Input details
Termination of data line input - string values in data input lines

As stated above, data line input is terminated either by entering the symbol @, the string
DATAEND or the input of a new command. When data lines begin with string values,
care must be taken to enclose the string values in quotes, otherwise the string values might be
interpreted as new commands. For example (using pre-processing commands)
DOMAIN NAME=1
ENTRIES TYPE NAME
VOLUME 1
@
In this sequence, the AUI assumes that the string VOLUME begins a new command. But the
string VOLUME by itself does not uniquely specify the command, since there is more than
one command that begins with VOLUME. So the AUI gives an error message such as
***INPUT ERROR: Keyname TYPE
Valid choices are
PATCH
VERTEX
REVOLVED
...
which is confusing, since the word TYPE in the error message does not refer to the data input
line entries in the DOMAIN command.
To avoid this error message, enclose the string VOLUME in quotes:
DOMAIN NAME=1
ENTRIES TYPE NAME
VOLUME 1
@
The quotes tell the AUI to interpret the string as a data input line entry.
Names
AUI names are usually of two types alphanumeric strings of up to 30 characters or integer
label numbers. Integer label numbers normally start with 1.
Integer values
Integers can be input with a maximum of 9 significant digits. For positive values, a preceding
+ sign can, if desired, be input.
Real values
Specification of real values can include a decimal point and/or an exponent. The exponent
must be preceded by the letters E, e, D, or d, e.g.,
ADINA R & D, Inc.
1-7
2E5
2.0d+05
200000.
all refer to the same real number.
Alphanumeric values
Alphanumeric values must start with a letter (A-Z, a-z), a digit (0-9) or the # sign. The only
permissible characters allowed are the letters A-Z, a-z, the digits 0 to 9, the hyphen (-), the +
sign, and the underscore (_). Lower-case characters in an alphanumeric value are always
converted to upper-case by the AUI.
String values
A string should be enclosed by apostrophes ('). Any apostrophe within the string must be
entered twice. Any character can be included in a string. Lower-case characters in a string
value are not converted to upper-case.
Filenames
A filename should be enclosed by apostrophes ('). Filenames can be up to 256 characters
long.
Length of input lines
Input lines to the AUI can each contain up to 256 characters.
Line continuation, line separator, blanks, and commas
If the last non-blank character of a command or data line is a comma (,), then the command or
data is continued on the next input line. The total length of an input line and all of its
continuations can be up to 2000 characters.
A slash (/) in an input line can be used to end a command or data input line; more commands
or data can then be entered on the same input line.
A blank, several blanks, <Tab> characters, a comma, or a comma surrounded by blanks act as
delimiters. Commands, parameter keynames and values must be separated by delimiters.
Comments
Comment lines can appear anywhere in the input and are identified by an asterisk (*) in
column 1, e.g.,
* This is a comment line
Parameter substitution
You can define parameters as numeric expressions, and use the parameter values in later
commands. This feature is useful when creating batch files used in structural optimization.
1-8
Sec. 1.5 File input/output
For example:
PARAMETER A '5 + 7'
PARAMETER B '2*$A'
PARAMETER C '3 + $A + 4*$B'
BODY BLOCK DX1=$A DX2=$B DX3=$C
defines the size of a rectangular block in terms of parameters A, B and C. See the
PARAMETER command (in Section 3.4) for more information and examples.
1.4 Messages
Commands will often echo messages confirming their successful completion, or provide other
information. Otherwise you may get error/warning messages with varying levels of severity:
*** INPUT ERROR
You have entered an unacceptable parameter value or data. The command will not
execute with invalid input.
*** WARNING
The command has completed, but has detected a possible inconsistency which you may
have to resolve.
*** ALERT
The command has completed, but has detected a definite inconsistency which you have to
resolve.
*** ERROR
The command has not completed.
*** INTERNAL ERROR
The program has determined some internal inconsistency, normally due to a software bug.
You should contact ADINA R & D Inc. if you encounter such a message. In order to
track down the source of the problem it would be most useful if the input responsible for
this condition is made available to the support engineers.
*** MEMORY OVERFLOW
The command has not completed, due to the program running out of memory. Increase
the memory allocation to the program.
Note: you can request that the AUI skip the remaining commands in a batch file after the AUI
writes error messages, see Section 1.12 and the ERRORACTION parameter of the
CONTROL command for further information.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
1-9
1.5 File input/output

The AUI uses several files for handling I/O. Here is a brief description of some of them,
together with a suggested filename extension convention:
<file>.in
<file>.idb
<file>.plo
<file>.pdb
<file>.ses
<file>.ps
<file>.dat
<file>.por
<file>.out
ADINA-IN batch command input

ADINA-IN permanent database
ADINA-PLOT batch command input
ADINA-PLOT permanent database
AUI session file (echo of command input)
PostScript snapshot
Analysis data
Analysis porthole file
Analysis printout
1.6 The AUI database

The AUI uses an internal database to store and retrieve data used during program execution.
The internal database is stored in main memory and, if main memory is not sufficient, a
temporary database file is created to hold the excess data. The internal database can be saved
in a disk file, called a permanent database file, so that it can be retrieved in a future run.
Five commands are used to create, open and save databases. DATABASE NEW creates a
new empty internal database. DATABASE OPEN initializes the internal database using a
specified permanent database file. DATABASE SAVE saves the internal database to disk,
allowing you to specify the name of the database file. DATABASE ATTACH causes the
AUI to use the specified permanent database file as the internal database. DATABASE
DETACH renames the internal database file as a permanent database file. All of these
commands are described in Section 3.1.
The permanent database file is similar to a text file used in a word processing program. Like
the text file, the permanent database file resides on disk and can be retrieved by the program
in a future run. The permanent database file can be saved on disk periodically during
program execution to protect against loss of data due to computer failure. During each save
operation, a different permanent database file can be selected so that several versions of the
database are available for retrieval. (This is similar to saving several versions of a text file on
disk when working with a word processing program.)
For the differences between DATABASE OPEN and DATABASE ATTACH, see the
command description for DATABASE ATTACH. For the differences between DATABASE
SAVE and DATABASE DETACH, see the command description for DATABASE
DETACH.
1-10
Sec. 1.7 Listings
1.7 Listings
Many AUI commands generate lists. For example, the ZONELIST command in Section 7.2
lists the values of variables. You can specify whether listings are sent to your terminal or to a
disk file (see the FILELIST command in Section 3.3).
When the listings are sent to your terminal, you are prompted by
--More--( %)
after each screen of the listing. The number printed before the percent sign represents the
percentage of the file that has been displayed so far. Responses to this prompt are as follows:
<return>
<spacebar>
<i><spacebar>
D or d
<i>D or <i>d
<i>Z or <i>z
<i>S or <i>s
<i>F or <i>f
<i>B or <i>b
Q or q
=
.
Display another line of the listing.

Display another screenful of the listing.
Display i more lines.
Display the next half-screen (a scroll) of the listing.
Set the number of lines in the scroll to i and display the next scroll.
Set the number of lines in each screen to i and display the next screen.
Skip i lines and print a screenful of lines.
Skip i screenfuls and print a screenful of lines.
Skip back i screenfuls and print a screenful of lines.
Stop the listing.
Print the current line number in the listing.
Repeat the last prompt response.
In these responses, <i> represents an optional integer argument, defaulting to 1. If you are
familiar with the UNIX operating system, you will recognize that the above options
correspond closely to the options of the 'more' command.
1.8 Plotting length units

Many plotting commands and their related depiction commands have length unit parameters
to indicate drawing units. The typical choices are:
CM
INCHES
PERCENT
PIXELS
POINTS
centimeter
inches
percentage of size of graphics window, frame, or subframe
screen resolution unit
1 point = 1/72 inch
ADINA R & D, Inc.
1-11
1.9 Plotting symbols

Many plotting commands allow you to select plotting symbols. These can be input via the
"extended character" convention see the TEXT command in Section 5.12 for details.
1.10 Plotting colors

Many plotting commands allow you to select plotting colors. There are many colors
predefined by the AUI; use the LIST COLORTABLE command in Section 5.13 to see their
definitions. You can use the COLORTABLE command in Section 5.13 to add or modify
colors.
The special color INVERSE is interpreted by the AUI as the opposite of the background
color. For example, if the background color of the graphics window is BLACK, then color
INVERSE plots as WHITE.
Use the PLCONTROL commands in Chapter 8 to set the background color of the graphics
window.
A color name can also be in the format #XXXXXX where each X is a hex digit. Digits 1 and
2 give the red intensity, digits 3 and 4 give the green intensity and digits 5 and 6 give the blue
intensity. This is the same specification technique as is used in HTML. Examples:
#FFFFFF = red intensity 255, green intensity 255, blue intensity 255
#F42D37 = red intensity 244, green intensity 45, blue intensity 55
1.11 Graphics
You can display and interact with graphics using the command-line interface (UNIX versions
only). Before you can display graphics, you must issue a FRAME command (see Section
5.1). The first FRAME command initializes a graphics window and the plotting surface.
Successive FRAME commands clear the graphics window.
The contents of the graphics window are refreshed only when you are using a LOCATOR
command (see Section 4.2). For example, if you expose part of the graphics window, the
exposed part is redrawn only when you issue a LOCATOR command. You can resize the
graphics window using the mouse, but the contents are repositioned only when you issue a
LOCATOR command.
To exit a LOCATOR command, move the mouse cursor into the graphics window and press
(lower-case) q.
Use the SNAPSHOT command (see Section 3.3) to dump displayed graphics to a file. You
cannot use the PLSYSTEM command to force all graphics output to be drawn to a file. If
1-12
Sec. 1.12 Tips for writing batch files
you are using a batch file and do not want to display the graphics in a graphics window, you
can force the AUI to draw to the dummy plotting system NULL. For example, the command
sequence
PLSYSTEM
FRAME
MESHPLOT
SNAPSHOT
FRAME
MESHPLOT
BANDPLOT
SNAPSHOT
END
NULL
FILE=test.ps APPEND=NO
VAR=STRESS-XX
FILE=test.ps
can be submitted as a batch file to the AUI. It will not draw any graphics into a graphics
window, but will dump the graphics to the file "test.ps". If you want to simultaneously
preview the graphics, simply remove or comment out the PLSYSTEM NULL command.
If you want the AUI to pause between frames, you can either put READ END commands
where you want the AUI to pause and then use the READ command to incrementally read the
command file, or you can put PAUSE commands where you want the AUI to pause.
1.12 Tips for writing batch files

Increasing execution speed: The AUI contains features that are useful when you enter
commands using the dialog boxes, but are not useful when you read commands from a batch
file. These features are activated by default. You can deactivate the features to increase the
speed at which batch files are processed, and to reduce the memory requirements of the AUI.
The features are
Undo/redo storage: To turn off storage of undo/redo information, use the command
CONTROL UNDO=-1.
Automatic model rebuilding: This feature is used in ADINA-IN only, but we describe it here
for completeness. After the AUI processes an ADINA-IN command, it updates various data
structures so that the updated model is plotted correctly. To turn off this feature, use the
command CONTROL AUTOMREBUILD=NO. When this feature is turned off, if you want to
plot the model, you must use the ADINA, ADINA-T or ADINA-F commands to rebuild the
model beforehand. Note that batch files created by TRANSOR have this command setting.
When you have completed the batch input, you can set AUTOMREBUILD back to YES and
rebuild (and validate) the model using the ADINA, ADINA-T or ADINA-F commands.
Session file creation: To turn off creation of the session file, use the command
FILESESSION NO. (Note that if you use the AUI in command-line mode, this is the
default, but if you use the AUI in dialog box mode, the default is FILESESSION
ADINA R & D, Inc.
1-13
OVERWRITE.)
Storage of session file information in the database: To turn off this feature, use the command
CONTROL SESSIONSTORAGE=NO.
Automatic zone rebuilding: The AUI automatically creates zones corresponding to element
groups, geometry bodies, etc. When creating a model with many element groups or geometry
bodies, this feature slows down the AUI. To turn off this feature, use the command
CONTROL AUTOZONE=NO
Stopping after an error or memory overflow is detected: The AUI includes a feature that
skips the remaining commands in a batch file after an error or memory overflow is detected.
To activate this feature, use the command CONTROL ERRORACTION=SKIP.
Summary: Use the following commands to perform all of the above actions:
FILESESSION NO
CONTROL UNDO=-1 AUTOMREBUILD=NO SESSIONSTORAGE=NO,
ERRORACTION=SKIP AUTOZONE=NO
1.13 New features in AUI 8.8

The following new features are implemented in AUI 8.8 for display and post-processing.
New commands
BOLTPOINT, BOLTCOMBINATION, BOLTLINE: Defines bolt points, bolt combination
points and bolt lines. Bolt points allow the results from bolt element groups to be accessed.
EVECTORQUANTITY: Allows definition of a vector/tensor quantity from variables.
Updated commands/parameters
ELDEPICTION ... CSECTOPT CSECTNSEG NAXISNSEG: Allows plotting of Hermitian
beam cross-sections, and allows plotting of Hermitian beam neutral axes as curved lines.
BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC ... LOWER UPPER: Controls colors for values less than the
lowest value in the band table, and for values greater than the highest value in the band table.
BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC ... ROUNDING
BANDTABLE REPEATING ... ROUNDING: Controls rounding of values in the band table.
EVECTORGRID SITEOPTION=NODES: Forces plotting of quantities at nodes.
1-14
Sec. 1.14 ADINA System documentation
EVECTORRENDERING FILTER: Allows plotting of only positive or negative tensor

quantities.
ZONE and HIGHLIGHT : New selections GLUEMESH SURFACE and GLUEMESH
SURFACE SEGMENT for plotting gluemesh surfaces.
Support for new features of the ADINA System
ADINA-EM
New quantities for EVECTORPLOT command: EFI, EFI-R, EFI-I, HMI, HMI-R, HMI-I,
APT, APT-R, APT-I, DFI, DFI-R, DFI-I, BMI, BMI-R, BMI-I
New parameter for RESULTCONTROL command: OMEGAT
OpenCascade geometry
New parameter for GSDEPICTION command: OCCTOL
Beam-bolt elements
New quantities for ELINEPLOT command: BOLT_SHEARFORCE-S,
BOLT_SHEARFORCE-T, BOLT_TORSION, BOLT_MOMENT-S, BOLT_MOMENT-T
Additional variables
Bolt groups
Variables BOLT-FORCE, BOLT-SHORTENING are added.
Beam-bolt elements
Variables BOLT_SHEARFORCE-S, BOLT_SHEARFORCE-T, BOLT_TORSION,
BOLT_MOMENT-S, BOLT_MOMENT-T are added.
1.14 ADINA System documentation

At the time of printing of this manual, the following documents are available with the
ADINA System:
Installation Notes
Describes the installation of the ADINA System on your computer.
ADINA User Interface Command Reference Manual
ADINA R & D, Inc.
1-15
Volume I: ADINA Solids & Structures Model Definition, Report ARD 11-2,
December 2011
Volume II: ADINA Heat Transfer Model Definition, Report ARD 11-3, December
2011
Volume III: ADINA CFD&FSI Model Definition, Report ARD 11-4, December 2011
Volume IV: ADINA EM Model Definition, Report ARD 11-5, December 2011
Volume V: Display Processing, Report ARD 11-6, December 2011
These documents describe the AUI command language. You use the AUI command
language to write batch files for the AUI.
ADINA User Interface Primer, Report ARD 11-7, December 2011
Tutorial for the ADINA User Interface, presenting a sequence of worked examples which
progressively instruct you how to effectively use the AUI.
Theory and Modeling Guide
Volume I: ADINA Solids & Structures, Report ARD 11-8, December 2011
Volume II: ADINA Heat Transfer, Report ARD 11-9, December 2011
Volume III: ADINA CFD&FSI, Report ARD 11-10, December 2011
Volume IV: ADINA EM, Report ARD 11-11, December 2011
Provides a concise summary and guide for the theoretical basis of the analysis programs
ADINA, ADINA-T, ADINA-F, ADINA-FSI, ADINA-TMC and ADINA EM. The
manuals also provide references to other publications which contain further information,
but the detail contained in the manuals is usually sufficient for effective understanding
and use of the programs.
ADINA Verification Manual, Report ARD 11-12, December 2011
Presents solutions to problems which verify and demonstrate the usage of the ADINA
System. Input files for these problems are distributed along with the ADINA System
programs.
TRANSOR for I-DEAS Users Guide, Report ARD 11-15, December 2011
Describes the interface between the ADINA System and NX I-deas. This guide is
available in HTML format and is directly accessible from the TRANSOR interface within
I-deas. The use of TRANSOR for I-deas to perform pre/post-processing and ADINA
analysis within the I-deas environment is described.
TRANSOR for Femap Users Guide, Report ARD 11-16, December 2011
Describes the interface between the ADINA System and Femap. This guide is available
as a pdf file. The use of TRANSOR for Femap to perform pre/post-processing and
ADINA analysis within the Femap environment is described.
ADINA System 8.8 Release Notes, December 2011
Provides a description of the new and modified features of the ADINA System 8.8.
1-16
Sec. 1.14 ADINA System documentation
You will also find the following book useful:

K. J. Bathe, Finite Element Procedures, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1996.
Provides theoretical background to many of the solution techniques used in the ADINA
System.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
1-17
Chapter 2
Quick index
Chap. 2 Quick index
The following index presents a quick overview of all AUI commands and their functions.
The commands are presented in the order in which they appear in the manual.
Chapter 3: Input/output
Section 3.1: Database operations
DATABASE NEW, creates a new
database.
DATABASE OPEN, opens a database.
DATABASE SAVE, saves the current
internal database as a permanent
database file.
DATABASE ATTACH, allows access to
the specified file as an AUI database
file.
DATABASE DETACH, detaches the
database.
DATABASE MOVIESAVE, creates a
database that contains only movies
and related data.
Section 3.2: Porthole files
LOADPORTHOLE, loads an ADINA,
ADINA-T or ADINA-F porthole file
into the database.
MOVIESAVE, saves all of the graphics

of a movie to a disk file.
SAVEAVI, saves an animation as an AVI
file (Windows version only)
SAVEBMP, saves the screen in a bitmap
format
COMMANDFILE, writes commands
needed to recreate the AUI database to
a file.
EXPORT STL, saves the undeformed or
deformed FE model as an STL file.
Section 3.4: Auxiliary commands
MODE, switches between preprocessing
and postprocessing mode.
FEPROGRAM, selects the current finite
element program.
PAUSE, stops processing of commandline input until you press a key.
PARAMETER, defines a parameter that
can be substituted in a later command.
ECHO, echos the given string.
Section 3.5: Program termination
Section 3.3: Auxiliary files

END, terminates the program.
READ, reads AUI input commands from
a file.
FILEREAD, controls the source of input
commands to the AUI.
FILESESSION, controls the generation
and output of a session file.
FILELIST, controls the format and
output of listings.
FILEECHO, controls echoing of input
commands
FILELOG, controls the output of log
messages.
SNAPSHOT, saves the currently
displayed graphics to a disk file.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Chapter 4: Editing commands

and graphics interaction
Section 4.1: Editing
UNDO, cancels the effects of previous
commands.
REDO, cancels the effects of previous
UNDO commands.
2-1
Chap. 2 Quick index
Section 4.2: Graphics interaction

PICKED DELETE, deletes all picked
graphics.
PICKED MESHWINDOW-NORMAL,
sets the mesh viewing windows of all
picked mesh plots to normal.
RESET MESHWINDOW, sets the mesh
viewing windows of all displayed
mesh plots to normal.
LOCATOR, controls the function of the
locator (mouse).
ZOOM, zooms into or out of the
displayed image.
PAN, pans the displayed image.
HIGHLIGHT, highlights entities such as
nodes and elements.
Chapter 5: Display Control

Section 5.1: Screen control
REGENERATE, reconstructs all
meshplots, bandplots, etc. displayed
on the screen according to the current
depiction settings of the meshplots,
bandplots, etc. and according to the
current state of the model.
FRAME, defines a frame in the graphics
window.
SUBFRAME, defines a subframe.
Section 5.2: Mesh plotting
MESHPLOT, creates a mesh plot.
MESHSTYLE, groups depictions used
by MESHPLOT.
GPDEPICTION, defines attributes used
by MESHPLOT when drawing the
points in the model geometry.
GLDEPICTION, defines attributes used
lines and edges in the model
geometry.
2-2
GSDEPICTION, defines attributes used

surfaces and faces in the model
geometry.
GVDEPICTION, defines attributes used
by MESHPLOT when labeling the
geometry volumes or geometry bodies.
MODELDEPICTION, defines some
attributes used by MESHPLOT,
including the displacement
magnification factor.
MESHRENDERING, defines some
attributes used by MESHPLOT,
including shading.
NODEDEPICTION, defines attributes
used by MESHPLOT when drawing
nodes.
ELDEPICTION, defines attributes used
by MESHPLOT when drawing
elements.
VSDEPICTION, selects a virtual shift
drawn by MESHPLOT.
MESHANNOTATION, selects optional
text plotted by MESHPLOT.
BOUNDEPICTION, defines attributes
used by MESHPLOT when drawing
boundary conditions.
PLOTAREA, defines a plotarea
depiction, used by MESHPLOT to
specify the area into which to draw the
mesh plot.
VIEW, defines a view depiction, used by
MESHPLOT to specify the view.
MESHWINDOW, defines a mesh
viewing window depiction, used by
MESHPLOT to specify the mesh
viewing window.
CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE, defines a
mesh plot cutting surface as a cutting
plane.
CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE, defines
a mesh plot cutting surface as an
isosurface of a result.
Chap. 2 Quick index
CUTSURFACE NONE, turns off mesh

plot cutting surface calculations.
GEDRAWING, defines the local nodes
between which lines are drawn when
plotting general elements with
MESHPLOT.
EVECTORGRID, defines where element

vectors drawn by EVECTORPLOT
are plotted.
EVECTORRENDERING, defines
drawing attributes used by
EVECTORPLOT, including the
maximum length of element vectors.
Section 5.3: Load plotting

Section 5.6: Element line plotting
LOADPLOT, plots the loads as vectors.
LOADSTYLE, groups depictions used
by LOADPLOT.
LOADRENDERING, defines drawing
attributes used by LOADPLOT,
including which loads are plotted.
Section 5.4: Band plotting
BANDPLOT, plots results as a band plot.
BANDSTYLE, groups depictions used by
BANDPLOT.
BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC, defines
an automatic band table used by
BANDPLOT.
BANDTABLE CUSTOM, defines a
custom band table used by
BANDPLOT.
BANDTABLE REPEATING, defines a
repeating band table used by
BANDPLOT.
BANDRENDERING, defines drawing
attributes used by BANDPLOT,
including the type of bands.
BANDANNOTATION selects optional
text plotted by BANDPLOT.
Section 5.5: Vector plotting
EVECTORPLOT, plots the results as an
element vector plot.
EVECTORSTYLE, groups depictions
used by EVECTORPLOT.
EVECTORQUANTITY, defines
quantities drawn by EVECTORPLOT.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
ELINEPLOT, plots results such as

bending moment or shear force as an
element line plot.
ELINESTYLE, groups depictions used
by ELINEPLOT.
ELINERENDERING, defines drawing
attributes used by ELINEPLOT,
including the maximum length of
element lines.
ELINEANNOTATION, selects optional
text plotted by ELINEPLOT.
Section 5.7: Reaction plotting
REACTIONPLOT, plots reactions and
contact forces as vectors.
REACTIONSTYLE, groups depictions
used by REACTIONPLOT.
Section 5.8: Trace plotting
TRACEPLOT, creates particle traces.
TRACESTYLE, groups depictions used
by TRACEPLOT
TRACETYPE PARTICLE, sets the
colors and sizes of particle traces
drawn by TRACEPLOT.
TRACETYPE RIBBON, sets the colors
and sizes of ribbon traces drawn by
TRACEPLOT.
TRACERAKE COORDINATES,
defines the locations of injectors used
by TRACEPLOT, using coordinates
2-3
Chap. 2 Quick index
TRACERAKE NODES, defines the

locations of injectors used by
TRACEPLOT, using nodes
TRACERAKE GNODES, defines the
TRACEPLOT, using nodes selected
by geometry
TRACERAKE GRIDS, defines the
TRACEPLOT, using grids
TRACECALCULATION, determines
trace calculation options used by
TRACEPLOT.
TRACERENDERING, determines
plotting options used by
TRACEPLOT.
TRACEANNOTATION, determines
optional text plotted by TRACEPLOT.
TRACESTEP, updates quasi-steady
particle traces.
Section 5.9: J-integral line contour
plotting
LCPLOT, plots a J-integral line contour.
LCSTYLE, groups depictions used by
LCPLOT.
Section 5.10: Graph plotting
MATERIALSHOW STRAIN, graphs
stress-strain curves for a material.
MATERIALSHOW TIME, graphs
material response vs time curves for a
material.
USERDATA, defines user-supplied XY
data (a userdata).
USERSHOW, graphs a userdata.
RESPONSESHOW, graphs a curve
giving the response of two variables as
functions of load step or mode shape.
LINESHOW, graphs a curve giving the
response of two variables along a line.
2-4
SPECTRUMSHOW, graphs a response

spectrum.
SSPECTRUMSHOW, graphs a sweep
spectrum.
RSPECTRUMSHOW, graphs a random
spectrum.
HARMONICSHOW, graphs the
response due to a sweep spectrum.
RANDOMSHOW, graphs the response
due to a random spectrum.
FSSHOW, graphs the response of an
SDOF system as a function of the
SDOF system natural frequency, when
the structural loading is given as
ground motion response spectra.
FTSHOW, graphs the response of an
SDOF system as a function of the
SDOF system natural frequency, when
the time history of the structure is
known.
FOURIERSHOW, graphs the results of a
Fourier analysis of the time history of
a variable.
TRACESHOW, graphs residence time
distribution data based on the data in a
trace plot.
TFSHOW, graphs a time function.
GRAPHPLOT, modifies a graph plot.
GRAPHSTYLE, groups depictions used
by the graphing section of the SHOW
commands.
GRAPHLIST, lists the curves of a graph
plot.
GRAPHDEPICTION, defines some
attributes of a graph plot, including the
graph title.
AXIS, defines attributes of axes of a
graph plot.
CURVEDEPICTION, defines attributes
of curves within a graph plot.
Chap. 2 Quick index
Section 5.11: Movie frames and

animations
USERNODALDATA, defines nodal data

that can be plotted or listed.
MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEP, creates a

movie by regenerating all mesh plots
and their attachments over a range of
solution times.
MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE,
creates a movie by regenerating all
mesh plots and their attachments,
varying the eigenvector scaling factor
sinusoidally over a range of angles.
MOVIESHOOT ROTATE, creates a
movie by rotating all mesh plots and
their attachments.
MOVIESHOOT CUTPLANE, creates a
movie by regenerating all mesh plots
and their attachments, changing the
positions of cutting planes.
MOVIESHOOT ISOSURFACE, creates
a movie by regenerating all mesh plots
and their attachments, changing the
threshold values of the cutting surface
isosurface variables.
MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT, creates
a movie by updating all quasi-steady
trace plots.
MOVIEFRAME, creates a movie frame
from the current graphics window.
ANIMATE, animates a movie.
REFRESH, redraws the graphics
window, clearing any displayed
animation.
Section 5.13: Plotting definitions
Section 5.12: User defined plotting

TEXT, draws text strings.
USERTEXT, defines text strings (a
usertext) that can be plotted by TEXT.
UDRAW, draws line segments.
USERSEGMENT, defines line segments
(a usersegment) that can be plotted by
UDRAW.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
COLORTABLE, defines colors in the

color table.
Chapter 6: Display and postprocessing definitions

Section 6.1: Settings
CONTROL, defines certain parameters
that control program behavior.
Section 6.2: Zones
ZONE, defines a zone as entities such as
elements, geometry, etc.
BOXZONE, includes/deletes elements
that lie in boxes in a zone.
CGZONE, selects contact surface groups
to include in or delete from a zone.
COMBZONE, selects zones to include in
or delete from a zone.
CSZONE, selects contact surfaces to
include in or delete from a zone.
EGZONE, selects element groups to
ELZONE, selects elements/layers to
RADGZONE, selects radiosity groups to
RADZONE, selects radiosity segments to
ACTIVEZONE, selects zones that the
AUI updates when you change the
model definition.
COLORZONE, specifies colors of
zones.
2-5
Chap. 2 Quick index
Section 6.3: Response data

RESPONSE LOAD-STEP, names a load
step (solution time) solution.
RESPONSE MODE-SHAPE, names a
mode shape solution.
RESPONSE RESIDUAL, names a
residual (static correction) solution.
RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM,
names a response spectrum solution.
RESPONSE HARMONIC, names a
harmonic analysis solution.
RESPONSE RANDOM, names a
random analysis solution.
RESPONSE RESPONSECOMBINATION, names a
combination of previously defined
responses.
RESPONSE ENVELOPE, names a
response calculation method in which
several responses are evaluated and
the most extreme value is returned.
Section 6.4: Response range data
RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP, names a
range of load step solutions.
RESPRANGE MODE-SHAPE, names a
range of mode shape solutions.
Section 6.5: Spectrum definitions
SPECTRUM, defines a response
spectrum.
SSPECTRUM, defines a sweep
spectrum.
RSPECTRUM, defines a random
spectrum.
DAMPINGTABLE, defines a damping
table.
FREQCURVE, defines a frequency
curve.
2-6
FREQTABLE, defines a frequency table,

which is a list of frequencies and peak
broadening factors.
Section 6.6: Result control definitions
SMOOTHING, defines a smoothing
technique.
RESULTCONTROL, controls the way
the AUI computes results.
MASS-SELECT, determines which
elements and nodes contribute to the
total mass/volume calculations.
RESULTGRID, controls the locations at
which the AUI computes results.
Section 6.7: Model points
NODEPOINT, names a node point.
ELPOINT, names a point within an
element or element layer.
SECTPOINT, names a point within an
element section.
CSPOINT, names a contact segment.
RADPOINT, names a point within a
radiosity surface segment.
VSPOINT, names a virtual shift.
LCPOINT, names a J-integral line
contour.
DBPOINT, names a drawbead segment
BOLTPOINT, names a bolt point
ELESETPOINT, names a point
consisting of element edges.
ELFSETPOINT, names a point
consisting of element faces.
NODECOMBINATION, names a
combination of node points.
ELCOMBINATION, names a
combination of element points.
SECTCOMBINATION, names a
combination of section points.
CSCOMBINATION, names a
combination of contact segment
points.
Chap. 2 Quick index
RADCOMBINATION, names a
combination of radiosity segment
points.
VSCOMBINATION, names a
combination of virtual shift points.
LCCOMBINATION, names a
combination of line contour points.
DBCOMBINATION, names a
combination of drawbead points.
BOLTCOMBINATION, names a
combination of bolt points.
POINTCOMBINATION, creates a
model point from previously defined
model points.
GNCOMBINATION, names a
combination of node points selected
by general selections.
MESHINTEGRATION, creates a model
point, based upon a mesh plot, that is
an integration domain.
MESHMAX, creates a model point,
based upon a mesh plot, that is a
searching domain.
REACTIONSUM, names a combination
of node points at which reactions were
computed.
Section 6.8: Model lines
NODELINE, names a line (sequence) of
node points.
ELLINE, names a line (sequence) of
element points.
SECTLINE, names a line (sequence) of
element section points.
CSLINE, names a line (sequence) of
contact segments.
RADLINE, names a line (sequence) of
radiosity surface points.
VSLINE, names a line (sequence) of
virtual shifts.
LCLINE, names a line (sequence) of Jintegral line contours.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
DBLINE, names a line of drawbead

segments
BOLTLINE, names a line of bolt points
ELESETLINE, names a line of element
edges.
ELFSETLINE, names a line of element
faces.
GNLINE, names a line of node points
selected by general selections.
Section 6.9: Variables
ALIAS, assigns an alternate name to a
variable.
CONSTANT, defines a variable to have a
constant value.
RESULTANT, defines a variable as an
arithmetic expression.
Chapter 7: Results listing

commands
Section 7.1: Model information
MODELINFO, lists information about
the finite element model loaded into
the database.
RESPONSEINFO, lists information
about the response solutions for the
finite element model loaded into the
database.
VARIABLEINFO, lists information
about the variables used to plot and
list results.
MASSINFO, lists the total mass, volume
and other related information for that
part of the model selected by MASSSELECT.
MPFINFO, lists information associated
with ground motion modal
participation factors.
CGINFO, lists information about the
specified contact group.
2-7
Chap. 2 Quick index
CPINFO, lists information about the

specified contact pair.
CSINFO, lists information about the
specified contact surface.
DRAWBEADINFO, lists information
about the specified drawbead.
EGINFO, lists information about the
specified element group.
ELINFO, lists information about the
specified element.
NODEINFO, lists information about the
specified node.
Section 7.2: Variables listing
POINTMAX, scans the values of up to
six variables at the specified point and
lists the most extreme values.
LINEMAX, scans the values of up to six
variables along the specified line and
ZONEMAX, scans the values of up to six
variables in the specified zone and
POINTEXCEED, scans the values of up
to six variables at the specified point
and lists the values that exceed a
prespecified value.
LINEEXCEED, scans the values of up to
six variables along the specified line
prespecified value.
ZONEEXCEED, scans the values of up
to six variables in the specified zone
prespecified value.
POINTLIST, lists the values of up to six
variables at the specified point.
LINELIST, lists the values of up to six
variables at points within the specified
line.
ZONELIST, lists the values of up to six
variables at points in a zone.
2-8
Chapter 8: Graphics devices

PLSYSTEM, specifies the plotting
system used to draw to the graphics
window.
PLCONTROL AI, specifies the
parameters associated with the Adobe
Illustrator plotting system driver.
PLCONTROL GDI, specifies the
parameters associated with the
Windows GDI plotting system driver.
PLCONTROL HPGL, specifies the
parameters associated with the HP-GL
plotting system driver.
PLCONTROL HPGL2, specifies the
HP-GL/2 plotting system driver.
PLCONTROL NULL, specifies the
parameters associated with the NULL
plotting system.
PLCONTROL OPENGL, specifies the
OpenGL plotting system driver.
PLCONTROL POSTSCRIPT, specifies
the parameters associated with the
PostScript plotting system driver.
PLCONTROL XWINDOW, specifies
the parameters associated with the X
Window plotting system driver.
Chapter 3
Input/output
DATABASE NEW
Sec. 3.1 Database operations
DATABASE NEW SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT

DATABASE NEW creates a new database. The new database is initially empty. Before
creating the new database, you have the option of saving any current internal database to disk.
This option is controlled by parameters SAVE and PERMFILE.
SAVE
[UNKNOWN]
Parameter SAVE is used only when a database has been modified. If you specify YES, the
program will save the current internal database to disk using the filename specified by
parameter PERMFILE. Then the program will create a new internal database. If you specify
NO, the program will not save the current internal database before creating a new internal
database. If you specify UNKNOWN, the program will ask you if you want to save the
database. {YES / NO / UNKNOWN}
PERMFILE
[the current permanent database filename]
PERMFILE is the filename of the permanent database file when saving the current database
file to disk. You will be prompted for this name if you do not enter a value for this parameter
and no permanent database name was previously specified.
PROMPT
[UNKNOWN]
When saving a permanent database file, you will be prompted "Ready to save permanent
database file?" if PROMPT is set to YES. You will be prompted "Permanent database file
already exists" if the database file already exists and PROMPT is set to UNKNOWN. You will
not receive a prompt if PROMPT is set to NO. {YES / NO / UNKNOWN}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
3-1
Chap. 3 Input/output
DATABASE OPEN
DATABASE OPEN
FILE SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT
DATABASE OPEN opens a database. Before the AUI opens the database, you have the
option of saving the current internal database to disk.
Also see DATABASE ATTACH in this section for another way to access a permanent
database.
You can open a database that was created by earlier versions of the AUI. In this case,
however, the AUI deletes and reinitializes all graphics and model display definitions in the
working copy of the opened database.
FILE
The filename of the permanent database file to be opened. If you do not enter a filename and
there is no default value, the program will prompt you for the filename.
SAVE
[UNKNOWN]
Used only when a database has been modified. If you specify YES, the program will save the
current internal database to disk using the filename specified by parameter PERMFILE. Then
the program will open the database specified by FILE. If you specify NO, the program will
not save the current internal database before opening the specified database. If you specify
UNKNOWN, the program will ask you if you want to save the database. {YES / NO /
UNKNOWN}
PERMFILE
file to disk. The program will prompt you if you do not enter a value for PERMFILE and if
no permanent database filename has previously been specified.
PROMPT
[UNKNOWN]
3-2
DATABASE SAVE
DATABASE SAVE
PERMFILE PROMPT
DATABASE SAVE saves the current internal database as a permanent database file.
Also see DATABASE DETACH in this section for another way to save the current internal
database.
PERMFILE
Specifies the filename of the permanent database file. The program will prompt you if you do
not enter a value for PERMFILE and if no permanent database filename has previously been
specified.
PROMPT
[UNKNOWN]
ADINA R & D, Inc.
3-3
DATABASE ATTACH
DATABASE ATTACH FILE

DATABASE ATTACH allows access to the specified file as an AUI database file. Unlike
DATABASE OPEN (described in this section), DATABASE ATTACH does not make a
working copy of the database file prior to opening it. Instead you work directly with the
specified file as you use the AUI, possibly modifying the file's contents.
The advantages of DATABASE ATTACH as compared to DATABASE OPEN are: disk
requirements are reduced because the AUI does not create a copy of the database file, and the
CPU time to attach a database is much less than the CPU time required to open it.
The disadvantages of DATABASE ATTACH are: (1) important information can be
inadvertently modified or deleted from an attached database file, (2) the attached database
cannot shrink, but can only grow as the AUI is used and (3) an attached database file cannot
be saved, but can only be detached using DATABASE DETACH (described in this section).
Before you can use DATABASE ATTACH, you must first save any current database, and
then use DATABASE NEW (described in this section) to create a new database. You can use
DATABASE ATTACH only if the current database is new and unmodified.
DATABASE ATTACH clears the permanent database filename.
You can attach a database that was created by earlier versions of the AUI. In this case,
however, the AUI deletes and reinitializes all graphics and model display definitions in the
attached database.
Exiting the AUI when a database is attached automatically detaches the database.
FILE
The filename of the permanent database file to be attached. If no filename is entered, the AUI
will prompt you for the filename.
3-4
DATABASE DETACH
DATABASE DETACH
PERMFILE PROMPT
DATABASE DETACH creates a permanent database file by detaching the working copy of
the database file. Unlike DATABASE SAVE (described in this section), DATABASE
DETACH does not create a new permanent database file.
The advantages of DATABASE DETACH as compared to DATABASE SAVE are: disk
requirements are reduced because the AUI does not create a copy of the database file, and the
CPU time to detach a database is much less than the CPU time required to save it.
The disadvantage of DATABASE DETACH is: the AUI does not compress the database file
by removing unused records.
After the database is detached, the AUI creates a new empty internal database.
A database can be detached at any time whether or not it was attached using DATABASE
ATTACH (described in this section).
PERMFILE
The working copy of the database file is renamed to PERMFILE.
PROMPT
[UNKNOWN]
You will be prompted "Ready to rename permanent database file?" if PROMPT is set to YES.
You will be prompted "Permanent database file already exists" if the database file already
exists and PROMPT is set to UNKNOWN. You will not receive a prompt if PROMPT is set to
NO. {YES / NO / UNKNOWN}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
3-5
DATABASE MOVIESAVE
DATABASE MOVIESAVE
FILE PROMPT
DATABASE MOVIESAVE allows you to create a database that contains only movies. You
can open the database at a later time and show the movies, either as animations or as still
images. The size of the database file created using DATABASE MOVIESAVE is typically
much smaller than the size of the database file created using DATABASE SAVE (described
in this section) because no finite element information is saved when using DATABASE
MOVIESAVE.
This command is provided for convenience in preparing demonstrations in which you will
show animations or still images. For information about creating movies, see Section 5.11.
DATABASE MOVIESAVE does not modify the existing temporary database. You can, at a
later time, use DATABASE SAVE or DATABASE DETACH (both described in this section)
to save or detach the entire database.
FILE
The filename of the database file. If no filename is entered, the AUI will prompt you for the
filename.
PROMPT
[UNKNOWN]
You will be prompted "Ready to save database file?" if PROMPT is set to YES. You will be
prompted "Database file already exists" if the database file already exists and PROMPT is set
to UNKNOWN. You will not receive a prompt if PROMPT is set to NO. {YES / NO /
UNKNOWN}
3-6
LOADPORTHOLE
LOADPORTHOLE OPERATION
Sec. 3.2 Porthole files
FILE PRESCAN RANGE TIMESTART

TIMEEND STEPSTART STEPEND
STEPINCREMENT ZOOM-MODEL
INITIALCONDITIONS CPSTART CPEND
LOADPORTHOLE loads an ADINA, ADINA-T or ADINA-F porthole file into the database.
The porthole file can be created by any of the ADINA system programs version 7.0 and
higher.
You can load the porthole files from two different finite element programs into the database.
For example, you can load the ADINA and the ADINA-F porthole files created by
ADINA-FSI into the database. When the results from two different finite element programs
are stored in the database, use the FEPROGRAM command (described in Section 3.4) to set
the current finite element program. Some commands require that you set the current finite
element program.
You can load the porthole file into a database file created by ADINA-IN. The data from the
porthole file does not overwrite the ADINA-IN information because the AUI keeps
ADINA-IN and ADINA-PLOT information separate. The advantage of loading the porthole
file into an ADINA-IN database is that you can then access geometry information during
postprocessing. For example, you can plot the deformed mesh and the geometry in the same
mesh plot. You can also use the postprocessing commands that require geometrical
information, such as GNCOMBINATION (described in Section 6.7).
You can load porthole files that were split using the MAX-STEPS parameter in the
PORTHOLE command (ADINA-IN for ADINA). Load the first porthole file using
LOADPORTHOLE CREATE and any successive porthole files using LOADPORTHOLE
RESTART or LOADPORTHOLE APPEND (it doesnt matter which command you use).
When you load a porthole file, the AUI automatically sets the mode to POSTPROCESSING
(see the MODE command described in Section 3.4) and sets the current finite element
program (see the FEPROGRAM command).
OPERATION
CREATE
RESTART
Overwrites any existing postprocessing information from ADINA,

ADINA-T or ADINA-F and loads the database with information from the
porthole file. Any preprocessing information from these programs is not
affected.
Appends information from the porthole file to information stored in the
database. This option is only applicable when the porthole file corresponds
to a restart run and when the results preceding the restart run are already in
the database.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
3-7
APPEND
LOADPORTHOLE
Appends information from the porthole file to information stored in the

database. The appended porthole file need not be a restart run for which
results are already in the database. The appended porthole file and the
results already in the database must have the same number of nodes,
elements, element groups, etc. Only the loads, time functions and number
of steps can be different.
The AUI shifts the load step numbers and solution times in the appended
porthole file so that the load step numbers and solution times do not conflict
with load step numbers and solution times previously loaded. The AUI
outputs the load step number shift and solution time shift after loading the
appended porthole file.
After loading the appended porthole file, you can access results from the
appended porthole using the shifted solution times. See the example below
for more details.
FILE
The porthole file to be loaded in this command. The file can be formatted or unformatted;
this command automatically determines whether the file is formatted or unformatted.
Except on Windows, the filename can be a pathname pattern that includes wildcards such
as *. The allowed wildcard patterns are those supported by the glob function. When the
filename includes wildcards, the AUI loads each porthole file that matches the pattern.
Porthole files can have different characteristics, e.g. one porthole file can be an ADINA
analysis and the other porthole file can be an ADINA-F analysis.
PRESCAN
[NO]
Specifies whether the AUI reads the porthole file twice, the first time to determine how many
time steps, mode shapes, etc are in the porthole file, and the second time to actually load the
porthole file. The first read of the porthole file is called the prescan. When the AUI reads the
porthole file twice, then the AUI uses information learned during the prescan to update the
progress bar when loading the porthole file. But the AUI does not use the prescan
information for any other purpose. In particular, the AUI can load the porthole file whether
PRESCAN=YES or NO.
RANGE
Specifies whether the AUI should skip time steps while loading the porthole file.
[ALL]
ALL The AUI loads all time steps

TIME The AUI loads time steps with solution times in the range TIMESTART to
TIMEEND (including time steps with solution times TIMESTART and
TIMEEND)
STEP The AUI loads time steps with step numbers in the sequence STEPSTART,
STEPSTART+STEPINCREMENT, ..., STEPEND.
3-8
LOADPORTHOLE
NONE The AUI does not load any time steps or initial conditions. This feature is useful
when postprocessing data defined with the USERNODALDATA command.
TIMESTART
TIMEEND
The range of solution times used when RANGE=TIME.
STEPSTART
STEPEND
STEPINCREMENT
The range of step numbers used when RANGE=STEP.
ZOOM-MODEL
[0]
This parameter is used to force the AUI to load a normal porthole file (that is, a porthole file
from a model that is not a zoom-model) as a zoom-model. The number of the zoom-model is
the value of the ZOOM-MODEL parameter. If ZOOM-MODEL=0, the porthole is not
loaded as a zoom-model.
Note, when loading a zoom-model porthole file, the AUI automatically detects that the
porthole file is a zoom-model porthole file, and there is no need to use parameter ZOOMMODEL. So parameter ZOOM-MODEL is typically not used.
INITIAL-CONDITIONS
[AUTOMATIC]
This parameter is used to control whether initial conditions from a restart run are kept (loaded
into the database) or discarded. This parameter is used only when loading results from an
ADINA-F porthole file, and when OPERATION=RESTART.
Results from the restart run are kept (and these results overwrite any
existing results from previous runs)
DISCARD
Results from the restart run are discarded (results from previous runs are
kept)
AUTOMATIC KEEP unless loading restart results from an adaptive CFD run.
KEEP
CPSTART
[1]
CPEND
[0]
These parameters are used when loading the porthole file from a cyclic symmetry or periodic
symmetry porthole file. See notes at the end of this command description.
Example for splitting porthole files
ADINA-IN for ADINA:
...
PORTHOLE MAX-STEPS=2
ADINA R & D, Inc.
3-9
LOADPORTHOLE
...
ADINA FILE=ex.dat
ADINA:
Runs for 100 time steps, creating files ex_1.port to ex_20.port (ADINA creates a maximum
of 20 split porthole files; the last split porthole file contains all of the remaining solution
steps).
ADINA-PLOT:
LOADPORTHOLE CREATE ex_1.port
LOADPORTHOLE RESTART ex_2.port
...
ex_1.port must always be the first porthole file loaded. All of the other porthole files need
not be loaded; for example, the following ADINA-PLOT commands will also work:
LOADPORTHOLE CREATE ex_1.port
Example for LOADPORTHOLE APPEND
Suppose that there are two porthole files (runa.por and runb.por) corresponding to the same
finite element model, but with different loadings. runa.por contains results for run A and
runb.por contains results for run B. Both porthole files contain information from steps 0 to
10, solution times 0.0 to 3.0. Now suppose that you load runa.por into the AUI using
LOADPORTHOLE CREATE and runb.por into the AUI using LOADPORTHOLE
APPEND. Then the AUI outputs the time shift as 4.0 (4.0 = 3.0 + 1.0) and the load step shift
as 11 (10 +1).
You can select any solution from either run by setting the time appropriately. For example,
time 1.0 corresponds to run A, solution time 1.0; time 3.0 corresponds to run A, solution time
3.0; time 4.0 corresponds to run B, solution time 0.0; time 7.0 corresponds to run B, solution
time 3.0. In a listing, results for times 0.0 to 3.0 correspond to run A and results for times 4.0
to 7.0 correspond to run B.
Notes for the RANGE options
1) Initial conditions are always loaded, unless RANGE=NONE.
2) All load steps are always loaded under the following conditions:
ADINA model, linearized buckling analysis.
3-10
LOADPORTHOLE
ADINA model, ground motion modal participation factors are computed.

ADINA-T model, porthole file from ADINA-T 7.5 and lower.
3) When loading a porthole file from a restart analysis, the step numbers are those in the
restart analysis. For example, if there are 10 steps in the restart analysis, then STEPSTART
and STEPEND should be between 1 and 10.
4) There is no way at present to load only the last computed time step.
5) There is no way at present to load only the first few mode shapes.
Notes for the ZOOM-MODEL parameter and zoom-models
A porthole file that is a zoom-model is loaded as a zoom-model when there is already data in
the database for ADINA. For example
LOADPORTHOLE CREATE main.port

LOADPORTHOLE CREATE zoom.port
// loads main.port
// loads zoom.port
main.port and zoom.port are loaded side-by-side. zoom.port is assigned a zoom-model

number, for example 1. Then, to postprocess the results from the zoom-model, the zoom
model is considered to be a substructure of the ADINA model. For example, to label node
point 5 in zoom-model 1, use
NODEPOINT TEST SUBSTRUCTURE=1 NODE=5
Exceptions are the ZONE and HIGHLIGHT commands. For these commands, use the
keyword ZOOM-MODEL, for example
ZONE TEST
ELEMENT GROUP 1 OF ZOOM-MODEL 1'
DATAEND
Notes for explicit DMP analysis
In explicit DMP analysis, ADINA creates one porthole file per processor. To postprocess the
results from entire model, all of the porthole files must be loaded into ADINA-PLOT. For
example
LOADPORTHOLE
LOADPORTHOLE
LOADPORTHOLE
LOADPORTHOLE
ADINA R & D, Inc.
CREATE
CREATE
CREATE
CREATE
a001-000.por
a001-001.por
a001-002.por
a001-003.por
3-11
LOADPORTHOLE
The order that the porthole files are loaded in doesnt matter.
Wildcards can be used to reduce the number of commands needed:
LOADPORTHOLE CREATE a001-*.por
It is also allowed to load one porthole file, to postprocess just the results from one processor.
However the results from contact analysis may be inaccurate in this case.
Notes for the INITIAL-CONDITIONS parameter
In restart analysis, results are output in the porthole file for the initial conditions. These
results have the same solution time as results in porthole files for previous runs. Thus the
AUI needs to decide which results to keep, and which to discard.
Normally, the AUI keeps the results output in the restart file and discards the results
previously loaded. This is acceptable since the restart file results and previously loaded
results should be identical.
However, in adaptive CFD analysis, the mesh underlying the previously loaded results may
be different than the mesh underlying the restart results. Then ADINA-F maps the previously
loaded results to the restart mesh, so that the initial conditions loaded with the restart results
will be different than the previously loaded results. In addition, the mapping process may
result in inaccuracies. In this case, discarding the initial conditions from the restart results is
appropriate.
Notes for the CPSTART, CPEND parameters
These parameters are used to selected the cyclic parts to load in cyclic symmetry or periodic
symmetry analysis. If either of these parameters is 0, then the number of cyclic parts
(NCYCL) is substituted.
If CPSTART <= CPEND, then parts CPSTART to CPEND are loaded and the other parts are
skipped. If CPSTART > CPEND, then parts 1 to CPEND, and parts CPSTART to NCYCL,
are loaded, and the other parts are skipped.
In the following examples, NCYCL is assumed to be 24.
LOADPORTHOLE CREATE ... CPSTART=2 CPEND=10 // Loads parts 2 to 10
LOADPORTHOLE CREATE ... CPSTART=10 CPEND=3 // Loads parts 1 to 3, and 10
to 24
When using LOADPORTHOLE RESTART, CPSTART and CPEND are not used (they are
taken from the currently existing data in the database).
3-12
LOADPORTHOLE
For a periodic symmetry model, it is only allowed to have CPSTART=1 and CPEND=0, 1 or
NCYCL.
Notes for multiple solutions for a solution time
Usually there is one solution output in the porthole file for each solution time. (Here we are
not considering frequency analysis.) But for certain analysis features, there are multiple
solutions output in the porthole file for a given solution time. For example, when the bolt
feature is used, each bolt sequence step can be output as a solution. This note describes how
multiple solutions are handled by the AUI.
Each of the multiple solutions is assigned a solution sequence number, and one of these
solutions is termed the main solution. The multiple solutions that are not the main solution
are given a solution description string, and the main solution may or may not be given a
solution description string. (All of the above assignments are made by the solution program
and stored in the porthole file.)
The AUI creates a solution table, giving the solution time, solution description string and
solution sequence number for each solution. This table can be listed using the
RESPONSEINFO TABLE=YES command. If the results from more than one FE program
are loaded (e.g. FSI analysis), there is one solution table for each program.
Here is an example of a solution table from a bolt analysis:
Solution time
Sequence
number
Main
solution flag
1.0
yes
1.0
no
Bolt sequence 1
1.0
no
Bolt sequence 2
1.0
no
Bolt sequence 5
2.0
yes
2.0
no
Bolt sequence 1
2.0
no
Bolt sequence 3
2.0
no
Bolt sequence 6
3.0
yes
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Solution description string
3-13
LOADPORTHOLE
The solution sequence number can be directly specified as part of the RESPONSE
LOADSTEP command. The default is to select the main solution.
Listings may contain the solution description string (when it is not blank).
3-14
READ
READ
Sec. 3.3 Auxiliary files
FILE REWIND SCANDATA
READ reads AUI input commands from the file specified by parameter FILE until the end of
the file is reached or the READ END command is encountered in the file. After the READ
command is executed, subsequent input is read from the previous command input source (that
is, the input source from which the READ command was entered).
READ commands can be nested (that is, a file processed by the READ command can include
a READ command).
FILE
The name of the file from which AUI commands are read. Note that the name END is not
allowed.
REWIND
[NO]
If the file pointer is at end-of-file or if the file is not currently open, the read file is rewound
before beginning to read commands regardless of the value of this parameter. {YES / NO}
SCANDATA
[' ']
If SCANDATA is specified, the file is scanned until the SCANDATA string (1 - 80
characters) is found anywhere within an input record. Reading of input data from the file
starts at the beginning of the record that contains the string.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
3-15
FILEREAD
FILEREAD OPTION FILE

FILEREAD controls the source of input commands to the AUI.
OPTION
[INTERFACE]
INTERFACE Commands are read from the terminal or window from which you invoked
the AUI.
FILE
Commands are read from the file specified by the FILE parameter.
FILE
Used only if OPTION = FILE. The filename of the file from which commands are read.
Auxiliary commands
LIST FILEREAD
3-16
FILESESSION
FILESESSION OPTION FILE

FILESESSION controls the generation and output of a session file. The session file contains
the commands needed to repeat an AUI session.
Use the COMMANDFILE command (described in this section) to create a file that contains
the commands needed to reconstruct an AUI database.
OPTION
[NO]
NO
No session file is created.
OVERWRITE
A session file is generated and overwrites any existing contents of the

specified file.
APPEND
A session file is generated and is appended to any existing contents of

the specified file.
REACTIVATE
= NO if no file is specified
= APPEND if a file is specified
FILE
The filename of the session file.
[the current session filename, if any]
Auxiliary commands
LIST FILESESSION
ADINA R & D, Inc.
3-17
Chap 3 Input/output
FILELIST
FILELIST
OPTION FILE LINPAG EJECT
FILELIST controls the format and output of listings.

OPTION
[INTERFACE]
INTERFACE Listings are output at the terminal or window from which you invoked the
AUI. Listings are buffered using a "UNIX more"-like interface that allows
you to scroll through listings.
FILE
Listings are output to the file specified by the FILE parameter.
TEMPFILE Listings are output to temporary files. Each listing is placed in a separate
file. The filenames are of the form tmpXX_YYYY.lst, where XX is a
number between 00 and 99 and YYYY is a number between 0000 and
9999. XX is the same number for all listings produced in a single run, and
YYYY is incremented for each listing produced in the run.
FILE
Used only if OPTION = FILE. The filename of the file to which listings are written. This
can be the same file used for command echoing or logging.
LINPAG
[0]
The maximum of lines output between list headings. You can suppress list headings (except
for the first list heading) by specifying LINPAG = 0.
EJECT
Specifies whether page ejects are placed before headings. {YES / NO}
[NO]
Auxiliary commands
LIST FILELIST
3-18
FILEECHO
FILEECHO OPTION FILE

FILEECHO controls the echoing of your input commands.
OPTION
NO
[INTERFACE]
no echoing of input commands.
INTERFACE input commands are echoed back to the terminal or window from which
you invoked the AUI.
FILE
input commands are echoed back to the file specified by the FILE
parameter.
FILE
Used only if OPTION = FILE. The filename of the file to which input commands are echoed
back. This can be the same file for logs or listings.
Auxiliary commands
LIST FILEECHO
ADINA R & D, Inc.
3-19
Chap 3 Input/output
FILELOG
FILELOG
OPTION FILE
FILELOG controls the output of log messages.

OPTION
[INTERFACE]
INTERFACE Log messages are written to the terminal or window from which you
invoked the AUI.
FILE
Log messages are written to the file specified by the FILE parameter.
FILE
Used only if OPTION = FILE. The filename of the file to which log messages are written.
This can be the same file used for echoed commands or listings. When using the user
interface, if a command is typed into the Command Window, the log messages go both to the
user interface and to the log file.
Auxiliary commands
LIST FILELOG
3-20
SNAPSHOT
SNAPSHOT FILENAME APPEND SYSTEM RESIZE ROTATION SURFACE

PROMPT UPDATE
SNAPSHOT creates a graphics file that corresponds to the currently displayed graphics
window. The graphics file is formatted according to the settings of the specified plotting
system.
Only that part of the graphics window that is currently visible is output to the graphics file.
Therefore you can zoom into the picture and make a snapshot of the zoomed portion.
Conversely, if you want to make a snapshot of the entire graphics window, you must zoom
out.
When SNAPSHOT creates the graphics file, it can optionally transform the graphics, for
example, to make the graphics fit in the plotting surface defined by the specified plotting
system.
Parameters of the plotting systems are defined using the corresponding PLCONTROL
commands (see Chapter 8).
See the SAVEBMP command (in this section) for additional options.
FILENAME
Specifies the disk file to which the snapshot will be stored. This parameter must be entered.
APPEND
[YES]
Used when the specified disk file already exists. If APPEND = NO, the existing disk file will
be overwritten; if APPEND = YES, the new plotting information will be appended to the end
of the existing disk file. {YES / NO}
SYSTEM
Specifies which plotting system (file format) to use. Choices are
AI
Adobe Illustrator file format
HP-GL
HP-GL file format
HP-GL/2
HP-GL/2 file format
POSTSCRIPT PostScript file format
[POSTSCRIPT]
RESIZE
[YES]
Controls whether the snapshot of the graphics window is resized to fill the area defined by the
plotting system. {YES / NO}
ROTATION
[0]
The snapshot of the graphics window can be rotated into the area defined by the plotting
system. The amount of rotation is controlled by the ROTATION parameter. If you specify
ROTATION = NONE, then the snapshot is not rotated.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
3-21
SNAPSHOT
If you specify ROTATION = 0, 90, 180, 270, then the snapshot is rotated in two
steps. First the program computes the amount of rotation needed to make the long edge of the
snapshot be aligned with the long edge of the plotting surface. After the snapshot is rotated
by this amount, it is then rotated by the angle given by the ROTATION parameter. {NONE
/ 0 / 90 / 180 / 270}
SURFACE <not currently active>
[CURRENT]
PROMPT
[UNKNOWN]
You will be prompted "Ready to write to snapshot file?" if PROMPT = YES. You will be
prompted "The snapshot file already exists" if the snapshot file already exists and PROMPT =
UNKNOWN. You will not receive a prompt if PROMPT = NO. {YES / NO / UNKNOWN}
UPDATE
[NO]
Controls whether the initial values of command parameters are updated. If UPDATE = NO,
the initial values are not updated and the command is run. If UPDATE = YES, the initial
values are updated and the command is run. {YES / NO}
Auxiliary commands
LIST SNAPSHOT
Lists the current default values of the SNAPSHOT parameters.
UPDATE SNAPSHOT
FILENAME APPEND SYSTEM RESIZE ROTATION

SURFACE PROMPT UPDATE
Updates the initial values for the SNAPSHOT command, but does not run the
SNAPSHOT command. (Note that the UPDATE parameter of the SNAPSHOT command
can be used to update the initial values and immediately run the SNAPSHOT command.)
RESET SNAPSHOT
Resets the default values for the SNAPSHOT command to their initial values (which are
given above).
3-22
MOVIESAVE
MOVIESAVE
MOVIENUMBER FIRST LAST FILENAME APPEND SYSTEM

RESIZE ROTATION
MOVIESAVE creates a graphics file that corresponds to the movie frames of a movie. The
file is formatted according to the settings of the specified plotting system. This command can
be used, for example, to save an animation that was created by a MOVIESHOOT command
to disk. See Section 5.11 for information about creating movies and animations.
The movie frames are chosen by specifying a movie number and a range of frames within that
movie.
When MOVIESAVE creates the graphics file, it can optionally transform the graphics, for
example, to fit in the plotting surface defined by the specified plotting system. Parameters of
the plotting systems are defined using the corresponding PLCONTROL commands (see
Chapter 8).
Once you have saved the graphics file, you can convert it into commonly used PC formats
using the instructions given in AUI Primer problem 7.
See the SAVEAVI command (in this section) for additional options. Note that the SAVEAVI
command is only available for the Windows version of the AUI, and the AUI must be run in
user interface mode.
MOVIENUMBER
[last defined movie number]
The movie number from which the movie frames are saved.
FIRST
[FIRST]
LAST
[LAST]
The first and last movie frames in the movie to save. {ALL / FIRST / LAST/ or an
integer}
FILENAME
[' ']
Specifies the disk file to which the movie frames will be output. This parameter must be
entered.
APPEND
[NO]
Used when the specified disk file already exists. If APPEND = NO, the existing disk file will
be overwritten; if APPEND = YES, the new plotting information will be appended to the end
of the existing disk file. {YES / NO}
SYSTEM
Specifies which plotting system (file format) to use. Choices are
AI
Adobe Illustrator file format
HP-GL
HP-GL file format
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[POSTSCRIPT]
3-23
HP-GL/2
POSTSCRIPT
MOVIESAVE
HP-GL/2 file format

PostScript file format
RESIZE
[YES]
Controls whether the movie frames are resized into the area defined by the plotting surface.
{YES / NO}
ROTATION
[NONE]
The movie frames can be rotated when saved. The amount of rotation is controlled by the
ROTATION parameter.
If you specify ROTATION = NONE, the movie frames are not rotated.
If you specify ROTATION = 0, 90, 180, 270, then each movie frame is rotated in
two steps. First the program computes the amount of rotation needed to make the long edge
of the movie frame align with the long edge of the plotting surface. After the movie frame is
rotated by this amount, it is then rotated by the angle given by the ROTATION parameter.
PROMPT
[UNKNOWN]
You will be prompted "Ready to write to moviesave file?" if PROMPT = YES. You will be
prompted "The moviesave file already exists" if the moviesave file already exists and
PROMPT = UNKNOWN. If PROMPT = NO, you will not receive a prompt. {YES / NO/
UNKNOWN}
Auxiliary commands
LIST MOVIESAVE
Lists the current default values of the MOVIESAVE parameters.
UPDATE MOVIESAVE FILENAME APPEND SYSTEM RESIZE
ROTATION
Updates the initial values of some of the MOVIESAVE parameters, but does not run the
MOVIESAVE command.
RESET MOVIESAVE
Resets the default values for the MOVIESAVE command to their initial values.
3-24
SAVEAVI
SAVEAVI
FILENAME SPEED XSIZE YSIZE MOVIENUMBER SIZE SCALE

COLORBITS
The SAVEAVI command creates an AVI file from the frames of a movie. See Section 5.11
for information about creating movies and animations.
This command is implemented only for Windows versions of the AUI. The AUI must be run
in user interface mode for this command to work. For UNIX versions of the AUI, use the
MOVIESAVE command (described in this section) to save the movie to PostScript format,
then convert the PostScript file to AVI format as described in AUI Primer problem 7.
FILENAME
[' ']
Specifies the name of the AVI file to which the movie frames will be output. This parameter
must be entered.
SPEED
The number of frames per second at which the AVI file will play back.
[15]
XSIZE
[640]
YSIZE
[480]
The size of each frame in the AVI file, in pixels. This parameter is used only if SIZE=
SPECIFIED, see below.
MOVIENUMBER
[last defined movie number]
The movie number of the animation to save to the AVI file.
SIZE
[FRAME]
If SIZE=FRAME, the size of each frame in the AVI file is the size of each frame in the movie
when the movie was created (in pixels), multiplied by parameter SCALE. If SIZE=
SPECIFIED, the size of each frame in the AVI file is that specified by parameters XSIZE
and YSIZE.
SCALE
[1.0]
The scale factor used to obtain the size of each frame in the AVI file, if SIZE=FRAME.
SCALE must be between 0.2 and 1.0.
COLORBITS
The number of color bits per pixel used in the AVI file {8 / 16 / 24}.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[16]
3-25
SAVEBMP
SAVEBMP FILENAME SIZE SCALE XSIZE YSIZE

The SAVEBMP command creates a bitmap file from the currently displayed graphics
window. The format of the bitmap file can be BMP, DIB or JPEG for the Windows version,
and can be BMP, JPEG or PNG for UNIX versions.
The AUI must be run in user interface mode for this command to work. For UNIX versions
of the AUI, the plotting system must be X Window (see the PLSYSTEM command in Section
8.1 to set the plotting system).
As an alternative to the SAVEBMP command, use the SNAPSHOT command (described in
this section) to save the currently displayed graphics window to a vector format such as
PostScript or Adobe Illustrator, then use a PC program such as CorelDraw or Adobe
Illustrator to convert the file to a bitmap file.
FILENAME
[' ']
Specifies the name of the bitmap file. This parameter must be entered. The extension that
you give the filename determines the format of the file: .BMP for a BMP file, .DIB for a DIB
file, .JPG, .JPEG, .JPE for a JPEG file, .PNG for a PNG file. (The case of the letters used in
the extension doesnt matter.)
SIZE
[FRAME]
If SIZE=FRAME, the size of the bitmap file is the size of the currently displayed graphics
window (in pixels), multiplied by parameter SCALE. If SIZE=SPECIFIED, the size of the
bitmap file is that specified by parameters XSIZE and YSIZE.
SCALE
[1.0]
The scale factor used to obtain the size of the bitmap file, if SIZE=FRAME. SCALE must be
between 0.2 and 1.0.
XSIZE
[640]
YSIZE
[480]
The size of the bitmap file, in pixels. This parameter is used only if SIZE=SPECIFIED.
3-26
COMMANDFILE
COMMANDFILE
FILENAME PROMPT OPTION GRAPHICS
The COMMANDFILE command creates a file containing the commands needed to recreate
the model stored in the current database.
Use the FILESESSION command (described in this section) to create a file containing the
commands needed to repeat an AUI session.
FILENAME
The name of the file to be created. This parameter must be entered.
PROMPT
[from CONTROL PROMPT]
You will be prompted Ready to write command file? if PROMPT = YES. You will be
prompted "The command file already exists" if the specified file already exists and PROMPT
= UNKNOWN. You will not be prompted if PROMPT = NO.
OPTION
[SESSION]
If OPTION = SESSION, the command file produced is a record of all commands issued
when this database file is in use. The command file contains model modifications and
deletions as well as model additions. Commands in the command file can contain references
to other files; for example, when a porthole file is loaded, the command file contains a
LOADPORTHOLE command (described in Section 3.2).
Commands that you issue while CONTROL SESSIONSTORAGE=NO are not stored in the
command file. See Section 6.1 for a description of the CONTROL command.
Currently OPTION must be set to SESSION. This parameter is provided for future
developments of the AUI.
GRAPHICS
[NO]
This parameter is used when OPTION = SESSION to control whether graphics commands
such as FRAME, MESHPLOT, VIEW, etc. are written to the command file. If GRAPHICS =
YES, graphics commands are written to the command file, otherwise they are not written.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
3-27
EXPORT STL
EXPORT STL
FILE OVERWRITE FORMAT EGROUP RESPONSE

RESULTCONTROL
The EXPORT STL command creates an STL file from the specified element group of a
undeformed or deformed FE model.
FILE
The name of the STL file to be written.
OVERWRITE
[CONTROL PROMPT]
Determines, if the filename given by FILE already exists, whether the command will
overwrite its contents with the currently generated STL file. If set to UNKNOWN, a prompt
will be given requesting confirmation for overwriting an existing file.
{YES/NO/UNKNOWN}
FORMAT
The format of the STL file. {BINARY/TEXT}
[BINARY]
EGROUP
[1st exportable element group]
The element group number of the element group to export (must be a 2D, 3D or shell element
group).
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape, etc. used for determining
the deformations of the model. See the response commands in Section 6.3.
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result control depiction. This depiction is used to scale the mode shape, in
the case when the deformations come from a mode shape. A result control depiction is
specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).
3-28
MODE
Sec. 3.4 Auxiliary commands
MODE MODE
The database can contain both ADINA-IN data and ADINA-PLOT data. Use this command
to specify which kind of data to display.
This command is active only if read by the command-line interface. It is ignored when using
the user interface.
When you load a porthole file, the AUI automatically sets the mode to POSTPROCESSING.
When working with a database created with AUI 7.2 or below, it is necessary to set
MODE=PREPROCESSING to display ADINA-PLOT data.
MODE
PREPROCESSING
POSTPROCESSING
[PREPROCESSING]
The AUI will display ADINA-IN data.
The AUI will display ADINA-PLOT data.
Auxiliary commands
LIST MODE
Lists the current mode of operation.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
3-29
FEPROGRAM
FEPROGRAM PROGRAM
FEPROGRAM specifies the current finite element program.
You need to use this command only when you have loaded the results from more than one
finite element program into the database.
PROGRAM
[ADINA]
The finite element analysis program name {ADINA / ADINA-T / ADINA-F /
ADINA-EM / ADINA-F+EM}.
3-30
PAUSE
PAUSE
When the AUI reads the PAUSE command, it stops processing commands until you hit a key.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
3-31
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
NAME EXPRESSION
Defines a parameter that can be substituted in a later command. The parameter can either be
an arbitrary string or a numeric expression. If the parameter is a numeric expression, the AUI
evaluates it and stores the resulting number as the value of the parameter.
Parameter definitions and values are not stored in the database.
Parameter substitution is described in the examples at the end of this command.
NAME
The name of the parameter (1 to 30 alphanumeric characters). The name is not case sensitive.
If the parameter is not already defined, a new parameter is created, otherwise the existing
parameter is modified.
Note that the name cannot contain a - (to avoid confusion with minus signs).
EXPRESSION
A string (up to 256 characters long) that contains a numeric expression or an arbitrary text
string. The numeric expression string can contain the following items:
The arithmetic operators +, -, *, /, ** (exponentiation)
Numbers (either real numbers or integers)
The following functions:
ABS(x)
AINT(x)
ANINT(x)
ACOS(x)
ASIN(x)
ATAN(x)
ATAN2(x,y)
COS(x)
COSH(x)
DIM(x,y)
EXP(x)
LOG(x)
LOG10(x)
MAX(x,y,...)
MIN(x,y,...)
MOD(x,y)
SIGN(x,y)
SIN(x)
3-32
absolute value
truncation
nearest whole number
arccosine
arcsine
arctangent
arctangent(x/y)
cosine
hyperbolic cosine
positive difference
exponential
natural logarithm
common logarithm
largest value
smallest value
remaindering
transfer of sign
sine
PARAMETER
SINH(x)
SQRT(x)
STEP(x)
hyperbolic sine
square root
the unit step function:
0.0 if x 0.0
1.0 if x > 0.0
TAN(x)
TANH(x)
tangent
hyperbolic tangent
All trigonometric functions operate on or return angles in radians.

Use an initial backslash \ to prevent the string from being interpreted as a numeric expression.
Examples
PARAMETER A '3.0'
// A = 3
PARAMETER B '5 + 7'
// B = 12
PARAMETER C '6 * \
// The string can be entered on several
5 '
// command lines as in this example; C = 30
PARAMETER D \My string// The initial backslash signals the start of
// a text string.
Parameter substitution
When the command-line parser finds a token value that starts with a $, the parser finds the
parameter name with that token value and substitutes the parameter value. For example, in
the commands
PARAMETER X1 '2.0/3.0'
PARAMETER X2 'SQRT(5.0)'
PARAMETER X3 'SIN(2.0)'
BODY BLOCK DX1=$X1 DX2=$X2 DX3=$X3
the parser looks for the values of X1, X2 and X3 and substitutes the values (e.g. the
characters '0.666666666666667') for the names (e.g. the characters 'X1'). Hence the
above commands are exactly equivalent to the command
BODY BLOCK DX1=0.666666666666667 DX2=2.23606797749979,
DX3=0.909297426825682
The token values need not be in upper-case:
BODY BLOCK DX1=$x1 DX2=$x2 DX3=$x3
Parameter substitution occurs before command execution, so the following is allowed:
ADINA R & D, Inc.
3-33
PARAMETER
PARAMETER A '2.0'
PARAMETER A '$A + 1'
// A = 3
Now you may want to put the symbol $ into a string without parameter substitution occuring.
The rule is: if the next character after the $ is a letter [a-z], the command-line parser attempts
parameter substitution. So
PARAMETER A '3.0'
USERTEXT ABC
'The cost is $2000.00'
'The size is $A'
DATAEND
is equivalent to
USERTEXT ABC
'The cost is $2000.00'
'The size is 3.0'
DATAEND
A convenient way to output the value of a single parameter is with the ECHO command
(described in this section):
PARAMETER X1 '2.0/3.0'
ECHO $X1
ECHO 'The value of X1 is $X1'
You can also use parameter substitution with parameters that are not numeric expressions:
PARAMETER GROUPTYPE
EGROUP $GROUPTYPE
'\THREEDSOLID'
is equivalent to
EGROUP THREEDSOLID
Auxiliary command
LIST PARAMETER
Lists the values of all parameters.
3-34
ECHO
ECHO
STRING
Outputs the given string. This command can be used to output the value of a parameter, see
the examples given in the PARAMETER command description (in this section).
The output of the ECHO command goes either to the terminal or window from which you
invoked the AUI, or to the file specified in the FILELOG command (which is described in
Section 3.3).
STRING
A string (up to 256 characters long).
ADINA R & D, Inc.
3-35
END
END
SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT IMMEDIATE
END terminates the program.

If the program is reading data from a file specified by the FILEREAD command and the end
of the file is reached, the END command is executed automatically.
SAVE
[UNKNOWN]
Used only when you have modified the internal database. If you specify SAVE = YES, the
program will save the current internal database to disk using the filename specified by
parameter PERMFILE. If you specify SAVE = NO, the program will ask you for
confirmation. If you confirm by answering YES, then the program will not save the internal
database. If you specify SAVE = UNKNOWN, the program will ask you if you want to save
the internal database. {YES / NO / UNKNOWN}
PERMFILE
file to disk. If you do not enter a value for PERMFILE and no previously specified
permanent database filename was specified, the program will prompt you for the value of
PERMFILE.
PROMPT
[UNKNOWN]
database file?" if PROMPT = YES. You will be prompted "Permanent database file already
exists" if that is the case and PROMPT = UNKNOWN. You will not be prompted if PROMPT
is set to NO. {YES / NO / UNKNOWN}
IMMEDIATE
[NO]
If IMMEDIATE=YES, the program immediately stops execution without saving the database
or prompting you. This option is most useful when writing batch scripts to force the program
to terminate.{YES / NO}
Auxiliary commands
EXIT SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT IMMEDIATE
QUIT SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT IMMEDIATE
STOP SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT IMMEDATE
EXIT, QUIT and STOP are equivalent to END.
3-36
Chapter 4
Editing commands and graphics
interaction
UNDO
UNDO
Sec. 4.1 Editing
NUMBER
UNDO cancels the effects of previous commands.

UNDO is possible only if CONTROL UNDO is greater than zero. See Section 6.1 for a
description of the CONTROL command.
The UNDO command can itself be undone by REDO (described in this section).
NUMBER
[1]
The number of previous commands to be undone. The maximum possible number of
previous commands that can be undone is set by CONTROL UNDO. However, the actual
number of previous commands that can be undone may be less than this.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
4-1
Chap. 4 Editing commands and graphics interaction
REDO
REDO
NUMBER
REDO cancels the effects of previous UNDO commands (described in this section). It can be
used only if the previous command was either UNDO or REDO.
A REDO command can be followed by an UNDO command to cancel the REDO.
NUMBER
The number of previous UNDO commands to be undone.
4-2
[1]
PICKED DELETE
Sec. 4.2 Graphics interaction
PICKED DELETE
PICKED DELETE deletes all picked graphics. Use LOCATOR PICK (described in this
section) to pick graphics.
See the AUI Primer for information about picking graphics.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
4-3
PICKED MESHWINDOW-NORMAL
PICKED MESHWINDOW-NORMAL
PICKED MESHWINDOW-NORMAL resets the mesh viewing window to normal for all
picked mesh plots, or for the current mesh plot if there are no picked mesh plots.
The normal mesh viewing window is the smallest box in the view projection plane that
contains the projections of all mesh plot coordinates. See the MESHWINDOW command in
Section 5.2 for a description of mesh viewing windows.
Use LOCATOR PICK (described in this section) to pick graphics.
4-4
RESET MESHWINDOW
RESET MESHWINDOW
RESET MESHWINDOW resets the mesh viewing window to normal for all mesh plots. See
the MESHWINDOW command in Section 5.2 for a description of mesh viewing windows.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
4-5
LOCATOR
LOCATOR ACTION
LOCATOR activates or deactivates the locator and specifies the locator action.
A locator is used to point to a location on the graphics window. Usually the locator is the
mouse.
When the locator is active, the program does not read commands from the command-line
interface. If the program reads the LOCATOR command from a file, the program stops
reading commands until you deactivate the locator. Deactivate the locator by moving the
cursor into the graphics window and typing (lower-case) q.
When the locator is active you can point to items on the graphics window with it. You can
also perform some locator action, such as picking or dragging. You specify the action using
the ACTION parameter of this command.
See the AUI Primer for more information about using the mouse to manipulate graphics
objects, inquire graphics objects, zoom and zoom mesh plots.
ACTION
OFF
4-6
[OFF]
Deactivates the locator.
PICK
Places the locator in PICK mode. You use PICK mode to highlight
something. You can either highlight whatever is at the locator position
or you can create a box and highlight whatever is in the box. Pick mode
allows you to manipulate (move, resize, rotate) the highlighted graphics.
DRAW
Places the locator in DRAW mode, i.e., freehand drawing using the
locator.
INQUIRE
Places the locator in INQUIRE mode, i.e., the locator will respond by
identifying objects at the locator position. Multiple objects may be
inquired on by repeated use of the locator button.
ZOOM
Places the locator in ZOOM mode, i.e., the locator is used to input a
"rubber-band" rectangle, the contents of which are scaled to fit the
graphics window. After the zoom, the locator action is reset to the
previous locator action.
MESHWINDOW
Similar to ZOOM, except a mesh plot is scaled to fit its prior bounding
rectangle, leaving other graphics in the graphics window intact.
MZOOM
Similar to ZOOM, except that the locator action is not reset.
LOCATOR
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOCATOR
Writes the current locator action.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
4-7
ZOOM
ZOOM
TYPE FACTOR WINDOW UPDATE
ZOOM allows you to specify the magnification of the image on the graphics window. This
magnification can either be specified as an absolute number (relative to the unzoomed image)
or as a relative number (relative to the current image).
TYPE
[ABSOLUTE]
If TYPE = ABSOLUTE, the scale factor is the magnification factor relative to the unzoomed
image. If TYPE = RELATIVE, the scale factor is the magnification factor relative to the
current image.
FACTOR
[1.0]
The zoom scale factor. Scale factors greater than 1.0 enlarge the image; scale factors
smaller than 1.0 shrink the image. Note that when TYPE = ABSOLUTE, the factor must not
be smaller than 1.0.
WINDOW <not currently active>
[CURRENT]
UPDATE
[NO]
This parameter controls whether the initial values of command parameters are updated. If
UPDATE = NO, the initial values are not updated and the command is run. If UPDATE =
YES, the initial values are updated and the command is run.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ZOOM
Lists the current default values of the ZOOM parameters.
UPDATE ZOOM TYPE FACTOR WINDOW UPDATE
Updates the initial values for the ZOOM command, but does not run the ZOOM
command. (Note that the UPDATE parameter of the ZOOM command can be used to
update the initial values and immediately run the ZOOM command.)
RESET ZOOM
Resets the default values for the ZOOM command to their initial values (which are given
above).
4-8
PAN
PAN XMOTION YMOTION WINDOW UNITXMOTION UNITYMOTION

UPDATE
PAN allows you to pan the image in the graphics window. Panning is only useful when the
image in the graphics window has been zoomed.
XMOTION
[0.0]
The image is shifted by an amount XMOTION in the X direction. A positive value of
XMOTION moves the panning window to the right and the image appears to shift to the left.
A negative value of XMOTION moves the panning window to the left and the image appears
to shift to the right. If XMOTION = LEFT, the panning window is moved as far as possible
to the left and the image appears to move as far as possible to the right. If XMOTION =
RIGHT, the panning window is moved as far as possible to the right and the image appears to
move as far as possible to the left.
YMOTION
[0.0]
The image is shifted by an amount YMOTION in the Y direction. A positive value of
YMOTION moves the panning window to the top and the image appears to shift to the
bottom. A negative value of YMOTION moves the panning window to the bottom and the
image appears to shift to the top. If YMOTION = TOP, the panning window is moved as far
as possible to the top and the image appears to move as far as possible to the bottom. If
YMOTION = BOTTOM, the panning window is moved as far as possible to the bottom and
the image appears to move as far as possible to the top.
WINDOW <not currently active>
[CURRENT]
UNITXMOTION, UNITYMOTION
[PERCENT]
The unit of parameters XMOTION and YMOTION. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /
PIXELS}
UPDATE
[NO]
Controls whether the initial values of command parameters are updated. {YES / NO}
Auxiliary commands
LIST PAN
Lists the current default values of the PAN parameters.
UPDATE PAN XMOTION YMOTION WINDOW UNITXMOTION
UNITYMOTION UPDATE
Updates the initial values for the PAN command, but does not run the PAN command.
(Note that the UPDATE parameter of the PAN command can be used to update the initial
values and immediately run the PAN command.)
ADINA R & D, Inc.
4-9
PAN
RESET PAN
Resets the default values for the PAN command to their initial values (which are given
above).
4-10
HIGHLIGHT
HIGHLIGHT
selectioni
HIGHLIGHT highlights the specified selections in all currently displayed mesh plots.
Each selection is a string of the form
object1 OF object2 OF ...
where the objects are
NODE
ELEMENT
CONTACT SURFACE
CONTACT SEGMENT
LAYER
ELEMENT LAYER
ELEMENT FACE
RIGID LINK
CONSTRAINT EQUATION
NODE-NODE CONTACT PAIR
CRACK FRONT
LINE CONTOUR
GEOMETRY POINT or POINT
GEOMETRY LINE or LINE
GEOMETRY SURFACE or SURFACE
GEOMETRY VOLUME or VOLUME
GEOMETRY EDGE or EDGE
GEOMETRY FACE or FACE
GEOMETRY BODY or BODY
GEOMETRY SHEET or SHEET
PROGRAM
SUBSTRUCTURE
REUSE
CYCLIC PART
ELEMENT GROUP
CONTACT GROUP
RADIOSITY GROUP
RADIOSITY SURFACE
RADIOSITY SEGMENT
CONTACT PAIR
INTERFACE ELEMENT
BOUNDARY SURFACE ELEMENT
BOUNDARY SURFACE
ADINA R & D, Inc.
4-11
HIGHLIGHT
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE
ZOOM-MODEL
BCELL
ELFACESET
ELEDGESET
SKEW SYSTEM
COHESIVE SURFACE
COHESIVE SURFACE SEGMENT
GLUEMESH SURFACE
GLUEMESH SURFACE SEGMENT
The characters needed to uniquely specify the object are indicated in bold.
You use OF to completely specify the object.
For example
'ELEMENT 1'
is an acceptable selection if there is only one element group in the model. But if there is more
than one element group, then you must use
'ELEMENT 1 OF ELEMENT GROUP 1'
to specify the first element of element group 1.
Object keywords can be abbreviated. For example
'EL 1 OF EL GR 1'
Object keywords can be upper, lower or mixed case. Keywords can be separated using
spaces.
The quotes are necessary so that the selection string is not interpreted as a command.
Auxiliary commands
LIST HIGHLIGHT
Lists the current selections.
4-12
Chapter 5
Display control
REGENERATE
Sec. 5.1 Screen control
REGENERATE
REGENERATE reconstructs all meshplots, bandplots, etc. currently displayed on the screen
according to the current depiction settings of the meshplots, bandplots, etc. and according to
the current state of the model.
This command is useful when you have updated the model and want to update the graphics.
Notice that if CONTROL AUTOREGENERATE=YES, then the AUI automatically
regenerates the graphics after every change to the model (see Section 6.1 for the CONTROL
command).
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-1
Chap. 5 Display control
FRAME
FRAME
LOWER UPPER ROTATION LINE SIZE ISOSIZE WIDTH HEIGHT

XOFFSET YOFFSET INDEX CUTMARK WINDOW UNITLOWER
UNITUPPER UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFFSET
UNITYOFFSET UPDATE ASPECT CHARSIZE UNITCHARSIZE
HSTRING ADINATEXT
FRAME defines a frame in the graphics window.

LOWER
[0.0]
The plotting frame can contain a lower margin. If LOWER = 0.0, then no lower margin is
drawn. If LOWER > 0.0, then the size of the lower margin is given by LOWER and
nothing is drawn below the lower margin. If LOWER is the word HEADING, then the lower
margin is sized to contain the program name, version number and heading, and this
information is drawn below the lower margin. {HEADING / number >= 0.0}
UPPER
[0.0]
The plotting frame can contain an upper margin. If UPPER = 0.0, then no upper margin is
drawn. If UPPER > 0.0, then the size of the upper margin is given by UPPER and nothing
is drawn above the upper margin. If UPPER is the word HEADING, then the upper margin is
sized to contain the program name, version number and heading, and this information is
drawn above the upper margin. {HEADING / number >= 0.0}
ROTATION
[0]
The plotting frame can be rotated relative to the graphics window. The ROTATION
parameter specifies the amount of rotation in degrees. {0 / 90 / 180 / 270}
LINE
[YES]
Specifies whether or not to draw the boundary of the plotting frame, and the boundaries of
any subframes in the plotting frame. {YES / NO}
SIZE
ISOSIZE
WIDTH
HEIGHT
The size of the plotting frame can be specified in several ways.
[SURFACE]
SIZE = SURFACE: the plotting frame completely fills the graphics window and ISOSIZE,
WIDTH and HEIGHT are not used.
SIZE = ISO: parameter ISOSIZE specifies the size of the plotting frame as follows:
Integer values of |ISOSIZE| produce frames with sizes ISO A1, ISO A2, etc. If ISOSIZE
> 0, the longer side of the frame is parallel to the horizontal side of the graphics window;
if ISOSIZE < 0, the longer side of the frame is parallel to the vertical side of the graphics
5-2
FRAME
window; parameters WIDTH and HEIGHT are not used.

SIZE = DIRECT: parameters WIDTH and HEIGHT specify the width and height of the
plotting frame; parameter ISOSIZE is not used.
SIZE = ASPECT: parameter ASPECT specifies the aspect ratio of the frame and
parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT and ISOSIZE are not used.
XOFFSET
[0.0]
YOFFSET
[0.0]
The location of the lower left-hand corner of the plotting frame can be specified using
parameters XOFFSET and YOFFSET. These parameters are not used when SIZE =
SURFACE or ASPECT.
INDEX
Clear the graphics window before drawing a new frame. {YES / NO}
[YES]
CUTMARK
Draw cut marks at the corners of the graphics window. {YES / NO}
[NO]
WINDOW
[PREVIOUS]
If WINDOW=PREVIOUS, then the new frame uses the previous window. If
WINDOW=NEW, then the AUI opens a new window and puts the frame into the new
window. If WINDOW=BITMAP, the AUI opens a new window (as a static bitmap) and puts
the frame into the new window (this option is added only for support of the user interfaces
and is not intended to be used in command-line mode).
UNITLOWER
[PERCENT]
UNITUPPER
[PERCENT]
UNITWIDTH
[PERCENT]
UNITHEIGHT
[PERCENT]
UNITXOFFSET
[PERCENT]
UNITYOFFSET
[PERCENT]
These parameters specify the units for parameters LOWER, UPPER, WIDTH, HEIGHT,
XOFFSET and YOFFSET. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
UPDATE
[NO]
Controls whether the initial values of command parameters are updated. UPDATE specifies
whether or not the initial values are updated before the command is run. {YES / NO}
ASPECT
[1.33]
The aspect ratio of the frame (width/height), used if SIZE=ASPECT. The frame is centered
within the graphics window.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-3
FRAME
CHARSIZE
[0.25]
UNITCHARSIZE
[CM]
The size of the characters used to draw the heading, and its unit, if LOWER=HEADING or
UPPER=HEADING. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
HSTRING
[]
A string containing the heading text plotted in the frame heading. The heading text can be
specified in several ways:
HSTRING = : The heading text is taken from the problem heading.
HSTRING = (a string): The heading text is taken from parameter HSTRING.
ADINATEXT
[VERTICAL]
The FRAME command writes the word ADINA into the upper left-hand corner according
to the following options:
NONE
HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL
The FRAME command does not write the word ADINA

The FRAME command writes the word ADINA horizontally, as in
AUI 7.5.
The FRAME command writes the word ADINA vertically, as in our
company logo.
Auxiliary commands
LIST FRAME
Lists the current values of the FRAME parameters.
UPDATE FRAME (frame command parameters)
Updates the initial values for the FRAME command, but does not run the FRAME
command. Note that the UPDATE parameter of the FRAME command can be used to
update the initial values and immediately run the FRAME command.
RESET FRAME
Resets the default values for the FRAME command to their initial values.
DELETE FRAME
Deletes the frame along with the window that contains the frame.
5-4
FRAME
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-5
SUBFRAME
SUBFRAME
NAME SIZE XOFFSET UNITXOFFSET YOFFSET UNITYOFFSET

WIDTH UNITWIDTH HEIGHT UNITHEIGHT
SUBFRAME defines a subframe depiction. The subframe specifies the portion of the frame
in which a graphics entity such as a mesh plot is drawn.
The subframe is always defined within the current frame.
The subframe boundary is drawn if the frame itself is drawn, see the FRAME command,
parameter LINE.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the subframe depiction. If there is a previously defined subframe depiction with
this name, data entered in this command is appended to that subframe depiction. If there is no
previously defined subframe depiction with this name, a new subframe depiction is created by
this command.
SIZE
Specifies how the subframe size is specified:
FRAME
[FRAME]
the subframe coincides with the plotting frame
DIRECT the subframe is defined using the remaining parameters

You can also enter a 4 digit integer ABCD (see Figure) to quickly define a subframe. The
digits are interpreted as follows:
A The total number of equal partitions of the plotting frame in the horizontal direction.
B The selected partition in the horizontal direction.
C The total number of equal partitions in the vertical direction.
D The selected partition in the vertical direction.
5-6
SUBFRAME
XOFFSET
[0.0]
UNITXOFFSET
[PERCENT]
YOFFSET
[0.0]
UNITYOFFSET
[PERCENT]
WIDTH
[100.0]
UNITWIDTH
[PERCENT]
HEIGHT
[100.0]
UNITHEIGHT
[PERCENT]
Used only if size = DIRECT. See the figure for parameter definitions. Parameters with
PERCENT units are interpreted as percentages of the frame. {CM / INCHES /
PERCENTS / PIXELS / POINTS}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-7
Mesh plotting Introduction

You draw a mesh using the MESHPLOT command. You can also modify an existing mesh
plot using this command.
The mesh plot can contain geometry, the mesh in its original configuration and the mesh in its
deformed configuration.
If you have loaded the results from more than one finite element program into the database,
the mesh plot can display the meshes from all of the loaded finite element program results.
Every mesh plot has a name, which you can specify when you create the mesh plot. You
refer to the mesh plot by name when modifying or deleting it.
The appearance of the mesh plot is governed by the mesh plot depictions. The mesh plot
depictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the mesh plot's
appearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used in the MESHPLOT command to refer
to the depiction.
The depictions used by the MESHPLOT command are:
ZONE: specifies what to plot (for example, nodes, elements, geometry, etc.). See the
zone commands in Section 6.2.
RESPONSE: specifies the solution time, mode-shape, etc. for the mesh plot. See the
response commands in Section 6.3.
MODELDEPICTION: specifies whether to draw the geometry, mesh in original and/or
deformed configurations, and the displacement magnification factor. See the
MODELDEPICTION command in this section.
VIEW: specifies the view. See the VIEW command in this section.
MESHWINDOW: specifies the mesh viewing window. See the MESHWINDOW
command in this section.
PLOTAREA: specifies the location in the graphics window where the mesh plot is
drawn. See the PLOTAREA command in this section.
SUBFRAME: the subframe in which the mesh plot is drawn. See the SUBFRAME
command in Section 5.1.
ELDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing elements. See the ELDEPICTION
5-8
Sec. 5.2 Mesh plotting
NODEDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing nodes. See the NODEDEPICTION

BOUNDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing boundary conditions. See the
BOUNDEPICTION command in this section.
GPDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing geometry points. See the
GPDEPICTION command in this section.
GLDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing geometry lines and edges. See the
GLDEPICTION command in this section.
GSDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing geometry surfaces and faces. See the
GSDEPICTION command in this section.
GVDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing geometry volumes and bodies. See the
GVDEPICTION command in this section.
MESHRENDERING: specifies hidden line removal, shading and related items. See the
MESHRENDERING command in this section.
MESHANNOTATION: attributes of optional text drawn with the mesh. See the
MESHANNOTATION command in this section.
FRONDEPCTION: controls the appearance of frontiers. The following predefined
names can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF, ON.
CONDEPICTION: controls the appearance of constraint equations and rigid links. The
following predefined names can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF, ON.
VSDEPICTION: attributes used when drawing fracture mechanics virtual shifts. See the
VSDEPICTION command in this section.
CRACKDEPICTION: controls the appearance of fracture mechanics crack fronts. The
following predefined names can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF, ON.
RESULTCONTROL: specifies the mode shape amplification factor. See the
RESULTCONTROL command in Section 6.6.
CUTSURFACE: controls cutting surfaces, see the CUTSURFACE commands in this
section.
You can group depiction names into a style using the MESHSTYLE command. Then you
can specify the mesh style in the MESHPLOT command. It is not necessary to use
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-9
MESHSTYLE in order to use MESHPLOT. The mesh style simply provides a way to group
mesh plot depictions together so that you can switch from one set of depictions to another.
When you create a mesh plot, the depictions that you specify (except for the zone) are copied
and given the same name as the mesh plot. So if you create a mesh plot M1, the AUI will
create a subframe M1, an element depiction M1, etc.
You can modify an existing mesh plot in several ways:
1) Alter the depictions with the mesh plot name, using the depiction commands, then
regenerate the mesh plot using the REGENERATE command. For example:
MESHPLOT M1
Creates mesh plot M1.
NODEDEPICTION M1 SYMBOLS=YES
Turns on plotting of node symbols for mesh plot M1.
REGENERATE
Regenerates the mesh plot.
2) Use the MESHPLOT command to substitute depictions. For example:
MESHPLOT M1
MESHPLOT M1 BOUNDEP=ALL
Substitutes boundary depiction ALL for the boundary depiction used during the
creation of mesh plot M1, then regenerates the mesh plot.
You can delete a mesh plot using the DELETE MESHPLOT command, by picking the mesh
plot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command or by clearing the
graphics window using the FRAME command.
When you delete a mesh plot, all of the depictions with the name of the mesh plot are
automatically deleted as well. Therefore, if you want to create several mesh plots with the
same attributes, you may want to create a mesh style with those attributes, then use the mesh
style when creating mesh plots. For example:
MESHSTYLE MS1 NODEDEP=SYMBOLS BOUNDEP=ALL
Creates a mesh style in which nodes are marked with symbols and boundary
conditions are plotted.
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP TIME=1.0
Prepare to plot the results at time 1.0.
5-10
MESHPLOT MESHSTYLE=MS1 RESPONSE=DEFAULT

Creates mesh plot MESHPLOT00001 using this mesh style.
FRAME
Clears the graphics window.
Prepare to plot the results at time 2.0.
MESHPLOT MESHSTYLE=MS1 RESPONSE=DEFAULT
Creates the mesh plot MESHPLOT00001 using this mesh style.
An additional command, that does not define a depiction, is also used by MESHPLOT.
GEDRAWING: specifies how to draw general mass/stiffness/damping elements. See the
GEDRAWING command in this section.
Also note that the COLORZONE command (in Section 6.2) can be used to change the colors
of objects such as elements and geometry in the mesh plot.
Auxiliary commands
The MESHPLOT command has the following auxiliary commands:
LIST MESHPLOT
Lists all mesh plots.
LIST MESHPLOT NAME
Lists the depictions for the specified mesh plot.
DELETE MESHPLOT NAME
Deletes the specified mesh plot.
The MESHSTYLE command has the following auxiliary commands:
LIST MESHSTYLE
Lists all mesh styles.
LIST MESHSTYLE NAME
Lists the depictions for the specified mesh style.
DELETE MESHSTYLE NAME
Deletes the specified mesh style.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-11
COPY MESHSTYLE NAME1 NAME2

Copies the mesh style specified by NAME1 to NAME2.
Each of the depiction commands has the following auxiliary commands:
LIST (depiction)
Lists all names for the specified depiction type.
LIST (depiction) NAME
Lists the attributes for the specified depiction.
DELETE (depiction) NAME
Deletes the attributes for the specified depiction.
COPY (depiction) NAME1 NAME2
Copies the depiction specified by NAME1 to NAME2.
5-12
MESHPLOT
MESHPLOT
NAME MESHSTYLE ZONENAME RESPONSE

MODELDEPICTION VIEW MESHWINDOW PLOTAREA
SUBFRAME ELDEPICTION NODEDEPICTION BOUNDEPICTION
GPDEPICTION GLDEPICTION GSDEPICTION GVDEPICTION
MESHRENDERING MESHANNOTATION FRONDEPICTION
CONDEPICTION VSDEPICTION CRACKDEPICTION
RESULTCONTROL CUTSURFACE ELFACESET ELEDGESET
MESHPLOT creates a mesh plot according to the attributes given by the specified depictions.
NAME
[MESHPLOTnnnnn]
The name of the mesh plot. The name is used by commands that draw upon the mesh plot,
such as BANDPLOT. If no name is given, one is automatically generated, in the form
MESHPLOTnnnnn, where nnnnn is a number between 00001 and 99999.
MESHSTYLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the mesh style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters of this
command. A mesh style is defined by the MESHSTYLE command (in this section).
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone that specifies what (for example, nodes, elements, geometry, etc.)
appears in the meshplot. A zone is defined by a zone command (see Section 6.2).
Note that the ZONENAME is not used when plotting an element face-set or element
edge-set using the ELFACESET or ELEDGESET parameters.
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape, etc. used when drawing
the mesh plot. A response is defined by a response command (see Section 6.3).
MODELDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the model depiction that specifies how the model appears. A model depiction is
defined by the MODELDEPICTION command (in this section).
VIEW
[DEFAULT]
The name of the view depiction that gives the view used to draw the mesh plot. A view
depiction is defined by the VIEW command (in this section).
MESHWINDOW
[DEFAULT]
The name of the window that gives the viewing window used to draw the meshplot. A
meshwindow is defined by the MESHWINDOW command (in this section).
PLOTAREA
[DEFAULT]
The name of the plotarea that gives the location within the subframe for the meshplot. A
plotarea is defined by the PLOTAREA command (in this section).
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-13
MESHPLOT
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the subframe that gives the location within the frame for the meshplot. A
subframe is defined by the SUBFRAME command (in Section 5.1).
ELDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing elements. An
element depiction is defined by the ELDEPICTION command (in this section).
NODEDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the node depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing nodes. A node
depiction is defined by the NODEDEPICTION command (in this section).
BOUNDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the boundary conditions depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing
nodal boundary conditions. A boundary conditions depiction is defined by the
BOUNDEPICTION command (in this section).
GPDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the geometry point depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing the
geometry points. A geometry point depiction is defined by the GPDEPICTION command (in
this section).
GLDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the geometry line depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing geometry
lines and edges. A geometry line depiction is defined by the GLDEPICTION command (in
this section).
GSDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the geometry surface depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing the
geometry surfaces and faces. A geometry surface depiction is defined by the GSDEPICTION
command (in this section).
GVDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the geometry volume depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing the
geometry volumes and bodies. A geometry volume depiction is defined by the
GVDEPICTION command (in this section).
MESHRENDERING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the rendering depiction that specifies how the meshplot is drawn. A rendering
depiction is specified by a MESHRENDERING command (in this section).
5-14
MESHPLOT
MESHANNOTATION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the mesh annotation depiction that specifies what additional text and mesh
axes appear along with the meshplot. A mesh annotation depiction is specified by a
MESHANNOTATION command (in this section).
FRONDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the frontier depiction, used to determine how frontiers are displayed. Currently
there is no corresponding frontier depiction command, but the following predefined frontier
depictions can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF, ON.
CONDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the constraint depiction, used to determine how constraint equations and rigid
links are displayed. Currently there is no corresponding constraint depiction command, but
the following predefined constraint depictions can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF,
ON.
VSDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the virtual shift depiction that specifies which virtual shift to plot in fracture
mechanics analysis. A virtual shift depiction is specified by the VSDEPICTION command
(in this section).
CRACKDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the crack depiction that specifies whether or not to plot the crack front in a
fracture mechanics analysis. Currently there is no corresponding crack depiction command,
but the following predefined crack depictions can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF,
ON.
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result control depiction. The MESHPLOT command uses the
MODEFACTOR parameter of the result control depiction to determine the scaling of mode
shapes. A result control depiction is specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (in
Section 6.6).
CUTSURFACE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the cutting surface depiction. Cutting surfaces are controlled by the
CUTSURFACE commands (in this section).
ELFACESET
The number of the element face-set to plot. If this is 0, then this parameter is not used.
Element face-sets are defined using the ELFACESET command.
[0]
ELEDGESET
[0]
The number of the element edge-set to plot. If this is 0, then this parameter is not used.
Element edge-sets are defined using the ELEDGESET command.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-15
MESHPLOT
Notes for the ZONENAME, ELFACESET and ELEDGESET parameters

If ELFACESET and ELDGESET are both 0, then MESHPLOT plots the elements, geometry,
etc specified by zone ZONENAME.
If either ELFACESET or ELEDGESET are nonzero, then MESHPLOT plots the element
face-set or edge-set specified the ELFACESET or ELEDGESET. The zone specified by
ZONENAME is not used.
It is not allowed for both ELFACESET and ELEDGESET to be nonzero.
5-16
MESHSTYLE
MESHSTYLE
NAME ZONENAME RESPONSE MODELDEPICTION VIEW

MESHWINDOW PLOTAREA SUBFRAME ELDEPICTION
NODEDEPICTION BOUNDEPICTION GPDEPICTION
GLDEPICTION GSDEPICTION GVDEPICTION MESHRENDERING
MESHANNOTATION FRONDEPICTION CONDEPICTION
VSDEPICTION CRACKDEPICTION RESULTCONTROL
CUTSURFACE ELFACESET ELEDGESET
MESHSTYLE groups depictions used when drawing a mesh using MESHPLOT.

NAME
The name of the mesh style. If there is a previously defined mesh style with this name, data
entered in this command modifies that mesh style. If there is no previously defined mesh
style with this name, a new mesh style is created by this command.
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone that specifies what (for example, nodes, elements, geometry, etc.)
appear in the meshplot. A zone is defined by a zone command (in Section 6.2).
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the response that gives the response (solution time, mode shape, etc.) used when
drawing the mesh plot. A response is defined by a response command (in Section 6.3).
MODELDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the model depiction that specifies how the model appears. A model depiction is
defined by the MODELDEPICTION command (in this section).
VIEW
[DEFAULT]
The name of the view depiction that gives the view used to draw the meshplot. A view
depiction is defined by the VIEW command (in this section).
MESHWINDOW
[DEFAULT]
The name of the window that gives the viewing window used to draw the meshplot. A
meshwindow is defined by the MESHWINDOW command (in this section).
PLOTAREA
[DEFAULT]
The name of the plotarea that gives the location within the subframe for the meshplot. A
plotarea is defined by the PLOTAREA command (in this section).
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the subframe that gives the location within the frame for the meshplot. A
subframe is defined by the SUBFRAME command (in Section 5.1).
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-17
MESHSTYLE
ELDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing elements. An
element depiction is defined by the ELDEPICTION command (in this section).
NODEDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the node depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing nodes. A node
depiction is defined by the NODEDEPICTION command (in this section).
BOUNDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the boundary condition depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing nodal
boundary conditions. A boundary condition depiction is defined by the BOUNDEPICTION
GPDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the geometry point depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing the
geometry points. A geometry point depiction is defined by the GPDEPICTION command (in
this section).
GLDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the geometry line depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing the
geometry lines and edges. A geometry line depiction is defined by the GLDEPICTION
GSDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the geometry surface depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing the
geometry surfaces and faces. A geometry surface depiction is defined by the GSDEPICTION
GVDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the geometry volume depiction that gives the attributes used for drawing the
geometry volumes and bodies. A geometry volume depiction is defined by the
GVDEPICTION command (in this section).
MESHRENDERING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the rendering depiction that specifies how the meshplot is drawn. A rendering
depiction is specified by the MESHRENDERING command (in this section).
MESHANNOTATION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the mesh annotation depiction that specifies what additional text and mesh axes
appear along with the meshplot. A mesh annotation depiction is specified by the
MESHANNOTATION command (in this section).
5-18
MESHSTYLE
FRONDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the frontier depiction, used to determine how frontiers are displayed. Currently
there is no corresponding frontier depiction command, but the following predefined frontier
depictions can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF, ON.
CONDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the constraint depiction, used to determine how constraint equations and rigid
links are displayed. Currently there is no corresponding constraint depiction command, but
the following predefined constraint depictions can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF,
ON.
VSDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the virtual shift depiction that specifies which virtual shift to plot in fracture
mechanics analysis. A virtual shift depiction is specified by the VSDEPICTION command
(in this section).
CRACKDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the crack depiction that specifies whether or not to plot the crack front in a
fracture mechanics analysis. Currently there is no corresponding crack depiction command,
but the following predefined crack depictions can be used: DEFAULT, FACTORY, OFF,
ON.
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result control depiction. The MESHPLOT command uses the
MODEFACTOR parameter of the result control depiction to determine the scaling of mode
shapes. A result control depiction is specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (in
Section 6.6).
CUTSURFACE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the cutting surface depiction. Cutting surfaces are controlled by the
CUTSURFACE commands (in this section).
ELFACESET
The number of the element face-set to plot. If this is 0, then this parameter is not used.
Element face-sets are defined using the ELFACESET command.
[0]
ELEDGESET
[0]
The number of the element edge-set to plot. If this is 0, then this parameter is not used.
Element edge-sets are defined using the ELEDGESET command.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-19
GPDEPICTION
GPDEPICTION NAME STATUS SYMBOLPLOT SYMBOL SYMBOLCOLOR

SYMBOLSIZE UNITSYMBOLSIZE NUMBER NUMBERCOLOR
NUMBERSIZE UNITNUMBERSIZE
GPDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing the points in the model geometry using
the MESHPLOT command. The attributes can be grouped as follows:
1) Point symbol attributes
2) Point numbering attributes
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the geometry point depiction. If there is a previously defined geometry point
depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that geometry point
depiction. If there is no previously defined geometry point depiction with this name, a new
geometry point depiction is created by this command.
STATUS
[ON]
If STATUS = ON, geometry points are plotted using the attributes given by the remaining
style attribute parameters. If STATUS = OFF, geometry points are not plotted. {ON /
OFF}
SYMBOLPLOT
[YES]
Enter NO for no symbol plotting at geometry points and YES to plot symbols at geometry
points. If NO is entered, the values of parameters SYMBOL, SYMBOLCOLOR,
SYMBOLSIZE and UNITSYMBOLSIZE are ignored.
SYMBOL
['@C[1,23]']
The symbol string, up to 30 characters long, used to mark each geometry point. Use the
extended character convention to enter a special symbol. See the TEXT command in Section
5.12 for the extended character convention.
SYMBOLCOLOR
The color of the symbol.
[ORANGE]
SYMBOLSIZE
UNITSYMBOLSIZE
The size of the symbol and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS
/POINTS}
NUMBER
Specifies whether the label numbers of geometry points are plotted. {YES / NO}
NUMBERCOLOR
The color of geometry point numbers.
5-20
[0.10]
[CM]
[NO]
[ORANGE]
GPDEPICTION
NUMBERSIZE
[0.25]
UNITNUMBERSIZE
[CM]
The size of geometry point numbers and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /
PIXELS / POINTS}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-21
GLDEPICTION
GLDEPICTION NAME STATUS LINESTYLE LINECOLOR LINEWIDTH

UNITLINEWIDTH NUMBER NUMBERCOLOR NUMBERSIZE
UNITNUMBERSIZE LINESEGMENT CURVEANGLE
SUBDIVISION SUBDCOLOR SUBDSIZE UNITSUBDSIZE
PCCANG REMOVALCOLOR
GLDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing the lines and edges in the model
geometry using the MESHPLOT command. The attributes can be grouped as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Line attributes
Line numbering attributes
Line approximation attributes
Line subdivision attributes
Parasolid edge approximation attributes
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the geometry line depiction. If there is a previously defined geometry line
depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that geometry line depiction.
If there is no previously defined geometry line depiction with this name, a new geometry line
depiction is created by this command.
STATUS
[ON]
If STATUS = ON, geometry lines are plotted using the attributes given by the remaining style
attribute parameters. If STATUS = OFF, geometry lines are not plotted (except for those
lines needed to draw surfaces). {ON / OFF}
LINESTYLE
The style of the lines. {SOLID / DASHED}
LINECOLOR
The color of the lines.
[SOLID]
[ORANGE]
LINEWIDTH
UNITLINEWIDTH
The width of the line and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS /
POINTS} If LINEWIDTH = 0.0, the thinnest possible line is used.
[0.0]
[CM]
NUMBER
[NO]
Specifies whether or not the label numbers of geometry lines are plotted. {YES / NO}
NUMBERCOLOR
The color of geometry line numbers.
5-22
[ORANGE]
GLDEPICTION
NUMBERSIZE
[0.25]
UNITNUMBERSIZE
[CM]
The size of geometry line numbers and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /
PIXELS / POINTS}
LINESEGMENT
[1]
The minimum number of straight line segments used to draw each curved line. The actual
number of straight line segments used is dependent upon the value of parameter
CURVEANGLE.
CURVEANGLE
[5.0]
The number of straight line segments used to draw each curved line is chosen so that the
angle between successive straight line segments is less than CURVEANGLE. Hence,
decreasing CURVEANGLE increases the number of straight line segments used to draw each
curved line. CURVEANGLE is entered in degrees.
SUBDIVISION
[YES]
Indicates whether line subdivisions (as used by mesh generation) are to be plotted. {YES /
NO}
SUBDCOLOR
The color of the line subdivision markers.
[ORANGE]
SUBDSIZE
[0.1]
UNITSUBDSIZE
[CM]
The size of the line subdivision markers and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /
PIXELS / POINTS}
PCCANG
[0.2]
The maximum chord angle used for plotting Parasolid edges, entered in radians. Decreasing
PCCANG improves the appearance of curved Parasolid edges.
REMOVALCOLOR
[YELLOW]
The colors of edges that are targeted for removal by the BODY-CLEANUP and BODYDEFEATURE commands.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-23
GSDEPICTION
GSDEPICTION NAME STATUS LINESTYLE LINECOLOR LINEWIDTH

UNITLINEWIDTH NUMBER NUMBERCOLOR NUMBERSIZE
UNITNUMBERSIZE UGRID VGRID USEGMENT VSEGMENT
PCCANG REMOVALCOLOR OCCTOL
GSDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing the surfaces and faces in the model
geometry using the MESHPLOT command. The attributes can be grouped as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Surface attributes
Surface numbering attributes
Surface line approximations
Parasolid and OpenCascade face approximation attributes
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the geometry surface depiction. If there is a previously defined geometry
surface depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that geometry
surface depiction. If there is no previously defined geometry surface depiction with this
name, a new geometry surface depiction is created by this command.
STATUS
[ON]
If STATUS = ON, geometry surfaces are plotted using the attributes given by the remaining
style attribute parameters. If STATUS = OFF, geometry surfaces are not plotted (except for
those needed to draw volumes). {ON / OFF}
LINESTYLE
[SOLID]
The style of the visible intermediate lines used when drawing the surface. {SOLID /
DASHED} Note that LINESTYLE, LINECOLOR, LINEWIDTH and UNITLINEWIDTH
are not used for the bounding lines of the surface. The style of the bounding lines of the
surface is controlled by the GLDEPICTION command.
LINECOLOR
The color of the visible intermediate lines.
[ORANGE]
LINEWIDTH
[0.0]
UNITLINEWIDTH
[CM]
The width of the visible intermediate lines and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /
PIXELS / POINTS} If LINEWIDTH = 0.0, the thinnest possible lines are used.
NUMBER
[NO]
Specifies whether the label numbers of geometry surfaces are plotted. {YES / NO}
NUMBERCOLOR
The color of geometry surface numbers.
5-24
[ORANGE]
GSDEPICTION
NUMBERSIZE
[0.25]
UNITNUMBERSIZE
[CM]
The size of geometry surface numbers and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /
PIXELS / POINTS}
UGRID
VGRID
The number of visible intermediate lines used to represent the surface in the U and V
directions. {UGRID, VGRID >= 0}
[0]
[0]
USEGMENT
[0]
VSEGMENT
[0]
These parameters affect the quality of the surface approximation in the U and V directions.
Increasing these values improves the quality of the approximation. A value of 0 means that
the parameter is automatically set when it is used. {USEGMENT, VSEGMENT >= 0}
PCCANG
[0.2]
The maximum chord angle used for plotting Parasolid faces, entered in radians. Decreasing
PCCANG improves the appearance of curved Parasolid faces.
REMOVALCOLOR
[YELLOW]
The colors of faces that are targeted for removal by the BODY-CLEANUP and BODYDEFEATURE commands.
OCCTOL
[0.1]
Tolerance used when plotting OpenCascade faces. Smaller values result in a more accurate
approximation.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-25
GVDEPICTION
GVDEPICTION NAME STATUS NUMBER NUMBERCOLOR NUMBERSIZE

UNITNUMBERSIZE
GVDEPICTION defines attributes used when labeling the geometry volumes or geometry
bodies in a mesh plot.
Geometry volumes and geometry bodies are indicated in a mesh plot by their bounding lines,
edges, surfaces and faces. Use the GLDEPICTION and GSDEPICTION commands (in this
section) to alter the appearances of the bounding lines, edges, surfaces and faces.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the geometry volume depiction. If there is a previously defined geometry
volume depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that geometry
volume depiction. If there is no previously defined geometry volume depiction with this
name, a new geometry volume depiction is created by this command.
STATUS <not currently active>
[ON]
NUMBER
[NO]
Specifies whether the label numbers of geometry volumes are plotted. {YES / NO}
NUMBERCOLOR
The color of geometry volume numbers.
[ORANGE]
NUMBERSIZE
[0.25]
UNITNUMBERSIZE
[CM]
The size of geometry volume numbers and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /
PIXELS / POINTS}
5-26
MODELDEPICTION
MODELDEPICTION NAME ORIGINAL DEFORMED GEOMETRY DISPOPTION

DISPFACTOR UNITDISPFACTOR REFOPTION REFTIME
BDREP COORDPLOT COORDCOLOR COORDSIZE
UNITCOORDSIZE
MODELDEPICTION defines some attributes used by MESHPLOT. The attributes can be
grouped as follows:
1) Whether to plot the mesh in the original or reference configuration
2) Whether to plot the mesh in the deformed configuration
3) Whether to plot the model geometry
4) The displacement magnification factor
5) The reference configuration about which displacements are magnified
6) Whether to plot the body discrete reps (discrete breps) of geometry bodies.
7) Whether to plot coordinate system origins.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the model depiction. If there is a previously defined model depiction with this
name, data entered in this command modifies that model depiction. If there is no previously
defined model depiction with this name, a new model depiction is created by this command.
ORIGINAL
[YES if in preprocessing mode, NO if in postprocessing mode ]
Specifies whether the mesh is plotted in the original (or reference) configuration. If there is
no finite element data stored in the database, this parameter is ignored. {YES / NO}
DEFORMED
[NO if in preprocessing mode, YES if in postprocessing mode]
Specifies whether the mesh is plotted in the deformed configuration. (The actual deformed
configuration is specified by the RESPONSE parameter in the MESHPLOT command.) If
there is no finite element data stored in the database, this parameter is ignored. {YES /
NO}
Note: ORIGINAL=YES plots all elements, regardless of any birth-death information stored
for the elements. DEFORMED=YES plots only those elements that are active at the given
solution time. You can use DEFORMED=YES during preprocessing to check the element
birth-death information.
GEOMETRY
[YES]
Specifies whether the geometry is plotted. If there is no geometry data stored in the database,
this parameter is ignored. {YES / NO}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-27
MODELDEPICTION
DISPOPTION
[AUTOMATIC]
DISPFACTOR
[1.0]
UNITDISPFACTOR
These parameters control the magnification factor used to plot the displacements when
plotting the deformed mesh. These parameters are ignored if DEFORMED = NO.
If you specify DISPOPTION = MAGNIFICATION, then DISPFACTOR is interpreted as a
displacement magnification factor (1.0 = no magnification) and UNITDISPFACTOR is
ignored.
If you specify DISPOPTION = LENGTH, then DISPFACTOR is interpreted as the length on
the plotting surface of the maximum displacement and UNITDISPFACTOR gives the length
unit of DISPFACTOR {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}. In this
case, the program automatically determines the displacement magnification factor.
If you specify DISPOPTION = AUTOMATIC, then the program automatically determines the
displacement magnification factor as follows: If the mesh plot displacements are actual
displacements, then the programs sets the displacement magnification factor to 1.0 (no
magnification). If the mesh plot displacements are eigenvectors or response spectrum
residual solutions, the program determines the displacement magnification factor to cause the
maximum plotted displacement to be 10% of the plotted length of the subframe, times the
value of RESULTCONTROL MODEFACTOR. DISPFACTOR and UNITDISPFACTOR
are ignored when DISPOPTION = AUTOMATIC.
REFOPTION
[ORIGINAL]
REFTIME
[0.0]
These parameters are applicable when plotting a mesh using a response of type load-step (that
is, when plotting a load-step solution).
If REFOPTION=ORIGINAL, the original mesh is plotted using the original configuration of
the model. All elements are drawn in the original mesh, including those elements that are
dead at the start of the program solution. The deformed mesh is plotted using the
displacements, and, if the displacements are magnified, the total displacements are magnified.
REFTIME is ignored in this case.
If REFOPTION=REFTIME, the original mesh is plotted using the configuration of the model
at time REFTIME (in other words, the displacements at REFTIME are used to calculate the
coordinates of the original mesh). Only those elements alive at time REFTIME are drawn.
The deformed mesh is plotted using the displacements, and, if the displacements are
magnified, only the incremental displacements between the current solution time and
REFTIME are magnified.
5-28
MODELDEPICTION
It is an error if REFTIME is less than the earliest solution time, or greater than the latest
solution time. However REFTIME can lie between two solution times. REFTIME can be
larger or smaller than the current solution time.
A typical use of REFOPTION=REFTIME is in suspension bridge analysis. This type of
model is solved in two analyses, a static analysis to determine the initial shape of the bridge
due to gravity, than a restart to dynamic analysis to perform an earthquake analysis. If you
set REFOPTION=REFTIME and REFTIME=the solution time for the static analysis, the AUI
will magnify only the displacements due to the earthquake.
BDREP
[YES]
If the body discrete rep (discrete brep) of a geometry body is available, the body discrete rep
is plotted if BDREP=YES, otherwise the body discrete rep is not plotted.
COORDPLOT
[GLOBAL for preprocessing, NO for postprocessing]
If COORDPLOT=NO, then no coordinate system origins are plotted. If COORDPLOT=
GLOBAL, then the global coordinate system origin is plotted. If COORDPLOT=LOCAL,
then the local coordinate system origin (set using the SYSTEM command) is plotted. If
COORDPLOT=BOTH, then both the local and global coordinate system origins are plotted.
COORDCOLOR
[INVERSE]
The color of the coordinate system origins, used only when COORDPLOT is not equal to
NO.
COORDSIZE
[15]
UNITCOORDSIZE
[PIXEL]
The size of the coordinate system origins, used only when COORDPLOT is not equal to NO ,
and its unit. {CM / INCH PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-29
MESHRENDERING
MESHRENDERING
NAME LINESOPTION LINES HIDDEN OUTLINE

LINESSOURCE TOLHIDDEN SHADING AMBIENT
DIFFUSE QUANTIZATION COLORZONE ELLINE
ELLINEANGLE GEOMLINE VOLINSIDE DBPROJECTION
DBOFFSET FRONTTRIANGLES BACKTRIANGLES
CSOPAQUE
MESHRENDERING defines attributes used when drawing a mesh plot. The attributes that
you can control using this command include:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Criteria used to determine which element lines and geometry lines are drawn.
Whether hidden lines are removed or dashed.
Whether outline generation is used to complete the outline of the model.
Shading attributes.
Colors of zones.
Drawbead plotting options
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the mesh rendering depiction. If there is a previously defined mesh rendering
depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that mesh rendering
depiction. If there is no previously defined mesh rendering depiction with this name, a new
mesh rendering depiction is created by this command.
LINESOPTION
[ALL]
LINES
These parameters are obsolete and replaced by ELLINE, ELLINEANGLE and GEOMLINE.
HIDDEN
[REMOVED]
If this parameter is NO, hidden lines and surfaces are not removed. If this parameter is
REMOVED, hidden lines and surfaces are removed. If this parameter is DASHED, hidden lines
are dashed.
Hidden node symbols are removed only if this parameter is REMOVED. Hidden bands from
band plots are removed if this parameter is REMOVED or DASHED. Hidden loads from load
plots are removed if this parameter is REMOVED.
If all of the points of the model lie in one of the global coordinate system planes, the program
automatically deactivates the hidden line removal algorithm and the value of this parameter is
ignored.
OUTLINE
[GEOMETRY]
Controls whether outline generation is used to complete the outline of the model. {YES /
NO / GEOMETRY}. If OUTLINE=GEOMETRY, outline generation is used for the geometry
model, but not for the finite element model.
5-30
MESHRENDERING
If all of the points of the model lie in one of the global coordinate system planes, the program
automatically deactivates the outline generation algorithm and the value of this parameter is
ignored.
LINESSOURCE
This parameter is obsolete, and is replaced by parameter VOLINSIDE.
TOLHIDDEN
Tolerance for hidden line removal.
SHADING
Controls whether element and geometry faces are shaded. {NO / YES}
[AUTOMATIC]
[0.0]
[NO]
AMBIENT
[0.25]
DIFFUSE
[0.7]
QUANTIZATION
[0]
Control how element and geometry faces are shaded, when SHADING = YES. AMBIENT is
the intensity of ambient light illuminating the model, and DIFFUSE is the intensity of diffuse
light radiating from a light source placed at the eye point. The total intensity of a face is
equal to the ambient light intensity plus a fraction of the diffuse light intensity, the fraction
being calculated using the angle between the face and the screen. The effect is to most
brightly illuminate faces that are parallel to the screen and to least brightly illuminate faces
that are perpendicular to the screen. Both AMBIENT and DIFFUSE can be between 0.0 (no
intensity), and 1.0 (maximum intensity), but the program treats all faces with intensity
greater than 1.0 alike.
To set the intensity of all faces to be equal, set DIFFUSE = 0.0. This option is intermediate
in rendering time between no shading and full shading.
QUANTIZATION is the number of discrete intensities used by the AUI, between the lowest
intensity and the highest intensity. The purpose of this parameter is to limit the number of
colors used in a shaded color image. You can set QUANTIZATION to 0 to allow the AUI to
use any intensity.
COLORZONE
[YES]
Indicates whether or not the colors of entities drawn in the meshplot are overridden by colors
selected within the COLORZONE command (in Section 6.2). {YES / NO}
ELLINE
This parameter controls which element lines are drawn.
ALL
GROUP
[ALL]
All element lines are drawn.

Only those element lines on group boundaries are drawn.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-31
MODEL
NONE
MESHRENDERING
Only those element lines on model boundaries are drawn.

No element lines are drawn.
ELLINEANGLE
[10.0]
This parameter is used when drawing volume elements and non-planar surface elements (such
as shell elements), when ELLINE=GROUP or MODEL. For these elements, a line is on the
boundary if either the line is attached to only one element face, or if the dihedral angle
created by all element faces attached to the line is greater than ELLINEANGLE.
ELLINEANGLE is specified in degrees.
GEOMLINE
This parameter controls which geometry lines are drawn {ALL / NONE}.
[ALL]
VOLINSIDE
[NO]
This parameter is used when plotting volume elements. If VOLINSIDE=NO, the AUI only
plots the skin of volume element meshes (that is, the visible faces of the volume elements)
and does not plot the inside lines of the meshes. If VOLINSIDE=YES, the AUI plots the
inside lines of the meshes.
If VOLINSIDE=YES, the AUI plots dashed hidden lines if HIDDEN=REMOVED, the AUI
turns off shading if SHADING=YES, and the AUI plots all element lines (if ELLINE
=MODEL or GROUP). In addition, the AUI plots all nodes, even nodes that are not attached to
elements. Also it is not possible to pick 3D element faces.
DBPROJECTION
[NO]
Specifies whether to plot drawbeads as projections onto their contact surfaces. {YES/NO}
DBOFFSET
[0.0]
The drawbead z coordinates (after projection) are adjusted by a factor DBOFFSET. The
intent for parameter DBOFFSET is to move the projected drawbead relative to its contact
surface so that the contact surface does not interfere with the drawbead, as far as hidden line
removal is concerned.
FRONTTRIANGLES
[YES]
BACKTRIANGLES
[YES]
FRONTTRIANGLES controls whether front-facing triangles are plotted {NO / YES}.
BACKTRIANGLES controls whether back-facing triangles are plotted {NO / YES}.
These parameters are used for special plotting effects, as follows:
Shaded element and geometry faces are converted into triangles before plotting. Front-facing
triangles are triangles with outwards normal pointing towards the eye, back-facing triangles
are triangles with outwards normal pointing away from the eye. As you change the view of
the meshplot, triangles that were front-facing become back-facing, and vice versa.
5-32
MESHRENDERING
Normally, you want to plot all shaded triangles. But there are two special display effects in
which you want to plot only front- or back-facing triangles:
1) If FRONTTRIANGLES=NO, BACKTRIANGLES=YES, only back-facing triangles are
displayed. This creates a plot in which you can see through the mesh. These parameter
settings are best used along with the settings ELLINE=MODEL or NONE, SHADING=YES.
When you use this combination of options, any incompatibility in the meshing becomes
visible. In addition, you can plot vectors and particle traces within the mesh.
2) If FRONTTRIANGLES=YES, BACKTRIANGLES=NO, only front-facing triangles are
displayed. This speeds up the display somewhat when there are only solid elements or solid
geometry entities (such as bodies or volumes) within the meshplot. (The reason is that backfacing triangles cannot be seen, and do not contribute to hidden line removal, when
visualizing solid objects.)
CSOPAQUE
CSOPAQUE controls whether 3D contact surfaces are plotted opaque:
[AUTOMATIC]
AUTOMATIC: The program chooses which 3D contact surfaces are plotted opaque. A
3D contact surface is opaque if it is not attached to any element.
NO:
No 3D contact surface is plotted opaque.
YES:
All 3D contact surfaces are plotted opaque.
Note that an opaque contact surface can hide graphics behind it (if hidden lines are removed),
and that an opaque contact surface is shaded when shading is on.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-33
NODEDEPICTION
NODEDEPICTION NAME SYMBOLPLOT SYMBOL SYMBOLCOLOR

SYMBOLSIZE UNITSYMBOLSIZE NUMBER NUMBERCOLOR
NUMBERSIZE UNITNUMBERSIZE SKEWPLOT SKEWCOLOR
SKEWSIZE UNITSKEWSIZE CMAPLOT CMASYMBOL
CMACOLOR CMASIZE UNITCMASIZE CDAPLOT
CDASYMBOL CDACOLOR CDASIZE UNITCDASIZE
selectori statusi symbolploti symboli symbolcolori symbolsizei unitsymbolsizei
numberi numbercolori numbersizei unitnumbersizei skewploti skewcolori skewsizei
unitskewsizei cmaploti cmasymboli cmacolori cmasizei unitcmasizei cdaploti
cdasymboli cdacolori cdasizei unitcdasizei
NODEDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing nodes using the MESHPLOT
command. The attributes can be grouped as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Node symbol attributes

Node number attributes
Skew system attributes
Concentrated mass symbol attributes
Concentrated damper symbol attributes
The attributes are assigned using selectors. Each data input line of this command assigns the
given attributes to a selector. Those nodes not in any selector given in this command are
assigned the attributes of the command parameters.
Selectors specified in the data input lines must be disjoint, see table.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the node depiction. If there is a previously defined node depiction with this
name, data entered in this command modifies that node depiction. If there is no previously
defined node depiction with this name, a new node depiction is created by this command.
SYMBOLPLOT
[YES]
Enter NO for no symbol plotting at nodes and YES to plot symbols at nodes. If NO is entered,
the values of parameters SYMBOL, SYMBOLCOLOR, SYMBOLSIZE and
UNITSYMBOLSIZE are ignored.
SYMBOL
['@C[1,5]']
The symbol string, up to 30 characters long, used to mark each node. Use the extended
character convention to enter a special symbol. See the TEXT command in Section 5.12 for
the extended character convention.
SYMBOLCOLOR
5-34
[GREEN]
NODEDEPICTION
SYMBOLSIZE
UNITSYMBOLSIZE
The size of the symbol and its unit. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS /
POINTS}
[0.25]
[CM]
NUMBER
[NO]
Determines whether node numbers are plotted (with main structure node numbers above the
nodal points and substructure node numbers below the nodal points). {YES / NO}
NUMBERCOLOR
The color of node numbers, used only when NUMBER = YES.
[GREEN]
NUMBERSIZE
[0.25]
UNITNUMBERSIZE
[CM]
The size of node numbers, used only when NUMBER = YES, and its unit. {CM / INCH
PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
SKEWPLOT
Determines whether skew system symbols are plotted. {YES / NO}
SKEWCOLOR
The color of skew system symbols, used only when SKEWPLOT = YES.
[NO]
[GREEN]
SKEWSIZE
[15]
UNITSKEWSIZE
[PIXELS]
The size of skew system symbols, used only when SKEWPLOT = YES, and its unit. {CM /
INCH PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
CMAPLOT
Determines whether concentrated mass symbols are plotted. {YES / NO}
[NO]
CMASYMBOL
['M']
The symbol string, up to 30 characters long, used to mark each node with concentrated mass,
used only when CMAPLOT=YES. Use the extended character convention to enter a special
symbol. See the TEXT command in Section 5.12 for the extended character convention.
CMACOLOR
[LIGHT_BLUE]
The color of concentrated mass symbols, used only when CMAPLOT = YES.
CMASIZE
[10]
UNITCMASIZE
[PIXELS]
The size of concentrated mass symbols, used only when CMAPLOT = YES, and its unit.
{CM / INCH PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-35
NODEDEPICTION
CDAPLOT
Determines whether concentrated damper symbols are plotted. {YES / NO}
[NO]
CDASYMBOL
['D']
The symbol string, up to 30 characters long, used to mark each node with concentrated
damper, used only when CDAPLOT=YES. Use the extended character convention to enter a
special symbol. See the TEXT command in Section 5.12 for the extended character
convention.
CDACOLOR
[LIGHT_BLUE]
The color of concentrated damper symbols, used only when CDAPLOT = YES.
CDASIZE
[10]
UNITCDASIZE
[PIXELS]
The size of concentrated damper symbols, used only when CMAPLOT = YES, and its unit.
{CM / INCH PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
selectori
The name of a node selector (see table below). All selector names specified in the data input
lines must be disjoint.
statusi
The node selector is active only if its status is ON. If you specify statusi = OFF, the node
selector is not used. If you do not specify the status, the default status is ON. {ON / OFF}
symbolploti symboli symbolcolori symbolsizei unitsymbolsizei,
numberi numbercolori numbersizei unitnumbersizei
skewploti skewcolori skewsizei unitskewsizei
cmaploti cmasymboli cmacolori cmasizei unitcmasizei
cdaploti cdasymboli cdacolori cdasizei unitcdasizei
The attributes used when drawing nodes that match the selector. If an attribute is not
specified in the data input line, it is copied from the corresponding command line attribute.
5-36
NODEDEPICTION
Node selectors:
Selector name
MAIN
SUBSTRUCTURE
TRANSGLOBAL
TRANSSKEW
ROTGLOBAL
ROTSKEW
ROTMIDSURFACE
FRONT
UNRELEASED
RELEASED
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Matches
nodes in the main structure
nodes in any substructure
nodes with translational DOFs referenced
to the global system
nodes with translational DOFs referenced
to any skew system
nodes with rotational DOFs referenced
to the global system
nodes with rotational DOFs referenced
to any skew system
nodes with rotational DOFs referenced to
a shell mid-surface system
nodes on a fracture mechanics crack front
nodes on a fracture mechanics crack
propagation surface that are not on the
crack front and are not released
nodes on a fracture mechanics crack
propagation surface that are released
Is disjoint to
SUBSTRUCTURE
MAIN
TRANSSKEW
TRANSGLOBAL
ROTSKEW,
ROTMIDSURFACE
ROTGLOBAL,
ROTSKEW
ROTGLOBAL,
ROTSKEW
UNRELEASED,
RELEASED
FRONT, RELEASED
FRONT,
UNRELEASED
5-37
ELDEPICTION
ELDEPICTION NAME ORCOLOR DECOLOR ORLSTYLE DELSTYLE

SHELLSTYLE SHFAC1 SHFAC2 CSLINE UNITCSLINE RSLINE
UNITRSLINE SYMBOLPLOT SYMBOL SYMBOLCOLOR
SYMBOLSIZE UNITSYMBOLSIZE SUBNUMBER REUNUMBER
GRONUMBER ELENUMBER LAYNUMBER NUMBERCOLOR
NUMBERSIZE UNITNUMBERSIZE TRIAD TRIADCOLOR
TRIADSIZE UNITTRIADSIZE NNCSIZE UNITNNCSIZE
NNCLINE TRIADTYPE SEGNORMAL SEGNSIZE UNITSNSIZE
DBHFACTOR SPRINGSIZE UNITSPRING E1DLINE
UNITE1DLINE CSECTOPT CSECTNSEG NAXISNSEG
zonenamei orcolori decolori orlstylei delstylei shellstylei shfac1i shfac2i cslinei
unitcslinei rslinei unitrslinei symbolploti symboli symbolcolori symbolsizei
unitsymbolsizei subnumberi reunumberi gronumberi elenumberi laynumberi
numbercolori numbersizei unitnumbersizei triadi triadcolori triadsizei unittriadsizei
nncsizei unitnncsizei nnclinei triadtypei segnormali segnsizei unitsnsizei dbhfactori
springsizei unitspringi e1dlinei unite1dlinei csectopti csectnsegi naxisnsegi
DELETE zonenamei
ELDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing elements using MESHPLOT. The
attributes include element colors, element shape attributes, element symbol attributes, element
number attributes and element triads.
The element attributes are assigned using zonenames. Each data input line assigns the given
element attributes to a zone. Those elements not in any zone specified in the data input lines
are assigned the attributes given by the command line parameters.
If zonenames are specified on the data input lines, they must be disjoint, that is, if an element
is in a zone, it cannot be in any other zone given in the data input lines.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element depiction. If there is a previously defined element depiction with
this name, data entered in this command modifies that element depiction. If there is no
previously defined element depiction, a new element depiction is created by this command.
ORCOLOR
The color of elements when drawing the original configuration of the mesh.
[BLUE]
DECOLOR
The color of elements when drawing the deformed configuration of the mesh.
[CYAN]
5-38
ELDEPICTION
ORLSTYLE
[SOLID]
The style of the lines of elements when drawing the original configuration of the mesh.
{SOLID / DASHED}
DELSTYLE
[SOLID]
The style of the lines of elements when drawing the deformed configuration of the mesh.
{SOLID / DASHED}
SHELLSTYLE
[MIDSURFACE]
Controls whether SHELL elements are drawn using a midsurface or topbottom depiction.
{MIDSURFACE / TOPBOTTOM}
SHFAC1
[1.0]
SHFAC2
[1.0]
These attributes affect SHELL elements drawn in the topbottom depiction only. They alter
the layer thicknesses and placement of the layer from the midsurface. (See figure.)
CSLINE
[0.1]
UNITCSLINE
[CM]
The width of thick plotted lines used to draw contact surface elements, and its unit. These
parameters also control the width of thick plotted lines used to draw fluid-structure interface
elements (used with ADINA potential-based fluid elements). {CM / INCH / PERCENT
/ PIXELS / POINTS}
RSLINE
[0.1]
UNITRSLINE
[CM]
The width of thick plotted lines used to draw radiosity surface elements, and its unit. {CM /
INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
SYMBOLPLOT
[YES]
Enter NO for no symbol plotting at elements and YES to plot symbols at elements. If NO is
entered, the values of parameters SYMBOL, SYMBOLCOLOR, SYMBOLSIZE and
UNITSYMBOLSIZE are ignored.
SYMBOL
['@C[1,6]']
The symbol string, up to 30 characters long, used to mark each element. Use the extended
character convention to enter a special symbol. See the TEXT command in Section 5.12 for
the extended character convention.
SYMBOLCOLOR
The color of element symbols.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[INVERSE]
5-39
ELDEPICTION
SYMBOLSIZE
[0.25]
UNITSYMBOLSIZE
[CM]
The size of element symbols and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS /
POINTS}
SUBNUMBER
Controls whether substructure numbers are plotted. {YES / NO}
[NO]
REUNUMBER
Controls whether reuse numbers are plotted. {YES / NO}
[NO]
GRONUMBER
[NO]
Controls whether element group / contact surface group / radiosity surface group numbers are
plotted. {YES / NO}
ELENUMBER
[NO]
Controls whether element / contact surface / radiosity surface numbers are plotted. {YES /
NO}
LAYNUMBER
[NO]
Controls whether element layer / contact segment numbers are plotted. {YES / NO}
NUMBERCOLOR
[INVERSE]
The color of element numbers, used only when at least one of SUBNUMBER,
REUNUMBER, GRONUMBER, ELENUMBER, LAYNUMBER is YES.
NUMBERSIZE
[0.25]
UNITNUMBERSIZE
[CM]
The size of element numbers, used only when at least one of SUBNUMBER, REUNUMBER,
GRONUMBER, ELENUMBER, LAYNUMBER is YES, and its unit. {CM / INCHES /
TRIAD
[NO]
Enter NO for no triad plotting at elements and YES for triad plotting. If NO is entered, the
values of parameters TRIADCOLOR, TRIADSIZE and UNITTRIADSIZE are ignored.
TRIADCOLOR
The color of element triads.
[VIOLET]
TRIADSIZE
[15]
UNITTRIADSIZE
[PIXELS]
The size of element triads, and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS /
POINTS}
5-40
ELDEPICTION
NNCSIZE
[0.25]
UNITNNCSIZE
[CM]
The size of symbols plotted at target nodes in node-node contact surface groups and its unit.
{CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
NNCLINE
[YES]
If NNCLINE = NO, no lines are plotted between contactor and target nodes in node-node
contact surface groups. If NNCLINE = YES, lines are plotted between contactor and target
nodes.
TRIADTYPE
The type of triad.
ELEMENTCS
RESULTTR
[ELEMENTCS]
The triad indicates the element local coordinate system. For brick
volume elements, the AUI plots the symbols +r, -r, etc. to indicate
the volume element faces. For tetrahedral volume elements, the AUI
plots the symbols r=0, etc. to indicate the volume element faces.
The triad indicates the local coordinate system used to calculate
transformed stresses and strains. The local coordinate system is the
system given in the result control depiction used in the MESHPLOT
command (see RESULTCONTROL RESULTSYSTEM in Section 6.6)
MATERIALAXES
The triad indicates the material axes for those elements that use
orthotropic materials.
INITIALSTRAINAXES
The triad indicates the initial strain axes for those elements with initial
strains.
SEGNORMAL
[NO]
Enter NO for no plotting of contact segment normals and YES for plotting of contact segment
normals. If NO is entered, the values of parameters SEGNSIZE and UNITSNSIZE are
ignored.
Note: SEGNORMAL, SEGNSIZE and UNITSNSIZE also control the plotting of radiosity
segment normals and fluid-structure interface element normals (used with ADINA potentialbased fluid elements).
SEGNSIZE
[0.75]
UNITSNSIZE
[CM]
The size of contact segment normals, and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /
PIXELS / POINTS}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-41
ELDEPICTION
DBHFACTOR
[1.0]
The plotted line width for drawbeads is equal to DBHFACTOR the input drawbead height,
where DBHFACTOR the input drawbead height is measured in the coordinate system of
the model. Hence DBHFACTOR can be used to magnify the plotted width of drawbeads.
SPRINGSIZE
[0.25]
UNITSPRING
[CM]
The plotted size of 1 DOF spring elements, and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /
PIXELS / POINTS}
E1DLINE
[2]
UNITE1DLINE
[PIXELS]
The plotted width of 1D elements (truss, beam, iso-beam, pipe), and its unit. {CM /
INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
CSECTOPT
[NONE]
Controls whether the cross-sections of Hermitian beam elements are plotted. If
CSECTOPT=NONE, then the cross-sections are not plotted. If CSECTOPT=CENTER, then
the cross-sections are plotted at the element centers. Exception: the cross-sections of
elements with cross-sections defined by section properties are never plotted.
CSECTNSEG
[16]
The number of line segments used to draw a circle when drawing a pipe cross-section of a
Hermitian beam element (used when CSECTOPT=CENTER).
NAXISNSEG
[1]
The number of line segments used to draw the neutral axis of a Hermitian beam element.
Increasing this number gives a better approximation of the curved neutral axis of a deformed
Hermitian beam element.
zonenamei
The name of a zone. All zonenames specified in the data input lines must be disjoint. The
connection between a zone and its attributes can be removed using the DELETE zonenamei
option.
zonenamei orcolori decolori orlstylei delstylei shellstylei shfac1i shfac2i cslinei
unitcslinei rslinei unitrslinei symbolploti symboli symbolcolori symbolsizei
unitsymbolsizei subnumberi reunumberi gronumberi elenumberi laynumberi
numbercolori numbersizei unitnumbersizei triadi triadcolori triadsizei unittriadsizei
nncsizei unitnncsizei nnclinei triadtypei segnormali segnsizei unitsnsizei springsizei
unitspringi e1dlinei unite1dlinei csectopti csectnsegi naxisnsegi
The attributes to be used when drawing elements in zone zonenamei. If an attribute is not
specified, it is copied from the corresponding command-line parameter.
5-42
ELDEPICTION
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-43
VSDEPICTION
VSDEPICTION NAME PLOTSHIFT SHIFTNUMBER

VSDEPICTION defines information used when plotting virtual shifts on mesh plots. Virtual
shifts are defined in fracture mechanics analysis.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the virtual shift depiction. If there is a previously defined virtual shift depiction
with this name, data entered in this command modifies that virtual shift depiction. If there is
no previously defined virtual shift depiction, a new virtual shift depiction is created by this
command.
PLOTSHIFT
[NO]
Plots the virtual shift. When PLOTSHIFT = YES, the deformed mesh plot is formed using
the virtual shifts of the specified virtual shift number instead of the displacements. {NO /
YES}
SHIFTNUMBER
The label number of the virtual shift to plot.
5-44
[1]
MESHANNOTATION
MESHANNOTATION NAME COLOR CHARSIZE UNITCHARSIZE BOXSIZE

UNITBOXSIZE WIDTH UNITWIDTH PLACEMENT
XSTART UNITXSTART YSTART UNITYSTART SCALE
labeltypei statusi colori charsizei unitcharsizei boxsizei unitboxsizei widthi
unitwidthi placementi xstarti unitxstarti ystarti unitystarti scalei
MESHANNOTATION defines which optional text to plot along with the MESHPLOT
command. It also defines the attributes of the optional text.
Optional text is as follows:
MAGNIFICATION: The displacement magnification factor is plotted, if it is not equal
to 1.0.
RESPONSE: Information about the response (for example, the solution time or the mode
number) is plotted.
SCALES: A scaling factor, that gives the number of model length units corresponding to
a plotted distance, is plotted
MESHWINDOW: The current mesh viewing window limits are plotted.
AXES: The coordinate axes are plotted
CUTSURFACE: Information about the cutting surface (for example, the variable used in
a cutting surface of type isosurface) is plotted.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the mesh annotation depiction. If there is a previously defined mesh annotation
depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that mesh annotation
depiction. If there is no previously defined mesh annotation depiction with this name, a new
mesh annotation depiction is created by this command.
COLOR
The color of the selected annotation.
[INVERSE]
CHARSIZE
[24]
UNITCHARSIZE
[POINTS]
The size of the characters of the selected annotation, and its unit. {CM / INCHES /
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-45
MESHANNOTATION
BOXSIZE
[2.0]
UNITBOXSIZE
[CM]
The size of the box of the selected annotation, and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT
/ PIXELS / POINTS}
WIDTH
[0.1]
UNITWIDTH
[CM]
The width of the selected annotation, and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /
PIXELS / POINTS}
PLACEMENT
[AUTOMATIC]
XSTART
[0.0]
UNITXSTART
[PERCENT]
YSTART
[0.0]
UNITYSTART
[PERCENT]
If PLACEMENT is AUTOMATIC, then the placement of the annotation text is done
automatically by the program. If PLACEMENT is CUSTOM, then the annotation text
placement is specified by XSTART, UNITXSTART, YSTART, UNITYSTART. XSTART
and YSTART specify the subframe X and Y coordinates of the selected annotation and their
units are given by UNITXSTART and UNITYSTART respectively.
SCALE
A scale factor applied to the entire annotation.
[1.0]
labeltypei
The name of an annotation label. {MAGNIFICATION / RESPONSE / SCALES /
MESHWINDOW / AXES / CUTSURFACE}
[ON]
statusi
If statusi is set to ON, the annotation is used; if statusi is set to OFF, the annotation is not used.
{ON / OFF}
colori charsizei unitcharsizei boxsizei unitboxsizei
widthi unitwidthi placementi
xstarti unitxstarti ystarti unitystarti scalei
The attributes used when drawing the selected annotation. Some attributes are ignored for
some of the annotations. Their descriptions are the same as for the corresponding command
line parameters. If an attribute is not specified on the data input line, its value is taken from
the corresponding command line parameter.
Note: The color of the plotting scales is taken from the default original and deformed colors
defined in ELDEPICTION (in this section).
5-46
BOUNDEPICTION
BOUNDEPICTION NAME BCODE SYMBOL SYMBOLCOLOR SYMBOLSIZE

UNITSYMBOLSIZE BTABLE PLACEMENT XSTART
UNITXSTART YSTART UNITYSTART SCALE
BOUNDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing boundary conditions with the
MESHPLOT command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the boundary depiction. If there is a previously defined boundary depiction with
this name, data entered in this command is appended to that boundary depiction. If there is
no previously defined boundary depiction with this name, a new boundary depiction is
created by this command.
BCODE
[NO]
All nodes having boundary conditions matched by the BCODE parameter are marked by a
symbol derived from SYMBOL.
For ADINA meshes, BCODE can be one of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Six digit integer

The word OVALIZATION
The word SLAVES
The word DIR followed by 1 to 6 digits
The word ALL
The word NO
For ADINA-T or ADINA-F meshes, BCODE can be either ALL or NO. See the notes at the
end of this command for more information.
SYMBOL
[B]
The symbol string, up to 30 characters long, used to mark each node with the specified
boundary condition. Use the extended character convention to enter a special symbol. See
the TEXT command in Section 5.12 for the extended character convention.
When BCODE = ALL, SYMBOL must be a character from A to Z.
SYMBOLCOLOR
[GREEN]
SYMBOLSIZE
[0.25]
UNITSYMBOLSIZE
[CM]
The size of the symbol and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS /
POINTS}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-47
BOUNDEPICTION
BTABLE
[YES]
Indicates whether to plot a table of symbols and the corresponding degrees of freedom. This
table is created when BCODE = ALL. {YES / NO}
PLACEMENT
[AUTOMATIC]
XSTART
[0.0]
UNITXSTART
[CM]
YSTART
[0.0]
UNITYSTART
[CM]
These parameters are used only when BCODE = ALL. They control the location of the
boundary condition code table.
If PLACEMENT = AUTOMATIC, then the program decides where to put the boundary
condition code table automatically. If PLACEMENT = CUSTOM, then you use parameters
XSTART, UNITXSTART, YSTART, UNITYSTART to position the upper left-hand corner
of the boundary condition code table.
SCALE
[1.0]
This parameter is used only when BCODE = ALL. The boundary condition code table is
scaled by SCALE.
Note:
The boundary conditions plotted onto the geometry correspond to those defined for the
current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command in Section 3.4).
Description of parameter BCODE:
The following list gives the available options:
1. Six digit integer. Each digit can be:
0
1
2
9
free degree of freedom

fixed (deleted) degree of freedom
slave degree of freedom
either free, fixed or slave degree of freedom
The position of each digit corresponds to a degree of freedom as follows:

1st digit:
2nd digit:
3rd digit:
4th digit:
5th digit:
5-48
X-translation (A-translation if skew-system)

Y-translation (B-translation if skew-system)
Z-translation (C-translation if skew-system)
X-rotation (A-rotation if skew-system)
Y-rotation (B-rotation if skew-system)
BOUNDEPICTION
6th digit: Z-rotation (C-rotation if skew-system)

(Note that the directions of the rotational degrees of freedom for a shell element
midsurface node depend on the number of degrees of freedom assigned to the node.)
All nodes with degrees of freedom that match the degrees of freedom specified in the sixdigit integer are marked with the boundary code character BCHARACTER.
Example: 100999 specifies that nodes with fixed X-translations (or A-translations) and
free Y- and Z-translations (or B- and C-translations) shall be marked with the
boundary code character.
2. The word OVALIZATION:
Nodes with fixed ovalization degrees of freedom are marked with the boundary code
symbol.
3. The word SLAVES:
Nodes with one or more slave degrees of freedom are marked with the boundary code
symbol.
4. The word DIR followed by 1 - 6 digits:
Nodes with fixed degrees of freedom in one or more of the specified directions are
marked with the boundary code symbol. The directions are specified using digits as
follows:
1
2
3
4
5
6
X-translation (A-translation if skew system)

Y-translation (B-translation if skew system)
Z-translation (C-translation if skew system)
X-rotation (A-rotation if skew system)
Y-rotation (B-rotation if skew system)
Z-rotation (C-rotation if skew system)
(Note that the directions of the rotational degrees of freedom for a shell element
midsurface node depend on the number of degrees of freedom assigned to that node.)
Examples:
DIR5 specifies that nodes with fixed Y-rotations (or B-rotations) shall be marked with
the boundary code symbol.
DIR316 specifies that nodes with fixed Z-translations (or C-translations), fixed X-
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-49
BOUNDEPICTION
translations (or A-translations) or fixed Z-rotations (or C-rotations) shall be marked

with the boundary code symbol.
5. The word ALL:
Nodes with any fixed, slave, ovalization or fluid boundary conditions are marked with a
boundary code character. Each different boundary condition is marked with a different
boundary code character. A table can be plotted showing the boundary condition
associated with each letter.
6. The word NO:
Boundary codes are not checked or marked.
Note that only the options ALL and NO are applicable for the finite element programs
ADINA-T and ADINA-F.
5-50
PLOTAREA
PLOTAREA NAME SIZE XOFFSET UNITXOFFSET YOFFSET UNITYOFFSET

WIDTH UNITWIDTH HEIGHT UNITHEIGHT ROTATION
PLOTAREA defines a plotarea depiction. The plotarea can be used in the MESHPLOT
command to specify the exact area within the subframe into which a meshplot is drawn.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the plotarea depiction. If there is a previously defined plotarea depiction with
this name, data entered in this command modifies that plotarea depiction. If there is no
previously defined plotarea depiction with this name, a new plotarea depiction is created by
this command.
SIZE
Specifies how the plotarea size is specified:
[AUTOMATIC]
AUTOMATIC Size chosen automatically by the command that uses the plotarea.
DIRECT
Size defined using the remaining parameters.
MARGIN
Size chosen automatically, including a margin at the right-hand side.
XOFFSET
[0.0]
UNITXOFFSET
[PERCENT]
YOFFSET
[0.0]
UNITYOFFSET
[PERCENT]
WIDTH
[100.0]
UNITWIDTH
[PERCENT]
HEIGHT
[100.0]
UNITHEIGHT
[PERCENT]
These parameters are used only if size = DIRECT. See the figure for their definitions.
Unit parameters can take the values CM, INCHES, PERCENT, PIXELS, POINTS.
Parameters with PERCENT units are interpreted as percentages of the subframe.
ROTATION
[0.0]
The plot can be rotated with respect to the subframe. The rotation angle is entered in degrees.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-51
5-52
PLOTAREA
VIEW
VIEW
NAME TYPE XVIEW YVIEW ZVIEW ROTATION XREFERENCE

YREFERENCE ZREFERENCE SXV SYV SZV DZVV
VIEW defines a view depiction. The view can be used in the MESHPLOT command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the view depiction. If there is a previously defined view depiction with this
name, data entered in this command modifies that view depiction. If there is no previously
defined view depiction with this name, a new view depiction is created by this command.
TYPE
[AUTOMATIC]
The type of view depiction.
AUTOMATIC the view is automatically chosen by the command that uses the view
depiction. Currently the view is a parallel projection.
PARALLEL a parallel projection is defined using the remaining parameters of this
command.
XVIEW
[1.0]
YVIEW
[1.0]
ZVIEW
[1.0]
These parameters specify the direction from the view reference point to the eye point (see
figure).
ROTATION
[0.0]
This parameter specifies the clockwise rotation in degrees of the view projection plane
coordinate system about the view vector, as observed looking at the view reference point.
Note that when the view projection plane coordinate system rotates clockwise, the model
rotates counterclockwise relative to the view projection plane coordinate system and hence
with respect to the subframe.
XREFERENCE
YREFERENCE
ZREFERENCE
These parameters specify the view reference point.
[0.0]
[0.0]
[0.0]
SXV
[1.0]
SYV
[1.0]
SZV
[1.0]
These stretch factors are applied to the coordinates of points in the model after viewing.
They are used for special effects, such as stretching a thin model so that results can more
easily be plotted onto it.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-53
VIEW
DZVV
[0.0]
This parameter is used when viewing zoom-models. The zoom-model is shifted by an
amount DZVV (DZVV > 0) in the ZV direction. In this way, the zoom-model always
appears in front of the main structure. If DZVV=0.0, the AUI automatically computes the
shift based on the size of the model.
5-54
VIEW
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-55
MESHWINDOW
MESHWINDOW
NAME SIZE XVMIN YVMIN ZVMIN XVMAX YVMAX

ZVMAX CLIP
MESHWINDOW defines a mesh viewing window depiction.

After the mesh coordinates are projected by the specified view, they are (optionally) clipped
by the mesh viewing window; therefore only that part of the model that can be seen through
the mesh viewing window is displayed. As a consequence, decreasing the size of the mesh
viewing window has the effect of zooming into a region of the model.
The mesh viewing window is defined as a rectangular box in the view projection plane.
The mesh viewing window can either be chosen automatically by the program or can be
directly specified by this command. It is also possible to use the mouse to interactively
change the viewing window of a displayed mesh plot (see LOCATOR MESHWINDOW in
Section 4.2).
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the mesh viewing window depiction. If there is a previously defined mesh
viewing window depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that mesh
viewing window depiction. If there is no previously defined mesh viewing window depiction
with this name, a new mesh viewing window depiction is created by this command.
SIZE
[AUTOMATIC]
This parameter specifies the size of the mesh viewing window.
AUTOMATIC the mesh viewing window is chosen to be the smallest viewing window that
contains all of the mesh coordinates.
DIRECT
the mesh viewing window is directly chosen using the remaining

parameters of this command.
XVMIN
[-1.0]
YVMIN
[-1.0]
ZVMIN
[-1.0]
XVMAX
[1.0]
YVMAX
[1.0]
ZVMAX
[1.0]
These parameters are used only when SIZE = DIRECT. They give the bounding box
coordinates of the mesh viewing window, see figure.
CLIP
The AUI can clip the mesh coordinates to the viewing window {YES / NO}.
5-56
[YES]
MESHWINDOW
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-57
CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE
CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE NAME OPTION X Y Z PROGRAM SUBSTRUCTURE

REUSE NODE1 NODE2 NODE3 NX NY NZ
COORDINATE SPACING PLOTPLANE
PLANECOLOR LINEWIDTH UNITLWIDTH
UNDERMESH OVERMESH OPAQUEOPTION
Defines a cutsurface depiction of type CUTPLANE. When used in a meshplot, this
cutsurface depiction causes the meshplot to be cut by cutting planes according to the
attributes of this command. The attributes include:
Origin and direction of cutting planes

Number of cutting planes (all parallel to each other)
Plotting attributes of cutting planes
Plotting of mesh above and below cutting planes
When a meshplot is cut by cutting planes, you can plot bands and element vectors onto the
cut surfaces.
You can have several parallel cutting planes with the same normal and different origin. In
this case you specify the cutting plane as usual and also the spacing between successive
cutting planes. The cutting plane that you specify is termed the base cutting plane.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the cutsurface depiction. If there is a previously defined cutsurface depiction
with this name, data entered in this command modifies that cutsurface depiction. If there is
no previously defined cutsurface depiction, a new cutsurface depiction is created by this
command.
OPTION
This controls the origin and direction of the base cutting plane as follows:
[XPLANE]
POINTNORMAL You specify the origin and normal direction for the base cutting plane
using parameters X, Y, Z, NX, NY, NZ.
THREENODE
You specify the base cutting plane using three nodes. The node
numbers are specified using parameters PROGRAM,
SUBSTRUCTURE, REUSE, NODE1, NODE2, NODE3.
NODENORMAL
You specify the base cutting plane using a node and a normal direction.
The node number is specified using parameters PROGRAM,
SUBSTRUCTURE, REUSE, N1 and the normal direction is specified
using parameters NX, NY, NZ.
5-58
CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE
XPLANE
YPLANE
ZPLANE
The base cutting plane has normal in the specified direction. The origin
of the base cutting plane is specified by parameter COORDINATE
along the specified direction.
X
Y
Z
The origin of the base cutting plane, used when OPTION = POINTNORMAL.
[0.0]
[0.0]
[0.0]
PROGRAM
[current FE program]
SUBSTRUCTURE
[0]
REUSE
[1]
The finite element program, substructure number, and reuse number for the node(s) used to
specify the base cutting plane, used only if OPTION = THREENODE or NODENORMAL and
only when there is more than one node with the same node number in the model (this can
occur if the model contains substructures, reuses or cyclic parts, or if the results from more
than one finite element program are loaded).
NODE1
[1]
NODE2
[1]
NODE3
[1]
The node numbers used to specify the base cutting plane when OPTION = THREENODE or
NODENORMAL. When OPTION = THREENODE, the nodes cannot be collinear. When
OPTION = NODENORMAL, only node NODE1 is used, and its position specifies the origin of
the base cutting plane.
NX
[1.0]
NY
[0.0]
NZ
[0.0]
The outwards normal of the base cutting plane, used when OPTION = POINTNORMAL or
NODENORMAL.
COORDINATE
[0.0]
The position of the base cutting plane along the specified coordinate direction, used when
OPTION = XPLANE, YPLANE or ZPLANE.
SPACING
[0.0]
The distance between cutting planes as measured in the direction of the cutting plane normal.
If SPACING = 0.0, only one cutting plane is used, otherwise as many parallel cutting planes
with distance SPACING as are necessary to cut the entire meshplot are used.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-59
CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE
PLOTPLANE
If PLOTPLANE = YES, cutting planes are plotted, otherwise they are not plotted.
PLANECOLOR
The color of plotted cutting planes, used if PLOTPLANE = YES.
[YES]
[INVERSE]
LINEWIDTH
[0.0]
UNITLWIDTH
[CM]
The plotted width of lines used to draw cutting planes, used if PLOTPLANE = YES.
UNITLWIDTH can be CM, INCHES, PERCENT, POINTS or PIXELS.
UNDERMESH
[TRANSPARENT]
This parameter specifies how the part of the meshplot that lies underneath all cutting planes is
drawn (underneath means opposite the direction of the cutting plane normal).
OPAQUE
The part of the meshplot that lies underneath all cutting planes is
drawn as usual.
TRANSPARENT
Only the outline of the part of the meshplot that lies underneath all
cutting planes is drawn.
NONE
The part of the meshplot that lies underneath all cutting planes is not
drawn.
OVERMESH
[TRANSPARENT]
This parameter specifies how the part of the meshplot that lies over at least one cutting plane
is drawn (over means in the direction of the cutting plane normal).
OPAQUE
The part of the meshplot that lies over at least one cutting plane is
drawn as usual.
TRANSPARENT
Only the outline of the part of the meshplot that lies over at least one
cutting plane is drawn.
NONE
The part of the meshplot that lies over at least one cutting plane is
not drawn.
OPAQUEOPTION
[ALL]
This parameter specifies if bands and vectors are plotted on the opaque part of the meshplot:
NONE
Bands and vectors are not plotted on the opaque part of the
meshplot.
ALL
Bands and vectors are plotted on the opaque part of the meshplot.
5-60
CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE
Bands and vectors are always plotted on the cutting plane intersection.
Notes:
* The following graphical items are processed by cutting planes:
Graphical item
Processed by
cutting plane
Truss and other 1D elements
Yes
2D elements, planar and nonplanar
Yes
3D elements
Yes
Beam, iso-beam, pipe elements
Yes
Plate elements
Yes
ADINA shell elements, defined by

midsurface, plotted in midsurface depiction
Yes

midsurface, plotted in topbottom depiction
Yes1

topbottom nodes
Yes2
ADINA-T shell elements
Yes2
Spring elements
Yes
General elements
Yes
Potential-based fluid interface elements
Yes
2D contact segments
Yes
3D contact segments
Yes
Drawbeads
Yes
2D boundary surfaces
Yes
Yes
Bcells
Yes
Crack front lines
Yes
2D fluid-structure boundaries
Yes
Yes
Constraint equations/rigid links
Yes
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-61
CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE
ADINA-T convection and radiation

elements
Yes
2D radiosity surfaces
Yes
Yes
Load vectors
Yes
Element line vectors
Yes
Element vectors
Yes
Bands
Yes
Reaction vectors
Yes
Geometry points, lines, surfaces, etc.
No
1) Shell elements defined by midsurface nodes, and plotted in topbottom depiction, are
processed if the shell elements have 3 or 4 nodes. Shell elements with more than 4 nodes are
processed approximately, as in note 2 below.
2) Non-midsurface shell elements are processed approximately. An element is plotted only
if all of the nodes of the element are visible. Partial elements are not plotted.
* Also note, if a single element is cut by more than one cutting surface, the element is
incompletely processed and a warning message is written.
* A cutting plane should not exactly coincide with element boundaries.
5-62
CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE
NAME VARIABLE THRESHOLD SMOOTHING

RESULTCONTROL UNDERMESH OVERMESH
OPAQUEOPTION
Defines a cutsurface depiction of type ISOSURFACE. When used in a meshplot, this

cutsurface depiction causes the meshplot to be cut by a surface determined by the value of a
variable (an isosurface).
When a meshplot is cut by an isosurface, you can plot bands and element vectors onto the cut
surfaces.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
command.
VARIABLE
The name of the variable used to create the isosurface. The variable can be a predefined
variable, an alias or a resultant. See Section 6.9 for information about variables.
THRESHOLD
The value of the variable used to determine the isosurface.
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the smoothing technique that specifies how the variable is smoothed. A
smoothing technique is specified by the SMOOTHING command in Section 6.6.
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result control depiction. This depiction, along with the smoothing technique,
controls how the variable is evaluated. A result control depiction is specified by the
UNDERMESH
[TRANSPARENT]
This parameter specifies how the part of the meshplot in which the variable is less than the
threshold value is drawn.
OPAQUE
The part of the meshplot in which the variable is less than the
threshold value is drawn as usual.
TRANSPARENT
Only the outline of the part of the meshplot in which the variable is
less than the threshold value is drawn.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-63
NONE
The part of the meshplot in which the variable is less than the
threshold value is not drawn.
OVERMESH
[TRANSPARENT]
This parameter specifies how the part of the meshplot in which the variable is greater than the
threshold value is drawn.
OPAQUE
The part of the meshplot in which the variable is greater than the
threshold value is drawn as usual.
TRANSPARENT
Only the outline of the part of the meshplot in which the

variable is greater than the threshold value is drawn.
NONE
The part of the meshplot in which the variable is greater than the
threshold value is not drawn.
OPAQUEOPTION
[ALL]
This parameter specifies if bands and vectors are plotted on the opaque part of the meshplot:
NONE
Bands and vectors are not plotted on the opaque part of the
meshplot.
ALL
Bands and vectors are plotted on the opaque part of the meshplot.
Bands and vectors are always plotted on the cutting plane intersection.
The following graphical items are processed by cutting isosurfaces:
Graphical item
Processed by
cutting isosurface
Truss and other 1D elements
No
2D elements, planar and nonplanar
Yes
3D elements
Yes
Beam, iso-beam, pipe elements
No
Plate elements
Yes

midsurface, plotted in midsurface depiction
Yes

midsurface, plotted in topbottom depiction
Yes1
5-64

topbottom nodes
No
ADINA-T shell elements
No
Spring elements
No
General elements
No
Potential-based fluid interface elements
No
2D contact segments
No
3D contact segments
No
Drawbeads
No
No
No
Bcells
No
Crack front lines
No
No
No
Constraint equations/rigid links
No
ADINA-T convection and radiation

elements
No
No
No
Load vectors
No
Element line vectors
No
Element vectors
No2
Bands
No
Reaction vectors
No
Geometry points, lines, surfaces, etc.
No
1) Shell elements defined by midsurface nodes, and plotted in topbottom depiction, are
processed if the shell elements have 3 or 4 nodes. Shell elements with more than 4 nodes are
not processed.
2) Element vectors are plotted on element faces. Element vectors that are interior in the
model are not plotted (these vectors are plotted when the meshplot rendering is transparent).
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-65
CUTSURFACE NONE
CUTSURFACE NONE
NAME
Defines a cutsurface depiction of type NONE. When used in a meshplot, this cutsurface
depiction turns off all cutting surface calculations.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
command.
5-66
GEDRAWING
GEDRAWING SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP MATRIXSET

lni lnj
GEDRAWING is used to define the local nodes between which lines are drawn when plotting
general mass/stiffness/damping elements in an ADINA model. This information is referred to
as "local node plotting connectivity data". All general elements that use the same matrix set
are drawn using the same local node plotting connectivity data.
SUBSTRUCTURE
GROUP
The substructure number and element group number of the general elements.
[0]
[1]
MATRIXSET
The matrix set number of the general elements.
[1]
lni lnj
Local node numbers within the general element to be connected by a straight line during
plotting.
Example:
The above figures show a structure with two general elements having the same matrix set.
The following GEDRAWING command can be used to define the local node plotting
connectivity data for the general element:
GEDRAWING MATRIXSET=2
1 2
2 3
3 4
4 1
DATAEND
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-67
Load plotting Introduction

You draw loads onto an existing mesh plot using the LOADPLOT command. The resulting
plot is called a load plot. You can also modify an existing load plot using this command.
the load plot can display the loads from all of the loaded finite element program results.
A load plot is considered to be attached to a mesh plot, which must have been defined before
you create the load plot. See Section 5.2 for information regarding mesh plots.
Every load plot has a name, which you specify when you create the load plot. You refer to
the load plot by name when modifying or deleting the load plot.
The appearance of the load plot is governed by the load plot depictions. The load plot
depictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the load plot appearance.
Each depiction has a name, which is used by the LOADPLOT command to refer to the
depiction.
The depictions used by LOADPLOT are:
LOADSEARCH: specifies the nodes and elements onto which loads are plotted.
Currently this cannot be changed.
LOADRENDERING: specifies which loads to plot and how they are drawn. See the
LOADRENDERING command in this section.
LOADANNOTATION: specifies which optional text should be drawn along with the
load plot. Currently this cannot be changed.
You can group depiction names into a style using the LOADSTYLE command. Then you
can specify the load style name in the LOADPLOT command. It is not necessary to use
LOADSTYLE in order to use LOADPLOT. The load style simply provides a way to group
load plot depictions together so that you can switch from one set of depictions to another set
by specifying a load style name.
When you create a load plot, the depictions that you specify are copied and given the same
name as the load plot.
5-68
Sec. 5.3 Load plotting
You can modify an existing load plot in several ways:

1) Alter the depictions with the load plot name using the depiction commands, then
regenerate the load plot using the REGENERATE command. For example:
MESHPLOT M1
LOADPLOT L1
Creates load plot L1
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP L1 TIME=2.0
Redefines the solution time for L1 to be 2.0.
REGENERATE
Regenerates the load plot.
2) Use the LOADPLOT command to substitute depictions. For example;
MESHPLOT M1
LOADPLOT L1
Creates load plot L1.
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP MAX_RESP TIME=3.0
Defines a response.
LOADPLOT L1 RESPONSE=MAX_RESP
Substitutes response MAX_RESP for the response depiction used during the
creation of load plot L1, then regenerates the load plot.
You can delete a load plot using the DELETE LOADPLOT command, by picking the mesh
plot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command, or by clearing the
When you delete a load plot, all of the depictions with the name of the load plot are
automatically deleted as well.
Auxiliary commands
The LOADPLOT command has the following auxiliary commands:
LIST LOADPLOT
Lists all load plots.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-69
LIST LOADPLOT NAME

Lists the depictions for the specified load plot.
DELETE LOADPLOT NAME
Deletes the specified load plot.
The LOADSTYLE command has the following auxiliary commands:
LIST LOADSTYLE
Lists all load styles.
LIST LOADSTYLE NAME
Lists the depictions for the specified load style.
DELETE LOADSTYLE NAME
Deletes the specified load style.
COPY LOADSTYLE NAME1 NAME2
Copies the load style specified by NAME1 to NAME2.
Each of the depiction commands has auxiliary commands, see the discussion in Section 5.2
regarding the mesh plot depiction auxiliary commands.
5-70
LOADPLOT
LOADPLOT
NAME LOADSTYLE MESHNAME LOADSEARCH RESPONSE

LOADRENDERING LOADANNOTATION
LOADPLOT allows you to draw loads as vectors onto a mesh plot. The loads are drawn
according to the attributes within the depictions that you specify via this command.
NAME
[LOADPLOTnnnnn]
The name of the load plot. If you do not enter a name, the program will automatically
generate a name of the form LOADPLOTnnnnn where nnnnn is a number between 00001
and 99999.
LOADSTYLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the load style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters of this
command. A load style is defined by the LOADSTYLE command (in this section).
MESHNAME
[PREVIOUS]
The name of the mesh plot upon which the load vectors are drawn. You can also enter the
special name PREVIOUS to plot onto the last created mesh plot. See Section 5.2 for
information about mesh plots.
LOADSEARCH
The name of the load search depiction. You can specify onto which nodes, elements and
geometry entities to plot loads with this depiction. Currently there is no corresponding
depiction command.
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape or other response
description. A response is defined by the response commands (see Section 6.3). Note, this
parameter is not used when adaptive meshes are used, instead the response is taken from the
underlying response of the meshplot.
LOADRENDERING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the load rendering depiction. You specify which types of loads to plot and their
style attributes with this depiction. A load rendering depiction is defined by the
LOADRENDERING command (in this section).
LOADANNOTATION
The name of the load annotation depiction. You specify the legends used to plot load scale
factors with this depiction. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-71
LOADSTYLE
LOADSTYLE
NAME MESHPLOTNAME LOADSEARCH RESPONSE

LOADRENDERING LOADANNOTATION
LOADSTYLE groups depictions used when drawing loads using LOADPLOT.

NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the load style. If there is a previously defined load style with this name, data
entered in this command modifies that load style. If there is no previously defined load style
with this name, a new load style is created by this command.
MESHPLOTNAME
This parameter is currently unused.
[PREVIOUS]
LOADSEARCH
The name of the load search depiction. You can specify onto which nodes, elements and
geometry entities to plot loads with this depiction.
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the response. You specify the load step, mode shape or other response
description with this depiction. The load vectors are plotted according to the specified
response. See the RESPONSE command.
LOADRENDERING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the load rendering depiction. You specify which types of loads to plot and their
style attributes with this depiction. A load rendering depiction is defined by the
LOADRENDERING command (in this section).
LOADANNOTATION
The name of the load annotation depiction. You specify the legends used to plot load scale
factors with this depiction.
5-72
LOADRENDERING
LOADRENDERING
NAME COLOR LENGTHOPTION MAXLENGTH

UNITMAXLENGTH SCALEOPTION SCALEFACTOR
COMBINE THETA SITELOCATION SITEMARKER
HEADMARKER TAILMARKER TAILFLAG TAILSIZE
UNITTAIL MINLENGTH UNITMINLENGTH
loadtypei statusi colori lengthoptioni maxlengthi unitmaxlengthi scaleoptioni

scalefactori combinei thetai sitelocationi sitemarkeri headmarkeri tailmarkeri tailflagi
tailsizei unittaili minlengthi unitminlengthi
LOADRENDERING defines attributes used when drawing a load plot with the LOADPLOT
command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the load rendering depiction. If there is a previously defined load rendering
depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that load rendering
depiction. If there is no previously defined load rendering depiction with this name, a new
load rendering depiction is created by this command.
COLOR
LENGTHOPTION
MAXLENGTH
UNITMAXLENGTH
SCALEOPTION
SCALEFACTOR
COMBINE
THETA
SITELOCATION
SITEMARKER
HEADMARKER
TAILMARKER
TAILFLAG
TAILSIZE
UNITTAIL
MINLENGTH
UNITMINLENGTH
The default values of the data input lines.
loadtypei
The type of load. This can be
ACCELERATION
ANGULAR_ACCELERATION
ANGULAR_VELOCITY
CONVECTION (the convection environmental temperature)
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-73
LOADRENDERING
CURRENT-DENSITY
DISPLACEMENT
ELECTRIC-POTENTIAL
FORCE (concentrated translational forces)
HEAD (used in ADINA-T seepage flow analysis)
HEATFLUX
LINE
MASSFLUX_I (substitute the species number for I, for example MASSFLUX_1)
MASS-RATIO_I (substitute the species number for I)
MOMENT (concentrated rotational moments)
NODAL-CURRENT
NODAL-PHIFLUX (used in potential-based fluid flow analysis)
NODAL-PRESSURE
NODAL-HEATFLOW
NODAL-SEEPAGEFLOW
NORMAL-TRACTION
PHIFLUX (used in potential-based fluid flow analysis)
PORE-PRESSURE
POREFLOW
PRESSURE
RADIATION (the radiation environmental temperature)
ROTATION
SEEPAGEFLUX
TEMPERATURE
TGRADIENT (temperature gradient)
TURBULENCE_K
TURBULENCE_EPSILON
TURBULENCE_W
VELOCITY
VOF_I (substitute the VOF species number for I)
The remaining data for this data input line gives the plotting attributes for this type of load.
Defaults depend on this type of load.
statusi
If statusi = OFF, this load type is not plotted; if statusi = ON, this load type is plotted.
colori
The color used to plot this load type.
lengthoptioni
If lengthoptioni = SCALED, the load vector lengths are scaled according to their magnitude,
using parameters scaleoptioni and scalefactori. If lengthoptioni = FIXED, all load vectors are
plotted with the same length.
5-74
LOADRENDERING
maxlengthi
unitmaxlengthi
The length of the longest plotted load vector and its unit.
/ PIXELS / POINTS}
{CM / INCHES / PERCENT
scaleoptioni
scalefactori
These parameters are used only when lengthoptioni = SCALED. When scaleoptioni =
AUTOMATIC, the program scales the load vectors so that the longest load vector has length
maxlengthi. In this case, scalefactori is not used. When scaleoptioni = CUSTOM, you enter the
scaling factor scalefactori used to determine the vector length from the vector magnitude. See
the notes at the end of this command description.
combinei
If there are several loads with this type acting at the same location, they can be vectorially
combined. {YES / NO} For example, a concentrated load acting in the y direction can be
vectorially summed with a concentrated load acting in the z direction.
thetai
Some load types are scalar in nature, for example, TEMPERATURE. The program plots scalar
loads as vectors in a direction given by thetai.
sitelocationi
Each load acts onto a site, for example, node points or geometry points. You can choose
whether the head of the load vector is placed at the site, or whether the tail of the load vector
is placed at the site. {HEAD / TAIL}
sitemarkeri
The site can be marked with a marker, as follows: 0 = no marker; 1 = outline circle ; 2 = filled
circle; 3 = outline square.
headmarkeri
tailmarkeri
The load vector head and tail can be marked with markers, as follows: 0 = no marker; 1 =
single arrowhead; 2 = double arrowhead; 3 = single line; 4 = double line; 5 = inverted V; 6 =
square; 7 = E with open side pointing towards other end of arrow; 8 = E with open side
pointing towards this end of arrow; 9 = X; 10 = crossed arrowhead.
tailflagi
The load vector tail can be marked with a tail flag, as follows: 0 = no tail flag; 1000*I + J =
character J in character set I (see the TEXT command in Section 5.12); 10000 + I = M(I) (for
example 10234 = M234); 20000 + I = V(I) (for example 20234=V234). The tail flag is
mainly used for mass flux and mass ratio load vectors, in which the species number is written
into the tail flag.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-75
LOADRENDERING
tailsizei
unittaili
The size of the tail flag, if any, and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS /
POINTS}
minlengthi
unitminlengthi
Load vectors shorter than minlengthi are not plotted.
Notes
Suppressing loads: A typical use of the LOADRENDERING command is to suppress
plotting of temperatures and temperature gradients.. To suppress plotting of temperatures and
temperature gradients for all successive loadplots, use the following command:
LOADRENDERING
ENTRIES LOADTYPE STATUS
TEMPERATURE OFF
TGRADIENT OFF
DATAEND
scalefactor: The plotted load vector length (in cm) = SCALEFACTOR (result value)|
For example, suppose that a load vector has magnitude 1234.0, that scaleoptioni = CUSTOM
and that scalefactori = 1E-4. Then the plotted load vector length is 1E-4 1234 = 0.12 cm.
5-76
Band plotting Introduction
Sec. 5.4 Band plotting

You draw bands, either filled contours or line contours, onto an existing mesh plot using the
BANDPLOT command. The bands represent the value of a variable in truss, 2-D, 3-D, beam,
iso-beam, plate, shell and pipe elements. You can optionally mark the extreme values with
symbols. The resulting plot is called a band plot. You can also modify an existing band plot
using this command.
the band plot can display the results from all of the loaded finite element program results.
A band plot is considered to be attached to a mesh plot, which must have been defined before
you create the band plot. See Section 5.2 for information regarding mesh plots.
Every band plot has a name, which you specify when you create the band plot. You refer to
the band plot by name when modifying or deleting it.
The appearance of the band plot is governed by the band plot depictions. The band plot
depictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the band plot appearance.
Each depiction has a name, which is used in the BANDPLOT command to refer to the
depiction.
The depictions used by the BANDPLOT command are:
ZONE: specifies the nodes and elements onto which bands are plotted. See the zone
commands in Section 6.2.
SMOOTHING: specifies how the plotted variable is smoothed. See the SMOOTHING
RESULTCONTROL: specifies how the plotted variable is calculated. See the
BANDTABLE: specifies how colors are associated with values of the variable. There are
three BANDTABLE commands, BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC, BANDTABLE
CUSTOM and BANDTABLE REPEATING; see the descriptions in this section.
BANDRENDERING: specifies how bands are drawn. See the BANDRENDERING
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-77
BANDANNOTATION: specifies which optional text is drawn along with the band plot.
See the BANDANNOTATION command in this section.
You can group depiction names into a style using the BANDSTYLE command. Then you
can specify the band style name in the BANDPLOT command. It is not necessary to use
BANDSTYLE in order to use BANDPLOT. The band style simply provides a way to group
band plot depictions together so that you can switch from one set of depictions to another set
by specifying a band style name.
When you create a band plot, the depictions that you specify are copied and given the same
name as the band plot.
You can modify an existing band plot in several ways:
1) Alter the depictions with the band plot name using the depiction commands, then
regenerate the band plot using the REGENERATE command. For example:
MESHPLOT M1
BANDPLOT B1
Creates band plot B1
BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC B1 MINVALUE=5.0
Sets the minimum value in the band table.
REGENERATE
Regenerates the band plot.
2) Use the BANDPLOT command to substitute depictions. For example;
MESHPLOT M1
BANDPLOT B1
Creates band plot B1.
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP MAX_RESP TIME=3.0
Defines a response.
BANDPLOT B1 RESPONSE=MAX_RESP
Substitutes response MAX_RESP for the response depiction used during the
creation of band plot B1, then regenerates the band plot.
5-78
You can delete a band plot using the DELETE BANDPLOT command, by picking the mesh
plot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command, or by clearing the
When you delete a band plot, all of the depictions with the name of the band plot are
automatically deleted as well.
Auxiliary commands
The BANDPLOT command has the following auxiliary commands:
LIST BANDPLOT
Lists all band plots.
LIST BANDPLOT NAME
Lists the depictions for the specified band plot.
DELETE BANDPLOT NAME
Deletes the specified band plot.
The BANDSTYLE command has the following auxiliary commands:
LIST BANDSTYLE
Lists all band styles.
LIST BANDSTYLE NAME
Lists the depictions for the specified band style.
DELETE BANDSTYLE NAME
Deletes the specified band style.
COPY BANDSTYLE NAME1 NAME2
Copies the band style specified by NAME1 to NAME2.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-79
BANDPLOT
BANDPLOT
NAME BANDSTYLE VARIABLE MESHNAME ZONENAME

RESPONSE SMOOTHING BANDTABLE BANDRENDERING
BANDANNOTATION RESULTCONTROL
BANDPLOT creates a band plot according to the attributes specified by the specified
depictions.
NAME
[BANDPLOTnnnnn]
The name of the band plot. If no name is given, one is automatically generated in the form
BANDPLOTnnnnn, when nnnnn is a number between 00001 and 99999.
BANDSTYLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the band style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters of this
command. A band style is defined by the BANDSTYLE command (in this section).
VARIABLE
The name of the variable to be plotted. The VARIABLE can be a predefined variable, a
constant, an alias or a resultant. See Section 6.9 for information about defining variables.
Certain variables can also be used to plot prescribed loads, see notes at the end of this
command description.
MESHNAME
[PREVIOUS]
The name of the meshplot onto which the bands are plotted. This meshplot is termed the
underlying meshplot for these bands. A meshplot is defined by the MESHPLOT command
(in Section 5.2). A meshplot can hold the results from more than one BANDPLOT
command. You can specify the special meshname PREVIOUS to plot on the last created
meshplot.
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone that specifies at which elements to compute the variable. A zone is
defined by a zone command (see Section 6.2). See notes at the end of this command.
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
the band plot. A response is defined by a response command (see Section 6.3). The response
name specified here can be different than the response name specified in the underlying mesh
plot. Note, this parameter is not used when adaptive meshes are used, instead the response is
taken from the underlying response of the meshplot.
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the smoothing technique that specifies how to smooth the variables. A
smoothing technique is defined by the SMOOTHING command (see Section 6.6).
5-80
BANDPLOT
BANDTABLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the band table used to associate colors with values of the variable. A band table
is defined by the BANDTABLE command (in this section).
BANDRENDERING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the band rendering depiction that specifies how the band plot is drawn. A
rendering depiction is specified by the BANDRENDERING command (in this section).
BANDANNOTATION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the band annotation depiction that specifies what additional text appears along
with the band plot. A band annotation depiction is specified by the BANDANNOTATION
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
controls how the results are calculated. A result control depiction is specified by the
RESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).
Notes for ZONENAME
When the underlying mesh plot plots elements, then BANDPLOT draws bands in those
elements that are selected by both the BANDPLOT ZONENAME and the MESHPLOT
ZONENAME.
When the underlying mesh plot plots element faces or element edges, then BANDPLOT
draws bands in the plotted element faces or element edges, and the BANDPLOT
Variables for plotting prescribed loads as bands
The following variables can be plotted as bands on 3D, plate and shell elements (in
midsurface depiction).
PRESCRIBED_PRESSURE, PRESCRIBED_NORMAL_TRACTION,
PRESCRIBED_HEATFLUX, PRESCRIBED_SEEPAGE_FLUX,
PRESCRIBED_MASSFLUX_*, PRESCRIBED_POREFLOW,
PRESCRIBED_CURRENT_DENSITY, PRESCRIBED_PHIFLUX,
PRESCRIBED_EM-FLUX
Notes:
i) These variables cannot be used by any other command, including ALIAS or RESULTANT.
ii) These variables plot on elements cut by cutting planes.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-81
BANDPLOT
iii) The sign of these variables is correct: positive pressures and normal tractions act into the
elements, positive heat flux adds heat to the elements, etc.
iv) The usual band table options are applicable.
v) The "close extremes" feature is not implemented for these variables.
vi) Multiple loads acting on the same element faces are correctly combined.
Band plots with smoothing
The band plot algorithm with smoothed results has the following issue. Consider three
elements, two 3-D elements and a truss element, with the truss element connecting the 3-D
elements. When plotting bands of unsmoothed stresses onto this assemblage of elements,
nothing is plotted onto the truss element, which is correct. But when plotting bands of
smoothed stresses onto this assemblage of elements, smoothed stresses from the 3-D elements
are plotted onto the truss element. This happens because the nodal stresses are known at each
node of the truss element, and the nodal stresses are simply interpolated into the truss
element.
5-82
BANDSTYLE
BANDSTYLE
NAME VARIABLE MESHNAME ZONENAME RESPONSE

SMOOTHING BANDTABLE BANDRENDERING
BANDANNOTATION RESULTCONTROL
BANDSTYLE groups depictions used when drawing bands using the BANDPLOT
command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the band style. If there is a previously defined band style with this name, data
entered in this command overwrites information for that band style. If there is no previously
defined band style with this name, a new band style is created by this command.
VARIABLE
The name of the variable to be plotted. The VARIABLE can be a predefined variable, a
constant, an alias or a resultant. See Section 6.9 for information about defining variables.
MESHNAME
[PREVIOUS]
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone that specifies at which elements to compute the variable. A zone is
defined by a zone command (see Section 6.2). Note that BANDPLOT evaluates the variable
only in those elements selected by ZONENAME that were also plotted in the underlying
mesh plot.
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
the band plot. A response is defined by a response command (see Section 6.3). The response
name specified here can be different than the response name specified in the underlying mesh
plot.
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the smoothing technique that specifies how to smooth certain variables and how
they are smoothed. A smoothing technique is defined by the SMOOTHING command (see
Section 6.6).
BANDTABLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the band table used to associate colors with values of the variable. A band table
is defined by the BANDTABLE command (in this section).
BANDRENDERING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the band rendering depiction that specifies how the band plot is drawn. A band
rendering depiction is specified by the BANDRENDERING command (in this section).
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-83
BANDSTYLE
BANDANNOTATION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the band annotation depiction that specifies what additional text appears along
with the band plot. A band annotation depiction is specified by the BANDANNOTATION
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
5-84
BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC
BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC
NAME MINIMUM MAXIMUM COLORMAX

MINCOLOR MAXCOLOR VALUEOPTION
VALUECOLOR VALUE FREEZERANGE
LOWER UPPER ROUNDING
BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC defines an automatic band table. This name can be used in the
BANDPLOT command to specify the band table.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name to be associated with the band table. If there is a previously defined band table of
type automatic with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined
band table. Otherwise, a new band table of type automatic is created by this command.
MINIMUM
[AUTOMATIC]
The minimum value to be contained in the band table. If you specify AUTOMATIC, the
program calculates the minimum value when the band table is used.
MAXIMUM
[AUTOMATIC]
The maximum value to be contained in the band table. If you specify AUTOMATIC, the
program calculates the maximum value when the band table is used.
COLORMAX
The number of colors or gray shades within the band table. 0 means that BANDPLOT
automatically chooses the number of colors, see notes below.
[0]
MINCOLOR
[BLUE_MAGENTA_50]
MAXCOLOR
[MAGENTA_RED_50]
The colors corresponding to the minimum and maximum values in the band table.
Intermediate colors are constructed by interpolation between these colors. If gray-scale bands
are desired, use MINCOLOR = BLACK, MAXCOLOR = WHITE, or vice-versa.
VALUEOPTION
[NONE]
VALUECOLOR
[GRAY]
VALUE
When VALUEOPTION=VALUECOLOR, then the band table is constructed with smoothly
varying colors between values MINIMUM and VALUE, and with smoothly varying colors
between values VALUE and MAXIMUM. The color assigned to VALUE is
VALUECOLOR. When VALUEOPTION=NONE, this feature is not used.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-85
BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC
FREEZERANGE
[YES]
If FREEZERANGE=YES, then the band table is frozen (kept unchanged) for all of the frames
of a movie. If FREEZERANGE=NO, then the band table is changed (with a new maximum
and minimum) for each frame of a movie. The FREEZERANGE parameter also controls if
the band table is frozen when one of the icons that changes the solution time is clicked.
LOWER
[AUTOMATIC]
UPPER
[AUTOMATIC]
LOWER controls the color for values less than the lowest value in the band table, UPPER
controls the color for values greater than the largest value in the band table. These
parameters can have the values {AUTOMATIC / NONE / (color name)}. LOWER
and UPPER are not used when plotting line contours.
ROUNDING
[YES]
If ROUNDING=NO, the band table values are not rounded; if ROUNDING=YES, the band
table values are rounded. The band table values can either be the automatically generated
values or the user-input values from parameters MINIMUM and MAXIMUM.
Note: When the band table DEFAULT is updated using the BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC
command, the band table DEFAULT_AUTOMATIC is set equal to band table
DEFAULT.
Notes for COLORMAX=0
When COLORMAX=0, then if the band plot variable is a real number, or if the band plot
variable is an integer with an unknown number of values, then BANDPLOT uses 16 colors.
If the band plot variable is an integer with a known number of values, then BANDPLOT
constructs a band table with the number of colors equal to the known number of values.
Integer variables with a known number of values include:
NODAL_CONTACT_STATUS
PLASTIC_FLAG
PLASTIC_FLAG_2
WRINKLE_FLAG
SMA_FLAG
MOHR-COULOMB_FLAG
CAM-CLAY_FLAG
DRUCKER-PRAGER_FLAG
FAILURE_FLAG...
GASKET_DEFORMATION_MODE
GASKET_STATUS
TRANSLATIONAL_SYSTEM
ROTATIONAL_SYSTEM
5-86
BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC
FLUID_DOF_TYPE
CONTACT_STATE_FLAG
NUMBER_OF_CRACKS
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-87
BANDTABLE CUSTOM
BANDTABLE CUSTOM NAME LOWER UPPER VALUETYPE

valuei colori
BANDTABLE CUSTOM defines a custom band table. This name can be used in the
NAME
[DEFAULT]
type custom with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined band
table. Otherwise, a new band table of type custom is created by this command.
LOWER
[NONE]
The color associated with a value that is lower than the lowest value in the band table.
LOWER is ignored when drawing line contours.
NONE
No color.
CONSTANT
The color associated with the lowest value in the band table.
REPEAT
The band table is assumed to repeat periodically for values less than the
lowest value in the band table. This extended band table is used to
associate a color with the value.
(anything else)
The name of the color to be associated with a value that is lower than
the lowest value in the band table.
UPPER
[CONSTANT]
The color associated with a value that is higher than or equal to the highest value in the band
table. UPPER is ignored when drawing line contours.
NONE
No color.
CONSTANT
The color associated with the highest value in the band table.
REPEAT
The band table is assumed to repeat periodically for values higher than
or equal to the highest value in the band table. This extended band table
is used to associate a color with the value.
(anything else)
The name of the color to be associated with a value that is higher than
or equal to the highest value in the band table.
5-88
BANDTABLE CUSTOM
VALUETYPE
[ABSOLUTE]
ABSOLUTE The numbers in the band table are directly associated with the plotted
results.
PERCENT
BANDPLOT first determines the approximate maximum and minimum

values of the plotted results (VMAX and VMIN). The numbers entered in
the band table represent percentages in this range of results.
MAXIMUM
BANDPLOT first determines the approximate maximum absolute value of

the plotted result (VMAX). The numbers entered in the band table
represent percentages in the range from -VMAX to VMAX.
valuei , colori
The value and color of one entry in the band table. The value is a real number, the color is
either a color defined in the COLORTABLE command, the word INVERSE to specify the
opposite of the background color or the word NONE to specify no color.
If VALUETYPE=ABSOLUTE, the color colori is associated with a value that is in the range
valuei to valuei+1.
If VALUETYPE=PERCENT, the color colori is associated with a value that is in the range
VMAX - VMIN
VMAX - VMIN
value i + VMIN value<

valuei+1 + VMIN
100
100
If VALUETYPE=MAXIMUM, the color colori is associated with a value that is in the range
valuei
valuei+1
VMAX
- 1 value < VMAX
- 1
50
50
The color associated with the highest value in the band table is not used unless
UPPER=CONSTANT or line contours are drawn.
Example
Suppose that the following band table is entered:
BANDTABLE CUSTOM
-1.0 INVERSE
0.0
NONE
3.0
YELLOW
4.0
RED
ADINA R & D, Inc.
EXAMPLE
LOWER=CONSTANT
UPPER=REPEAT
5-89
BANDTABLE CUSTOM
Then
value < 0.0

0.0 value < 3.0
3.0 value < 4.0
4.0 value < 5.0
color = INVERSE
color = NONE
color = YELLOW
color = INVERSE
5.0 value < 8.0 color = NONE

8.0 value < 9.0 color = YELLOW
etc for higher values.
5-90
BANDTABLE REPEATING
BANDTABLE REPEATING NAME START WIDTH COLOR1 COLOR2

ROUNDING
BANDTABLE REPEATING defines a repeating band table. This name can be used in the
When a repeating band table and solid area fills are specified, values from START to START
+ WIDTH are drawn in color 1 and values from START + WIDTH to START + 2WIDTH
are drawn in color 2.
When a repeating band table and line contours are specified, value START is drawn in color
1 and value START + WIDTH is drawn in color 2.
In both cases the band table is repeated downward and upward for values lower than START
and higher than START + 2WIDTH.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
type repeating with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined
band table. Otherwise, a new band table of type repeating is created by this command.
START
[AUTOMATIC]
WIDTH
[AUTOMATIC]
The start and width for the repeating band table. If you specify AUTOMATIC, the program
calculates the parameter value. If you specify a numeric value for width, the value must be
greater than zero.
COLOR1
[INVERSE]
COLOR2
[NONE]
The colors associated with the band table. NONE specifies no color (but you cannot use
NONE for both COLOR1 and COLOR2).
ROUNDING
[YES]
If ROUNDING=NO, the band table values are not rounded; if ROUNDING=YES, the band
table values are rounded.
Note: When the band table DEFAULT is updated using the BANDTABLE REPEATING
command, the band table DEFAULT_REPEATING is set equal to band table
DEFAULT.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-91
BANDRENDERING
BANDRENDERING
NAME BANDTYPE LINEWIDTH UNITLINEWIDTH

EXTREMES SHELLTOPFACES SHELLBOTTOMFACES
SHELLMIDSURFACEFACES SHELLSIDEFACES
OTHERFACES TOLERANCE HIDDEN COORDCALC
VIEWSHIFT LOCATIONS
BANDRENDERING defines attributes used when drawing a band plot with the BANDPLOT
command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the band rendering depiction. If there is a previously defined band rendering
depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that band rendering
depiction. If there is no previously defined band rendering depiction with this name, a new
band rendering depiction is created by this command.
BANDTYPE
Specifies the type of bandplot:
[SOLID]
SOLID
bands are drawn with solid area fills
LINE
bands are drawn with line contours
LINEWIDTH
[0.0]
UNITLINEWIDTH
[PIXELS]
The width of lines and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
These parameters are used in two cases: plotting bands as line contours, and plotting solid
bands onto line elements. Enter 0.0 for the thinnest possible lines.
EXTREMES
[NONE]
The extreme values in the band plot can be plotted using special symbols. This parameter
controls which extremes, if any, are plotted:
NONE
extremes are not plotted
MINIMUM
the minimum is plotted
MAXIMUM
the maximum is plotted
ALL
both the minimum and maximum are plotted
The symbols used to plot extremes can be specified using a bandannotation depiction, see the
BANDANNOTATION command in this section.
5-92
BANDRENDERING
SHELLTOPFACES
[YES]
SHELLBOTTOMFACES
[YES]
SHELLMIDSURFACEFACES
[YES]
SHELLSIDEFACES
[YES]
OTHERFACES
[YES]
The bands can be drawn on all faces or on selected faces. If parameter SHELLTOPFACES =
YES, bands are drawn on shell top faces, otherwise bands are not drawn on shell top faces. If
parameter SHELLBOTTOMFACES = YES, bands are drawn on shell bottom faces,
otherwise bands are not drawn on shell bottom faces. If parameter
SHELLMIDSURFACEFACES = YES, bands are drawn on shell midsurface faces, otherwise
bands are not drawn on shell midsurface faces. If parameter SHELLSIDEFACES = YES,
bands are drawn on shell side faces, otherwise bands are not drawn on shell side faces. If
parameter OTHERFACES = YES, bands are drawn on all other faces (that is, nonshell faces),
otherwise bands are not drawn on these faces.
TOLERANCE
The band plot tolerance, between 0.0 (most accurate) and 1.0 (least accurate).
[0.0]
HIDDEN
Controls whether hidden bands and line contours are removed. {YES / NO}
[YES]
COORDCALC
Controls how band coordinates are calculated:
[GRAPHICAL]
GRAPHICAL
Band coordinates are calculated so as to lie on the graphical

representation of the meshplot. This can cause a slight wavyness
of the bands.
THEORETICAL
Band coordinates are calculated so as to lie on the theoretical

representation of the meshplot. This can cause the bands to lie
underneath the graphical representation of the meshplot; in this
case, the bands are hidden by the meshplot.
VIEWSHIFT
[0.0]
The graphical representation of the bands is shifted by an amount VIEWSHIFT towards the
eye. The typical use of this feature is when plotting bands on contact surfaces. It is possible
for the graphical representation of contact surfaces to interfere with the graphical
representation of the attached element faces. When this interference occurs, the band plots
can be inadvertently hidden by the attached element faces. Then setting VIEWSHIFT > 0.0
causes the bands to be no longer hidden by the attached element faces.
The unit of VIEWSHIFT is the model length unit.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-93
BANDRENDERING
LOCATIONS
[YES]
Plot the close locations associated with the band extreme values {YES/NO}. See notes
below.
Notes for LOCATIONS=YES
The extremes table produced during band plotting includes close locations, one close
location for the maximum value and one close location for the minimum value. The close
location can be a node point, element integration point, element local node or contact
segment. The close location corresponds to the marked maximum or minimum in the band
plot. For the marked maximum or minimum, the AUI finds a close location, then evaluates
the band plot variable at this close location. If you list the bandplot variable at the close
location, you will obtain the same result as the result indicated in the bandplot extremes table.
There are a number of subtle points concerning the close locations feature:
a) The value of the bandplot variable at the close location will not usually be the value of the
bandplot variable at the marked maximum or minimum. This is because the marked
maximum or minimum need not be exactly at a node, element integration point, etc. For
example, consider a bandplot of unsmoothed stresses in volume elements. In this case, the
close location is an element integration point within the element, but the marked maximum or
minimum is a point on the element face. Normally BANDPLOT extrapolates stresses from
the integration points to the element faces. This extrapolation can drastically change the
value of the bandplot variable.
When the value of the bandplot variable at the close location is different than the value of the
bandplot variable at the marked maximum or minimum, then the extremes table includes both
the maximum/minimum value and the close location value:
MAXIMUM
^ 0.2345
GR 1, EL 2, INT PT 333 (0.1300)
Here the maximum value is 0.2345, and the close location value is 0.1300.
When the value of the bandplot variable at the close location is the same as the value of the
bandplot variable at the marked maximum or minimum, then the extremes table includes only
the maximum/minimum value:
MAXIMUM
^ 0.1234
NODE 25
5-94
BANDRENDERING
b) The type of close location depends upon the bandplot variable, as shown in the following
table:
Bandplot variable
Close location
Nodal field
(e.g. Y-DISPLACEMENT)
Node
Smoothed element field

(e.g. STRESS-YY with smoothing on)
Node
Unsmoothed element field

(e.g. STRESS-YY with smoothing off)
Element integration point
Local node (e.g. THICKNESS)
Element local node
Contact segment for old contact segment

representation
(e.g. NORMAL_TRACTION)
Contact segment
Note that the current contact surface representation outputs contact results at the nodes, so
variables such as NODAL_CONTACT_STATUS will have close locations at nodes.
c) When the bandplot variable includes a surface normal, then the surface normal is evaluated
at the marked maximum/minimum, but the remaining part of the variable is evaluated at the
close location:
Example:
RESULTANT TEST <STRESS-YY>*<SURFACE_NORMAL-Y>
BANDPLOT VAR=TEST
STRESS-YY is evaluated at the close location, but SURFACE_NORMAL-Y is evaluated at
the marked maximum or minimum.
d) The marked maximum or minimum gives the maximum or minimum only as evaluated on
the bandplot. For example, in a bandplot of stress on volume elements, BANDPLOT only
examines the element faces that are on the skin of the meshplot. Hence the marked
maximum or minimum is also on the skin of the meshplot.
If the true maximum or minimum is somewhere inside the model, and not on the skin of the
meshplot, BANDPLOT will not detect the true maximum or minimum.
Because the close location value corresponds to the marked maximum or minimum, the close
location value also will not correspond to the true maximum or minimum.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-95
BANDANNOTATION
BANDANNOTATION NAME TABLE TCOLOR TCHARSIZE UNITTCHARSIZE

TLENGTH UNITTLENGTH TWIDTH UNITTWIDTH
TPLACEMENT TXSTART UNITTXSTART TYSTART
UNITTYSTART TSCALE EXTREMES EMINSYMBOL
EMINCOLOR EMINSIZE UNITEMINSIZE EMAXSYMBOL
EMAXCOLOR EMAXSIZE UNITEMAXSIZE ECHARSIZE
UNITECHARSIZE EPLACEMENT EXSTART
UNITEXSTART EYSTART UNITEYSTART ESCALE
BANDANNOTATION defines which optional text to plot along with the BANDPLOT
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the BANDANNOTATION depiction. If there is a previously defined
BANDANNOTATION depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that
BANDANNOTATION depiction. If there is no previously defined BANDANNOTATION
depiction with this name, a new BANDANNOTATION depiction is created by this
command.
TABLE
Determines whether or not the band table is plotted. {YES / NO}
TCOLOR
The color of text in the band table.
TCHARSIZE
UNITTCHARSIZE
The size of the characters in the band table, before scaling, and its unit.
[YES]
[INVERSE]
[.25]
[CM]
TLENGTH
[0.0]
UNITTLENGTH
[CM]
The length of the band table, before scaling, and its unit. A value of 0.0 will result in the
program choosing a length.
TWIDTH
[0.0]
UNITTWIDTH
[CM]
The width of the band table, before scaling, and its unit. A value of 0.0 will result in the
program choosing a width.
5-96
BANDANNOTATION
TPLACEMENT
[AUTOMATIC]
TXSTART
[0.0]
UNITTXSTART
[CM]
TYSTART
[0.0]
UNITTYSTART
[CM]
If TPLACEMENT is AUTOMATIC, then the placement of the band table text is done
automatically by the program. If TPLACEMENT is CUSTOM, then the band table text
placement is specified by TXSTART, UNITTXSTART, TYSTART, UNITTYSTART.
TXSTART and TYSTART specify the subframe X and Y coordinates of the top left corner of
the band table. Their units are given by UNITTXSTART and UNITTYSTART respectively.
TSCALE
A scale factor applied to the entire band table.
[1.0]
EXTREMES
[YES]
If EXTREMES = NO, the extreme value table is not plotted. If EXTREMES = YES, the
extreme value table is plotted. This parameter does not affect the plotting of extreme values
on the band plot this is controlled in the BANDRENDERING command.
EMINSYMBOL
[@C[1,11]]
The symbol used to mark the minimum band value. See the TEXT command in Section 5.12
for the conventions used. Use @C[0,32] for a blank string.
EMINCOLOR
The color used to draw the symbol used to mark the minimum band value.
[INVERSE]
EMINSIZE
UNITEMINSIZE
The size of the symbol used to mark the minimum band value and its unit.
[0.25]
[CM]
EMAXSYMBOL
[@C[1,2]]
The symbol used to mark the maximum band value. See the TEXT command in Section 5.12
for the conventions used.
EMAXCOLOR
The color used to draw the symbol used to mark the maximum band value.
[INVERSE]
EMAXSIZE
UNITEMAXSIZE
The size of the symbol used to mark the maximum band value and its unit.
[0.25]
[CM]
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-97
BANDANNOTATION
ECHARSIZE
UNITECHARSIZE
The size of the characters in the extremes annotation, before scaling, and its unit.
[0.25]
[CM]
EPLACEMENT
[AUTOMATIC]
EXSTART
[0.0]
UNITEXSTART
[CM]
EYSTART
[0.0]
UNITEYSTART
[CM]
If EPLACEMENT is AUTOMATIC, then the placement of the extremes text is done
automatically by the program. If EPLACEMENT is CUSTOM, then the extremes placement is
specified by EXSTART, UNITEXSTART, EYSTART, UNITEYSTART. EXSTART and
EYSTART specify the subframe X and Y coordinates of the extremes annotation. Their units
are given by UNITEXSTART and UNITEYSTART respectively.
ESCALE
A scale factor applied to the entire extremes annotation.
5-98
[1.0]
Vector plotting Introduction
Sec. 5.5 Vector plotting

You draw element vectors onto an existing mesh plot using the EVECTORPLOT command.
The resulting plot is called an element vector plot. You can also modify an existing element
vector using this command.
The element vectors you can draw are
STRESS
principal stresses
STRAIN
principal strains
CREEP_STRAIN
principal creep strains
PLASTIC_STRAIN
principal plastic strains
HEAT_FLUX
heat flux vectors
SEEPAGE_FLUX
seepage flux vectors
VELOCITY
velocity vectors
V_STRETCH
the principal values of the left stretch tensor V, see the
ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 3.1.2.
CRACK_STRESS
stresses in the crack directions
CRACKS
open and closed cracks and crushing symbols
OPEN_CRACKS
open cracks
CLOSED_CRACKS
closed cracks
CRUSHED
crushing symbols
CURRENT_DENSITY
current density
INPLANE_STRESS
in-plane stresses in shell elements
INPLANE_STRAIN
in-plane strains in shell elements
CRACK_STRAIN
strains in the crack directions
EFI, EFI-R, EFI-I
electric field intensity, -R, real part only, -I, imag. part only
DFI, DFI-R, DFI-I
electric displacement intensity
HMI, HMI-R, HMI-I
magnetic field intensity
APT, APT-R, APT-I
magnetic potential
BMI, BMI-R, BMI-I
magnetic field intensity
(For INPLANE_STRESS, INPLANE_STRAIN, the results must have been calculated in the
midsurface coordinate system.)
the element vector plot can display the element vectors from all of the loaded finite element
program results.
An element vector plot is considered to be attached to a mesh plot, which must have been
defined before you create the element vector plot. See Section 5.2 for information regarding
mesh plots.
Every element vector plot has a name, which you specify when you create the element vector
plot. You refer to the element vector plot by name when modifying or deleting it.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-99
The appearance of the element vector plot is governed by the element vector plot depictions.
The element vector plot depictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of
the element vector plot appearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used in the
EVECTORPLOT command to refer to the depiction.
The depictions used by the EVECTORPLOT command are:
RESPONSE: specifies the solution time, mode-shape, etc. for the element vector plot.
See the response commands in Section 6.3.
ZONE: specifies the elements onto which element vectors are plotted. See the zone
SMOOTHING: specifies how the plotted variable is smoothed. See the SMOOTHING
RESULTCONTROL: specifies how the plotted variable is calculated. See the
EVECTORQUANTITY: defines a vector quantity from variables. See the
EVECTORQUANTITY command in this section.
EVECTORGRID: specifies at which points the plotted quantity is drawn. See the
EVECTORGRID command in this section.
EVECTORRENDERING: specifies how the plotted quantity is drawn. See the
EVECTORRENDERING command in this section.
You can group depiction names into a style using the EVECTORSTYLE command. Then
you can specify the element vector style name in the EVECTORPLOT command. It is not
necessary to use EVECTORSTYLE in order to use EVECTORPLOT. The element vector
style simply provides a way to group element vector plot depictions together so that you can
switch from one set of depictions to another set by specifying a element vector style name.
When you create a element vector plot, the depictions that you specify are copied and given
the same name as the element vector plot.
You can modify an existing element vector plot either by using the REGENERATE
command or by substituting depiction names using the EVECTORPLOT command. The
techniques are analogous to those used in the BANDPLOT command, see the introduction to
Section 5.4 for examples.
You can delete an element vector plot using the DELETE EVECTORPLOT command, by
picking the mesh plot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command or by
5-100
clearing the graphics window using the FRAME command.

When you delete an element vector plot, all of the depictions associated with the name of the
element vector plot are automatically deleted as well.
Auxiliary commands
The EVECTORPLOT and EVECTORSTYLE commands have auxiliary commands
analogous to those of BANDPLOT and BANDSTYLE, see the introduction to Section 5.4.
Each of the depiction commands has auxiliary commands, see the introduction to Section 5.2
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-101
EVECTORPLOT
EVECTORPLOT
NAME EVECTORSTYLE QUANTITY MESHNAME

ZONENAME RESPONSE SMOOTHING EVECTORGRID
EVECTORTABLE EVECTORVECTORTYPE
EVECTORCOORDINATESYSTEM EVECTORRENDERING
EVECTORANNOTATION RESULTCONTROL MULTIPLIER
EVECTORPLOT allows you to draw results within elements as vectors onto a mesh plot.
The element vectors are drawn according to the attributes within the depictions that you
specify via this command.
NAME
[EVECTORPLOTnnnnn]
The name of the element vector plot. If you do not enter a name, the program will
automatically generate a name in the form EVECTORPLOTnnnnn where nnnnn is a number
between 00001 and 99999.
EVECTORSTYLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element vector style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters of
this command. An element vector style is defined by the EVECTORSTYLE command (in
this section).
QUANTITY
You can draw vectors of several types of result. Depending on the finite element analysis,
you can choose from the following list:
STRESS
STRAIN
CREEP_STRAIN
PLASTIC_STRAIN
HEAT_FLUX
SEEPAGE_FLUX
VELOCITY
V_STRETCH
CRACK_STRESS
CRACKS
OPEN_CRACKS
CLOSED_CRACKS
CRUSHED
CURRENT_DENSITY
INPLANE_STRESS
INPLANE_STRAIN
CRACK_STRAIN
EFI, EFI-R, EFI-I
DFI, DFI-R, DFI-I
HMI, HMI-R, HMI-I
APT, APT-R, APT-I
BMI, BMI-R, BMI-I
5-102
EVECTORPLOT
You only need to enter the characters indicated in bold.

You can also define a quantity using the EVECTORQUANTITY command.
MESHNAME
[PREVIOUS]
The name of the meshplot upon which the load vectors are drawn. See Section 5.2 for
information about meshplots. You can also enter the special name PREVIOUS to plot onto
the last created mesh plot.
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone that specifies onto which elements vectors will be plotted. See the zone
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
the element vector plot. See the response commands in Section 6.3. Note, this parameter is
not used when adaptive meshes are used, instead the response is taken from the underlying
response of the meshplot.
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the smoothing technique that specifies how to smooth the results. A smoothing
technique is defined by the SMOOTHING command (see Section 6.6).
EVECTORGRID
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element vector grid depiction. You specify the number and location of grid
points within each element or element face with this depiction.
For ADINA postprocessing, if QUANTITY=CRACK_STRESS, CRACKS,
OPENCRACKS, CLOSEDCRACKS or CRUSHED, then EVECTORPLOT chooses the
integration points as the sampling points, and EVECTORGRID is not used. For ADINA-F
postprocessing, if QUANTITY=VELOCITY, and if cutting planes are not used, then
EVECTORPLOT chooses the node points as the sampling points, and EVECTORGRID is
not used.
EVECTORTABLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element vector table depiction. You specify the colors of the element
vectors with this depiction. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.
EVECTORVECTORTYPE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element vector type depiction. You specify the way in which element
vectors are drawn (for example, the vector head and tail) with this depiction. Currently there
is no corresponding depiction command.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-103
EVECTORPLOT
EVECTORCOORDINATESYSTEM
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element vector coordinate system depiction. You specify the coordinate
system in which the element vectors are displayed, and also the components of the element
vectors that are plotted with this depiction. Currently there is no corresponding depiction
command.
EVECTORRENDERING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element vector rendering depiction. You specify the lengths and scaling of
the element vectors with this depiction. An element vector rendering depiction is specified by
the EVECTORRENDERING command in this section.
EVECTORANNOTATION
The name of the element vector annotation depiction. You specify attributes of the legend
used to plot the element vector information with this depiction. Currently there is no
corresponding depiction command.
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
MULTIPLIER
[1.0]
The quantity can be multiplied by MULTIPLIER before plotting. Quantities CRACKS,
OPENCRACKS, CLOSEDCRACKS and CRUSHED are not affected by the value of this
parameter.
Notes for ZONENAME

When the underlying mesh plot plots elements, then EVECTORPLOT draws vectors in those
elements that are selected by both the EVECTORPLOT ZONENAME and the MESHPLOT
ZONENAME.
When the underlying mesh plot plots element faces or element edges, then
1) If EVECTORGRID SITEOPTION=ELFACES, then EVECTORPLOT draws vectors in
the plotted element faces or element edges, and the EVECTORPLOT ZONENAME is not
used.
2) If EVECTORGRID SITEOPTION=ELEMENTS, then EVECTORPLOT draws vectors
in the elements selected by EVECTORPLOT ZONENAME.
5-104
EVECTORPLOT
Notes for RESPONSE

It is an error to use an envelope response in the EVECTORPLOT comand.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-105
EVECTORSTYLE
EVECTORSTYLE NAME QUANTITY MESHNAME ZONENAME RESPONSE

SMOOTHING EVECTORGRID EVECTORTABLE
EVECTORVECTORTYPE EVECTORCOORDINATESYSTEM
EVECTORRENDERING EVECTORANNOTATION
RESULTCONTROL MULTIPLIER
EVECTORSTYLE groups style depictions used by EVECTORPLOT.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element vector style. If there is a previously defined element vector style
with this name, data entered in this command modifies that element vector style. If there is
no previously defined element vector style with this name, a new element vector style is
QUANTITY
The name of the quantity to be plotted. See the EVECTORPLOT command for a list of
possible quantities.
MESHNAME
[PREVIOUS]
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone that specifies onto which elements of the model the element vector plot
command will plot. See the zone commands in Section 6.2.
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
the element vector plot. See the response commands in Section 6.3.
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the smoothing technique that specifies how to smooth the specified quantity. A
smoothing technique is defined by the SMOOTHING command (see Section 6.6).
EVECTORGRID
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element vector grid, used to specify the number and location of grid points
within each element or element face.
EVECTORTABLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element vector table used to associate colors with values of the quantity.
EVECTORVECTORTYPE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element vector vector type, used to specify the way in which element vectors
are drawn (for example, the vector head and tail).
5-106
EVECTORSTYLE
EVECTORCOORDINATESYSTEM
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element vector coordinate system depiction, used to specify the coordinate
system in which element vectors are displayed and the components of the element vector that
are displayed.
EVECTORRENDERING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element vector rendering depiction, used to specify the lengths and scaling
of the element vectors. An element vector rendering depiction is defined by the
EVECTORRENDERING command (in this section).
EVECTORANNOTATION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element vector annotation depiction that specifies what additional text
appears with the element vector plot.
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
MULTIPLIER
The quantity can be multiplied by MULTIPLIER before plotting.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[1.0]
5-107
EVECTORQUANTITY
EVECTORQUANTITY
QUANTITY TYPE V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6
Defines a vector or tensor quantity that can be plotted using the EVECTORPLOT command.
QUANTITY
The name of the quantity. Predefined quantities cannot be redefined..
TYPE
Type of quantity {VECTOR / SYMTENSOR}.
[]
[VECTOR]
V1, V2, ..., V6

[]
When TYPE=VECTOR, V1 to V3 are variables giving the X, Y and Z components of the
vector. When TYPE=SYMTENSOR, V1 to V6 are variables giving the XX, YY, ZZ, XY, XZ,
YZ components of a symmetric tensor. It is allowed to enter 'NONE' for
any variable; then zero is substituted for that variable.
Example:
EVECTORQUANTITY DISP VECTOR,
'X-DISPLACEMENT' 'Y-DISPLACEMENT' 'Z-DISPLACEMENT'
EVECTORPLOT QUANTITY=DISP // plots displacements as vectors
5-108
EVECTORGRID
EVECTORGRID
NAME SITEOPTION GRIDOPTION GRID1 GRID2 GRID3

SITESPACING UNITSSPACING SITESKIP
Defines a grid used to place the element vectors drawn with the EVECTORPLOT command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the EVECTORGRID depiction. If there is a previously defined
EVECTORGRID depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies the
depiction, otherwise data entered in this command defines a new depiction.
SITEOPTION
SITEOPTION is used when drawing vectors on 3D elements.
ELFACES
[AUTOMATIC]
Vectors are always drawn on element faces.
ELEMENTS Vectors are always drawn within elements.

NODES
Vectors are always drawn at nodes (if possible).
AUTOMATIC EVECTORPLOT decides where to draw vectors, see notes at the end of
this command description.
SITEOPTION is most useful when the mesh plot displays an element face-set or element
edge-set.
Note that quantities plotted on shell elements can only be plotted on element faces, not within
elements and not at nodes.
GRIDOPTION
[EQUALLY_SPACED]
INTEGRATION_POINTS Vectors are drawn at the element integration points. When

drawing vectors on a 3D element face, the element face is
considered to have a 2D isoparametric coordinate system,
and vectors are drawn at integration points in this coordinate
system.
EQUALLY_SPACED
Vectors are drawn at points on an equally spaced (in the

isoparametric system) grid.
GRIDOPTION is not used when drawing vectors at nodes.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-109
EVECTORGRID
GRID1
GRID2
GRID3
The number of points in each direction of the grid, used when
GRIDOPTION=EQUALLY_SPACED.
[2]
[2]
[2]
SITESPACING
UNITSSPACING
Not used in this version of the AUI.
SITESKIP
[1]
When SITESKIP=1, no sampling points are skipped. When SITESKIP=2, every other
sampling point is skipped. Higher values of SITESKIP cause more sampling points to be
skipped.
Notes
There are four predefined depictions: DEFAULT, FACTORY, INTEGRATION_POINTS,
CENTROID, which have the following meanings:
EVECTORPLOT chooses evenly spaced grid points (not at
the integration point locations).
INTEGRATION_POINTS EVECTORPLOT chooses the element integration points
CENTROID
EVECTORPLOT chooses the element centroids, or the
centers of the element faces.
DEFAULT, FACTORY
The logic used for SITEOPTION AUTOMATIC is as follows: If the mesh plot uses hidden
line removal and plots front-facing triangles, the mesh plot is assumed to be opaque;
otherwise the mesh plot is assumed to be transparent. If the mesh plot is opaque, vectors are
plotted at nodes if all variables in the quantity are nodal variables, otherwise vectors are
plotted at element faces. If the mesh plot is transparent, vectors are plotted at nodes if all
variables in the quantity are nodal variables, otherwise vectors are plotted within elements.
5-110
EVECTORRENDERING
EVECTORRENDERING
NAME LENGTHOPTION MAXLENGTH

UNITMAXLENGTH MINLENGTH UNITMINLENGTH
SCALEOPTION SCALEFACTOR EPSMIN
COORDCALC PRINCIPAL FILTER
Defines drawing attributes used when drawing element vectors with the EVECTORPLOT
command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the EVECTORRENDERING depiction. If there is a previously defined
EVECTORRENDERING depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies
the depiction, otherwise data entered in this command defines a new depiction.
LENGTHOPTION
[SCALED]
If LENGTHOPTION = SCALED, the vector lengths are scaled according to their magnitude,
using parameters SCALEOPTION and SCALEFACTOR. If LENGTHOPTION = FIXED, all
vectors are plotted with the same length.
MAXLENGTH
UNITMAXLENGTH
The length of the longest plotted element vector and its unit. {CM / INCHES /
MINLENGTH
UNITMINLENGTH
Element vectors shorter than MINLENGTH are not plotted.
[1.0]
[CM]
[0.01]
[CM]
SCALEOPTION
[AUTOMATIC]
SCALEFACTOR
[1.0]
These parameters are used only when LENGTHOPTION = SCALED. When
SCALEOPTION = AUTOMATIC, the program scales the element vectors so that the longest
element vector has length MAXLENGTH. In this case, SCALEFACTOR is not used. When
SCALEOPTION = CUSTOM, you enter the scaling factor SCALEFACTOR used to determine
the vector length from the vector magnitude. See the notes at the end of this command
description.
EPSMIN
[0.0]
When plotting cracks, open cracks with normal mechanical strain less than EPSMIN are not
plotted. The strain is measured in the direction of the open crack. If closed cracks and
crushed points are requested to be plotted, they are plotted regardless of the value of
EPSMIN.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-111
EVECTORRENDERING
COORDCALC
[GRAPHICAL]
Controls how the coordinates of the element vector locations are calculated:
GRAPHICAL
Coordinates are calculated so as to lie on the graphical

representation of the meshplot. This can cause the vectors to be
nonsymmetric even if the meshplot is symmetric..
THEORETICAL
Coordinates are calculated so as to lie on the theoretical

representation of the meshplot. This can cause the vectors to lie
underneath the graphical representation of the meshplot; in this
case, the vectors are hidden by the meshplot.
PRINCIPAL
[ALL]
For vectors calculated from principal values of tensors (e.g. stress, strain), this parameter
controls which vectors to plot. For example, when PRINCIPAL=MAXIMUM, only vectors
from maximum principal values are plotted.
{ALL/MAXIMUM/INTERMEDIATE/MINIMUM}
FILTER
[ALL]
Controls whether to plot all, only positive, only negative or no quantities. For example, when
FILTER=POSITIVE, only positive quantities are plotted. FILTER is useful only for tensor
quantities. FILTER is ignored for crack/crush quantities.
{ALL/POSITIVE/NEGATIVE/NONE
Notes:
The plotted element vector length (in cm) = |SCALEFACTOR (result value)|
For example, suppose that, at a point in the element, the principal stress magnitude = 1234,
the MULTIPLIER used in EVECTORPLOT is 3.4, SCALEOPTION = CUSTOM and the
SCALEFACTOR is 1E-4. Then the plotted element vector length at that element point is
1E-4 3.4 1234 = 0.42 cm.
5-112
Element line plotting Introduction
Sec. 5.6 Element line plotting
Element line plotting - Introduction

You draw element lines onto an existing mesh plot using the ELINEPLOT command. The
resulting plot is called an element line plot. You can also modify an existing element line plot
using this command.
Element lines depict the intensity and direction of a quantity within line elements. Currently
the only elements supported are ADINA truss and beam elements.
For example, you can draw shear force and bending moment diagrams in an element line plot.
The quantities that you can plot using element lines are
AXIAL_FORCE
SHEAR_FORCE-S
SHEAR_FORCE-T
TORSIONAL_MOMENT
BENDING_MOMENT-S
BENDING_MOMENT-T
AXIAL_STRAIN
TWIST
CURVATURE-S
CURVATURE-T
PLASTIC_AXIAL_STRAIN
PLASTIC_TWIST
PLASTIC_CURVATURE-S
PLASTIC_CURVATURE-T
ACCUM_PLASTIC_AXIAL_STRAIN
ACCUM_PLASTIC_TWIST
ACCUM_PLASTIC_CURVATURE-S
ACCUM_PLASTIC_CURVATURE-T
YIELD_AXIAL_FORCE
YIELD_TORSIONAL_MOMENT
YIELD_BENDING_MOMENT-S
YIELD_BENDING_MOMENT-T
BOLT_FORCE
BOLT_SHORTENING
BOLT_SHEARFORCE-S
BOLT_SHEARFORCE-T
BOLT_TORSION
BOLT_MOMENT-S
BOLT_MOMENT-T
WARPING
BIMOMENT
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-113
The quantities depend upon the element group / material model.

An element line plot is considered to be attached to a mesh plot, which must have been
defined before you create the element line plot. See Section 5.2 for information regarding
mesh plots.
Every element line plot has a name, which you specify when you create the element line plot.
You refer to the element line plot by name when modifying or deleting it.
The appearance of the element line plot is governed by the element line plot depictions. The
element line plot depictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the
element line plot appearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used in the ELINEPLOT
command to refer to the depiction.
The depictions used by the ELINEPLOT command are:
RESPONSE: Specifies the solution time, mode shape, etc., for the line plot. See the
ZONE: Specifies the elements onto which element lines are plotted. See the zone
RESULTCONTROL: Specifies how the quantity is calculated. See the
ELINERENDERING: Specifies how the element lines are drawn. See the
ELINERENDERING command in this section.
ELINEANNOTATION: Specifies which optional information is drawn along with the
element line plot. See the ELINEANNOTATION command in this section.
You can group depiction names into a style using the ELINESTYLE command. Then you can
specify the element line style name in the ELINEPLOT command. It is not necessary to use
ELINESTYLE in order to use ELINEPLOT. The element line style simply provides a way to
group element line plot depictions together so that you can switch from one set of depictions
to another set by specifying a element line style name.
When you create an element line plot, the depictions that you specify are copied and given the
same name as the element line plot.
You can modify an existing element line plot by using the REGENERATE command or by
substituting depiction names using the ELINEPLOT command. The techniques are
analogous to those used in the BANDPLOT command, see the introduction to Section 5.4 for
examples.
5-114
You can delete an element line plot using the DELETE ELINEPLOT command, by picking
the mesh plot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command, or by clearing
the graphics window using the FRAME command.
When you delete an element line plot, all of the depictions with the name of the element line
plot are deleted as well.
Auxiliary commands
The ELINEPLOT and ELINESTYLE commands have auxiliary commands analogous to
those of BANDPLOT and BANDSTYLE, see the introduction to Section 5.4.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-115
ELINEPLOT
ELINEPLOT
NAME ELINESTYLE QUANTITY MULTIPLIER MESHNAME

ZONENAME RESPONSE RESULTCONTROL ELINERENDERING
ELINEANNOTATION
Creates an element line plot according to the attributes of the specified depictions.
NAME
[ELINEPLOTnnnnn]
The name of the element line plot. If no name is given, one is automatically generated in the
form ELINEPLOTnnnnn, when nnnnn is a number between 00001 and 99999.
ELINESTYLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element line style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters of
this command. An element line style is defined by the ELINESTYLE command (in this
section).
QUANTITY
The name of the quantity to be plotted. Depending upon the analysis, you can choose from
the following list:
AXIAL_FORCE
SHEAR_FORCE-S
SHEAR_FORCE-T
TORSIONAL_MOMENT
BENDING_MOMENT-S
BENDING_MOMENT-T
AXIAL_STRAIN
TWIST
CURVATURE-S
CURVATURE-T
PLASTIC_AXIAL_STRAIN
PLASTIC_TWIST
PLASTIC_CURVATURE-S
PLASTIC_CURVATURE-T
ACCUM_PLASTIC_AXIAL_STRAIN
ACCUM_PLASTIC_TWIST
ACCUM_PLASTIC_CURVATURE-S
ACCUM_PLASTIC_CURVATURE-T
YIELD_AXIAL_FORCE
YIELD_TORSIONAL_MOMENT
YIELD_BENDING_MOMENT-S
YIELD_BENDING_MOMENT-T
BOLT_FORCE
BOLT_SHORTENING
BOLT_SHEARFORCE-S
BOLT_SHEARFORCE-T
5-116
ELINEPLOT
BOLT_TORSION
BOLT_MOMENT-S
BOLT_MOMENT-T
WARPING
BIMOMENT
MULTIPLIER
[1.0]
MESHNAME
[PREVIOUS]
The name of the mesh plot upon which the element line vectors are drawn. See Section 5.2
for information about mesh plots. You can also enter the special name PREVIOUS to plot
onto the last created mesh plot.
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone that specifies onto which elements the lines will be drawn. See the
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
the element line plot. See the response commands in Section 6.3. Note, this parameter is not
used when adaptive meshes are used, instead the response is taken from the underlying
response of the meshplot.
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result control depiction. This depiction controls how the results are
calculated. A result control depiction is specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (see
Section 6.6).
ELINERENDERING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element line rendering depiction. You specify the lengths, scaling and other
drawing attributes of the element lines using this depiction. An element line rendering
depiction is specified by the ELINERENDERING command in this section.
ELINEANNOTATION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element line annotation depiction. You specify the attributes of the legend
plotted along with the element lines using this depiction. An element line annotation
depiction is specified by the ELINEANNOTATION command in this section.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-117
ELINEPLOT
Notes for ZONENAME

When the underlying mesh plot plots elements, then ELINEPLOT draws element lines in
those elements that are selected by both the ELINEPLOT ZONENAME and the
MESHPLOT ZONENAME.
When the underlying mesh plot plots element edges, then ELINEPLOT draws element lines
in the plotted element edges, and the ELINEPLOT ZONENAME is not used.
5-118
ELINESTYLE
ELINESTYLE
NAME QUANTITY MULTIPLIER MESHNAME ZONENAME

RESPONSE RESULTCONTROL ELINERENDERING
ELINEANNOTATION
ELINESTYLE groups depictions used when drawing element lines using the ELINEPLOT
command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element line style. If there is a previously defined element line style with
this name, data entered in this command overwrites information for that element line style. If
there is no previously defined element line style with this name, a new element line style is
created.
QUANTITY
The name of the quantity to be plotted. See the ELINEPLOT command for a list of
quantities.
MULTIPLIER
MESHNAME
[1.0]
[PREVIOUS]
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone that specifies onto which elements the lines will be drawn. See the
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape, etc. used to draw the
element lines. See the response commands in Section 6.3.
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result control depiction. This depiction controls how the results are
Section 6.6).
ELINERENDERING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element line rendering depiction. You specify the lengths, scaling and other
drawing attributes of the element lines using this depiction. An element line rendering
depiction is specified by the ELINERENDERING command in this section.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-119
ELINESTYLE
ELINEANNOTATION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the element line annotation depiction. You specify the attributes of the legend
plotted along with the element lines using this depiction. An element line annotation
depiction is specified by the ELINEANNOTATION command in this section.
5-120
ELINERENDERING
ELINERENDERING
NAME MAXLENGTH UNITMAXLENGTH MINLENGTH

UNITMINLENGTH SCALEOPTION SCALEFACTOR
COLOR AXIALDIRECTION AXIALCONVENTION
SHEARCONVENTION MOMENTCONVENTION
Defines drawing attributes used when drawing element lines with the ELINEPLOT
command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the ELINERENDERING depiction. If there is a previously defined
ELINERENDERING depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies the
MAXLENGTH
[1.0]
UNITMAXLENGTH
[CM]
The length of the longest plotted element line and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT
/ PIXELS / POINTS}
MINLENGTH
UNITMINLENGTH
Element lines shorter than MINLENGTH are not plotted.
[0.01]
[CM]
SCALEOPTION
[AUTOMATIC]
SCALEFACTOR
[1.0]
When SCALEOPTION = AUTOMATIC, the program scales the element lines so that the
longest element line has length MAXLENGTH. In this case, SCALEFACTOR is not used.
When SCALEOPTION = CUSTOM, you enter the scaling factor SCALEFACTOR used to
determine the line length from the result value. See the notes at the end of this command
description.
COLOR
The color of the plotted element lines.
[RED]
AXIALDIRECTION
[S]
Element line quantities that represent axial results are plotted in the element plane specified
by this parameter. { S / T }. Note: when plotting results in truss elements, parameter
AXIALDIRECTION is not used, instead parameter TRUSSPLANE is used.
AXIALCONVENTION
[TENSION]
If AXIALCONVENTION = TENSION, positive axial quantities represent tensile quantities;
if AXIALCONVENTION = COMPRESSION, positive axial quantities represent compressive
quantities.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-121
ELINERENDERING
SHEARCONVENTION
[DOWNWARDS]
If SHEARCONVENTION = DOWNWARDS, positive shear quantities act downwards on the
positive face of the element; if SHEARCONVENTION = UPWARDS, positive shear quantities
act upwards on the positive face of the element.
MOMENTCONVENTION
[COUNTERCLOCKWISE]
If MOMENTCONVENTION = CLOCKWISE, positive moment quantities act in a clockwise
direction on the positive face of the element; if MOMENTCONVENTION =
COUNTERCLOCKWISE, positive moment quantities act in a counterclockwise direction on
the positive face of the element.
TRUSSPLANE
[XP]
This parameter determines the plane in which positive axial quantities are plotted in truss
elements. If TRUSSPLANE=XP, the AUI plots positive axial quantities in a plane parallel to
the y-z plane, if TRUSSPLANE=YP, the AUI plots positive axial quantities in a plane
parallel to the x-z plane, if TRUSSPLANE=ZP, the AUI plots positive axial quantities in a
plane parallel to the x-y plane. You can reverse the direction of positive axial quantities by
using XN instead of XP, YN instead of YP, ZN instead of ZP.
If the truss axis is parallel to the axis specified by TRUSSPLANE, the AUI chooses another
value for TRUSSPLANE.
COLORNEGATIVE
[GREEN]
This parameter specifies the color of element lines used to draw negative axial quantities.
Notes:
The plotted element line length (in cm) = |SCALEFACTOR (result value)|
For example, suppose that, at a point in the element, the bending moment = 1234, the
MULTIPLIER used in ELINEPLOT is 3.4, SCALEOPTION = CUSTOM and the
SCALEFACTOR is 1E-4. Then the plotted element line length at that element point is
1E-4 3.4 1234 = 0.42 cm.
5-122
ELINEANNOTATION
ELINEANNOTATION
NAME LEGEND COLOR CHARSIZE UNITCHARSIZE

PLACEMENT XSTART UNITXSTART YSTART
UNITYSTART SCALE
Defines the attributes of the optional legend plotted by ELINEPLOT.

NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the ELINEANNOTATION depiction. If there is a previously defined
ELINEANNOTATION depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies the
LEGEND
Determines whether the legend will be plotted. { YES / NO }.
[YES]
COLOR
[INVERSE]
The color of the legend. Note that the element lines drawn in the legend are always the color
of the plotted element lines.
CHARSIZE
[0.25]
UNITCHARSIZE
[CM]
The size of the characters in the legend, before scaling, and its unit. {CM / INCHES /
PLACEMENT
[AUTOMATIC]
XSTART
[0.0]
UNITXSTART
[CM]
YSTART
[0.0]
UNITYSTART
[CM]
If PLACEMENT is AUTOMATIC, then the placement of the legend is done automatically by
the program. If PLACEMENT is CUSTOM, then the legend placement is specified by
XSTART, UNITXSTART, YSTART, UNITYSTART. XSTART and YSTART specify the
subframe coordinates of the legend. Their units are given by UNITXSTART and
UNITYSTART respectively. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
SCALE
A scale factor applied to the entire legend.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[1.0]
5-123
Reaction plotting Introduction

You draw reactions and contact forces onto an existing mesh plot using the
REACTIONPLOT command. The resulting plot is called a reaction plot. You can also
modify an existing reaction using this command.
The reactions you can draw are
REACTION
translational reactions (forces)
MOMENT_REACTION
rotational reactions (moments)
CONSISTENT_CONTACT_FORCE
the contact forces presented as nodal point forces, acting upon
nodes of contactor and target contact surfaces
DISTRIBUTED_CONTACT_TRACTION
the contact tractions, acting upon contactor contact surfaces
SOLITARY_CONTACT_FORCES
contact forces that act on nodal points of contactor contact
surfaces but do not act on the contact segments, only for old
contact surfaces
RESTRAINING_FORCE
restraining forces on drawbeads, presented as nodal point forces
UPLIFTING_FORCE
uplifting forces on drawbeads, presented as nodal point forces
RESTRAINING_TRACTION
restraining forces on drawbeads, presented as distributed
tractions
UPLIFTING_TRACTION
uplifting forces on drawbeads, presented as distributed tractions
When you request plotting of distributed contact tractions, any solitary contact forces are no
longer automatically plotted (they were automatically plotted in previous versions of the
AUI).
See the Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 4.4, for more information about consistent,
distributed and solitary contact forces.
5-124
Sec. 5.7 Reaction plotting
the reaction plot can display the reactions from all of the loaded finite element program
results.
A reaction plot is considered to be attached to a mesh plot, which must have been defined
before you create the reaction plot. See Section 5.2 for information regarding mesh plots.
Every reaction plot has a name, which you specify when you create the reaction plot. You
refer to the reaction plot by name when modifying or deleting it.
The appearance of the reaction plot is governed by the reaction plot depictions. The reaction
plot depictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the reaction plot
appearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used in the REACTIONPLOT command to
refer to the depiction.
The depictions used by the REACTIONPLOT command are:
RESPONSE: specifies the solution time, mode-shape, etc. for the reaction plot. See the
ZONE: specifies the nodes and elements onto which reactions are plotted. See the zone
RESULTCONTROL: specifies how the reactions are calculated. See the
You can group depiction names into a style using the REACTIONSTYLE command. Then
you can specify the reaction style name in the REACTIONPLOT command. It is not
necessary to use REACTIONSTYLE in order to use REACTIONPLOT. The reaction style
simply provides a way to group reaction plot depictions together so that you can switch from
one set of depictions to another set by specifying a reaction style name.
When you create a reaction plot, the depictions that you specify are copied and given the
same name as the reaction plot.
You can modify an existing reaction plot either by using the REGENERATE command or by
substituting depiction names using the REACTIONPLOT command. The techniques are
examples.
You can delete a reaction plot using the DELETE REACTIONPLOT command by picking
the mesh plot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command or by clearing
the graphics window using the FRAME command.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-125
When you delete a reaction plot, all of the depictions associated with the name of the reaction
plot are automatically deleted as well.
Auxiliary commands
The REACTIONPLOT and REACTIONSTYLE commands have auxiliary commands
analogous to those of BANDPLOT and BANDSTYLE, see the introduction to Section 5.4.
5-126
REACTIONPLOT
REACTIONPLOT NAME REACTSTYLE QUANTITY MESHNAME ZONENAME

RESPONSE REACTTABLE REACTVECTORTYPE
REACTCOORDINATESYSTEM REACTRENDERING
REACTANNOTATION RESULTCONTROL MULTIPLIER
REACTIONPLOT allows you to draw reactions and contact forces/tractions as vectors onto a
mesh plot.
NAME
[REACTIONPLOTnnnnn]
The name of the reaction plot. If you do not enter a name, the program will automatically
generate a name of the form REACTIONPLOTnnnnn where nnnnn is a number between
00001 and 99999.
REACTSTYLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the reaction style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters of this
command. A reaction style is defined by the REACTIONSTYLE command (in this section).
QUANTITY
You can draw reaction vectors of several types of result. Depending on the finite element
analysis, you can choose from the following list:
REACTION
MOMENT_REACTION
CONSISTENT_CONTACT_FORCE
DISTRIBUTED_CONTACT_TRACTION
SOLITARY_CONTACT_FORCE
RESTRAINING_FORCE
UPLIFTING_FORCE
RESTRAINING_TRACTION
UPLIFTING_TRACTION
Note that if you choose DISTRIBUTED_CONTACT_TRACTION, the program will not plot
any solitary contact forces.
MESHNAME
[PREVIOUS]
The name of the mesh plot upon which the reaction vectors are drawn. A mesh plot is
defined by the MESHPLOT command (see Section 5.2). You can also enter the special name
PREVIOUS to plot onto the last created mesh plot.
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone that specifies onto which nodes and contact surfaces vectors will be
plotted. See the zone commands in Section 6.2. Note, the zone is not used when plotting an
element face-set or element edge-set.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-127
REACTIONPLOT
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the response that gives the solution time, mode shape, etc. used to draw the
reactions. See the response commands in Section 6.3. Note, this parameter is not used when
adaptive meshes are used, instead the response is taken from the underlying response of the
meshplot.
REACTTABLE
The name of the reaction table depiction. You specify the colors of the reactions with this
depiction. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.
REACTVECTORTYPE
The name of the reaction vector type depiction. You specify the way in which reactions are
drawn (for example, the vector head and tail) with this depiction. Currently there is no
corresponding depiction command.
REACTCOORDINATESYSTEM
The name of the reaction coordinate system depiction. You specify the coordinate system in
which the reactions are displayed, and also the components of the reactions that are plotted
with this depiction. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.
REACTRENDERING
The name of the reaction rendering depiction. You specify the lengths and scaling of the
reactions with this depiction. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.
REACTANNOTATION
The name of the reaction annotation depiction. You specify attributes of the legends used to
plot the reaction information with this depiction. Currently there is no corresponding
depiction command.
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result control depiction. The REACTIONPLOT command uses the
MODEFACTOR parameter in the result control depiction to determine the scaling of modal
reactions. A result control depiction is specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (see
Section 6.6).
MULTIPLIER
[1.0]
Notes for ZONENAME

When the underlying mesh plot plots elements, then REACTIONPLOT draws reactions in
those elements that are selected by both the REACTIONPLOT ZONENAME and the
MESHPLOT ZONENAME.
5-128
REACTIONPLOT
When the underlying mesh plot plots element faces or element edges, then REACTIONPLOT
draws reactions in the plotted element faces or element edges, and the REACTIONPLOT
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-129
REACTIONSTYLE
REACTIONSTYLE
NAME QUANTITY MESHNAME ZONENAME RESPONSE

RESULTCONTROL REACTTABLE REACTVECTORTYPE
REACTCOORDINATESYSTEM REACTRENDERING
REACTANNOTATION MULTIPLIER
REACTIONSTYLE groups depictions used when drawing reactions using the

REACTIONPLOT command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the reaction style. If there is a previously defined reaction style with this name,
data entered in this command modifies that reaction style. If there is no previously defined
reaction style with this name, a new reaction style is created by this command.
QUANTITY
The vector quantity to be plotted. See the REACTIONPLOT command for a list of quantities
that can be plotted.
MESHNAME
[PREVIOUS]
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone that specifies the elements and contact surfaces of the model onto
which the reaction plot command will plot. See the zone commands in Section 6.2.
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
the reaction plot. See the response commands in Section 6.3.
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result control depiction that controls how the results are calculated. A result
control depiction is defined using the RESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).
REACTTABLE
The name of the reaction table used to associate colors with values of the quantity. Currently
there is no corresponding depiction command.
REACTVECTORTYPE
The name of the reaction vector type, used to specify the way in which reaction vectors are
drawn. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.
REACTRENDERING
The name of the reaction rendering depiction, used to specify the lengths and scaling of the
reaction vectors. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.
5-130
REACTIONSTYLE
REACTANNOTATION
The name of the reaction annotation depiction, used to specify the additional text that appears
with the reaction plot. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.
MULTIPLIER
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[1.0]
5-131
Trace plotting Introduction

You draw particle traces onto an existing mesh plot using the TRACEPLOT command. The
resulting plot is called a trace plot. You can also modify an existing trace plot using this
command.
A trace plot is considered to be attached to a mesh plot, which must have been defined before
you create the trace plot. See Section 5.2 for information regarding mesh plots.
Every trace plot has a name, which you specify when you create the trace plot. You refer to
the trace plot by name when modifying or deleting it.
Fundamental concepts
Particle traces are used in fluid flow analysis to visualize the motions of massless particles
that are placed into the flow field. There are many options available, which are summarized
in the following.
Quasi-steady flow
Quasi-steady flow particle tracing is always used when the flow field is steady. Quasi-steady
flow particle tracing can also be used when the flow is unsteady (transient). In both cases,
the flow field is taken from the flow solution at a single solution time (actually, from the
response of the mesh plot to which the particle traces are attached).
Since the particle motion is dynamic, the particle location is determined by the time.
However, since the solution time is fixed in quasi-steady flow, we use the term "particle time"
instead of the term "time" when discussing the determination of particle traces.
As a specific example, consider quasi-steady flow particle tracing based on a mesh plot in
which the response is set to time 18.0. Time 18.0 may or may not actually correspond to a
solution time in ADINA-F for which velocities were calculated. If time 18.0 corresponds to a
solution time in ADINA-F for which velocities were calculated, then the flow field used in
particle tracing is the flow field at time 18.0. If time 18.0 is not a solution time in ADINA-F
for which velocities were calculated, then the flow field used in particle tracing is interpolated
from the two closest solution times for which velocities were calculated (for example,
solution times 17.0 and 19.0).
Now consider one particle injector. At particle time t p = 0.0 , the particle is emitted from
the injector and is at the location of the particle injector x . The particle has velocity v ,
where v is the velocity of the flow field at the injector (calculated at time 18.0). During the
first step of numerical integration, the particle moves roughly an amount v t p where t p
5-132
Sec. 5.8 Trace plotting
is the particle time step size, so that we know the particle location at particle time t p . To
begin the next step of numerical integration, the flow field velocity at location x + v t p is
determined (again, at time 18.0). This numerical integration can be repeated, so that the
particle location at all positive particle times can be determined.
(Note, although in the example, we use the Euler forward method of time integration for
clarity of explanation, we actually use a Runge-Kutta method in the TRACEPLOT
command.)
This integration is downstream, since the particle moves with the flow. The integration can
also be performed upstream, in which the particle moves against the flow. In the first step
of upstream numerical integration, the particle moves roughly v t p , o that we have the
particle location at particle time t p . Again, the numerical integration can be repeated, so
that the particle location at all negative particle times can be determined.
So, to summarize, for positive particle times, the particle moves downstream; for negative
particle times, the particle moves upstream.
The TRACEPLOT command displays the completed particle traces corresponding to the
particle time given by TRACECALCULATION PTIME. By default PTIME=0.0; therefore
by default TRACEPLOT shows no particle traces. To actually calculate particle traces, you
must change the particle time, which you can do in several ways:
1) Change the value of TRACECALCULATION PTIME, or
2) Use the TRACESTEP command to perform one step of particle tracing, or
3) Use the MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT command to create a movie showing particle
traces.
In quasi-steady flow particle tracing, it is useful to define a particle time step size (not
necessarily the particle time step size used in numerical integration). You can define this time
step size using TRACECALCULATION PSTEP, or, if PSTEP=0.0, TRACEPLOT calculates
the particle time step size such that the particle moves roughly one element in the first particle
time step.
The particle time step size PSTEP is not used by the TRACEPLOT command itself, but is
used in the TRACESTEP command.
Unsteady flow
Unsteady flow particle tracing can be used when the flow analysis is transient (unsteady). In
unsteady flow particle tracing, the flow field is taken from the actual solution time, and the
particle time concept used in quasi-steady flow particle tracing is not used.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-133
When you define a trace plot for the first time, the trace plot records the solution time of the
underlying mesh plot. This solution time is used as the reference time t ref . It is assumed that
all particles are at their injectors at time t ref . So, in unsteady flow particle tracing, the
TRACEPLOT command by itself does no particle tracing. Particle tracing is done when the
solution time of the underlying mesh plot is altered. Then the displayed trace corresponds to
the solution time of the altered mesh plot.
As a specific example, consider unsteady flow particle tracing in which the solution time of
the mesh plot is equal to 18.0 when TRACEPLOT is run. Now consider one particle injector.
At analysis time t = t ref = 18.0 , the particle is emitted from the injector and is at the
location of the particle injector x . No particle trace is computed.
Now suppose that the solution time of the underlying mesh plot is changed to 19.0. Then
TRACEPLOT computes particle traces as follows.
At time 18.0, the particle has velocity v , where v is the velocity of the flow field at the
injector (calculated at time 18.0). During the first step of numerical integration, the particle
moves roughly an amount v tu where tu is the time step size used in unsteady particle
tracing, so that we know the particle location at time 18.0 + tu . (Note that tu is not the
same as the time step size used by ADINA-F in the actual flow solution.) To begin the next
step of numerical integration, the flow field velocity at location x + v tu is determined
(now, at time 18.0 + tu ). This numerical integration is then repeated until the solution
time is greater than 19.0. The displayed particle traces correspond to solution time 19.0.
(We do not consider upstream particle tracing in unsteady flow particle tracing. It is assumed
that all particles are not present for solution times less than t ref .)
There are several ways to change the solution time of the underlying mesh plot:
1) Change the response of the mesh plot, then regenerate:
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP MESHPLOT00001 TIME=...
REGENERATE
or
2) Create a movie of type load-step:
MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEP TEND=...
5-134
The TRACESTEP and MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT commands do not apply to unsteady

flow particle tracing.
Notice that it is not possible to change t ref for a trace plot after the trace plot is created.
Therefore you must set the solution time for the mesh plot to the desired t ref before creating
the trace plot. For example
FRAME
MESHPLOT
TRACEPLOT
( t ref = 0.0)
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP MESHPLOT00001 TIME=LATEST
REGENERATE (the traceplot now displays the particle traces for the entire range of
solution times)
Injectors and rakes
Particles are injected into the flow field by injectors, which are fixed in space. A collection
of injectors is called a rake. There are four ways to define rakes, each with its own
TRACERAKE command:
TRACERAKE COORDINATES
Defines a rake in which each injector is at the specified

coordinate.
TRACERAKE NODES
Defines a rake in which each injector is at the specified

node.
TRACERAKE GNODES
Defines a rake in which each injector is at a node attached

to the given geometry.
TRACERAKE GRIDS
Defines a rake as a collection of grids; each grid contains

an array of injectors.
An injector can either inject a single particle, or many particles, as discussed in detail below.
Each injector is assigned a different color, with the first injector given the color
TRACETYPE ... COLORFIRST and the last injector given the color TRACETYPE ...
COLORLAST. The color of all particles emitted by an injector is the color of the injector.
By default, the rake has no injectors. Therefore you must explicitly define a rake before
using TRACEPLOT. For example
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-135
FRAME
MESHPLOT
1.0 2.0 3.0
DATAEND
TRACEPLOT
Particle / ribbon tracing
If the trace plot is created using TRACETYPE PARTICLE, then the trace plot will consist of
traced particles of the given colors and size. (This is the default.)
If the trace plot is created using TRACETYPE RIBBON, then the trace plot will consist of
traced ribbons of the given colors and size. The initial orientation of the ribbon is either userspecified, or the program computes it. The ribbon orientation is updated during the numerical
integration in such a way that the ribbon rotates with the flow field.
Single particle calculation option
If TRACECALCULATION OPTION=SINGLE, then each injector emits one particle or
ribbon at particle time 0.0 or time t ref . The trace consists of a plot of the particle or ribbon at
particle time PTIME or the solution time of the underlying meshplot.
Multiple particle calculation option
If TRACECALCULATION OPTION=MULTIPLE, then each injector emits one particle or
ribbon at particle times ..., -2EMITINTERVAL, -EMITINTERVAL, 0.0,
EMITINTERVAL, 2EMITINTERVAL, ...; or at solution times t ref ,
t ref +EMITINTERVAL, t ref +2EMITINTERVAL, ... . (EMITINTERVAL is a parameter

of the TRACECALCULATION command.) The trace consists of a plot of all of the particles
or ribbons at particle time PTIME or the solution time of the underlying meshplot. The
particles or ribbons successively injected from an injector are not connected to each other.
This is the default for unsteady flow.
Pathline calculation option
If TRACECALCULATION OPTION=PATHLINE, then each injector emits one particle or
ribbon at particle time 0.0 or time t ref . The trace consists of a plot of all of the connected
positions of the particle or ribbon from particle times PTIMESTART to PTIME, or from
solution times t ref to the solution time of the underlying meshplot.
5-136
Pathline calculations are most useful in quasi-steady flow (and is the default in quasi-steady
flow).
Streakline calculation option
If TRACECALCULATION OPTION=STREAKLINE, then each injector emits one particle
or ribbon at particle times ..., -2EMITINTERVAL, -EMITINTERVAL, 0.0,
EMITINTERVAL, 2EMITINTERVAL, ...; or at solution times t ref ,
t ref +EMITINTERVAL, t ref +2EMITINTERVAL, ... . The trace consists of a plot of all of
the connected positions of all of the particles or ribbons at particle time PTIME or the
solution time of the underlying meshplot.
Streakline calculations are most useful in unsteady flow. Note that, in theory, in quasi-steady
flow, pathlines and streaklines are identical.
Depending upon the flow conditions in unsteady flow, two particles successively emitted
from the same injector may separate during the numerical integration (for example, one
particle might remain in a recirculating region and the other particle might remain in the
primary flow). Then connecting the two particles will lead to a confusing plot. In this case,
you can use the TRACERENDERING STREAKDISTANCE parameter to specify the
maximum distance between successive particles that are connected.
3-D particle traces
In order to visualize 3-D particle traces, you should create a transparent mesh plot. For
example, you can use dashed hidden lines (MESHRENDERING HIDDEN=DASHED), you
can remove the front-facing triangles (MESHRENDERING FRONTTRI=NO), or you can
plot an element face-set.
Residence time distribution graphs
Once you have created a trace plot, you can obtain residence time distribution graphs using
the TRACESHOW command (described in Section 5.10).
Depictions
The appearance of the trace plot is governed by the trace plot depictions. The trace plot
depictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the trace plot appearance.
Each depiction has a name, which is used in the TRACEPLOT command to refer to the
depiction.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-137
The depictions used by the TRACEPLOT command are:

ZONE: specifies the elements in which particle traces are computed. See the zone
TRACETYPE: specifies the type of particle trace (particle or ribbon) and their colors
and sizes. There are two TRACETYPE commands, TRACETYPE PARTICLE and
TRACETYPE RIBBON; see the TRACETYPE commands in this section.
TRACERAKE: specifies the locations of the particle injectors. There are four
TRACERAKE commands, TRACERAKE COORDINATES, TRACERAKE NODES,
TRACERAKE GNODES and TRACERAKE GRIDS; see the TRACERAKE commands
in this section.
TRACECALCULATION: specifies the type of particle tracing (quasi-steady or
unsteady), the particle emission option (single, multiple, pathline or streakline), and other
parameters used in the trace calculations. See the TRACECALCULATION command in
this section.
TRACERENDERING: specifies how the traces are drawn. See the
TRACERENDERING command in this section.
TRACEANNOTATION: specifies optional text drawn along with the trace plot. See the
TRACEANNOTATION command in this section.
You can group depiction names into a style using the TRACESTYLE command. Then you
can specify the trace style name in the TRACEPLOT command. It is not necessary to use
TRACESTYLE in order to use TRACEPLOT. The trace style simply provides a way to
group trace plot depictions together so that you can switch from one set of depictions to
another set by specifying a trace style name.
When you create a trace plot, the depictions that you specify are copied and given the same
name as the trace plot.
Modification and deletion of trace plots
You can modify an existing trace plot either by using the REGENERATE command or by
substituting depiction names using the TRACEPLOT command. The techniques are
examples. You can also modify an existing trace plot using the TRACESTEP command
(quasi-steady flows only).
You can delete a trace plot using the DELETE TRACEPLOT command by picking the mesh
plot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command or by clearing the
5-138

When you delete a trace plot, all of the depictions associated with the name of the trace plot
are automatically deleted as well.
Auxiliary commands
The TRACEPLOT and TRACESTYLE commands have auxiliary commands analogous to
those of BANDPLOT and BANDSTYLE, see the introduction to Section 5.4.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-139
TRACEPLOT
TRACEPLOT
NAME TRACESTYLE MESHNAME ZONENAME TRACETYPE

TRACERAKE TRACECALCULATION VARIABLE
RESULTCONTROL SMOOTHING TRACETABLE
TRACERENDERING TRACEANNOTATION
TRACEPLOT allows you to draw particle traces onto a mesh plot. See the introduction to
this section for a summary of features.
NAME
[TRACEPLOTnnnnn]
The name of the trace plot. If you do not enter a name, the program will automatically
generate a name of the form TRACEPLOTnnnnn where nnnnn is a number between 00001
and 99999.
TRACESTYLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the trace style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters of this
command. A trace style is defined by the TRACESTYLE command (in this section).
MESHNAME
[PREVIOUS]
The name of the mesh plot upon which the particle traces are drawn. A mesh plot is defined
by the MESHPLOT command (see Section 5.2). You can also enter the special name
PREVIOUS to plot onto the last created mesh plot.
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone that specifies onto which elements particle traces are drawn. See the
TRACETYPE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the tracetype depiction that specifies whether particles or ribbons are traced, and
the color and sizes of the particles or ribbons. A tracetype depiction is defined by a
TRACETYPE command (in this section).
TRACERAKE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the tracerake depiction that specifies the locations of the particle injectors. A
tracerake depiction is defined by a TRACERAKE command (in this section).
TRACECALCULATION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the tracecalculation depiction that specifies the particle tracing flow assumption,
the particle tracing option, and other parameters used in particle tracing. A tracecalculation
depiction is defined by the TRACECALCULATION command (in this section).
VARIABLE
Unused in this version of the AUI.
5-140
[ ]
TRACEPLOT
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
Unused in this version of the AUI. A result control depiction is specified by the
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
Unused in this version of the AUI. A smoothing technique is defined by the SMOOTHING
command (see Section 6.6).
TRACETABLE
[DEFAULT]
TRACERENDERING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the trace rendering depiction that specifies how the trace plot is drawn. A
rendering depiction is specified by the TRACERENDERING command (in this section).
TRACEANNOTATION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the trace annotation depiction that specifies what additional text appears along
with the trace plot. A trace annotation depiction is specified by the TRACEANNOTATION
Notes for ZONENAME

When the underlying mesh plot plots elements, then TRACEPLOT draws particle traces in
those elements that are selected by both the TRACEPLOT ZONENAME and the
MESHPLOT ZONENAME.
When the underlying mesh plot plots element faces or element edges, then TRACEPLOT
draws particle traces in the elements selected by TRACEPLOT ZONENAME.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-141
TRACESTYLE
TRACESTYLE NAME ZONENAME TRACETYPE TRACERAKE

TRACECALCULATION VARIABLE RESULTCONTROL
SMOOTHING TRACETABLE TRACERENDERING
TRACEANNOTATION
TRACESTYLE groups depictions used when drawing particle traces using the TRACEPLOT
command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the trace style. If there is a previously defined trace style with this name, data
entered in this command modifies that trace style. If there is no previously defined trace style
with this name, a new trace style is created by this command.
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone that specifies the elements of the model onto which the TRACEPLOT
TRACETYPE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the tracetype depiction that specifies whether particles or ribbons are traced, and
the color and sizes of the particles or ribbons. A tracetype depiction is defined by a
TRACETYPE command (in this section).
TRACERAKE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the tracerake depiction that specifies the locations of the particle injectors. A
tracerake depiction is defined by a TRACERAKE command (in this section).
TRACECALCULATION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the tracecalculation depiction that specifies the particle tracing flow assumption,
the particle tracing option, and other parameters used in particle tracing. A tracecalculation
depiction is defined by the TRACECALCULATION command (in this section).
VARIABLE
[ ]
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
Unused in this version of the AUI. A result control depiction is specified by the
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
Unused in this version of the AUI. A smoothing technique is defined by the SMOOTHING
TRACETABLE
5-142
[DEFAULT]
TRACESTYLE
TRACERENDERING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the trace rendering depiction that specifies how the trace plot is drawn. A
rendering depiction is specified by the TRACERENDERING command (in this section).
TRACEANNOTATION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the trace annotation depiction that specifies what additional text appears along
with the trace plot. A trace annotation depiction is specified by the TRACEANNOTATION
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-143
TRACETYPE PARTICLE
TRACETYPE PARTICLE
NAME COLORFIRST COLORLAST WIDTH

UNITWIDTH SIZE UNITSIZE
TRACETYPE PARTICLE defines a tracetype depiction of type particle. This name can be
used in the TRACEPLOT command to specify the trace type.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name to be associated with the tracetype. If there is a previously defined trace type of
type particle with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined trace
type. Otherwise, a new trace type of type particle is created by this command.
COLORFIRST
[RED]
COLORLAST
[BLUE]
The color of the first and last injectors in the rake. Colors of other injectors are constructed
by interpolation. COLORFIRST and COLORLAST can be the same.
WIDTH
[1.0]
UNITWIDTH
[PIXELS]
The width of the particle trace when plotting pathlines or streaklines (see
TRACECALCULATION OPTION), and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /
PIXELS / POINTS}
SIZE
[3.0]
UNITSIZE
[PIXELS]
The size of the plotted particles when plotting single or multiple particles (see
TRACECALCULATION OPTION), and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /
PIXELS / POINTS}
5-144
TRACETYPE RIBBON
TRACETYPE RIBBON
NAME COLORFIRST COLORLAST AX AY AZ

WIDTH UNITWIDTH
TRACETYPE RIBBON defines a tracetype depiction of type ribbon. This name can be used
in the TRACEPLOT command to specify the trace type.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name to be associated with the tracetype. If there is a previously defined trace type of
type ribbon with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined trace
type. Otherwise, a new trace type of type ribbon is created by this command.
COLORFIRST
[RED]
COLORLAST
[BLUE]
The color of the first and last injectors in the rake. Colors of other injectors are constructed
by interpolation. COLORFIRST and COLORLAST can be the same.
AX
[0.0]
AY
[0.0]
AZ
[0.0]
The initial orientation of the ribbon. The program will automatically normalize the initial
orientation to unit length if necessary. The program will calculate the initial orientation if it is
of zero length.
WIDTH
[6.0]
UNITWIDTH
[PIXELS]
The width of the ribbon and its unit. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS /
POINTS}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-145
TRACERAKE COORDINATES NAME

xi yi zi
TRACERAKE COORDINATES defines a tracerake depiction of type coordinates. This
name can be used in the TRACEPLOT command to specify the trace rake.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name to be associated with the tracerake. If there is a previously defined trace rake of
type coordinates with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined
trace rake. Otherwise, a new trace rake of type coordinates is created by this command.
[0.0]
xi
[0.0]
yi
[0.0]
zi
The coordinates of the injector. The coordinates need not coincide with a node in the model.
5-146
TRACERAKE NODES
TRACERAKE NODES NAME

nodei
TRACERAKE NODES defines a tracerake depiction of type nodes. This name can be used
in the TRACEPLOT command to specify the trace rake.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
type nodes with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined trace
rake. Otherwise, a new trace rake of type nodes is created by this command.
nodei
The node number at which the injector is located. (The node is taken from the ADINA-F
model if more than one finite element model is loaded into the database.)
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-147
TRACERAKE GNODES
TRACERAKE GNODES NAME

selectioni
TRACERAKE GNODES defines a tracerake depiction of type gnodes (geometry nodes).
This name can be used in the TRACEPLOT command to specify the trace rake.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
type gnodes with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined trace
rake. Otherwise, a new trace rake of type gnodes is created by this command.
selectioni
A selection string used to select geometry. When using the command-line interface, you must
enclose the selection in quotes so that the AUI does not interpret the selection as a command.
When using the dialog box, you do not need to enclose the selection in quotes.
The AUI chooses those nodes that belong to at least one of the geometry selections, and
places injectors at each of the nodes.
where each object consists of a name and a number. Possible object names are:
GEOMETRY
GEOMETRY
GEOMETRY
GEOMETRY
GEOMETRY
GEOMETRY
GEOMETRY
NODES
POINT or POINT
LINE or LINE
SURFACE or SURFACE
VOLUME or VOLUME
EDGE or EDGE
FACE or FACE
BODY or BODY
The characters needed to uniquely specify the object name are indicated in bold.
See the GNCOMBINATION command (in Section 6.7) for a very similar selection process.
TRACERAKE GNODES uses the same conventions (regarding upper and lower case, for
example) that GNCOMBINATION uses. Note that TRACERAKE GNODES allows you to
use the NODES object name, but GNCOMBINATION does not.
5-148
TRACERAKE GRIDS
TRACERAKE GRIDS NAME

xi yi zi planei e1xi e1yi e1zi e2xi e2yi e2zi ,
shapei side1lengthi nside1i side2lengthi nside2i
TRACERAKE GRIDS defines a tracerake depiction of type grids. This name can be used in
the TRACEPLOT command to specify the trace rake.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
type grids with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined trace
rake. Otherwise, a new trace rake of type grids is created by this command.
xi
yi
zi
The coordinates of the center of the grid.
[0.0]
[0.0]
[0.0]
planei
[XPLANE]
The plane in which the grid lies {XPLANE / YPLANE / ZPLANE / CUSTOM}
e1xi
[0.0]
[1.0]
e1yi
[0.0]
e1zi
[0.0]
e2xi
[0.0]
e2yi
[1.0]
e2zi
The director vectors of the grid plane, used if planei = CUSTOM. The director vectors are
normalized to unit length if necessary. The director vectors need not be orthogonal. If the
director vectors are not orthogonal, then the grid is skewed.
shapei
The shape of the grid. {RECTANGULAR / ELLIPTICAL}
[RECTANGULAR]
[0.0]
side1lengthi
[1]
nside1i
For a rectangular grid, the length of side 1 of the grid, and the number of injectors along side
1. For an elliptical grid, the radius of the grid in the side 1 direction, and the number of
injectors in the radial direction.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-149
TRACERAKE GRIDS
side2lengthi
[0.0]
[1]
nside2i
For a rectangular grid, the length of side 2 of the grid, and the number of injectors along side
2. For an elliptical grid, the radius of the grid in the side 2 direction, and the number of
injectors in the tangential direction.
Notes
1) The side 1 and side 2 directions are as in the following table:
Plane
Side 1 X
Side 1 Y
Side 1 Z
Side 2 X
Side 2 Y
Side 2 Z
XPLANE
0.0
1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
YPLANE
0.0
0.0
1.0
1.0
0.0
0.0
ZPLANE
1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
0.0
CUSTOM
E1X
E1Y
E1Z
E2X
E2Y
E2Z
2) In 2-D problems, grids can also be used. In 2D, side 1 lies in the y-z plane, so
SIDE1LENGTH and NSIDE1 are used, but SIDE2LENGTH and NSIDE2 are not used. Here
are some examples:
Grid parallel to the Y axis:
TRACERAKE GRIDS
ENTRIES X Y Z PLANE SIDE1LENGTH NSIDE1
0.0 1.0 2.0 ZPLANE 2.0 2
Grid parallel to the Z axis:
TRACERAKE GRIDS
ENTRIES X Y Z PLANE SIDE1LENGTH NSIDE1
0.0 1.0 2.0 YPLANE 2.0 2
Inclined grid:
TRACERAKE GRIDS
ENTRIES X Y Z PLANE E1X
SIDE1LENGTH NSIDE1
0.0 1.0 2.0 CUSTOM 0.0
2.0 2
5-150
E1Y
E1Z
E2X E2Y E2Z,
0.866 0.500 1.0 0.0 0.0,
TRACERAKE GRIDS
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-151
TRACECALCULATION
TRACECALCULATION NAME
FLOWTYPE OPTION EMITINTERVAL

PTIMESTART PTIME LIFETIME
DINCREMENT PSTEP VMIN VEL2D3 VEL2D4
VEL2DQ VEL3D4 VEL3D8 VEL3DQ
TRACECALCULATION defines a tracecalculation depiction. This name can be used in the

TRACEPLOT command to specify the trace calculation parameters.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name to be associated with the trace calculation depiction. If there is a previously
defined trace calculation depiction with this name, data entered in this command alters the
previously defined trace calculation depiction. Otherwise, a new trace calculation depiction
is created by this command.
FLOWTYPE
[QUASI-STEADY if flow analysis is STEADY-STATE]

[UNSTEADY if flow analysis is TRANSIENT]
Specifies whether the particle tracing is performed using quasi-steady or unsteady flow
assumptions. {QUASI-STEADY / UNSTEADY}
Quasi-steady flow assumptions can always be used; unsteady flow assumptions can be used if
the flow analysis is transient.
OPTION
[PATHLINE if flow analysis is STEADY-STATE]

[MULTIPLE if flow analysis is TRANSIENT]
Specifies the particle tracing option, as follows:
SINGLE
Traces a single particle or ribbon and plots the particle or ribbon at

particle time PTIME or at the solution time of the underlying mesh plot.
MULTIPLE
Traces multiple particles or ribbons and plots the particles or ribbons at

particle time PTIME or at the solution time of the underlying mesh plot.
The particles or ribbons are emitted at an time interval
EMITINTERVAL. The particles or ribbons successively emitted from
the same injector are not connected.
PATHLINE
Traces a single particle or ribbon and plots the path of the particle or
ribbon from particle time PTIMESTART to particle time PTIME, or
from the reference time to the solution time of the underlying mesh plot.
STREAKLINE
Same as MULTIPLE, but particles or ribbons successively emitted from

the same injector are connected.
5-152
TRACECALCULATION
EMITINTERVAL
[0.0]
Specifies the time interval between successive emissions of a particle, used when
OPTION=MULTIPLE or STREAKLINE. If EMITINTERVAL=0.0, then the program
automatically calculates it as 2*PSTEP (quasi-steady flow) or as the average solution time
step size (unsteady flow).
PTIMESTART
[0.0]
The start particle time used for pathline calculations, only used when FLOWTYPE=QUASISTEADY and OPTION=PATHLINE. PTIMESTART can be less than or greater than 0.0.
PTIME
[0.0]
The current particle time, used when FLOWTYPE=QUASI-STEADY. PTIME can be less
than or greater than 0.0.
LIFETIME
[0.0]
DINCREMENT
[0.5]
The distance that a particle moves in one time step of particle tracing numerical integration
(which is different than one solution time step). The unit of DINCREMENT is element
length, so 0.5 means that the particle moves roughly 1/2 element length in one time step of
particle tracing numerical integration.
Decreasing DINCREMENT increases the accuracy of the particle tracing; increasing
DINCREMENT decreases the accuracy of the particle tracing.
PSTEP
[0.0]
The current particle time step size used by TRACESTEP, used when FLOWTYPE=QUASISTEADY. If PSTEP = 0.0, the program automatically calculates it as the minimum of the
ratio (element size at injector / velocity at injector) over all the injectors in the rake. The
intent of the above formula is that the particle should move roughly one element each time the
TRACESTEP command is run.
VMIN
[0.0]
Particle tracing is stopped if the particle velocity is less than VMIN. The intent of this
parameter is to prevent the program from tracing particles in regions of the mesh where the
velocities are very small. This is because it is thought that very small velocities might contain
round-off and other errors that prevent accurate velocity tracing.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-153
TRACECALCULATION
VEL2D3
[LINEAR]
VEL2D4
[LINEAR]
VEL2DQ
[LINEAR]
VEL3D4
[LINEAR]
VEL3D8
[LINEAR]
VEL3DQ
[LINEAR]
Using these parameters, you can control the velocity interpolations used within different types
of ADINA-F elements: VEL2D3 controls 2-D 3-node elements, VEL2D4 controls 2-D 4node elements, VEL2DQ controls 2-D quadratic elements (6-node triangles, 8 and 9-node
quadrilaterals), VEL3D4 controls 3-D 4-node elements, VEL3D8 controls 3-D 8-node
elements, VEL3DQ controls 3-D quadratic elements (10-node tetrahedrals, 27-node
hexahedrals). {LINEAR / CONSTANT}. Note that the program uses linear velocity
interpolations (from the corner nodes) for quadratic elements.
5-154
TRACERENDERING
TRACERENDERING NAME INJECTORS EXTREMES STREAKDISTANCE

TRACERENDERING defines a tracerendering depiction. This name can be used in the
TRACEPLOT command to specify the trace rendering parameters.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name to be associated with the trace rendering depiction. If there is a previously defined
trace rendering depiction with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously
defined trace rendering depiction. Otherwise, a new trace rendering depiction is created by
this command.
INJECTORS
Specifies whether or not to plot symbols at the injector locations. {YES / NO}
[YES]
EXTREMES
STREAKDISTANCE
[0.0]
STREAKDISTANCE is used only in streakline plotting (TRACECALCULATION
OPTION=STREAKLINE). If STREAKDISTANCE=0.0, then all successive particles or
ribbons emitted at the same injector are connected. If STREAKDISTANCE>0.0, then two
successive particles or ribbons emitted at the same injector are connected only if they are
closer together than STREAKDISTANCE. STREAKDISTANCE is measured in the
coordinate system of the model.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-155
TRACEANNOTATION
TRACEANNOTATION
NAME TABLE TCOLOR TCHARSIZE UNITTCHARSIZE

TLENGTH UNITTLENGTH TWIDTH UNITTWIDTH
TPLACEMENT TXSTART UNITTXSTART TYSTART
UNITTYSTART TSCALE EXTREMES EMINSYMBOL
EMINCOLOR EMINSIZE UNITEMINSIZE
EMAXSYMBOL EMAXCOLOR EMAXSIZE
UNITEMAXSIZE ECHARSIZE UNITECHARSIZE
EPLACEMENT EXSTART UNITEXSTART EYSTART
UNITEYSTART ESCALE
TRACEANNOTATION defines which optional text to plot along with the TRACEPLOT
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the trace annotation depiction. If there is a previously defined trace annotation
depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that trace annotation
depiction. If there is no previously defined trace annotation depiction with this name, a new
trace annotation depiction is created by this command.
TABLE
Determines whether or not the trace table is plotted. {YES / NO}
TCOLOR
The color of text in the trace table.
TCHARSIZE
UNITTCHARSIZE
The size of the characters in the trace table, before scaling, and its unit.
TLENGTH
UNITTLENGTH
TWIDTH
UNITTWIDTH
TPLACEMENT
TXSTART
UNITTXSTART
TYSTART
UNITTYSTART
TSCALE
EXTREMES
EMINSYMBOL
EMINCOLOR
EMINSIZE
5-156
[YES]
[INVERSE]
[.25]
[CM]
[0.0]
[CM]
[0.0]
[CM]
[AUTOMATIC]
[0.0]
[CM]
[0.0]
[CM]
[1.0]
[YES]
[@C[1,11]]
[INVERSE]
[0.25]
TRACEANNOTATION
UNITEMINSIZE
EMAXSYMBOL
EMAXCOLOR
EMAXSIZE
UNITEMAXSIZE
ECHARSIZE
UNITECHARSIZE
EPLACEMENT
EXSTART
UNITEXSTART
EYSTART
UNITEYSTART
ESCALE
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[CM]
[@C[1,2]]
[INVERSE]
[0.25]
[CM]
[0.25]
[CM]
[AUTOMATIC]
[0.0]
[CM]
[0.0]
[CM]
[1.0]
5-157
TRACESTEP
TRACESTEP
NAME DIRECTION PSTEP
The TRACESTEP command is used to integrate particle traces in quasi-steady flow particle
tracing.
Using TRACESTEP is easier than using TRACECALCULATION to modify a trace plot.
Typically you do not have to change the defaults.
NAME
[PREVIOUS]
The name of the trace plot. The trace plot must be defined and must be of type quasi-steady.
You can enter the special name PREVIOUS to select the last trace plot that is of type quasisteady.
DIRECTION
The direction of time integration. {DOWNSTREAM / UPSTREAM}
PSTEP
The change in the particle time PTIME.
5-158
[DOWNSTREAM]
[PSTEP from TRACEPLOT]
J-integral line contour plotting Introduction
Sec. 5.9 J-integral line contour plotting

You draw J-integral line contours onto an existing mesh plot using the LCPLOT command.
The resulting plot is called a line contour plot. You can also modify an existing line contour
plot using this command.
Each line contour plot is automatically assigned a name by the AUI. The names are of the
form LINE_CONTOUR-*, where * is the line contour number, for example
LINE_CONTOUR-1.
A line contour plot is considered to be attached to a mesh plot, which must have been defined
before you create the line contour plot. See Section 5.2 for information regarding mesh plots.
Every line contour plot has a name, which you specify when you create the line contour plot.
You refer to the line contour plot by name when modifying or deleting it.
The appearance of the line contour plot is governed by the line contour plot depictions. The
line contour plot depictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the line
contour plot appearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used in the LCPLOT command
to refer to the depiction.
The depictions used by the LCPLOT command are:
ZONE: specifies the elements onto which line contours are plotted. See the zone
You can group depiction names into a style using the LCSTYLE command. Then you can
specify the line contour style name in the LCPLOT command. It is not necessary to use
LCSTYLE in order to use LCPLOT. The line contour style simply provides a way to group
line contour plot depictions together so that you can switch from one set of depictions to
another set by specifying a line contour style name.
When you create a line contour plot, the depictions that you specify are copied and given the
same name as the line contour plot.
You can modify an existing line contour plot either by using the REGENERATE command
or by substituting depiction names using the LCPLOT command. The techniques are
examples.
You can delete a line contour plot using the DELETE LCPLOT command by picking the
mesh plot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command or by clearing the
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-159
When you delete a line contour plot, all of the depictions associated with the name of the line
contour plot are automatically deleted as well.
Auxiliary commands
The LCPLOT and LCSTYLE commands have auxiliary commands analogous to those of
BANDPLOT and BANDSTYLE, see the introduction to Section 5.4.
5-160
LCPLOT
LCPLOT
Sec. 5.9 J-integral line contour plotting
NAME LCSTYLE CONTOUR MESHNAME ZONENAME

LCRENDERING LCANNOTATION
LCPLOT plots a line contour onto a mesh plot, corresponding to the line contour used in
fracture mechanics analysis to evaluate J-integrals. The line contour is plotted according to
the attributes specified by the specified depictions.
More than one line contour can be plotted onto a mesh plot by issuing this command several
times.
NAME
[LCPLOTnnnnn]
The name of the line contour plot. If no name is given, one is automatically generated in the
form LCPLOTnnnnn, when nnnnn is a number between 00001 and 99999.
LCSTYLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the line contour style used to provide defaults for the remaining parameters of
this command. A line contour style is defined by the LCSTYLE command (in this section).
CONTOUR
The line contour to plot. Each line contour is automatically assigned a name by the AUI.
The names are of the form LINE_CONTOUR-*, where * is the line contour number, for
example, LINE_CONTOUR-1. This parameter must be entered.
MESHNAME
[PREVIOUS]
The name of the mesh plot upon which the line contour is drawn. See Section 5.2 for
information about mesh plots. You can also enter the special name PREVIOUS to plot onto
the last created mesh plot.
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone that specifies onto which elements line contours are plotted. A zone is
defined by a zone command (see Section 6.2).
LCRENDERING
The name of the line contour rendering depiction. You specify the appearance of the line
contour with this depiction. Currently, this parameter cannot be altered.
LCANNOTATION
The name of the line contour annotation depiction. You specify attributes of the legend that
is plotted along with the line contour. Currently, this parameter cannot be altered.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-161
LCSTYLE
LCSTYLE
NAME CONTOUR MESHNAME ZONENAME LCRENDERING

LCANNOTATION
LCSTYLE groups depictions used when drawing line contours using the LCPLOT command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the line contour style. If there is a previously defined line contour style with this
name, data entered in this command modifies that line contour style. If there is no previously
defined line contour style with this name, a new line contour style is created by this
command.
CONTOUR
The line contour to plot. Each line contour is automatically assigned a name by the AUI.
The names are of the form LINE_CONTOUR-*, where * is the line contour number, for
example, LINE_CONTOUR-1.
MESHNAME
[PREVIOUS]
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone that specifies the elements of the model onto which the line contour
LCRENDERING
The name of the line contour rendering depiction, used to specify the appearance of the line
contour. Currently, there is no corresponding depiction command.
LCANNOTATION
The name of the line contour connotation depiction, used to specify the additional text that
appears with the line contour plot. Currently there is no corresponding depiction command.
5-162
Graph plotting Introduction
Sec. 5.10 Graph plotting

You can create graph plots, which represent x-y data in graphical form. A graph plot can
have a title, graph box, x and y axes and an arbitrary number of curves.
In this section we discuss the creation and modification of graph plots. First we discuss the
SHOW commands, which create graph plots, then we discuss the graph plots themselves.
SHOW commands
There are several commands that create x-y curves:
MATERIALSHOW STRAIN: creates stress-strain curves from a material description
MATERIALSHOW TIME: creates stress-time curves from a material description
USERSHOW: creates a curve from user-supplied x-y data
RESPONSESHOW: creates a curve giving the response of two variables as functions of
load step (time) or mode shape.
LINESHOW: creates a curve giving the responses of two variables along a specified line.
SPECTRUMSHOW: creates curves corresponding to a response spectrum.
SSPECTRUMSHOW: creates curves corresponding to a sweep spectrum.
HARMONICSHOW: creates a curve of the response of a variable as a function of
loading frequency.
RSPECTRUMSHOW: creates a curve corresponding to a random spectrum.
RANDOMSHOW: creates a curve of the power-spectral-density of the response of the
variable.
FSSHOW: creates a curve giving the response of an SDOF system as a function of
natural frequency when the structural loading is given by response spectra.
FTSHOW: creates a curve giving the response of an SDOF system as a function of
natural frequency when the time history of the structure is known.
FOURIERSHOW: creates a curve based on a Fourier analysis of the time history of a
variable.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-163
These commands all end with the word SHOW, so they are referred to as the SHOW
commands. These commands are discussed in this section.
Graph plots
A graph plot is a collection of curves, x and y axes and a graph box, as shown:
The curves are produced by the SHOW commands, see above.

Each graph plot has a name, which you specify when you create the graph plot. You refer to
the graph plot by name when modifying or deleting it.
You add curves to a graph plot using one of the SHOW commands given above. You can
modify the appearance of the graph plot using the GRAPHPLOT command.
The appearance of the graph plot is governed by the graph plot depictions. The graph plot
depictions are groups of settings, each of which controls one part of the graph plot
appearance. Each depiction has a name, which is used in the graph plot command to refer to
the depiction.
5-164
The depictions used by graph plots are:

SUBFRAME: the subframe in which the graph plot is drawn. See the SUBFRAME
GRAPHDEPICTION: attributes of the graph box and graph title. Each graph plot uses
one graph depiction. See the GRAPHDEPICTION command in this section.
AXIS: attributes of a graph plot axis. Each graph plot uses two axis depictions, one for
the X axis and the other for the Y axis. See the AXIS command in this section.
CURVEDEPICTION: attributes of a graph plot curve. Each graph plot uses a separate
curve depiction for each curve. See the CURVEDEPICTION command in this section.
You can group depiction names into a style using the GRAPHSTYLE command. Then you
can specify the graph style in the SHOW command.
Creating graph plots
Each of the SHOW commands has two functions. The first function is to create curves and
the second function is to present the curves, either as curves in a graph plot and/or as listings.
For information about the curves created by the SHOW commands, see the SHOW command
descriptions in this section.
The parameters common to all SHOW commands are GRAPH, GRAPHNAME,
GRAPHSTYLE, CURVEDEPICTION, XAXIS, YAXIS, GRAPHDEPICTION,
SUBFRAME and LIST. GRAPH through SUBFRAME are used when creating or modifying
a graph plot, LIST is used to specify whether or not to generate curve listings.
The SHOW commands create or add curves to graphs if GRAPH = YES. If you do not enter
a GRAPHNAME, the SHOW command generates a new graph name of the form
GRAPHPLOTnnnnn, where nnnnn is a number between 00001 and 99999. In this case, or if
you enter a GRAPHNAME which does not exist, the SHOW command creates a new graph
plot. If you enter a GRAPHNAME which exists, the SHOW command adds its curves to that
graph plot.
The curves created by the SHOW command are plotted according to the curve depiction
specified by CURVEDEPICTION. The axes used are specified using the XAXIS and
YAXIS parameters, each of which accepts an axis depiction name. The graph title and graph
box are specified using the GRAPHDEPICTION parameter, which accepts a graph depiction
name, and the subframe is specified using the SUBFRAME parameter.
The default for the CURVEDEPICTION parameter is determined as follows: If a graphstyle
name is entered, the default is taken from the graphstyle; otherwise the default is that listed in
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-165
the SHOW command description.

The defaults for XAXIS, YAXIS, GRAPHDEPICTION and SUBFRAME are determined as
follows: if the graph name is defined, the default is taken from the graph name; otherwise, if a
graph style name is entered, the default is taken from the graphstyle; otherwise the default is
that listed in the SHOW command description.
In all cases, the depiction names are copied and given names that are based on the name of
the graph plot. The subframe and graph depiction names are the same as the name of the
graph plot. The axis names are the graph plot name with the extension _Xnnnnn (for an X
axis) and _Ynnnnn (for a Y axis), where nnnnn is the axis number. The curve depiction
names are the graph plot name with the extensions _Cnnnnn, where nnnnn is the curve
number.
Modifying graph plots
You can modify an existing graph plot in several ways:
1) Alter the depictions of the graph plot using the depiction commands, then regenerate the
graph plot using the REGENERATE commands. For example:
USERSHOW TEST GRAPHNAME=G1
Creates a graph plot G1.
AXIS G1_X00001 MINVALUE=0.0
Changes the minimum value of the X axis of the graph plot.
REGENERATE
Regenerates the graph plot.
2) Use the GRAPHPLOT command to substitute depictions. For example:
USERSHOW TEST GRAPHNAME=G1
Creates a graph plot G1.
GRAPHPLOT G1 AXIS 1 AUTO_LOG
Substitutes axis depiction AUTO_LOG for the X axis of graph plot G1, then
regenerates the graph plot.
You can delete a graph plot using the DELETE GRAPHPLOT command, by picking the
graph plot with the mouse and then using the PICKED DELETE command or by clearing the
When you delete a graph plot, all of the depictions associated with the name of the graph plot
are automatically deleted as well. Therefore, if you want to create several graph plots with
5-166
the same attributes, you may want to create a graph style with those attributes, then use the
graph style when creating the graph plots. For example:
GRAPHSTYLE GS1 XAXIS=AUTO_LOG YAXIS=AUTO_LOG
Creates a graph style in which the X and Y axes are logarithmic.
USERSHOW TEST1 GRAPHSTYLE=GS1
Creates a graph using this graph style.
FRAME
Clears the graphics window.
USERSHOW TEST2 GRAPHSTYLE=GS1
Creates another graph using this graph style.
Auxiliary commands
The GRAPHPLOT command has the following auxiliary commands:
LIST GRAPHPLOT
Lists all graph plots.
LIST GRAPHPLOT NAME
Lists the depictions for the specified graph plot.
DELETE GRAPHPLOT NAME
Deletes the specified graph plot.
The GRAPHSTYLE command has the following auxiliary commands:
LIST GRAPHSTYLE
Lists all graph styles.
LIST GRAPHSTYLE NAME
Lists the depictions for the specified graph style.
DELETE GRAPHSTYLE NAME
Deletes the specified graph style.
COPY GRAPHSTYLE NAME1 NAME2
Copies the graph style specified by NAME1 to NAME2.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-167
Each of the depiction commands has the following auxiliary commands:

LIST (depiction)
Lists all names for the specified depiction type.
LIST (depiction) NAME
Lists the attributes for the specified depiction name.
DELETE (depiction) NAME
Deletes the attributes for the specified depiction name.
COPY (depiction) NAME1 NAME2
Copies the depiction specified by NAME1 to NAME2.
5-168
MATERIALSHOW STRAIN
MATERIALSHOW STRAIN NAME CURVETYPE STRAINTYPE STRAINF1

STRAINF2 STRESSTYPE STRESSF1 STRESSF2
STRAINRANGE MINSTRAIN MAXSTRAIN NPTS
GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE
CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS
GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST
MATERIALSHOW STRAIN produces stress-strain curves based on the material name
supplied to this command. These curves can be graphed or listed.
NAME
The label number of the material.
CURVETYPE
[material-dependent]
Five types of stress-strain curves can be generated.
UNIAXIAL Uniaxial (simple tension or simple compression) curves.
BIAXIAL
Equibiaxial curves, used for rubber material models
SHEAR
Shear curves, used for rubber material models
STRIP-BIAXIAL Strip biaxial curves, used for rubber material models

STABILITY
STRAINTYPE
STRETCH
Stability curves, used for rubber material models

Stretch.
ENGINEERING Engineering strain

TRUE
True (logarithmic) strain.
STRAINF1
[1.0]
STRAINF2
[0.0]
The strain actually output (plotted or listed) is obtained from the material description strain in
the following way:
output strain = (STRAINF1) (strain from material description) + (STRAINF2)
in which the strain from the material description is computed with the strain type parameter.
STRESSTYPE
ENGINEERING Engineering stress (force per unit original area).
TRUE
True stress (force per unit deformed area).
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-169
MATERIALSHOW STRAIN
STRESSF1
[1.0]
STRESSF2
[0.0]
The stress actually output (plotted or listed) is obtained from the material description stress in
the following way:
output stress = (STRESSF1) (stress from material description) + (STRESSF2)
in which the stress from the material description is computed corresponding to the stress type
parameter.
STRAINRANGE
[AUTOMATIC]
MINSTRAIN
MAXSTRAIN
If STRAINRANGE is AUTOMATIC, then the minimum and maximum strain to be included
in the stress-strain curve are determined automatically from the material description. The
parameters MINSTRAIN and MAXSTRAIN are not used in this case.
If STRAINRANGE is CUSTOM, you enter the minimum (MINSTRAIN) and maximum
(MAXSTRAIN) strains to be included in the stress-strain curve. These numbers are
interpreted corresponding to the way in which strains are output. For example, if strain type =
TRUE, these numbers are interpreted as true strains. The strain factors are also taken into
account. For example, if STRAINF1 = 3.0, these numbers are divided by 3.0 to obtain
material minimum and maximum strains. Note: MAXSTRAIN > MINSTRAIN.
NPTS
Some material descriptions are specified by piecewise linear stress-strain segments. For
these, this parameter is used to display additional points for each segment. In this case you
can also specify that no additional points be computed by setting this parameter to 0.
Other material descriptions are defined as mathematical expressions. For these, NPTS
determines the number of points to compute. In this case you must set this parameter to at
least 1.
GRAPH
[YES]
Creates or updates a graph with the stress-strain curves computed by this command. {YES /
NO}. Currently GRAPH=NO is not implemented.
GRAPHNAME
[GRAPHPLOTnnnnn]
The name of the graph plot. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. If you do not
enter a graphplot name, the program will automatically generate a name of the form
GRAPHPLOTnnnnn where nnnnn is a number between 00001 and 99999. You can also
enter the special name PREVIOUS to add graphs to the last created graph plot.
5-170
MATERIALSHOW STRAIN
GRAPHSTYLE
The name of the graph style, used to provide defaults for the depictions used by the graph
plot. See the introduction to this section for more information.
CURVEDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The names of the curve depiction used to describe the material curves produced by this
command. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the curve legend,
symbols in the curve, etc with this depiction. The only curves that you can control using the
curve depiction name are the material curves themselves. Auxiliary curves plotted by this
command, for example experimental data points, are not controlled by the curve depiction
name.
XAXIS
[DEFAULT_X]
YAXIS
[DEFAULT_Y]
The names of the axis depictions used to describe the X and Y axes of the graph plot. These
parameters are used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the axes attributes, for example
the values contained in the axes, with these depictions.
GRAPHDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the graph depiction. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can
specify the graph attributes, for example the graph title and graph size, with this depiction.
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the subframe into which the graph is plotted. This parameter is used only if
GRAPH = YES.
LIST
[NO]
Specifies whether or not a listing is created with the stress-strain data. {YES / NO}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-171
MATERIALSHOW TIME
MATERIALSHOW TIME
NAME TIMEFAC1 TIMEFAC2 TIMERANGE

MINTIME MAXTIME NPTS STRESS
TEMPERATURE TEMPUNIT ORDINATE ORDFAC1
ORDFAC2 GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE
CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS
MATERIALSHOW TIME produces curves of material response vs time based on the

material name supplied to this command. These curves can be graphed or listed.
NAME
The label number of the material.
TIMEFAC1
[1.0]
TIMEFAC2
[0.0]
The time actually output (plotted or listed) is determined from the actual time in the following
way:
output time = (TIMEFAC1) (actual time) + (TIMEFAC2)
TIMERANGE
[AUTOMATIC]
MINTIME
MAXTIME
If TIMERANGE is AUTOMATIC, then the minimum and maximum times to be included in
the material response curve are determined automatically from the material description. The
parameters MINTIME and MAXTIME are not used in this case. If TIMERANGE is
CUSTOM, you enter the minimum (MINTIME) and maximum (MAXTIME) times to be
included in the material response curve. These numbers are interpreted corresponding to the
way in which times are output, taking the time factors into account. For example, if
TIMEFAC1 = 3.0, these numbers are divided by 3.0 to obtain the actual minimum and
maximum times. Note: (MAXTIME > MINTIME).
NPTS
Some material descriptions are specified by piecewise linear response-time segments. For
these, this parameter is used to display additional points for each segment. In this case you
can also specify that no additional points be computed by setting this parameter to 0.
Other material descriptions are defined as mathematical expressions. For these, NPTS
determines the number of points to compute. In this case you must set this parameter to at
least 1.
5-172
MATERIALSHOW TIME
STRESS
[0.0]
TEMPERATURE
[0.0]
TEMPUNIT
[CELSIUS]
The material response may be a function of the stress and/or temperature as well as the time.
Use these parameters to enter the values of stress and temperature. {CELSIUS /
FAHRENHEIT / KELVIN / RANKINE}
ORDINATE
[CREEP_STRAIN]
This is the quantity to be plotted as a function of time. {CREEP_STRAIN}
ORDFAC1
[1.0]
ORDFAC2
[0.0]
The ordinate value actually output (plotted or listed) is obtained from the material description
ordinate in the following way:
output ordinate = (ORDFAC1) (ordinate from material description) + (ORDFAC2)
GRAPH
[YES]
Specifies whether or not a graph will be created or updated with the material response vs time
curves computed by this command. {YES / NO} Currently GRAPH=NO is not
implemented.
GRAPHNAME
[GRAPHPLOTnnnnn]
The name of the graph plot. This parameter is used only if GRAPH is YES. If you do not
GRAPHSTYLE
The name of the graph style, used to provide the defaults for the depictions used by the graph
CURVEDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the curve depiction used to describe the curves produced by this command. This
parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the curve legend, symbols in the
curve, etc., with this depiction. Only the curves that actually show the material response are
controlled by the curve depiction specified here. Other curves, such as experimental data
points, are not controlled by this curve depiction.
XAXIS
[DEFAULT_X]
YAXIS
[DEFAULT_Y]
parameters are used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the axes attributes, for example
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-173
MATERIALSHOW TIME
the values contained in the axes, with these depictions.

GRAPHDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
GRAPH = YES.
LIST
[NO]
Specifies whether or not a listing will be created with the stress-strain data. {YES / NO}
5-174
USERDATA
USERDATA NAME XLABEL YLABEL

xi yi
USERDATA reads a set of user-supplied XY data (a userdata) and stores the data in the
database. The userdata can be plotted by USERSHOW (in this section).
NAME
The identifying name of the userdata (1 to 30 alphanumeric characters). If there is a
previously defined userdata with the same name, the data entered in this command modifies
that userdata, otherwise a new userdata is created.
XLABEL, YLABEL
[' ']
Labels that specify the types of data represented by the x and y values of the data points.
Each label can be up to 80 alphanumeric characters long. The labels are used only for user
input and output and hence can be arbitrary or blank.
xi yi
An xy point in the userdata. Notice that a userdata point cannot be deleted. If there is a
previously defined userdata with this name, the point xi, yi is appended to that userdata.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-175
USERSHOW
USERSHOW
USERDATA PSTART PEND GRAPH GRAPHNAME

GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS
USERSHOW graphs or lists a curve that you entered using the USERDATA command.
USERDATA
The name of the userdata. A userdata is defined by the USERDATA command (in this
section).
PSTART
PEND
You can specify a range of points in the selected userdata to be plotted. Start point is the
number of the first point in the userdata and end point is the number of the last point in the
userdata. The default is to use all of the points in the userdata.
GRAPH
[YES]
Specifies whether or not a graph is created or updated with the stress-strain curves. {YES /
NO} Currently GRAPH=NO is not implemented.
GRAPHNAME
[GRAPHPLOTnnnnn]
GRAPHSTYLE
CURVEDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The names of the curve depiction used to describe the curve produced by this command. This
curve, etc. with this depiction.
XAXIS
[DEFAULT_X]
YAXIS
[DEFAULT_Y]
parameters are used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the axes attributes, for
example the values contained in the axes, with these depictions.
GRAPHDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
5-176
USERSHOW
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
GRAPH = YES.
LIST
Creates a listing of the userdata. {YES / NO}
[NO]
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-177
RESPONSESHOW
RESPONSESHOW XVARIABLE XPOINT YVARIABLE YPOINT RESPRANGE

XSMOOTHING YSMOOTHING XRESULTCONTROL
YRESULTCONTROL GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE
CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION
SUBFRAME LIST
RESPONSESHOW produces a curve giving the response of two variables as functions of
load step or mode shape. This curve can be graphed or listed.
The first variable of the curve is referred to as the X variable and the second variable is
referred to as the Y variable. Any variable, whether predefined, a resultant, a constant or an
alias, can be used as either the X or Y variable.
To produce a time history curve, set the X variable to TIME.
XVARIABLE
[TIME]
XPOINT
The name of the variable associated with the X axis and the point at which the variable is
evaluated. The variable can be a predefined variable, an alias, a constant or a resultant, see
Section 6.9. The point must have been defined with a model point definition command (see
Section 6.7), unless the X variable is location-independent, in which case the X point is
ignored. You must enter an XPOINT name unless the X variable is location-independent.
YVARIABLE
YPOINT
The name of the variable associated with the Y axis and the point at which the variable is
evaluated. The variable can be a predefined variable, an alias, a constant or a resultant. The
point must have been defined with a model point definition command, unless the Y variable
is location-independent, in which case the Y point is ignored. You must enter a
YVARIABLE name. You must enter a YPOINT name unless the Y variable is locationindependent.
Note: when results from more than one finite element program are stored in the database, the
XPOINT and YPOINT must refer to the same finite element program. If both XVARIABLE
and YVARIABLE are location independent and both XPOINT and YPOINT are not
specified, the current finite element program is used to evaluate the variables (see the
FEPROGRAM command in Section 3.4).
RESPRANGE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the response range that specifies for which load steps, mode shapes, etc, the
variables are to be evaluated. See the response-range commands in Section 6.4.
5-178
RESPONSESHOW
XSMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
YSMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
The names of the smoothing definitions used when evaluating the X variable and the Y
variable. You can smooth none, either or both of the variables by specifying smoothing
definition names. Smoothing definitions are defined by the SMOOTHING command (see
Section 6.6).
XRESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
YRESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
The names of the result control depictions for the X and Y variables. These depictions, along
with the XSMOOTHING and YSMOOTHING definitions, control how the results are
Section 6.6).
GRAPH
[YES]
Specifies whether or not a graph is created or updated with the curve computed by this
command. {YES / NO} Currently GRAPH=NO is not implemented.
GRAPHNAME
[GRAPHPLOTnnnnn]
GRAPHSTYLE
CURVEDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the curve depiction used to describe the curve produced by this command. This
curve, etc., with this depiction.
XAXIS
[DEFAULT_X]
YAXIS
[DEFAULT_Y]
GRAPHDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-179
RESPONSESHOW
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
GRAPH = YES.
LIST
[NO]
Specifies whether this command creates a listing with the response graph data. {YES /
NO}
5-180
LINESHOW
LINESHOW
LINENAME XVARIABLE YVARIABLE RESPONSE

XSMOOTHING YSMOOTHING XWEIGHT YWEIGHT
XRESULTCONTROL YRESULTCONTROL GRAPH GRAPHNAME
GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS
LINESHOW produces a curve giving the response of two variables along a specified line for
a specified load step, mode shape or other response type. This curve can be graphed or listed.
The first variable of the curve is referred to as the X variable and the second variable is
referred to as the Y variable. Any variable, whether predefined, a resultant, a constant or an
alias, can be used as either the X or Y variable.
You can use either of the variables DISTANCE or DISTANCE_POSITION as one of the
variables to create a curve showing a variable as a function of distance along the line.
LINENAME
The name of the line along with the X and Y variable are evaluated. The line name must
have been defined by a model line definition command, see Section 6.8.
XVARIABLE
[DISTANCE]
YVARIABLE
The name of the variables associated with the X and Y axes. Each variable can be a
predefined variable, an alias, a constant or a resultant. See Section 6.9 for information about
variables.
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the response that specifies for which load step, mode shape, etc., the variables
are to be evaluated. See the response commands in Section 6.3.
XSMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
YSMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
The names of the smoothing definitions used when evaluating the X variable and the Y
variable. You can smooth none, either or both of the variables by specifying smoothing
definition names. Smoothing definitions are defined by the SMOOTHING command (see
Section 6.6).
XWEIGHT
[YES]
YWEIGHT
[YES]
If X variable weighting is YES, the X variable values are multiplied by the line point
multiplying factors, if Y variable weighting is YES, the Y variable values are multiplied by
the line point multiplying factors. You can define line point multiplying factors in the model
line definition. {YES / NO}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-181
LINESHOW
XRESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
YRESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
The names of the result control depiction for the X and Y variables. These depictions, along
with the XSMOOTHING and YSMOOTHING depictions, control how the results are
calculated. Result control depictions are specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (see
Section 6.6).
GRAPH
[YES]
GRAPHNAME
[GRAPHPLOTnnnnn]
GRAPHSTYLE
CURVEDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the curve depiction used to describe the curve produced by this command. This
curve, etc., with this depiction.
XAXIS
[DEFAULT_X]
YAXIS
[DEFAULT_Y]
GRAPHDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
GRAPH = YES.
LIST
Creates a listing for the line curve data. {YES / NO}
5-182
[NO]
SPECTRUMSHOW
SPECTRUMSHOW
NAME XPLOTTYPE YPLOTTYPE FACTOR

NFREQUENCIES GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE
SUBFRAME LIST
SPECTRUMSHOW graphs or lists the values of a response spectrum.

You define a response spectrum using the SPECTRUM command (see Section 6.5).
NAME
The name of a response spectrum. The name must correspond to a currently defined response
spectrum.
XPLOTTYPE
[from the response spectrum]
Specifies whether to plot or list the response spectrum in terms of frequencies or periods.
{FREQUENCY / PERIOD}
YPLOTTYPE
[from the response spectrum]
Specifies whether to plot or list the response spectrum values in terms of displacements,
velocities or accelerations. {DISPLACEMENT / VELOCITY / ACCELERATION}
FACTOR
[1.0/(response spectrum factor)]
You can multiply the response spectrum values by FACTOR before plotting or listing them.
NFREQUENCIES
[0]
For the frequency curve in the response spectrum, the values that you input are graphed or
listed. In addition, the frequency curve is sampled at NFREQUENCIES equally spaced
frequencies and these values are also graphed or listed. This option is most useful when the
graph axes types differ from the axes specified with the INPUT-AXES parameter of the
SPECTRUM command (recall that the frequency curve points are considered to be connected
with straight lines in the coordinate system selected by the INPUT-AXES parameter).
GRAPH
[YES]
GRAPHNAME
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-183
SPECTRUMSHOW
GRAPHSTYLE
The name of the graph style, used to provide defaults for the depictions used by the graph
CURVEDEPICTION
[LINE]
The name of the curve depiction used to determine how the curves produced by this
command are graphed. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the
curve legend, symbols in the curve, etc. with this depiction.
XAXIS
[AUTO_LINEAR or AUTO_LOG]
YAXIS
(depending upon the response spectrum)
The names of the axis depictions used to determine how the axes produced by this command
are graphed. This parameter is used only if GRAPH = YES. You can specify the axis
attributes, for example the range of values contained in the axes, with these depictions.
The defaults are chosen to agree with the value of the INPUT-AXES parameter of the
specified response spectrum.
GRAPHDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
specify the graph attributes, for example the graph title, with this depiction.
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
GRAPH = YES.
LIST
Indicates whether to create listings for the response spectrum curves. {YES / NO}
5-184
[NO]
SSPECTRUMSHOW
SSPECTRUMSHOW NAME YPLOTTYPE FACTOR NFREQUENCIES GRAPH

GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS
YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME LIST
SSPECTRUMSHOW graphs or lists the values of a sweep spectrum.
You define a sweep spectrum using the SSPECTRUM command (see Section 6.5).
NAME
The name of a sweep spectrum. The name must correspond to a currently defined sweep
spectrum.
YPLOTTYPE
[(from the sweep spectrum)]
If the sweep spectrum defines ground motion amplitudes, use this parameter to specify
whether to plot or list the sweep spectrum values in terms of displacements, velocities or
accelerations. If the sweep spectrum defines applied load multipliers, then this parameter
must be set to FORCE. {DISPLACEMENT / VELOCITY / ACCELERATION /
FORCE}
FACTOR
[1.0/(sweep spectrum factor)]
You can multiply the sweep spectrum values by FACTOR before plotting or listing them.
NFREQUENCIES
[0]
For the frequency curve in the sweep spectrum, the values that you input are graphed or
SSPECTRUM command (recall that the frequency curve points are considered to be
connected with straight lines in the coordinate system selected by the INPUT-AXES
parameter).
GRAPH
[YES]
GRAPHNAME
GRAPHSTYLE
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-185
SSPECTRUMSHOW
CURVEDEPICTION
[LINE]
XAXIS
YAXIS
(depending upon the sweep spectrum)
attributes, for example the range of values contained in the axes, with these depictions. The
defaults are chosen to agree with the value of the INPUT-AXES parameter of the specified
sweep spectrum.
GRAPHDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
GRAPH = YES.
LIST
Indicates whether to create a listing for the sweep spectrum curve. {YES / NO}
5-186
[NO]
RSPECTRUMSHOW
RSPECTRUMSHOW NAME YPLOTTYPE FACTOR NFREQUENCIES GRAPH

RSPECTRUMSHOW graphs or lists the values of a random spectrum.
You define a random spectrum using the RSPECTRUM command (see Section 6.5).
NAME
The name of a random spectrum. The name must correspond to a currently defined random
spectrum.
YPLOTTYPE
[from the random spectrum]
If the random spectrum defines the power-spectral-density of ground motion amplitudes, use
this parameter to specify whether to plot or list the random spectrum values in terms of
displacements, velocities or accelerations. If the random spectrum defines the powerspectral-density of applied load multipliers, use this parameter to specify whether to graph or
list the random spectrum values in terms of force or decibels. {DISPLACEMENT /
VELOCITY / ACCELERATION / FORCE / DB}
FACTOR
[1.0/(random spectrum factor)]
You can multiply the random spectrum values by FACTOR before plotting or listing them.
NFREQUENCIES
[0]
For the frequency curve in the random spectrum, the values that you input are graphed or
RRSPECTRUM command (recall that the frequency curve points are considered to be
connected with straight lines in the coordinate system selected by the INPUT-AXES
parameter).
GRAPH
[YES]
GRAPHNAME
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-187
RSPECTRUMSHOW
GRAPHSTYLE
CURVEDEPICTION
[LINE]
XAXIS
YAXIS
(depending upon the random spectrum)
attributes, for example the range of values contained in the axes, with these depictions. The
defaults are chosen to agree with the value of the INPUT-AXES parameter of the specified
random spectrum.
GRAPHDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
GRAPH = YES.
LIST
Indicates whether to create a listing for the random spectrum curve. {YES / NO}
5-188
[NO]
HARMONICSHOW
HARMONICSHOW
VARIABLE POINT SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL

FORMULA RESPONSE FMIN FMAX NFREQUENCIES
FSPACING FREQTABLE FACTOR1 FACTOR2 GRAPH
HARMONICSHOW is used in harmonic analysis. It is used to compute the response of a

variable at a point as a function of the loading frequency. The resulting curve is either
graphed or listed.
See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 9.3, for the theory used in the
HARMONICSHOW command.
VARIABLE
POINT
The name of the variable and the point at which the variable is evaluated. The variable can be
a predefined variable, an alias or a resultant (see Section 6.9). The point must have been
defined with a model point definition command (see Section 6.7).
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the smoothing definition used when evaluating the variable. A smoothing
definition is defined with the SMOOTHING command (see Section 6.6).
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result control definition used when evaluating the variable. A result control
definition is defined with the RESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).
FORMULA
[based on the variable]
In order to perform the harmonic analysis calculations, this command must make an
assumption about how the variable is related to the nodal quantities. Use this parameter to
override the program default:
DISPLACEMENT The variable is proportional to the nodal displacements.
VELOCITY
The variable is proportional to the nodal velocities.
ACCELERATION
The variable is proportional to the nodal accelerations.
Note: this parameter is used only if RESPONSE HARMONIC RESULTANT=BEFORE and

CONTROL FILEVERSION=V73.
RESPONSE
The name of a harmonic response, used as a template in the harmonic analysis calculations.
The following parameters of the harmonic response are used: METHOD, OMEGAT,
QUASISTATIC, DAMPINGTABLE, MSTART, MEND, REFTIME, RESULTANT and the
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-189
HARMONICSHOW
data input lines. See the RESPONSE HARMONIC command in Section 6.3.
FMIN
FMAX
The frequency range over which the harmonic response is evaluated, entered in cycles/sec.
NFREQUENCIES
[11]
FSPACING
[LOGARITHMIC]
NFREQUENCIES is the number of frequencies for which the harmonic response is
evaluated, used if FSPACING is LINEAR or LOGARITHMIC. FSPACING can be
LINEAR, LOGARITHMIC, USNRC or ASMEFLOOR. See the notes at the end of this
command for the USNRC and ASMEFLOOR frequency spacing guidelines.
FREQTABLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of a frequency table, used to evaluate the response for additional frequencies.
Currently this parameter is ignored.
FACTOR1
[1.0]
FACTOR2
[0.0]
The result is multiplied by FACTOR1 and added to FACTOR2 before being graphed or
listed.
GRAPH
[YES]
GRAPHNAME
GRAPHSTYLE
CURVEDEPICTION
[LINE]
5-190
HARMONICSHOW
XAXIS
[DEFAULT_X]
YAXIS
[DEFAULT_Y]
GRAPHDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
GRAPH = YES.
LIST
Indicates whether to create a listing for the curve. {YES / NO}
[NO]
Notes:
The USNRC frequency intervals are (as reprinted from USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.122):
Frequency range
(Hertz)
0.0 - 3.0
3.0 - 3.6
3.6 - 5.0
5.0 - 8.0
8.0 - 15.0
15.0 - 18.0
18.0 - 22.0
22.0 - (infinity)
ADINA R & D, Inc.
DF
(Hertz)
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.50
1.0
2.0
3.0
5-191
HARMONICSHOW
The ASMEFLOOR frequency intervals are (as reprinted from the 1992 ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Appendix N, Table N-1226-1):
Frequency range
(Hertz)
0.0 - 1.6
1.6 - 2.8
2.8 - 4.0
4.0 - 9.0
9.0 - 16.0
16.0 - 22.0
22.0 - infinity
5-192
DF
(Hertz)
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
1.0
2.0
3.0
RANDOMSHOW
RANDOMSHOW

FORMULA RESPONSE FMIN FMAX NFREQUENCIES
FSPACING FREQTABLE FACTOR1 FACTOR2 GRAPH
RANDOMSHOW is used in random analysis. It is used to compute the power-spectraldensity of a variable at a point as a function of the loading frequency. The resulting curve is
either graphed or listed.
See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 9.4, for the theory used in the
RANDOMSHOW command.
VARIABLE
POINT
The name of the variable and the point at which the variable is evaluated. The variable can be
a predefined variable, an alias or a resultant (see Section 6.9). The point must have been
defined with a model point definition command (see Section 6.7).
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
definition is defined with the SMOOTHING command (see Section 6.6).
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
definition is defined with the RESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).
FORMULA
[based on the variable]
In order to perform the random analysis calculations, this command must make an assumption
about how the variable is related to the nodal quantities. Use this parameter to override the
program default:
DISPLACEMENT The variable is proportional to the nodal displacements.
VELOCITY
The variable is proportional to the nodal velocities.
ACCELERATION
The variable is proportional to the nodal accelerations.
Note: this parameter is used only if RESPONSE RANDOM RESULTANT=BEFORE and

CONTROL FILEVERSION=V73.
RESPONSE
The name of a random response, used as a template in the random analysis calculations. The
following parameters of the random response are used: CUTOFF, DAMPINGTABLE,
MSTART, MEND, REFTIME, RESULTANT and the data input lines. See the RESPONSE
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-193
RANDOMSHOW
RANDOM command in Section 6.3.

FMIN
FMAX
The frequency range over which the random response is evaluated, entered in cycles/sec.
NFREQUENCIES
[11]
FSPACING
[LOGARITHMIC]
NFREQUENCIES is the number of frequencies for which the random response is evaluated,
used if FSPACING is LINEAR or LOGARITHMIC. FSPACING can be LINEAR,
LOGARITHMIC, USNRC or ASMEFLOOR. See the notes at the end of the
HARMONICSHOW command (in this section) for the USNRC and ASMEFLOOR
guidelines.
FREQTABLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of a frequency table, used to evaluate the response for additional frequencies.
Currently this parameter is ignored.
FACTOR1
[1.0]
FACTOR2
[0.0]
The result is multiplied by FACTOR1 and added to FACTOR2 before being graphed or
listed.
GRAPH
[YES]
GRAPHNAME
GRAPHSTYLE
CURVEDEPICTION
[LINE]
5-194
RANDOMSHOW
XAXIS
[AUTO_LOG]
YAXIS
[AUTO_LOG]
GRAPHDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
GRAPH = YES.
LIST
Indicates whether to create a listing for the curve. {YES / NO}
[NO]
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-195
FSSHOW
responsei
FSSHOW
TYPE POINT RESULTCONTROL FMIN FMAX NFREQUENCIES

FSPACING FREQTABLE SDOFDAMPING ROPTION SMETHOD
XPLOTTYPE PEAKBROADENING CURVESMOOTHING
CURVERAISE RAISETOLERANCE FACTOR1 FACTOR2 DELTAF
GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS
factori
directioni
The FSSHOW command is used in response spectrum analysis to compute the response of a
small SDOF system connected to the structure, as a function of the SDOF system natural
frequency, when the structural loading is given as ground motion response spectra.
The SDOF system is connected to the structure at a single node, called the connection point,
and vibrates in one or more of the three coordinate directions.
The SDOF system natural frequencies can be chosen to be linearly spaced, logarithmically
spaced or spaced according to USNRC or ASME guidelines. In addition, you can supply
additional SDOF system natural frequencies, for example, to correspond to structural
natural frequencies.
Each data input line specifies a load case. The load case defines the response spectrum and
multiplying factor giving the intensity of ground motion, and the direction of SDOF system
vibration. For each load case, the SDOF system response is calculated separately and then
the results for the load cases are combined into a single result.
The curve giving the response as a function of the SDOF system frequency can be smoothed
and the curve peaks broadened.
TYPE
[ACCELERATION]
The quantity that is plotted as a function of SDOF system frequency:
RDISPLACEMENT
maximum relative displacement with respect to ground motion
RVELOCITY
maximum relative velocity with respect to ground motion
ACCELERATION
maximum absolute acceleration
POINT
The name of the point to which the SDOF system is connected. Typically this point
corresponds to a nodal point and is therefore defined using the NODEPOINT command (in
Section 6.7). This parameter must be entered.
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result control definition used when evaluating the quantity. A result control
definition is specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).
5-196
FSSHOW
FMIN
FMAX
The frequency range over which the system response is evaluated, entered in cycles/sec. The
frequency range must be specified.
NFREQUENCIES
[11]
FSPACING
[LOGARITHMIC]
The number of SDOF system natural frequencies for which the response is computed, used if
FSPACING is LINEAR or LOGARITHMIC. FSPACING can be LINEAR, LOGARITHMIC,
USNRC or ASMEFLOOR. See the notes at the end of the HARMONICSHOW command (in
this section) for the USNRC and ASMEFLOOR frequency spacing guidelines.
FREQTABLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of a frequency table, used to evaluate the system response for additional
frequencies. The frequency table also specifies which response peaks are to be broadened
when you request that response peaks be broadened. A frequency table is defined by the
FREQTABLE command (see Section 6.5).
SDOFDAMPING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the damping table used to specify the damping of the SDOF system as a function
of the SDOF system frequency. A damping table is defined by the DAMPINGTABLE
command (see Section 6.5). It is necessary to define a damping table even if the SDOF
system has damping independent of natural frequency.
ROPTION
[UR]
This parameter controls the technique used to avoid numerical difficulties when the SDOF
system natural frequency is nearly equal to a structural natural frequency. See the Theory and
Modeling Guide for more details.
UN
The SDOF system response is computed using the undamped transfer function.
The SDOF system response can be very large when the SDOF system natural
frequency is close to a structural natural frequency.
UR
The SDOF system response is computed using the undamped transfer function
and also with resonance assumptions. The smaller of these two responses is
used.
D1
The SDOF system response is computed using the damped transfer function
with effective damping equal to the SDOF system damping, i.e.
eff = 0
where eff is the effective damping, and 0 is the SDOF system damping.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-197
D2
FSSHOW
Same as D1, but the effective damping is equal to
eff = 0 ( 0 + j )
where j is the modal damping factor for mode j.
D3
Same as D1, but the effective damping is equal to
eff = 02 + ( 0 j ) , 0 j
2
eff = 02 ( 0 j ) , 0 > j
2
SMETHOD
[SRSS]
The method used to combine responses from different load cases, when more than one load
case is specified, either SRSS (square root of the sum of the squares) or ABS (absolute sum
method).
XPLOTTYPE
PEAKBROADENING
CURVESMOOTHING
CURVERAISE
RAISETOL
INPUT-AXES
FACTOR1
FACTOR2
DELTAF
GRAPH
GRAPHNAME
GRAPHSTYLE
CURVEDEPICTION
XAXIS
YAXIS
GRAPHDEPICTION
SUBFRAME
LIST
See the corresponding parameters of the FTSHOW command.
responsei
A response of type response-spectrum that provides a template for the response spectrum
calculations. All parameters of the response except for RESIDUAL are used. The response
5-198
FSSHOW
must be acting in the X, Y or Z directions. See the RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM

command in Section 6.3 for more details.
factori
The response spectrum can be multiplied by this multiplying factor.
[1.0]
directioni
[LOAD]
The direction in which the SDOF system is vibrating, either X, Y, Z or LOAD. When direction
= LOAD, the direction is taken from the direction of the loading given in the specified
response.
Note
ROPTION=D1 to D3 should not be used in conjunction with the CQC method of modalcombinations, see the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-199
FTSHOW
resprangei
FTSHOW
TYPE POINT RESULTCONTROL FMIN FMAX NFREQUENCIES

FSPACING FREQTABLE SDOFDAMPING XGROUND YGROUND
ZGROUND SMETHOD PEAKBROADENING CURVESMOOTHING
CURVERAISE RAISETOLERANCE FACTOR1 FACTOR2
XPLOTTYPE DELTAF GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE
CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME
LIST
factori
directioni
The FTSHOW command is used in response spectrum analysis. It is used to compute the
response of a small SDOF system connected to the structure as a function of the SDOF
system natural frequency, when the time history of the structure is known.
The SDOF system is connected to the structure at a single node, called the connection point,
and vibrates in one of the three global coordinate directions, or in one of the skew coordinate
directions if the connection point node has a skew system.
The SDOF system natural frequencies can be chosen to be linearly spaced, logarithmically
spaced, or spaced according to USNRC or ASME guidelines. In addition, you can supply
additional SDOF system natural frequencies, for example, to correspond to structural natural
frequencies.
Each time interval and/or loading direction is specified by a data input line that contains the
response-range and the loading direction. For each time interval, the SDOF systems are
assumed to start from rest. The SDOF system responses during the time interval are computed
using numerical integration and the maximum responses are recorded. If several data input
lines are specified, the response is calculated separately for each data input line and then the
results are combined using the method specified by parameter SMETHOD.
The curve giving the response as a function of the SDOF system frequency can be smoothed
and the curve peaks broadened.
TYPE
The quantity that is plotted as a function of SDOF system frequency:
DISPLACEMENT
VELOCITY
ACCELERATION
RDISPLACEMENT
RVELOCITY
RACCELERATION
CDISPLACEMENT
5-200
[ACCELERATION]
maximum absolute displacement

maximum absolute velocity
maximum absolute acceleration
maximum relative displacement with respect to ground motion
maximum relative velocity with respect to ground motion
maximum relative acceleration with respect to ground motion
maximum relative displacement with respect to the connection
point
FTSHOW
CVELOCITY
CACCELERATION
maximum relative velocity with respect to the connection point

maximum relative acceleration with respect to the connection
point
POINT
The name of the point to which the SDOF system is connected. Typically this point
corresponds to a nodal point and is therefore defined using the NODEPOINT command (see
Section 6.7).
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result control definition used when evaluating the quantity. A result control
depiction is specified by the RESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).
FMIN
FMAX
The frequency range over which the system response is evaluated, entered in cycles/sec. The
frequency range must be specified.
NFREQUENCIES
[11]
FSPACING
[LOGARITHMIC]
The number of SDOF system natural frequencies for which the response is computed, used if
FSPACING is LINEAR or LOGARITHMIC. FSPACING can be LINEAR, LOGARITHMIC,
USNRC or ASMEFLOOR. See the notes at the end of the HARMONICSHOW command (in
this section) for the USNRC and ASMEFLOOR frequency spacing guidelines.
FREQTABLE
[DEFAULT]
The name of a frequency table, used to evaluate the system response for additional
frequencies. The frequency table also specifies which response peaks are to be broaden when
you request that response peaks be broadened. A frequency table is defined by the
FREQTABLE command (see Section 6.5).
SDOFDAMPING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the damping table used to specify the damping of the SDOF system as a function
of the SDOF system frequency. It is necessary to define a damping table even if the SDOF
system has damping independent of natural frequency. A damping table is defined by the
DAMPINGTABLE command (see Section 6.5).
XGROUND
[NO]
YGROUND
[NO]
ZGROUND
[NO]
If XGROUND = NO, then model displacements in the global X direction are interpreted as
absolute displacements. If XGROUND = YES, then model displacements in the global X
direction are interpreted as relative displacements to any ground motions specified by massproportional loads in the global X direction (if there is more than one ground motion in the
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-201
FTSHOW
global X direction, all of them are used). If XGROUND = an integer, then model
displacements in the global X direction are interpreted as relative displacements to the ground
motions with time function XGROUND. YGROUND and ZGROUND have analogous
meanings for the global Y and Z directions.
XGROUND, YGROUND and ZGROUND always control the interpretation of model
displacements in the global coordinate system, even when the SDOF system vibrates in one
of the skew directions. For example, if there is a mass-proportional loading in the Y direction
corresponding to ground accelerations in the Y direction, set YGROUND=YES. The AUI
will then compute the ground acceleration in the Y direction, transform it into the SDOF
system direction (global or skew) and add it to the ADINA-calculated connection point
acceleration to obtain the total absolute connection point acceleration.
SMETHOD
[SRSS]
The method used to combine responses from different time intervals, when more than one
time interval is specified, either SRSS (square root of the sum of the squares) or ABS
(absolute sum method).
PEAKBROADENING
[NO]
This specifies whether the response peaks are to be broadened. If PEAKBROADENING is
NO, peaks are not broadened. If PEAKBROADENING is YES, then the frequencies given in
the frequency table for which the response is at a local maximum are treated as peaks. Each
peak is broadened by the amount specified in the frequency table. If PEAKBROADENING
is ALL, then all peaks are broadened by the amount specified by parameter DELTAF. See the
figures at the end of this command description.
The peak broadening is performed in the coordinate system given by the INPUT-AXES
parameter.
Note that you can broaden peaks without smoothing the response curve, if
PEAKBROADENING=YES.
CURVESMOOTHING
[NO]
CURVERAISE
[0.0]
RAISETOL
[1.E-5]
This specifies whether the response curve is to be smoothed. If CURVESMOOTHING is NO,
smoothing is not applied. If CURVESMOOTHING is YES, the response curve is smoothed
by shifting responses upwards by an amount of at most CURVERAISE. RAISETOL is a
tolerance used in the smoothing procedure.
If CURVERAISE is small, the smoothed response curve will not be significantly different
that the unsmoothed curve. Increasing CURVERAISE increases the chance that segments
within the smoothed curve will be straight.
5-202
FTSHOW
If CURVERAISE = 0.0, then CURVERAISE is chosen to be 5% of the maximum response

value in the curve.
The smoothing is performed in the coordinate system given by the INPUT-AXES parameter.
Note that you can smooth the response curve without broadening peaks, but smoothing is
most effective when the peaks are broadened as well.
INPUT-AXES
[LOGLOG]
The broadening and smoothing operations take place on a graph in which the axes are either
logarithmic or linear as follows:
LINLIN
LOGLIN
LINLOG
LOGLOG
Linear frequency axis, linear response axis

Logarithmic frequency axis, linear response axis
Linear frequency axis, logarithmic response axis
Logarithmic frequency axis, logarithmic response axis
FACTOR1
[1.0]
FACTOR2
[0.0]
The results are multiplied by FACTOR1 and added to FACTOR2 before being plotted or
listed.
XPLOTTYPE
[FREQUENCY]
This specifies whether the response is graphed or listed as a function of the frequency
(cycles/sec) or period (sec). All input to this command is given in terms of frequencies
regardless of the value of this parameter. {FREQUENCY / PERIOD}
DELTAF
[0.15]
The peak broadening factor, used when PEAKBROADENING is ALL. This is interpreted as
shown in the figure.
GRAPH
GRAPHNAME
GRAPHSTYLE
See the corresponding parameters of the RESPONSESHOW command (in this section).
CURVEDEPICTION
[LINE]
The name of the curve depiction used to determine how the curve produced by this command
is graphed. This parameter is used only if GRAPH=YES. You can specify the curve legend,
symbols in the curve, etc. with this depiction.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-203
FTSHOW
XAXIS
[AUTO_LOG]
YAXIS
[AUTO_LOG]
are graphed. These parameters are used only if GRAPH=YES and if this command is
creating a new graph plot. You can specify the axis attributes, for example the range of
values contained in the axes, with these depictions.
GRAPHDEPICTION
SUBFRAME
LIST
resprangei
The response-range that specifies the time interval over which the transient analysis is
performed. See the RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP command in Section 6.4 for information
about response-ranges. This parameter must be specified. Note that, initially, response-range
DEFAULT corresponds to a time interval containing all solution steps in the analysis.
[1.0]
factori
The model displacements, velocities, accelerations and mass-proportional loadings are
multiplied by factori.
directioni
The direction in which the SDOF system vibrates. {X / Y / Z / A / B / C}. If
directioni = A, B or C, the model point given by the POINT parameter must be a node point.
5-204
FTSHOW
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-205
FOURIERSHOW
FOURIERSHOW

RESPRANGE TGAP FMIN FMAX PRESENTATION
FACTOR1 FACTOR2 GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE
SUBFRAME LIST
The FOURIERSHOW command is used to perform a Fourier analysis of the time history of a
variable evaluated at a point. Either the Fourier coefficients or the power-spectral-density is
computed. The mean-square value of the variable over the time interval is printed in the log
file.
VARIABLE
The name of the variable, either a predefined variable, an alias, a constant or a resultant (see
Section 6.9). The variable name must be specified.
POINT
The name of the point at which the variable is evaluated. If the variable is not locationindependent, POINT must be defined with a model point definition command (see Section
6.7). If the variable is location-independent and POINT is not specified, then the variable is
evaluated using the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command in
Section 3.4).
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
definition is defined using the SMOOTHING command (see Section 6.6).
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
definition is defined using the RESULTCONTROL command (see Section 6.6).
RESPRANGE
[DEFAULT]
The name of the response-range that specifies the start and end time over which the variable
is evaluated, along with the intermediate times at which the variable is evaluated. The
response-range must be of type load-step. See the RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP command in
Section 6.4 for further details.
Initially, the default response-range corresponds to all solution times for which data is loaded.
TGAP
[0.0]
A time interval for which the variable has zero value can be appended to the variable time
history. TGAP must be greater than or equal to zero.
5-206
FOURIERSHOW
FMIN
[0.0]
FMAX
[CUTOFF]
The lowest and highest frequencies for which the Fourier coefficients /
power-spectral-density values are evaluated. FMIN cannot be less than zero and FMAX
cannot be greater than the aliasing cut-off frequency. FMAX=CUTOFF is interpreted as the
aliasing cut-off frequency.
PRESENTATION
[AMPLITUDE]
If PRESENTATION=AMPLITUDE, the amplitude of the Fourier coefficients is calculated; if
PRESENTATION=PSD, the power-spectral-density corresponding to the Fourier
coefficients is calculated.
FACTOR1
[1.0]
FACTOR2
[0.0]
The results are multiplied by FACTOR1 and added to FACTOR2 before being plotted or
listed.
GRAPH
GRAPHNAME
GRAPHSTYLE
CURVEDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
XAXIS
[DEFAULT_X]
YAXIS
[DEFAULT_Y]
GRAPHDEPICTION
SUBFRAME
LIST
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-207
TRACESHOW
TRACESHOW NAME ZONENAME YPLOTTYPE DELTAT GRAPH

GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS
TRACESHOW produces a curve giving the residence time distribution data corresponding to
the particle traces in a trace plot. For more information about particle traces and trace plots,
see Section 5.8.
In its simplest form, the residence time distribution is a plot of the number of particles in the
fluid (or a fluid region) as a function of the time.
The x axis of the plot shows the particle time or solution time, depending upon whether the
trace plot uses quasi-steady flow assumptions or unsteady flow assumptions:
Quasi-steady flow assumptions: The x axis of the plot shows the particle time. The lowest
particle time is the lowest particle time used during any calculation for this trace plot, and
the highest particle time is the highest particle time used during any calculation for this
trace plot. If DELTAT=0.0, the particle times are equally spaced using
TRACECALCULATION PSTEP, otherwise the particle times are equally spaced using
increment DELTAT.
Unsteady flow assumptions: The x axis of the plot shows the actual solution time. The
lowest solution time is the lowest solution time used during any calculation for this trace
plot, and the highest solution time is the highest solution time used during any calculation
for this trace plot. If DELTAT=0.0, the solution times are taken from the times at which
ADINA-F calculated results; otherwise the solution times are equally spaced using
increment DELTAT.
The y axis of the plot can show a variety of data items, see parameter YPLOTTYPE.
The trace plot must plot either single unconnected particles (TRACECALCULATION
OPTION=SINGLE) or pathlines (TRACECALCULATION OPTION=PATHLINE). In
addition, the trace plot must have some particle traces computed; if just the injectors are
plotted, the trace plot cannot be used for residence time distribution calculations.
Note that the trace plot must be displayed before TRACESHOW can be used. After you use
TRACESHOW, then you can delete the mesh plot, so that the graphics window contains
only the graph produced by TRACESHOW.
NAME
[PREVIOUS]
The name of the trace plot from which residence time distribution data is calculated.
5-208
TRACESHOW
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
If ZONENAME=WHOLE_MODEL, then the residence time distribution data is calculated
based on the entire fluid model (in other words, the fluid region is the entire fluid model).
Otherwise, the residence time distribution data is calculated based on the elements in the zone
(the fluid region is the elements in the zone).
The intent of ZONENAME is to allow you to choose a region of the fluid for calculating
residence time distribution data.
YPLOTTYPE
Selects the data plotted on the Y axis.
TNI Total number of particles in the fluid region
TPI Percentage of particles in the fluid region
RNI Rate of change of total number of particles in the fluid region
RPI Rate of change of percentage of particles in the fluid region
VNI Total number of particles that have visited the fluid region
VPI Percentage of particles that have visited the fluid region
TNO Total number of particles not in the fluid region
TPO Percentage of particles not in the fluid region
RNO Rate of change of total number of particles not in the fluid region
RPO Rate of change of percentage of particles not in the fluid region
VNO Total number of particles that have not visited the fluid region
VPO Percentage of particles that have not visited the fluid region
[TNI]
The three letters have the following meanings: T=total quantity, R=rate of change, V=visited;
N=number of particles, P=percentage of particles; I=in fluid region, O=not in fluid region.
When a percentage option is chosen, the denominator is the total number of particles that are
in the entire fluid model at particle time 0.0 (for steady or quasi-steady flow) or at the
reference time of the trace plot (for unsteady flow).
A particle has visited the fluid region if it has entered the fluid region at or before the
current particle time or solution time. Note that if the fluid region is the entire model, then all
particles immediately visit the fluid region; so the visiting options are useful only if the
fluid region is a zone of the model.
DELTAT
[0.0]
The time increment (particle time increment for steady or quasi-steady trace plots) used on
the X axis. If DELTAT=0.0, then the program chooses it automatically as described above.
GRAPH
GRAPHNAME
GRAPHSTYLE
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-209
TRACESHOW
CURVEDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
XAXIS
[DEFAULT_X]
YAXIS
[DEFAULT_Y]
GRAPHDEPICTION
SUBFRAME
LIST
5-210
TFSHOW
TFSHOW
NCUR ARTM FACTOR TSTART TEND TINCREMENT

SOLUTIONTIME REFTIME GRAPH GRAPHNAME GRAPHSTYLE
CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION SUBFRAME
LIST
TFSHOW produces a curve giving the values of the specified time function for various times.
This command provides an easy way to plot a time function.
The time function is taken from the current finite element program, see the FEPROGRAM
command (in Section 3.4).
NCUR
The time function number.
[1]
ARTM
[0.0]
The plotted time function can be shifted by an arrival time, in exactly the same way that the
time function can be shifted by an arrival time when the time function is used by a load.
FACTOR
The time function is multiplied by FACTOR before it is plotted.
[1.0]
TSTART
[(earliest solution time)]
TEND
[(latest solution time)]
The time function is plotted over the range of times given by TSTART and TEND. The
range TSTART to TEND need not be in the range of solution times.
TINCREMENT
[0.0]
The time increment used to sample the time function. Note that when the time function does
not use a time function multiplier, the time function consists of straight lines connecting
successive time function values, and TINCREMENT is not used.
SOLUTIONTIME
[YES]
If SOLUTIONTIME=YES, the time function is also sampled at the solution times, and the
time function sampled at the solution times is marked with a symbol if CURVEDEPICTION=
LINE (the default). If SOLUTIONTIME=NO, the time function is only sampled at the time
function values (and possible time increments selected by TINCREMENT).
REFTIME
[(earliest solution time)]
REFTIME is used only during post-processing, and is used only if there is more than one
porthole file loaded into the database. In that case, there may be more than one set of time
functions loaded into the database (because the time functions can change during a restart
analysis). The time functions that are active at time REFTIME are chosen.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-211
TFSHOW
GRAPH
GRAPHNAME
GRAPHSTYLE
CURVEDEPICTION
[LINE]
XAXIS
[DEFAULT_X]
YAXIS
[DEFAULT_Y]
GRAPHDEPICTION
SUBFRAME
LIST
Notes
The time function is sampled at times taken from the following three lists:
1) List of times in the time function itself, always used.
2) List of times with constant increment TINCREMENT, used is the time function has a
multiplier function.
3) List of solution times, used if SOLUTIONTIME=YES. During pre-processing, the list
is taken from the current time step information. During post-processing, the list is taken
from the actual solution times.
5-212
GRAPHPLOT
GRAPHPLOT
NAME TYPE NUMBER DEPICTION
GRAPHPLOT provides a way for you to modify the appearance of an existing graph plot.
You do this by specifying a new depiction name for the graph depiction or one of the curve
depictions of the graph plot.
NAME
The name of the graph plot. This parameter must be entered.
TYPE
The type of the depiction entered with the remaining parameters of this command. This
parameter must be entered. {GRAPH / AXIS / CURVE}
NUMBER
The number of the axis or curve for which the depiction will be applied. You can determine
the number by using the LOCATOR INQUIRE feature (see Section 4.2) and clicking on the
desired axis or curve. This parameter must be entered if TYPE = AXIS or CURVE.
DEPICTION
[the current depiction]
The name of the depiction used to specify the desired graph, axis or curve attributes. If
TYPE = GRAPH, this must be a graph depiction, if TYPE = AXIS, this must be an axis
depiction, etc.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-213
GRAPHSTYLE
GRAPHSTYLE NAME CURVEDEPICTION XAXIS YAXIS GRAPHDEPICTION

SUBFRAME
GRAPHSTYLE defines a style for the graphing section of the SHOW commands. A style is
a group of depictions. When a style is used in a SHOW command, the depictions in the style
are the default depictions for the command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the graph style. If there is a previously defined graph style with this name, data
entered in this command modifies the graph style, otherwise data entered in this command
defines a new graph style.
CURVEDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the curve depiction, used to specify how the curves added by the SHOW
command are graphed. A curve depiction is defined using the CURVEDEPICTION
XAXIS
[DEFAULT_X]
YAXIS
[DEFAULT_Y]
The name of the axis depictions, used to specify how the axes added by the SHOW
commands are graphed. An axis depiction is defined using the AXIS command (in this
section).
GRAPHDEPICTION
[DEFAULT]
The name of the graph depiction, used to specify certain attributes of the graph itself. A
graph depiction is defined using the GRAPHDEPICTION command (in this section).
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the subframe into which the graph is plotted. A subframe is defined using the
SUBFRAME command (see Section 5.1).
5-214
GRAPHLIST
GRAPHLIST
NAME
GRAPHLIST produces a listing from the curves of a graph plot. The listing is the same as
that produced using the LIST = YES feature of the SHOW commands.
NAME
The name of the graph plot. This parameter must be entered.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-215
GRAPHDEPICTION
GRAPHDEPICTION
NAME TITLE TITLESIZE UNITTSIZE TITLECOLOR

TITLEPLACEMENT TITLEXSTART UNITTXSTART
TITLEYSTART UNITTYSTART TITLESCALE
GRAPHSCALE BOX BOXLINEWIDTH UNITBLWIDTH
BOXCOLOR BOXPLACEMENT BOXWIDTH UNITBWIDTH
BOXHEIGHT UNITBHEIGHT BOXXOFFSET UNITBXOFF
BOXYOFFSET UNITBYOFF
titlei
GRAPHDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing a graph. The attributes that you
can set in this command can be grouped as follows:
1) Graph box attributes
2) Graph title attributes
You assign a name, the graph depiction name, to the attributes set by this command. When
you use a command that creates or modifies a graph plot, specify the graph depiction name
corresponding to the desired graph attributes within the command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the graph depiction. If there is a previously defined graph depiction with this
name, data entered in this command modifies the graph depiction, otherwise data entered in
this command creates a new graph depiction.
TITLE
NONE
[AUTOMATIC]
the graph will be drawn without a title.
AUTOMATIC the graph will be drawn with a title that is determined automatically when
the graph is drawn.
CUSTOM
the graph will be drawn with a title that is entered via the data input lines.
TITLESIZE
[0.25]
UNITTSIZE
[CM]
The size of characters in the title, used only when drawing a graph title. {CM / INCH /
TITLECOLOR
The color of the title, used only when drawing a graph title.
5-216
[CYAN]
GRAPHDEPICTION
TITLEPLACEMENT
[AUTOMATIC]
This parameter is used only when drawing a graph title.
AUTOMATIC Specifies that the title location be calculated automatically by the program
when the graph is drawn.
CUSTOM
Specifies the title location using the parameters described below.
TITLEXSTART
[0.0]
UNITTXSTART
[CM]
TITLEYSTART
[0.0]
UNITTYSTART
[CM]
The X and Y coordinates of the start of the title, specified within the subframe coordinate
system. These parameters are used only when drawing a graph title and when the title
placement parameter is CUSTOM. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
TITLESCALE
[1.0]
A scale factor applied to the title, used only when drawing a graph title. A scale factor
greater than 1.0 magnifies the graph title, a scale factor less than 1.0 shrinks the graph title.
GRAPHSCALE
[1.0]
A scale factor applied to the graph box. A scale factor greater than 1.0 magnifies the graph
box, a scale factor less than 1.0 shrinks the graph box.
BOX
[YES]
Specifies whether or not a graph box is drawn. Notice that the graph box is used to place the
axes even if the graph box is not drawn. {YES / NO}
BOXLINEWIDTH
[0.0]
UNITBLWIDTH
[CM]
The width of the graph box lines, used only when drawing the graph box. Unit: {CM /
INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
BOXCOLOR
The color of the graph box lines, used only when drawing graph box lines.
[CYAN]
BOXPLACEMENT
[AUTOMATIC]
Governs how the graph box is placed within the subframe. If this parameter is AUTOMATIC,
the program automatically places the graph box within the subframe. If this parameter is
CUSTOM, the parameters BOXWIDTH, UNITBWIDTH, BOXHEIGHT, UNITBHEIGHT,
BOXXOFFSET, UNITBXOFF, BOXYOFFSET, UNITBYOFF unit are used to place the
graph box.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-217
GRAPHDEPICTION
BOXWIDTH
UNITBWIDTH
[PERCENT]
BOXHEIGHT
UNITBHEIGHT
[PERCENT]
The width and height of the graph box, used only if BOXPLACEMENT = CUSTOM. Unit:
{CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
BOXXOFFSET
UNITBXOFF
[PERCENT]
BOXYOFFSET
UNITBYOFF
[PERCENT]
The X and Y offset of the graph box from the subframe origin, used only if
BOXPLACEMENT = CUSTOM. Unit: {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS /
POINTS}
titlei
Text input for title if TITLE = CUSTOM.
5-218
AXIS
AXIS NAME MINVALUE MAXVALUE AXISTYPE AXISCOLOR

AXISLINEWIDTH UNITLWIDTH NUMBERSIZE UNITNSIZE ZEROLINE
GRIDLINES MINORTICKS AXISPLACEMENT AXISXSTART
UNITAXSTART AXISYSTART UNITAYSTART AXISLENGTH
UNITALENGTH LABEL LABELCOLOR LABELSIZE UNITLSIZE
LABELPLACEMENT LABELXSTART UNITLXSTART LABELYSTART
UNITLYSTART LABELSCALE TICKDIRECTION RESCALING
labeli
AXIS defines attributes used when drawing axes (either X or Y axes) of a graph plot. The
attributes that you can set can be grouped as follows:
1) Axis range and type
2) Axis drawing attributes
3) Axis location and length
4) Axis label attributes
You assign a name, the axis depiction name, to the attributes set by this command. When you
use a command that creates or modifies a graph plot, specify the axis depiction name
corresponding to the desired axis attributes within the command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the axis depiction. If there is a previously defined axis depiction with this name,
data entered in this command modifies the axis depiction, otherwise data entered in this
command creates a new axis depiction.
MINVALUE
[AUTOMATIC]
MAXVALUE
[AUTOMATIC]
The minimum and maximum values that the axis must contain. For each value, you can
either enter a number or AUTOMATIC to specify that the program will automatically calculate
a value whenever the axis is used.
AXISTYPE
[LINEAR]
Enter LINEAR for a linear axis or LOGARITHMIC for a logarithmic (base 10) axis.
AXISCOLOR
The color of the axis.
[CYAN]
AXISLINEWIDTH
[0.0]
UNITLWIDTH
[CM]
The width of axis lines, including tick marks, the axis zero line and the axis grid lines. {CM
/ INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-219
AXIS
NUMBERSIZE
[0.25]
UNITNSIZE
[CM]
The size of the axis numbers. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
ZEROLINE
[YES]
Indicates whether to draw a line at the axis zero value, see figure at the beginning of this
section. {YES / NO}
GRIDLINES
[NO]
Indicates whether to draw lines at each major tick value, see figure at the beginning of this
section. {YES / NO}
MINORTICKS
[AUTOMATIC]
Between successive major ticks, minor ticks (unlabelled ticks) can be drawn. Enter 0 (zero)
for no minor ticks, a positive number for the desired number of minor ticks or AUTOMATIC
to specify that the number of minor ticks be computed automatically when the axis is used.
AXISPLACEMENT
[AUTOMATIC]
Enter AUTOMATIC to specify that the axis location and length be calculated automatically by
the program when the axis is used. Enter CUSTOM to specify the axis location and length
using the parameters described below.
AXISXSTART
[0.0]
UNITAXSTART
[PERCENT]
AXISYSTART
[0.0]
UNITAYSTART
[PERCENT]
The X and Y coordinates of the start of the axis, specified relative to the graph box coordinate
system. These parameters are used only if AXISPLACEMENT = CUSTOM. Note that if
either unit is PERCENT, the corresponding coordinate is interpreted as a percentage within
the graph box coordinate system. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
AXISLENGTH
[100]
UNITALENGTH
[PERCENT]
The length of the axis, specified relative to the graph box coordinate system. These
parameters are used only if AXISPLACEMENT = CUSTOM. Note that if the unit is
PERCENT, the length is interpreted as a percentage within the graph box coordinate system.
For example, if the axis is used as an X axis, the length is interpreted as a percentage along
the graph box X axis. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
LABEL
[AUTOMATIC]
If LABEL = NONE, the axis will be drawn without a label. If LABEL = AUTOMATIC, the
axis will be drawn with a label that is determined automatically when the axis is used. If
LABEL = CUSTOM, the axis will be drawn with a label that is entered as input data lines to
5-220
AXIS
this command.
LABELCOLOR
The color of the label, used only when drawing an axis label.
[CYAN]
LABELSIZE
[0.25]
UNITLSIZE
[CM]
The size of characters in the label, used only when drawing an axis label. {CM / INCH /
LABELPLACEMENT
[AUTOMATIC]
This parameter is used only when drawing an axis label. Enter AUTOMATIC to specify that
the label location be calculated automatically by the program when the axis is used. Enter
CUSTOM to specify the label location using the parameters described below.
LABELXSTART
[0.0]
UNITLXSTART
[PERCENT]
LABELYSTART
[0.0]
UNITLYSTART
[PERCENT]
The x and y coordinates of the start of the label, specified within the subframe coordinate
system. These parameters are used only when drawing a label and when
LABELPLACEMENT = CUSTOM. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS /
POINTS}
LABELSCALE
[1.0]
A scale factor applied to the label, used only when drawing a label. A scale factor greater
than 1.0 magnifies the axis label, a scale factor less than 1.0 shrinks the axis label.
TICKDIRECTION
[OUT]
The direction of the axis ticks, either IN (towards the graph curves) or OUT (away from the
graph curves).
RESCALING
[YES]
When MINVALUE or MAXVALUE is AUTOMATIC, the axis is rescaled if either: 1) this is
the first curve in the graph in which the axis is used or 2) RESCALING is YES.
Note that if RESCALING is YES, the axis scaling is based upon all curves in the graph, but if
RESCALING is NO, the axis scaling is based upon the first curve in the graph.
The purpose of this parameter is to allow you to automatically set the axis scaling based on
the first curve in the graph and then have all remaining curves use the same axis scaling. To
achieve this, set MINVALUE and MAXVALUE to AUTOMATIC and RESCALING to NO.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-221
AXIS
labeli
Text input data lines for axis depiction label.
5-222
CURVEDEPICTION
CURVEDEPICTION
NAME SYMBOLPLOT SYMBOL SYMBOLSIZE

UNITSSIZE SYMBOLCOLOR SYMBOLSKIP LINETYPE
LINECOLOR LINEWIDTH UNITLWIDTH XLINE
XLINECOLOR XLINEWIDTH UNITXLWIDTH LEGEND
LEGENDSIZE UNITLSIZE LEGENDCOLOR
LEGENDSYMBOL LEGENDPLACEMENT
LEGENDXSTART UNITLXSTART LEGENDYSTART
UNITLYSTART LEGENDSCALE
legendi
CURVEDEPICTION defines attributes used when drawing a curve within a graph plot. The
attributes that you can set can be grouped as follows:
1) Curve symbol attributes
2) Curve line attributes
3) Curve legend attributes
You assign a name, the curve depiction name, to the attributes set by this command. When
you use a command that creates or modifies a graph plot, specify the curve depiction name
corresponding to the desired curve attributes within the command.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the curve depiction. If there is a previously defined curve depiction with this
name, data entered in this command modifies the curve depiction, otherwise data entered in
this command creates a new curve depiction.
SYMBOLPLOT
[YES]
Enter NO for no symbol plotting or YES for symbol plotting. If NO is entered, the values of
parameters SYMBOL, UNITSSIZE, SYMBOLCOLOR and SYMBOLSKIP are ignored.
SYMBOL
[CURVE]
The string (up to 30 characters long) that specifies the symbol to plot at points on the curve.
Use the extended character convention to enter a special symbol or CURVE to specify that the
symbol string is based on the curve number. See the TEXT command in Section 5.12 for the
extended character convention.
SYMBOLSIZE
[3]
UNITSSIZE
[PIXELS]
The size of curve symbols. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
SYMBOLCOLOR
[' ']
The color of curve symbols. You can enter a blank string ' ' to specify that the symbol
color is based on the curve number.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-223
CURVEDEPICTION
SYMBOLSKIP
[AUTOMATIC]
The curve can be marked with the symbol at none, some or all of the curve points:
If SYMBOLSKIP = AUTOMATIC, those curve points designated by the command that
created the curve are marked with the symbol. If SYMBOLSKIP = 0, all curve points are
marked with the symbol. If SYMBOLSKIP is a positive integer, then between every point
marked with the symbol, SYMBOLSKIP points are not marked with the symbol (for example,
if SYMBOLSKIP = 3, then the first, fourth, seventh, ..., curve points are marked with the
symbol).
LINETYPE
[SOLID]
Enter NONE for no lines connecting curve points or SOLID for solid lines connecting curve
points.
LINECOLOR
[' ']
The color of the curve lines, used only when drawing curve lines. You can enter a blank
string ' ' to specify that the curve line color is chosen from the curve number.
LINEWIDTH
[0.0]
UNITLWIDTH
[CM]
The width of the curve lines, used only when drawing curve lines. {CM / INCH /
XLINE
[NO]
Indicates whether to draw "X-Lines" between the curve points and the X axis (these lines are
parallel to the Y axis). {YES / NO}
XLINECOLOR
[' ']
The color of the X-lines, used only when drawing X-lines. You can specify a blank string
' ' to specify that the X-line color is chosen from the curve number.
XLINEWIDTH
[0.0]
UNITXLWIDTH
[CM]
The width of the X-lines, used only when drawing X-lines. {CM / INCH / PERCENT /
PIXELS / POINTS}
LEGEND
[AUTOMATIC]
If LEGEND = NONE, the curve will be drawn without a legend. If LEGEND =
AUTOMATIC, the curve will be drawn with a legend that is determined automatically. If
LEGEND = CUSTOM, the curve will be drawn with a legend that is entered as data input lines
to this command.
5-224
CURVEDEPICTION
LEGENDSIZE
[0.25]
UNITLSIZE
[CM]
The size of characters in the legend, used only when drawing a curve legend. {CM / INCH
/ PERCENT / PIXELS / POINTS}
LEGENDCOLOR
[' ']
The color of the legend, used only when drawing a curve legend. You can enter a blank
string ' ' to specify that the legend color is chosen using the curve number.
LEGENDSYMBOL
[YES]
Indicates whether the curve symbol should be automatically prepended to the curve legend.
{YES / NO}
LEGENDPLACEMENT
[AUTOMATIC]
This parameter is used only when drawing a curve legend. Enter AUTOMATIC to specify that
the legend location be calculated automatically by the program when the curve is drawn.
Enter CUSTOM to specify the legend location using the parameters described below.
LEGENDXSTART
[0.0]
UNITLXSTART
[PERCENT]
LEGENDYSTART
[0.0]
UNITLYSTART
[PERCENT]
The X and Y coordinates of the start of the legend, specified within the subframe coordinate
system. These parameters are used only when drawing a curve legend and when the legend
placement parameter is CUSTOM. Units: {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS /
POINTS}
LEGENDSCALE
[1.0]
A scale factor applied to the legend, used only when drawing a curve legend. A scale factor
greater than 1.0 magnifies the curve legend, a scale factor less than 1.0 shrinks the curve
legend.
legendi
Data input lines containing the legend, used only if LEGEND = CUSTOM.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-225
Movie frames and animations Introduction

The commands in this section are used to create and display animations.
An animation consists of a sequence of frames called a movie. Each movie is assigned a
number, called a movie number. Movie numbers are sequential starting from 1. Each frame
in the movie is called a movie frame. The frames are sequentially numbered starting from 1.
A movie frame can be thought of as a snapshot of the graphics window. Each movie frame is
stored in device-independent form in the database. (Do not confuse a movie frame with a
snapshot file produced by the SNAPSHOT command (in Section 3.3).)
Creating animations
To create an animation, first plot mesh plots, band plots, load plots, etc. You can use the
mouse to reposition and resize the mesh plots. The contents of the graphics window will
become a single representative frame in the animation.
There are several commands that you can use to create the movie frames in an animation:
MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEP: animates the response of the model as a function of
time.
MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE: animates the model moving through a mode shape.
MOVIESHOOT ROTATE: animates the rotation of the model.
MOVIESHOOT CUTPLANE: animates the motion of a cutting plane.
MOVIESHOOT ISOSURFACE: animates the motion of a cutting isosurface by
changing the cutting isosurface threshold value.
MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT: animates the motion of a quasi-steady particle trace by
changing the particle time.
These commands are described in detail later in this section.
In all cases, you specify the movie number of the animation. All of the movie frames created
by a MOVIESHOOT command belong to that movie number.
When you enter a MOVIESHOOT command, the AUI regenerates the graphics window for
each solution time, mode shape angle, rotation angle, etc. You will see each frame as the
AUI regenerates it. (The time required by the AUI to create each movie frame is much longer
than the time required to play back the movie frame during the animation.)
5-226
Sec. 5.11 Movie frames and animations
It is also possible to create a single movie frame from the current graphics window using the
MOVIEFRAME command, see the command description later in this section for details.
Playing back animations and saving animations to disk
Use the ANIMATE command to play back an animation. See the ANIMATE command
description later in this section for details.
When the ANIMATE command is invoked, the movie frames of the specified movie are read
from the database and processed into device-dependent display lists. Once this initial
processing is complete, the movie frames are drawn into the graphics window.
Animations can be performed at any computer terminal / PC / X terminal, although the speed
and quality of animations is computer and graphics terminal dependent. Animations can be
performed over an X Window network.
After the animation is played back, the last movie frame remains in the graphics window until
you use the REFRESH command (in this section) to redisplay the contents of the graphics
window or until you use the FRAME command (in Section 5.1) to clear the graphics window.
Use the MOVIESAVE command (in Section 3.3) to save the frames in a movie to disk. Once
the frames are saved to disk, you can convert the disk file to commonly used PC formats, see
the AUI Primer, problem 7, for an example.
Use the SHOW MOVIEFRAME command to dump each frame in a movie to an image file.
See the MOVIEFRAME command description later in this section for details.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-227
Chap. 5 Display contorl
MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEP
TSTART TEND FRAMES MOVIENUMBER
MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEP creates movie frames by regenerating all mesh plots and their
attachments, such as band plots, over a range of solution times.
All movie frames created by this command are placed into the specified movie number. Any
existing movie frames for the specified movie number are automatically deleted.
TSTART
[EARLIEST]
TEND
[LATEST]
The start and end times in the range of solution times. You can enter a solution time or the
words EARLIEST or LATEST for each of these parameters. LATEST means the latest
solution time for which there are displacements or temperatures (ADINA model),
temperatures (ADINA-T model) or velocities (ADINA-F model) in the database.
FRAMES
[AUTOMATIC]
The total number of movie frames to create in this command. You can enter an integer
greater than or equal to 2, in which case the AUI divides the solution time range into equal
increments and generates a movie frame for each increment. You can also enter the word
AUTOMATIC, in which case the AUI uses all solution times within the range of solution times
for which results were computed.
MOVIENUMBER
[highest defined movie number + 1]
The movie number into which the generated movie frames are placed. Any existing movie
frames are deleted. If you specify a movie number higher than the highest defined movie
number, the AUI creates a new movie number and places the generated movie frames within
it.
When there are multiple solutions for a solution time (see example at the end of the
LOADPORTHOLE command), then there are additional considerations for the FRAMES
parameter, as follows.
When FRAMES=AUTOMATIC, all solutions within the given range of solution times are
selected. When FRAMES=(a number), then only main solutions within the given range of
solution times are selected.
5-228
MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE
MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE ANGLESTART ANGLEEND FRAMES

MOVIENUMBER
MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE creates movie frames by regenerating all mesh plots and
their attachments, such as band plots, varying the eigenvector scaling factor sinusoidally over
a range of angles.
The typical use of MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE is to create movie frames that show one
period of the structural motion as the structure moves in one of its mode shapes.
For each displayed mesh plot, the mode shape that is animated is the mode shape
corresponding to the mesh plot. It is possible to generate movie frames showing several
meshes moving in several mode shapes simultaneously by first displaying mesh plots for
these mode shapes, then using this command. (In this case, each mode shape will appear to
have the same natural frequency.)
The movie frames created by this command can be easily animated using the ANIMATE
command (in this section). The CYCLES parameter of the ANIMATE command replays the
animation through an arbitrary number of cycles. The default values of the MOVIESHOOT
MODE-SHAPE parameters are chosen so that the resulting animation shows the structure
moving through CYCLES periods in one of its mode shapes.
ANGLESTART
[0.0]
ANGLEEND
[AUTOMATIC]
The start and end angles in the angular range, entered in degrees. ANGLEEND can also be
the word AUTOMATIC, in which case ANGLEEND is computed using the formula
ANGLEEND = ANGLESTART + 360.0(FRAMES - 1)/FRAMES
This choice of formula allows you to play back the animation using multiple cycles, as the
angular increment between the last movie frame of a cycle and the first movie frame of the
next cycle is then the same as all of the other angular increments.
FRAMES
[20]
The total number of movie frames to create in this command. In all cases the angular range is
divided into equal increments and a movie frame is generated for each increment, as well as
for the angles ANGLESTART and ANGLEEND. FRAMES must be greater than or equal to
2.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-229
MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE
MOVIENUMBER
[(highest defined movie number + 1)]
frames for this movie number are deleted. If you specify a movie number higher than the
highest defined movie number, the AUI creates a new movie number and places the generated
movie frames within it.
Notes
1) The eigenvector scaling factor is computed as
FACTOR = COS(ANGLE), where
ANGLE = ANGLESTART, ANGLESTART + ANGINC, ... , ANGLEEND,
and ANGINC = (ANGLEEND - ANGLESTART)/(FRAMES - 1)
When ANGLEEND is chosen automatically, ANGINC = 360.0/FRAMES.
2) The scaling factor is applied to the eigenvectors and also to the modal stresses, forces and
reactions.
5-230
MOVIESHOOT ROTATE
MOVIESHOOT ROTATE
AXISROTATE ANGLESTART ANGLEEND

ANGLESENSE FRAMES MOVIENUMBER
MOVIESHOOT ROTATE creates movie frames by regenerating all mesh plots and their
attachments, such as band plots, varying the view rotation of the mesh plots over a range of
angles.
The typical use of MOVIESHOOT ROTATE is to create movie frames showing the mesh
plots rotating completely around an axis.
When you use this command, the AUI regenerates the graphics window for each movie
frame. The time required by the AUI to create each movie frame is much longer than the time
required to play back the movie frame during animation.
The movie frames created by this command can be easily animated using the ANIMATE
command (in this section). You can use the CYCLES parameter of the ANIMATE command
to replay the animation through an arbitrary number of cycles. The default values of the
MOVIESHOOT ROTATE parameters are chosen so that the resulting animation shows the
structure rotating CYCLES times around an axis.
AXISROTATE
The axis about which the mesh plots are rotated.
VIEWX Horizontal axis of the mesh as currently plotted.
VIEWY
Vertical axis of the mesh as currently plotted.
VIEWZ
Axis perpendicular to the graphics window.
[VIEWX]
MODELX Axis parallel to the x axis of the model.

MODELY Axis parallel to the y axis of the model.
MODELZ Axis parallel to the z axis of the model.
ANGLESTART
[AUTOMATIC]
ANGLEEND
[360.0]
The start and end angles in the angular range, entered in degrees. ANGLESTART can also
be the word AUTOMATIC, in which case ANGLESTART is computed using the formula
ANGLESTART = ANGLEEND - 360.0 * (FRAMES - 1)/FRAMES.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-231
MOVIESHOOT ROTATE
This choice of formula allows you to play back the animation using multiple cycles, as the
angular increment between the last movie frame of a cycle and the first movie frame of the
next cycle is the same as the angular increment between each of the movie frames.
ANGLESENSE
The sense of rotation around the axis. {POSITIVE / NEGATIVE}
[POSITIVE]
FRAMES
[20]
The total number of movie frames to create in this command. In all cases the angular range is
divided into equal increments and a movie frame is generated for each increment, as well as
for the angles ANGLESTART and ANGLEEND. FRAMES must be greater than or equal to
2.
MOVIENUMBER
[(highest defined movie number) + 1]
5-232
MOVIESHOOT CUTPLANE
MOVIESHOOT CUTPLANE
START END FRAMES MOVIENUMBER
MOVIESHOOT CUTPLANE creates movie frames by regenerating all mesh plots and their
attachments, such as band plots, shifting the cutting plane along its normal in each frame.
Only those mesh plots in which a cutting surface of type cutplane is used are affected by this
command. See the CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE command in Section 5.2 for information
about defining cutting surfaces of type cutplane.
existing movie frames for the specified movie are automatically deleted.
START
[LOWEST]
END
[HIGHEST]
The coordinates giving the first cutting plane and the last cutting plane location. The
coordinate is measured from the origin of the cutting plane in the direction of the cutting
plane normal. LOWEST means the lowest coordinate for which the cutting plane intersects
the mesh plot and HIGHEST means the highest coordinate for which the cutting plane
intersects the mesh plot.
FRAMES
[20]
The total number of movie frames to create in this command. The cutting plane coordinate is
divided into equal increments between START and END and a movie frame is generated for
each increment, as well as for coordinates START and END. {>= 2}
MOVIENUMBER
movie frames into it.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-233
MOVIESHOOT ISOSURFACE
MOVIESHOOT ISOSURFACE START END FRAMES MOVIENUMBER

MOVIESHOOT ISOSURFACE creates movie frames by regenerating all mesh plots and
their attachments, such as band plots, shifting the threshold value for the cutting isosurface
value in each frame.
Only those mesh plots in which a cutting surface of type isosurface is used are affected by
this command. See the CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE command in Section 5.2 for
information about defining cutting surfaces of type isosurface.
existing movie frames for the specified movie are automatically deleted.
START
[LOWEST]
END
[HIGHEST]
The start and end threshold values. LOWEST means the lowest value in the meshplot and
HIGHEST means the highest value in the meshplot.
FRAMES
[20]
The total number of movie frames to create in this command. The threshold value is divided
into equal increments between START and END and a movie frame is generated for each
increment, as well as for threshold values START and END. {>= 2}.
MOVIENUMBER
movie frames into it.
5-234
MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT
MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT
PTIMESTART PTIMEEND FRAMES

MOVIENUMBER
MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT creates movie frames by regenerating all quasi-steady trace

plots, varying the particle time. See the introduction to Section 5.8 for information about
trace plots. Using this command, you can animate the particle motions of quasi-steady trace
plots.
PTIMESTART
[lowest particle time of any traceplot]
PTIMEEND
[highest particle time of any traceplot]
The start and end particle times. PTIMESTART can be greater than PTIMEEND to show the
particle traces evolving upstream.
FRAMES
[21]
The total number of movie frames to create in this command. In all cases the particle time
range is divided into equal increments and a movie frame is generated for each particle time.
FRAMES must be greater than or equal to 2.
MOVIENUMBER
[(highest defined movie number + 1)]
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-235
MOVIEFRAME
MOVIEFRAME
MOVIENUMBER FRAMENUMBER
MOVIEFRAME creates a movie frame from the graphics displayed in the graphics window.
Movie frames are automatically renumbered when additional movie frames are inserted, or
when movie frames are deleted, so that movie frames and movie numbers always have
sequential numbering without gaps starting from 1.
MOVIENUMBER
The movie number into which the movie frame is added. You can begin a new movie
number by specifying a number larger than the last defined movie number.
{1 to (highest defined movie number + 1)}
FRAMENUMBER
[highest defined frame number for the

specified movie number]
The movie frame is inserted after the movie frame with number FRAMENUMBER.
FRAMENUMBER can be between 0 and the highest defined frame number for the movie.
Auxiliary commands
SHOW MOVIEFRAME MOVIENUMBER FIRST LAST COMMAND
Plots the movie frames of the specified movie number in the specified range onto the
current graphics window. To specify a single movie frame, do not specify a value for
parameter LAST.
When you specify a range of movie frames, the AUI draws the movie frames rapidly in
sequence. The frames will appear to flicker and the result will not be as pleasing as when
the ANIMATE command (in this section) is used.
Parameter COMMAND is used to submit a command to the operating system after each
frame is displayed. Typically the command is used to dump the graphics window to an
image file. The command can include the special variables @W (which substitutes the
window ID of the graphics window), @F (which substitutes the current frame number) or
@[1-9]F (which substitutes the current frame number formatted using 1 to 9 digits).
Note that @F and @5F are identical. The characters W and F can be either upper or lower
case.
Parameter COMMAND can only be used for UNIX versions of the AUI.
As an example showing the use of the COMMAND parameter, for UNIX versions of the
AUI, the command
SHOW MOVIEFRAME COMMAND='xwd -id @w -out demo@f.xwd'
shows the current movie, running the xwd command after each frame is shown. The
5-236
MOVIEFRAME
frames are saved in image files demo00001.xwd, demo00002.xwd, etc. in xwd format.
While the AUI is running the SHOW MOVIEFRAME command, you should ensure that
the AUI graphics window remains visible at all times.
The resolution of the image files will be the same as the resolution of the AUI graphics
window. You can resize the AUI graphics window before using SHOW MOVIEFRAME
if you want to adjust the image file resolution.
The last movie frame will remain on the graphics window until the REFRESH command
(in this section) is used to redisplay the contents of the graphics window or the FRAME
command (in Section 5.1) is used to clear the graphics window.
LIST MOVIEFRAME MOVIENUMBER FIRST LAST
Lists information about the movie frames of a specified movie number. If nothing is
specified for MOVIENUMBER, the AUI lists summary information about all of the
defined movie numbers and movie frames.
DELETE MOVIEFRAME MOVIENUMBER FIRST LAST
Deletes the specified movie frames of the specified movie number.
RESET MOVIEFRAME
Deletes all movie frames of all movie numbers.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-237
ANIMATE
ANIMATE
MOVIENUMBER CYCLES METHOD METHODOPTION MINDELAY

MAXDELAY SWAPINTERVAL
ANIMATE draws the movie frames of the specified movie very rapidly in the graphics
window, producing an animation effect.
ANIMATE does not create movie frames. To create movie frames, see the MOVIEFRAME
and MOVIESHOOT commands in this section.
MOVIENUMBER
The number of the movie to animate.
[highest defined movie number]
CYCLES
The number of times to repeat the animation sequence.
[1]
METHOD
[AUTOMATIC]
METHODOPTION
[plotting system dependent]
The method that the AUI uses to perform the animation. If METHOD = AUTOMATIC, the
AUI selects the method automatically. If METHOD = CUSTOM, the AUI uses the method
selected by METHODOPTION.
METHODOPTION can be DOUBLEBUFFER, BITBLIT or IMMEDIATEDRAW.
DOUBLEBUFFER means that the graphics window memory is divided into two buffers, front
(which is displayed) and back (which is not displayed); the AUI draws the movie frame into
the back buffer, then swaps buffers to display the movie frame. BITBLIT means that the
AUI renders the movie frame into off-screen memory, then copies the memory to on-screen
memory (the copying process is a bitblit process). IMMEDIATEDRAW means that the AUI
immediately draws the movie frame into the graphics window; this process does not work
very well and should be used only when the other methods cannot be used for some reason.
The possible values for METHODOPTION depend on the plotting system. For the X
Window System, METHODOPTION can be DOUBLEBUFFER, BITBLIT and
IMMEDIATEDRAW; the default is BITBLIT (DOUBLEBUFFER may not be available for all
X Window implementations). For OpenGL, METHODOPTION can be DOUBLEBUFFER or
IMMEDIATEDRAW; the default is DOUBLEBUFFER. For Windows GDI, METHODOPTION
can be BITBLIT and IMMEDIATEDRAW; the default is BITBLIT.
MINDELAY
[0]
MAXDELAY
[0]
When the plotting system is the X Window System and METHOD = DOUBLEBUFFER,
MINDELAY and MAXDELAY are interpreted as follows: MINDELAY is the minimum
time (in milliseconds) to delay before swapping buffers and MAXDELAY is the maximum
time (in milliseconds) within which X Window swaps buffers after the time interval specified
by MINDELAY.
5-238
ANIMATE
When the plotting system is OpenGL or METHOD = BITBLIT, MINDELAY controls the
speed of animation playback, with 0 meaning the fastest possible playback speed and larger
values slowing down the playback speed.
Both MINDELAY and MAXDELAY are integer parameters.
SWAPINTERVAL
[0]
When OpenGL is used and METHOD=DOUBLEBUFFER, SWAPINTERVAL gives the
minimum number of retraces between buffer swaps. SWAPINTERVAL = 0 and
SWAPINTERVAL = 1 are the same and result in fastest possible animation playback.
Higher numbers slow down the animation playback.
SWAPINTERVAL can be used only when both the client and server support the
GLX_SGI_swap_control extension; SGI computers support this extension and other
computers may support it as well. However, this extension is not available under MS
Windows.
Note: After you run the ANIMATE command and before you create another movie, the
parameter default values are replaced by the last entered values. For example
ANIMATE CYCLES=5
ANIMATE
ANIMATE
ADINA R & D, Inc.
(repeats the animation 5 times)

(still repeats the animation 5 times)
(clears the last entered values for the parameters)
(repeats the animation once)
5-239
REFRESH
REFRESH
REFRESH redraws the graphics window. As a side effect, any currently displayed movie
frame, either from the SHOW MOVIEFRAME command or from the ANIMATE command,
is cleared (these commands are described in this section).
5-240
TEXT
TEXT
Sec. 5.12 User defined plotting
NAME XP YP HEIGHT ANGLE SPACING SCALE COLOR SUBFRAME

BOX UNITXP UNITYP UNITHEIGHT UNITSPACING
stringi
TEXT draws strings of alphanumeric characters in a plotting subframe.
The text created by this command can be manipulated with the mouse (see Section 4.2).
NAME
The name specifying the text. This name is defined by the USERTEXT command (in this
section). If no name is specified, the text is read from the data input lines of this command.
XP
[50.0]
YP
[50.0]
The coordinates of the first character in the first string. The coordinates are measured in the
plotting subframe coordinate system.
HEIGHT
The height of the plotted characters.
[1.0]
ANGLE
The angle (in degrees) between the strings and the plotting subframe XP axis.
[0.0]
SPACING
The distance between two successive character baselines.
[1.5]
SCALE
[1.0]
The text is scaled by this scale factor before plotting. A scale factor greater than 1.0
corresponds to an enlargement of the text; a scale factor less than 1.0 corresponds to a
shrinking of the text. The scale factor must be greater than zero.
COLOR
The color of the plotted characters.
[INVERSE]
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the subframe within which the text is plotted. A subframe is defined by the
SUBFRAME command (see Section 5.1).
BOX
[NO]
Specifies whether or not a box is drawn around the plotting subframe. {YES / NO}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-241
TEXT
UNITXP
[PERCENT]
UNITYP
[PERCENT]
The units associated with XP and YP. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS /
POINTS}
UNITHEIGHT
[PERCENT]
The unit associated with HEIGHT. {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS /
POINTS}
UNITSPACING
[HEIGHTS]
The unit associated with SPACING. If UNITSPACING = HEIGHTS, SPACING = X
corresponds to a distance of X HEIGHT . {CM / INCH / PERCENT / PIXELS /
POINTS / HEIGHTS}
stringi
A string of at most 80 characters. The string can contain characters, character codes and
character functions. The string must be entered in single quotes, which are not treated as part
of the string.
Character
Any keyboard character, with the exception of @.
Character code
Two numbers, the character set and the character number, that uniquely specify the
character. These are entered in the format
@C[(set),(number)]
For example:
@C[0,(number)]: ASCII character for the given number. For example, @C[0,65]
draws an uppercase A and @C[0,64] draws @.
@C[1,(number)]: Special character. The number can be from 1 to 24, as shown in
the following table:
5-242
TEXT
Character function
A function that modifies the characters that follow it. Functions are:
@F^ (superscript all following characters)
@F_ (subscript all following characters)
@FN (end of superscripting or subscripting)
Format code
A code that alters the placement of characters. Normally all characters on an
entered line are drawn in order and characters on different input lines are plotted
on different lines. You can use the following format codes to alter the placement
of characters:
@N
All characters after this code are placed on a new line.
@I[(heights)]
The next character code is drawn at a distance of (heights)HEIGHT from
the beginning of the line. This code can be used to vertically align
characters. It is most useful when the plotting system uses a
proportionally-spaced font. (Heights) can be a real number.
@,
When this code is entered at the end of a line, the carriage return is
suppressed.
You can enter an arbitrary number of strings.
Example 1
TEXT
'abcABC'
'abc@C[1,3]'
'x@F_ij@FN = y@F^kl@FN'
'abc@,'
'ABC'
DATAEND
plots
abcABC
abc+
xij = ykl
abcABC
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-243
TEXT
Example 2
TEXT
This is a very long string @,
that goes on and on and on.
DATAEND
plots
This is a very long string that goes on and on and on.
5-244
USERTEXT
USERTEXT NAME
stringi
USERTEXT defines text strings (a usertext) that can be plotted using the TEXT command (in
this section).
NAME
The name of the usertext. If there is a previously defined usertext with this name, data
entered in this command is used to modify that usertext. If there is no previously defined
usertext with this name, this command creates a new usertext.
stringi
A string of at most 80 characters. See the TEXT command in this section for further details.
Auxiliary commands
LIST USERTEXT
Lists all usertext names.
LIST USERTEXT NAME
Lists the strings within the specified usertext.
DELETE USERTEXT
Deletes the specified usertext.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-245
UDRAW
UDRAW NAME XP YP ANGLE SCALE COLOR SUBFRAME BOX UNITXP

UNITYP UNITCOORDINATES
xui yui
UDRAW draws line segments of the specified color in the specified subframe. The points
defining the line segments can come from either the USERSEGMENT command (in this
section) or the data input lines of this command.
The line segments can be either connected or unconnected, as described below.
One possible use of UDRAW is to draw a company logo in the graphics window.
All coordinates are in the usersegment coordinate system. The coordinates are transformed to
the plotting subframe coordinate system as shown in the figure.
The line segments created by this command can be manipulated with the mouse (see Section
4.2).
NAME
The name specifying a usersegment. This name is defined using the USERSEGMENT
command (in this section). If no name is specified, the points are read from the data input
lines of this command.
XP
YP
The reference coordinate of the usersegment in the plotting subframe (see figure).
[0.0]
[0.0]
ANGLE
[0.0]
The angle of the usersegment coordinate system, relative to the plotting subframe coordinate
system (see figure). The angle is entered in degrees.
SCALE
[1.0]
The usersegments are scaled by this scale factor before plotting. The scale factor modifies
the unit associated with usersegment data. The scale factor must be greater than zero.
COLOR
The color of the line segments.
[INVERSE]
SUBFRAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the subframe depiction that specifies into which subframe to draw the line
segments. A subframe is defined by the SUBFRAME command (see Section 5.1).
5-246
UDRAW
BOX
[NO]
Specifies whether or not the program draws a box around the plotting subframe. {YES /
NO}
UNITXP
[PERCENT]
UNITYP
[PERCENT]
The units associated with XP and YP. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT / PIXELS /
POINTS}
UNITCOORDINATES
[PERCENT]
Specifies the unit associated with the coordinates. {CM / INCHES / PERCENT /
PIXELS / POINTS}
xui yui
The X and Y coordinates of point i. Notice that a point cannot be deleted. The coordinates
are interpreted in the usersegment coordinate system (see figure).
If both xi and yi are less than 1E10, a line segment is drawn from the current position to (xui,
yui) and the current position is updated to (xui, yui).
If either xi or yi is greater than 1E10, no line segment is drawn and the current position is
replaced by the next coordinate for which xi and yi are both less than 1E10. This feature
allows you to draw unconnected line segments.
Examples
1)
USERSEGMENT TWOBOX
0.5 0.5 / 1.5 0.5 / 1.5 1.5 / 0.5 1.5 / 0.5 0.5
1E10 1E10
2.0 0.5 / 3.0 0.5 / 3.0 1.5 / 2.0 1.5 / 2.0 0.5
UDRAW TWOBOX
This example draws two boxes. The point (1E10, 1E10) is used to separate the
second box from the first box.
2)
UDRAW
0.5 0.5 / 1.5 0.5 / 1.5 1.5 / 0.5 1.5 / 0.5 0.5
1E10 1E10
2.0 0.5 / 3.0 0.5 / 3.0 1.5 / 2.0 1.5 / 2.0 0.5
DATAEND
This example draws the same line segments as the first. However, the points are not
named (i.e., stored in a usersegment) and therefore must be reentered if you want to draw
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-247
UDRAW
these line segments in a future plot.

3)
UDRAW SCALE=1.4
0.5 0.5 / 1.5 0.5 / 1.5 1.5 / 0.5 1.5 / 0.5 0.5
1E10 1E10
2.0 0.5 / 3.0 0.5 / 3.0 1.5 / 2.0 1.5 / 2.0 0.5
DATAEND
This example draws boxes that are 1.4 times as large as those drawn in example 2.
5-248
USERSEGMENT
USERSEGMENT
NAME
xi yi
USERSEGMENT defines line segments (a usersegment) that can be plotted using the
UDRAW command (in this section).
NAME
The name of the usersegment. If there is a previously defined usersegment with this name,
data entered in this command modifies that usersegment. If there is no previously defined
usersegment with this name, a new usersegment is created by this command.
x i, y i
The X and Y coordinates of point i. Notice that a usersegment point cannot be deleted. The
unit of the x and y coordinates is set in the UDRAW command (in this section).
Auxiliary commands
LIST USERSEGMENT
Lists all usersegment names.
LIST USERSEGMENT NAME
Lists the points within the specified usersegment.
DELETE USERSEGMENT
Deletes the specified usersegment.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-249
USERNODALDATA
USERNODALDATA
NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE UNDEFINED UVALUE
nodei valuei
USERNODALDATA defines nodal data that can be plotted or listed by other commands,
such as BANDPLOT.
NAME
The name of the usernodaldata. If there is a previously defined usernodaldata with this name,
data entered in this command modifies that usernodaldata. If there is no previously defined
usernodaldata with this name, a new usersegment is created by this command.
It is not allowed to specify the name of a previously defined variable.
SUBSTRUCTURE
The number of the substructure (0 for the main structure) to which the nodes belong.
[0]
REUSE
The number of the reuse or cyclic part to which the nodes belong.
[1]
UNDEFINED
[EMPTY]
The value assigned to a node that is not in the data input lines table {EMPTY/UVALUE}.
UVALUE
[0.0]
If UNDEFINED=UVALUE, then the value assigned to a node that is not in the data input
lines table is UVALUE.
nodei
A node number, in the current finite element program, and in the specified substructure and
reuse.
valuei
The value assigned to the node.
[0.0]
Notes
When you use the AUI to visualize user nodal data, you need not load the entire porthole file.
Only the model definition in the porthole file is necessary. To load only the model definition,
use the command LOADPORTHOLE CREATE ... RANGE=NONE. Note that loading only
the model definition is much faster and takes much less disk space than loading the entire
porthole file, especially for large models.
The usernodaldata name is considered to be a variable name by the other plotting and listing
commands.
5-250
USERNODALDATA
A band plot will not plot on elements for which any of the nodal values are empty. This
feature is useful if you just want to plot your data over part of the model.
Example
*
* Load just the model definition into the AUI
*
LOADPORTHOLE CREATE 'my_model.port' RANGE=NONE
*
* Import data sets
*
USERNODALDATA MY_FIRST_DATA_SET
1 10.0
2 11.0
...
10000 -3.0
DATAEND
USERNODALDATA MY_SECOND_DATA_SET
1 2.3
2 3.4
...
10000 -3.5
DATAEND
*
* Plot the first data set in a band plot
*
FRAME
MESHPLOT
BANDPLOT VAR=MY_FIRST_DATA_SET
*
* Plot the second data set in a band plot
*
FRAME
MESHPLOT
BANDPLOT VAR=MY_SECOND_DATA_SET
*
* Combine data sets, and plot the combined data set as
* a band plot
*
RESULTANT MY_COMBINED_DATA_SET 'MY_FIRST_DATA_SET +
MY_SECOND_DATA_SET'
FRAME
MESHPLOT
BANDPLOT VAR=MY_COMBINED_DATA_SET
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-251
USERNODALDATA
Auxiliary commands
LIST USERNODALDATA
Lists all usernodaldata names.
LIST USERNODALDATA NAME
Lists the usernodaldata data.
DELETE USERNODALDATA
Deletes the specified usernodaldata.
5-252
COLORTABLE
Sec. 5.13 Plotting definitions
COLORTABLE
redi greeni bluei colori
DELETE colori
COLORTABLE allows you to manipulate the color table, which gives the red-green-blue
(RGB) intensities corresponding to color names. All color names specified in other
commands must be listed in the color table.
The color table is stored in the database. When a database is initialized, a predefined color
table is initialized. The number of colors that you can specify in the color table is unlimited.
See Section 1.10 for more information about color names.
redi greeni bluei
The red-green-blue intensities corresponding to colori. The intensities must be between 0.0
and 1.0.
colori
The name of colori (up to 30 alphanumeric characters). If colori is already present in the color
table, its definition is updated using the specified values of redi, greeni, bluei.
Auxiliary commands
LIST COLORTABLE
Lists the current color definitions. The listing is sorted in ascending color name order.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
5-253
Chapter 6
Display and post-processing definitions
CONTROL
Sec. 6.1 Settings
CONTROL PLOTUNIT VERBOSE ERRORLIMIT LOGLIMIT UNDO PROMPT

AUTOREPAINT DRAWMATTACH DRAWTEXT DRAWLINES
DRAWFILLS AUTOMREBUILD ZONECOPY SWEEPCOINCIDE
SESSIONSTORAGE DYNAMICTRANSFORM UPDATETHICKNESS
AUTOREGENERATE ERRORACTION FILEVERSION INITFCHECK
SIGDIGIT AUTOZONE PSFILEVERSION
CONTROL defines certain parameters that control program behavior.
Certain parameters of this command are used when maximum backwards compatibility with
previous versions of the AUI is required.
PLOTUNIT <not currently active>
VERBOSE <not currently active>
[PERCENT]
[YES]
ERRORLIMIT <not currently active>
[0]
LOGLIMIT <not currently active>
[0]
UNDO
[5]
The UNDO parameter controls the number of commands that can be undone using the UNDO
command (see Section 4.1). If UNDO = -1, the UNDO command cannot be used and the
AUI cannot recover from an error when a command runs, if UNDO = 0, the UNDO
command cannot be used, but the AUI can recover from an error when a command runs, if
UNDO = 1, UNDO can be used to undo the effects of the previous command, if UNDO = 2,
UNDO can be used to undo the effects of the previous two commands, etc. Setting UNDO =
-1 can significantly speed up the processing of batch files.
PROMPT
[UNKNOWN]
Controls the default behavior for prompts which may arise from various commands.
NO
No command prompts will be issued this is useful in batch mode
eliminating any interaction.
YES
Command prompts are always issued.
UNKNOWN
Command prompts are issued only when necessary.
AUTOREPAINT
[YES]
When AUTOREPAINT = YES, the AUI automatically repaints that area of the graphics
window that is exposed to the removal or motion of overlapping windows or dialog boxes.
You may want to set AUTOREPAINT to NO to suppress the repainting; in that case, you can
use the REFRESH command (in Section 5.11 whenever you want to repaint the graphics
window.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-1
Chap. 6 Display and post-processing definitions
CONTROL
DRAWMATTACH
[YES]
When DRAWMATTACH = YES, mesh plot attachments (such as band plots) are drawn.
Otherwise, they are not drawn. One use of this option is to turn off drawing of mesh plot
attachments before moving the mesh plots with the mouse.
DRAWTEXT
DRAWLINES
DRAWFILLS
These options control the drawing of text, lines and fills:
EXACT
Use the requested colors while drawing.
[EXACT]
[EXACT]
[EXACT]
SATURATED Convert all colors to saturated colors before drawing.

GRAY
Convert all colors to gray scales before drawing.
INVERSE
Convert all colors to the INVERSE color before drawing (the INVERSE
color is the opposite of the background color).
NO
Do not draw.
AUTOMREBUILD
[YES]
When you enter a command that alters the geometry or finite element model, the AUI
rebuilds all corresponding data structures so that the model can be replotted. This feature can
be deactivated by setting AUTOMREBUILD = NO (in this case, if you want to plot the
model, you must use the ADINA-IN commands ADINA, ADINA-T or ADINA-F to rebuild
the model beforehand).
Setting AUTOMREBUILD = NO can significantly speed up the processing of batch files.
ZONECOPY
[NO]
Controls whether the commands BANDPLOT, MESHPLOT, ELINEPLOT,
EVECTORPLOT, LCPLOT, REACTIONPLOT, BANDSTYLE, MESHSTYLE,
ELINESTYLE, EVECTORSTYLE, LCSTYLE, REACTIONSTYLE create copies of the
input zones. Zone copies are always created by these commands in AUI 7.0, but not in later
versions of the AUI. The preferred setting of ZONECOPY is NO, but YES may be necessary
to read input/session files produced for/by AUI 7.0. { YES / NO }.
Session files produced by the AUI 7.0 will probably not work unless ZONECOPY = YES,
see note 4 for an example.
During model definition, when using active zones to keep geometry and finite element
entities in functional parts, mesh plots are only updated properly when ZONECOPY = NO,
see note 5 for an example.
6-2
CONTROL
Sec. 6.1 Settings
SWEEPCOINCIDE
[YES]
Controls whether the SURFACE/VOLUME REVOLVED/EXTRUDED geometry definition
commands of ADINA-IN check for coincident lines and surfaces, as well as for coincident
vertices (points). AUI 7.0 did not attempt to connect adjacent surfaces/volumes, resulting in
duplicate lines and surfaces from such sweep geometry definitions. The default in AUI 7.1
and higher is to connect adjacent surfaces/volumes whenever possible. However, AUI 7.0
input/session files which contain such geometry definitions will probably not work, so it may
be necessary to set SWEEPCOINCIDE = NO to correctly process older input files.
SESSIONSTORAGE
[YES]
If SESSIONSTORAGE = YES, subsequent commands are stored in the AUI database. You
can output these commands using the COMMANDFILE command (see Section 3.4). In the
event of a system crash, you can retrieve these commands by opening the AUI temporary
database, then by issuing the COMMANDFILE command.
If SESSIONSTORAGE = NO, commands are not stored and cannot be retrieved. You can set
SESSIONSTORAGE to NO when you are reading the commands from a batch file to
eliminate the overhead of storing the commands within the AUI database.
DYNAMICTRANSFORM
[YES]
Controls how the program indicates the transformation when you move, resize or rotate
graphics using the mouse. If DYNAMICTRANSFORM=YES, the program redraws all
picked graphics completely and redraws all other graphics that overlap the picked graphics.
If DYNAMICTRANSFORM=PARTIAL, the program partially redraws all picked graphics
and does not redraw overlapping graphics. If DYNAMICTRANSFORM=NO, the program
indicates the transformation using a bounding box.
UPDATETHICKNESS
[YES]
When you change the thickness of geometry surfaces or faces, all elements generated onto the
surfaces or faces are automatically updated with the updated thickness. {YES / NO}
In AUI 7.2 and lower, elements are not automatically updated. Therefore you may need to set
UPDATETHICKNESS=NO so that input files constructed for use with AUI 7.2 and lower
work correctly.
AUTOREGENERATE
[NO]
If AUTOREGENERATE=YES, the program regenerates the graphics after you run a
command that changes the model definition. This parameter only applies to commands that
are run from the command-line (or read from a file); it does not apply to dialog box input
from the user interface. Note that the user interface always regenerates the graphics after you
use a dialog box that changes the model definition. {YES / NO}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-3
CONTROL
ERRORACTION
[CONTINUE]
If ERRORACTION=CONTINUE, then, when the AUI detects an error, the AUI will continue
to process commands. If ERRORACTION=SKIP, then, when the AUI detects an error, the
AUI will skip the remaining commands, up to the next READ END command, if any. An
error is defined as one of the following two events:
1) A message of one of the following types is written: INPUT ERROR, ERROR,
SEVERE ERROR, INTERNAL ERROR, ALERT.
2) A memory overflow is detected.
The typical use of this feature is to prevent the AUI from creating a data file when there are
errors in the batch file, or when a memory overflow occurs while processing the batch file.
ERRORACTION only affects commands read from a batch command file. ERRORACTION
does not affect commands run from the dialog boxes or icons. It also does not affect
commands entered at the command window, or entered at the command-line prompt.
FILEVERSION
[V88]
This parameter tells the AUI which algorithms to use during subsequent commands. Use this
flag to request algorithms from previous versions of the AUI. For example, if you
constructed a batch file in AUI 8.3, set FILEVERSION=V83 to specify that the AUI 8.2
algorithms should be used in processing the file. {V73 / V74 / V75 / V80 / V81 /
V82 / V83 / V84 / V85 / V86 / V87 / V88}.
INITFCHECK
[NO]
This parameter tells the AUI whether or not to consider subsequent commands as part of an
initialization file. If INITFCHECK=NO, subsequent commands are not considered part of an
initialization file, if INITFCHECK=YES, subsequent commands are considered part of an
initialization file.
When INITFCHECK=YES, the AUI does not check resultants and aliases for errors.
Therefore resultants and aliases can be included in initialization files when
INITFCHECK=YES. Also the AUI always allows the use of the FEPROGRAM command
when INITFCHECK=YES.
SIGDIGITS
[6]
This parameter controls the number of significant digits used in listings. Between 1 and 16
significant digits can be requested.
AUTOZONE
[YES]
When AUTOZONE=YES, the AUI automatically creates zones for many common parts of
the model, such as element groups, contact surfaces and geometry bodies. See the description
in the Zones - Introduction section of this manual (Section 6.2.) { YES / NO }
6-4
CONTROL
Sec. 6.1 Settings
For models with many element groups or geometry bodies, you may want to turn off the
AUTOZONE feature to save storage and CPU time.
PSFILEVERSION
[V0]
This parameter gives the Parasolid version number used for saving Parasolid files. For
example, V150 means to save in Parasolid version 15.0 format. V0 means the Parasolid
version used to compile the AUI. { V0 / V80 / V90 / V91 / V100 / V110 /
V111 / V120 / V121 / V130 / V140 / V150 / V161}
Notes
1) One important use of parameters DRAWTEXT, DRAWLINES, DRAWFILLS is when
making plots in black and white for reports. In this case you might use DRAWTEXT =
INVERSE, DRAWLINES = INVERSE, DRAWFILLS = GRAY.
2) The drawing parameters apply both to graphics as displayed on the screen and to graphics
as produced using SNAPSHOT or MOVIESAVE (see Section 3.3).
3) One use of DRAWFILLS = SATURATED is to speed up shaded color image drawing,
especially using X Window System graphics; all shades of each color are converted to the
same color, resulting in significantly fewer color changes.
4) Example of a session file that will not work unless ZONECOPY = YES:
*
LOADPORTHOLE OPERATIO=CREATE FILE=...
*
MESHPLOT MESHSTYL=DEFAULT ZONENAME=WHOLE_MODEL RESPONSE=DEFAULT,
MODELDEP=DEFAULT VIEW=DEFAULT MESHWIND=DEFAULT PLOTAREA=DEFAULT,
SUBFRAME=DEFAULT ELDEPICT=DEFAULT NODEDEPI=DEFAULT,
BOUNDEPI=DEFAULT GPDEPICT=DEFAULT GLDEPICT=DEFAULT,
GSDEPICT=DEFAULT GVDEPICT=DEFAULT MESHREND=DEFAULT,
MESHANNO=DEFAULT FRONDEPI=DEFAULT CONDEPIC=DEFAULT,
VSDEPICI=DEFAULT CRACKDEP=DEFAULT RESULTCO=DEFAULT
*
NODEDEPICTIO NAME=MESHPLOT00001 SYMBOLPL=YES SYMBOL='@C[1,5]',
SYMBOLCO=GREEN SYMBOLSI=0.150000005960000 UNITSYMB=CM NUMBER=NO,
NUMBERCO=GREEN NUMBERSI=0.250000000000000 UNITNUMB=CM
@STARTMODIFY
@ENDMODIFY
*
MESHPLOT NAME=MESHPLOT00001 MESHSTYL=DEFAULT ZONENAME=MESHPLOT00001,
RESPONSE=MESHPLOT00001 MODELDEP=MESHPLOT00001 VIEW=MESHPLOT00001,
MESHWIND=MESHPLOT00001 PLOTAREA=MESHPLOT00001,
SUBFRAME=MESHPLOT00001 ELDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001,
NODEDEPI=MESHPLOT00001 BOUNDEPI=MESHPLOT00001,
GPDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001 GLDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001,
GSDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001 GVDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001,
MESHREND=MESHPLOT00001 MESHANNO=MESHPLOT00001,
FRONDEPI=MESHPLOT00001 CONDEPIC=MESHPLOT00001,
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-5
CONTROL
VSDEPICI=MESHPLOT00001 CRACKDEP=MESHPLOT00001,
RESULTCO=MESHPLOT00001
The second mesh plot requires a zone name MESHPLOT00001; this zone
name is produced by the first MESHPLOT command by a copy. Notice
that the initial mesh plot works regardless of the value of CONTROL ZONECOPY.
5) Example of commands that work unexpectedly unless ZONECOPY = NO:
MESHPLOT ZONE=PART1
ACTIVEZONE
CLEAR
'PART1'
DATAEND
LINE STRAIGHT 1 1 2
REGENERATE
We expect that the REGENERATE command will draw line 1, as line 1 has been added to
active zone PART1 and the mesh plot contains zone PART1. However the REGENERATE
command will only draw line 1 if CONTROL ZONECOPY = NO.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CONTROL
Lists the values of the parameters set by the CONTROL command.
6-6
Zones Introduction
Sec. 6.2 Zones
Zones - Introduction
You can select parts of the model using zones. A zone is a collection of elements, nodes,
contact segments, radiosity segments, geometry points, geometry lines, geometry surfaces,
geometry volumes, geometry edges, geometry faces, geometry bodies, rigid links and
constraint equations.
There are two purposes for zones:
1) To specify the elements, nodes, geometry, etc., on which a specified command acts. For
example, the MESHPLOT command (in Section 5.2) plots the contents of the specified
zone.
2) To organize the parts of the model into functional units. For example you can put all of
the nodes, elements, geometry for a hinge within a model into a zone named HINGE.
When you start the AUI, there is a zone, WHOLE_MODEL, which is defined to contain the
entire model.
There are several commands that allow you to create or modify zones:
BOXZONE: Selects contents that lie within specified boxes.
CGZONE*: Selects contact groups.
COMBZONE: Combines previously defined zones.
CSZONE*: Selects contact surfaces.
EGZONE*: Selects element groups.
ELZONE*: Selects elements and element layers.
RADGZONE*: Selects radiosity surface groups.
RADZONE*: Selects radiosity surfaces and segments.
ZONE: Explicitly specifies the contents of a zone.
These commands are described in detail later in this section.
In each of these commands, you specify a zone name. Whatever you select in the zone
command is either added to or subtracted from the specified zone. If the zone name does not
exist, it is created, otherwise it is modified.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-7
Zones Introduction
The commands marked with a * are retained for backwards compatibility with AUI version
7.0. You may find it easier to use the ZONE command if you want to specify the elements,
contact surfaces and radiosity segments in a zone.
Predefined zones
The predefined zone WHOLE_MODEL contains everything in the database. When you load
a porthole file, the AUI creates a zone for the corresponding finite element program, with the
name of the finite element program.
If CONTROL AUTOZONE=YES, the AUI creates predefined zones for each of the indicated
items.
Element group: EG(N)
Contact group: CG(N)
Contact surface: CS(N)
Substructure: S(N)
Zoom-model: ZM(N)
Main structure: MS
Reuse: R(N)
Cyclic part: CP(N)
Radiosity group: RG(N)
Geometry body: GB(N)
Bolt elements: BOLTS (all elements in all bolt element groups)
where (N) is the element group, contact group, etc. number. For example, in a model with 10
element groups, the AUI creates zones EG1, EG2, ..., EG10.
In a model with multiple cyclic parts, the element and contact group zones contain data for all
cyclic parts; e.g. zone EG1 contains element group 1 of each cyclic part.
One important use of the AUTOZONE feature is to support the Color FE Model icon, so if
you are going to use this icon, make sure that the AUTOZONE feature is turned on.
For models with many element groups or geometry bodies, you may want to turn off the
AUTOZONE feature to save storage and CPU time.
Referenced zones and active zones
It is allowed for a zone to explicitly reference another zone by name.
It is allowed to designate one or more zones as being "active". The AUI updates all active
zones as you create or modify the model definition during preprocessing.
6-8
Zones Introduction
Sec. 6.2 Zones
These features are implemented so that the AUI can emulate the "layer" concept of CAD
programs. This is best illustrated by an example.
Suppose you are building a model that includes, among other parts, a spring and a hinge. At
the beginning of the model definition, you can define empty zones SPRING and HINGE:
ZONE SPRING
@CLEAR
DATAEND
ZONE HINGE
@CLEAR
DATAEND
Before you start working on the spring, you designate zone SPRING to be active.
ACTIVEZONE
@CLEAR
'SPRING'
DATAEND
Then, as you alter the model definition, zone SPRING is automatically updated. When you
start to work on the hinge, you designate zone HINGE to be active.
ACTIVEZONE
@CLEAR
'HINGE'
DATAEND
Then, as you alter the model definition, zone SPRING doesn't change and zone HINGE is
automatically updated.
To plot just the spring, you can create a mesh plot using zone SPRING.
MESHPLOT ZONE=SPRING
As you continue to work on the spring, you can update the mesh plot using the
REGENERATE command (see Section 5.1). Similarly, you can create a mesh plot using
zone HINGE, and as you continue to work on the hinge, you can update the mesh plot using
the REGENERATE command. (Note: It is necessary for the ZONECOPY parameter of the
CONTROL command in Section 6.1 to be set to NO for the mesh plots to be properly
updated; ZONECOPY = NO is the default setting.)
To plot both the spring and the hinge, you can create a zone SPRING_HINGE that references
both the spring and the hinge:
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-9
Zones Introduction
ZONE SPRING_HINGE
'ZONE SPRING'
'ZONE HINGE'
DATAEND
MESHPLOT ZONE=SPRING_HINGE
Again, you can work on the spring and the hinge, and update the mesh plot using the
REGENERATE command.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ZONE
Lists the names of all zones.
LIST ZONE NAME
Lists the contents of the specified zone.
DELETE ZONE NAME
Deletes the specified zone.
COPY ZONE NAME1 NAME2
Copies the zone specified by NAME1 to NAME2. Any existing zone with name NAME2 is
redefined.
See also
Commands that accept zone names:
MESHPLOT (Section 5.2),
BANDPLOT (Section 5.4)
EVECTORPLOT (Section 5.5)
ELINEPLOT (Section 5.6)
REACTIONPLOT (Section 5.7)
TRACEPLOT (Section 5.8)
SMOOTHING (Section 6.6)
MASS-SELECT (Section 6.6)
MESHINTEGRATION (Section 6.7)
MESHMAX (Section 6.7)
ZONEEXCEED, ZONEMAX, ZONELIST (Section 7.2)
6-10
ZONE
ZONE
Sec. 6.2 Zones
NAME NODEATTACH GEOMATTACH
selectioni
'SUBTRACT' selectioni
Defines a zone as a list of selections. See below for the specification of selections.
NAME
The name of the zone. If the zone does not exist, it will be created by this command. The
zone name must be specified.
NODEATTACH
[YES]
If NODEATTACH = YES, then specifying elements, contact surfaces or radiosity surfaces
automatically includes the attached nodes in the zone. If NODEATTACH = NO, then only
nodes that are explicitly specified as selections are included in the zone.
GEOMATTACH
[YES]
If GEOMATTACH = YES, then specifying geometry automatically includes the attached
geometry in the zone. For example, specifying a geometry surface automatically includes the
attached geometry lines and geometry points. If GEOMATTACH = NO, then only geometry
that are explicitly specified as selections are included in the zone.
selectioni
A selection string used to select an element or range of elements, a node or range of nodes,
etc. By default, the selection is added to the zone. But you can also indicate that the
selection be subtracted from the zone using the SUBTRACT keyword.
When using the command-line interface, it is necessary to enclose the selection (and the
optional SUBTRACT keyword) in quotes so that the selection is not interpreted as a
command. When using the dialog box, it is not necessary to enclose the selection in quotes.
Selections:
NODE
ELEMENT
CONTACT SURFACE
CONTACT SEGMENT
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-11
ZONE
LAYER
ELEMENT LAYER
RIGID LINK
CONSTRAINT EQUATION
GEOMETRY SHEET or SHEET
PROGRAM
SUBSTRUCTURE
REUSE
CYCLIC PART
ELEMENT GROUP
CONTACT GROUP
RADIOSITY GROUP
RADIOSITY SURFACE
RADIOSITY SEGMENT
CONTACT PAIR
GEOMETRY_MODEL or GEOMETRY MODEL
WHOLE_MODEL or WHOLE MODEL
INTERFACE ELEMENT
BOUNDARY SURFACE ELEMENT
BOUNDARY SURFACE
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE
ZOOM-MODEL
BCELL
ELEMENTSET
GLUEMESH SURFACE
GLUEMESH SURFACE SEGMENT
COHESIVE SURFACE
COHESIVE SURFACE SEGMENT
The characters needed to uniquely specify an object name are indicated in bold.
The object number is the desired number or range of numbers. As examples, here are some
valid objects:
'ELEMENT 1'
'ELEMENTS 1 TO 10'
'PROGRAM ADINA'
'GEOMETRY FACE 2'
6-12
ZONE
Sec. 6.2 Zones
Notice that a range of numbers may be specified using the keyword TO.
When a single object is not sufficient to entirely specify the desired selection, then the
selection must be specified using the OF keyword. For example, if there is more than one
element group in the model, then you use
'ELEMENT 1 OF ELEMENT GROUP 1'
to specify element 1 of element group 1. Other examples using the OF keyword are
'ELEMENT GROUP 10 OF CYCLIC PART 2'
'GEOMETRY EDGE 1 OF GEOMETRY BODY 2'
'ELEMENTS 2 TO 4 OF ELEMENT GROUP 5 OF PROGRAM ADINA-T'
You can type selections in either upper, lower or mixed-case and you can abbreviate object
names.
To specify a rigid link, use the syntax S:M where S is the slave node number and M is the
master node number, for example
'RIGID LINK 4:7'
to specify the rigid link with slave node 4 and master node 7.
To specify a constraint equation, use the syntax N:I where N is the slave node number and I is
the degree of freedom, for example
'CONSTRAINT EQUATION 4:3'
to specify the constraint equation for ADINA slave node 4, z-translation. Degree of freedom
numbers are as follows:
ADINA:
1 = x-translation, 2 = y-translation, 3 = z-translation,
4 = x-rotation, 5 = y-rotation, 6 = z-rotation, 7 = fluid degree of freedom
ADINA-T:
1 = temperature, 2 = radiosity
ADINA-F:
1 = x-velocity, 2 = y-velocity, 3 = z-velocity, 4 = pressure, 5 = temperature
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-13
ZONE
Here are some examples in which the SUBTRACT keyword is used:

ZONE ABC
'WHOLE_MODEL'
'SUBTRACT CONTACT GROUP 1'
DATAEND
ZONE DEF
'ELEMENT GROUP 1'
'SUBTRACT ELEMENTS 3 TO 5'
DATAEND
The CONTACT PAIR selection can only be used for node-node contact groups.
6-14
BOXZONE
Sec. 6.2 Zones
BOXZONE NAME POSITION

xmini xmaxi ymini ymaxi zmini zmaxi partiali operationi
BOXZONE selects entities such as elements, contact surfaces, etc. to be included in or
deleted from a zone. Those entities that lie partially or completely within boxes are selected.
The boxes are defined in the model global coordinate system and are specified by the box
coordinates. The boxes are aligned with the global coordinate system axes.
NAME
The name of the zone which will be modified.
POSITION
xmini
xmaxi
ymini
ymaxi
zmini
zmaxi
Coordinates of the box defining the zone, in the model global system.
[YES]
partiali
Indicates whether entities that lie partially within the box are selected. {YES / NO}
operationi
[ADD]
Indicates whether entities selected are to be added to or subtracted from the zone definition.
{ADD / SUBTRACT}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-15
CGZONE
CGZONE
NAME FEPROGRAM SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE POSITION
groupi operationi
CGZONE selects contact surface groups to include in or delete from a zone.
NAME
FEPROGRAM
[ADINA]
The name of the finite element program to which the contact groups belong. Currently this
parameter must be set to ADINA.
SUBSTRUCTURE
[0]
The number of the substructure to which the contact groups belong. Currently this parameter
must be set to zero (0).
REUSE
[1]
The number of the reuse or cyclic part to which the contact groups belong. Currently this
parameter must be set to one (1).
POSITION
groupi
Label number of a contact surface group.
operationi
[ADD]
Indicates whether selected entities are to be added to or subtracted from the zone definition.
{ADD / SUBTRACT}
6-16
COMBZONE
COMBZONE
Sec. 6.2 Zones
NAME POSITION
zonenamei operationi
COMBZONE selects zones to include in or delete from a zone.
NAME
The name of the zone to be modified.
POSITION
zonenamei
Name of a zone (other than parameter NAME).
[ADD]
operationi
{ADD / SUBTRACT}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-17
CSZONE
CSZONE
NAME FEPROGRAM SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP POSITION
surfacei operationi
CSZONE selects contact surfaces from a contact surface group to include in or delete from a
zone.
NAME
FEPROGRAM
[ADINA]
The name of the finite element program to which the contact surfaces belong. Currently this
parameter must be set to ADINA.
SUBSTRUCTURE
The number of the substructure to which the contact surfaces belong. Currently this
parameter must be set to zero (0).
[0]
REUSE
[1]
The number of the reuse or cyclic part to which the contact surfaces belong. Currently this
parameter must be set to one (1).
GROUP
The number of the contact surface group to which the contact groups belong.
POSITION
surfacei
Label number of a contact surface within the contact surface group given by parameter
GROUP. If the contact group is a node-node contact group, this parameter is the pair
number.
[ADD]
operationi
{ADD / SUBTRACT}
6-18
EGZONE
EGZONE
Sec. 6.2 Zones
NAME FEPROGRAM SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE POSITION
groupi operationi
EGZONE selects element groups to include in or subtract from a zone.
NAME
FEPROGRAM
[current finite element program]
The name of the finite element program to which the element groups belong.
SUBSTRUCTURE
[0]
The number of the substructure (0 for the main structure) to which the element groups belong.
REUSE
The number of the reuse or cyclic part to which the element groups belong.
[1]
POSITION
groupi
Label number of an element group.
[ADD]
operationi
{ADD / SUBTRACT}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-19
ELZONE
ELZONE NAME FEPROGRAM SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP POSITION

elementi layeri operationi
ELZONE selects elements/layers from an element group to include in or delete from a zone.
NAME
FEPROGRAM
[current finite element program]
The name of the finite element program to which the elements and layers belong.
SUBSTRUCTURE
[0]
The number of the substructure (0 for the main structure) to which the elements and layers
belong.
REUSE
The number of the reuse or cyclic part to which the elements and layers belong.
[1]
GROUP
The number of the element group to which the elements and layers belong.
POSITION
elementi
Element label number.
[1]
layeri
Layer number within element. If the element does not have layers, this parameter is ignored.
operationi
[ADD]
{ADD / SUBTRACT}
6-20
RADGZONE
RADGZONE
Sec. 6.2 Zones
NAME FEPROGRAM POSITION
groupi operationi
RADGZONE selects radiosity surface groups to include in or subtract from a zone.
NAME
FEPROGRAM
[ADINA-T]
The name of the finite element program to which the radiosity surface groups belong. Note
that radiosity surfaces can currently only belong to ADINA-T.
POSITION
groupi
Label number of a radiosity surface group.
[1]
operationi
[ADD]
Indicates whether this group is to be added to or subtracted from the zone definition. {ADD
/ SUBTRACT}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-21
RADZONE
RADZONE NAME FEPROGRAM GROUP POSITION

surfacei segmenti operationi
RADZONE selects radiosity surface segments to include in or subtract from a zone.
NAME
FEPROGRAM
[ADINA-T]
The name of the finite element program to which the radiosity surface segments belong. Note
that radiosity surfaces can currently only belong to ADINA-T.
GROUP
[1]
The number of the radiosity surface group to which the radiosity surfaces and segments
belong.
POSITION
surfacei
Label number of a radiosity surface.
[1]
segmenti
Label number of a radiosity segment. Enter 0 to specify all segments in the surface.
[0]
operationi
Indicates whether this surface/segment is to be added to or subtracted from the zone
definition. {ADD / SUBTRACT}
[ADD]
6-22
ACTIVEZONE
Sec. 6.2 Zones
ACTIVEZONE
zonei
Specifies that one or more zones are to be active. When a change is made to the model,
corresponding changes are made in the active zones. See the discussion at the beginning of
this section for an example of the use of this command.
zonei
The name of a zone. The zone must have been already defined, but may be empty.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ACTIVEZONE
Lists the currently active zones.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-23
COLORZONE
COLORZONE
zonei colori
Specifies the colors of one or more zones. All currently displayed meshplots (except those
for which MESHRENDERING COLORZONE=NO) are updated with the given colors. All
successive meshplots with MESHRENDERING COLORZONE=YES are created using the
given colors. See Section 5.2 for information about meshplots and the MESHRENDERING
command.
zonei
The name of a zone. The zone must exist, although it may be empty.
colori
The name of a color.
Notes:
The colors are first set using the attributes of the mesh plot, for example ELDEPICTION
ORCOLOR, GSDEPICTION LINECOLOR, etc. Then all text, lines, fill areas, etc.,
corresponding to each zone specified in the COLORZONE command are updated with the
given color. Zones are processed in the order in which they appear in the data input lines.
For example, the command sequence:
ELDEPICTION ORCOLOR=BLUE DECOLOR=CYAN
MESHPLOT
draws the mesh plot with the original configuration in blue and the deformed configuration in
cyan. Then the commands
ZONE EG1
'ELEMENT GROUP 1'
DATAEND
ZONE EG2
'ELEMENT GROUP 2'
DATAEND
COLORZONE
'EG1' RED
'EG2' GREEN
DATAEND
update the mesh plot so that all text, lines, etc of element group 1 are drawn in red and all
text, lines, etc., of element group 2 are drawn in green. Any text, lines, etc. that belong to
both element groups are drawn in green. Both the original and deformed configurations of
6-24
COLORZONE
Sec. 6.2 Zones
the element groups are drawn in red and green.

Then the commands
FRAME
MESHPLOT
create a new mesh plot. Since there are zones specified in the COLORZONE command, text,
lines, etc. of element group 1 are drawn in red and text, lines, etc. of element group 2 are
drawn in green.
Then the commands
MESHRENDERING COLORZONE=NO
MESHPLOT
create a new mesh plot. Since MESHRENDERING COLORZONE=NO, the COLORZONE
command is not used to determine the colors of the mesh plot.
Auxiliary commands
LIST COLORZONE
Lists the currently assigned zone colors.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-25
Response data Introduction

Responses are used to specify "when" or "for which solution" results are to be evaluated.
There are currently eight types of response available in the AUI, each with its own command.
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP: load-step (time step) response
RESPONSE MODE-SHAPE: mode shape response
RESPONSE RESIDUAL: residual (static correction) response
RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM: response calculated using the response
spectrum method
RESPONSE HARMONIC: response calculated using the harmonic vibration analysis
method
RESPONSE RANDOM: response calculated using the random vibration analysis
method
RESPONSE RESPONSE-COMBINATION: response calculated as a combination of
other responses
RESPONSE ENVELOPE: response calculated by evaluating several responses and
selecting a value, such as the most extreme value.
These commands are described in this section.
The results associated with LOAD-STEP, MODE-SHAPE and RESIDUAL responses are
calculated by the finite element solution program, and the RESPONSE command simply
labels the desired results. (But RESPONSE LOAD-STEP can also be used to perform
interpolation in time between two solutions calculated by the finite element solution
program.)
The results associated with the remaining responses are calculated by the AUI from
information calculated by the finite element solution program. The actual calculations are
done when the response is used by another command, not when the response is defined. The
RESPONSE command is used to specify the methods used for the calculations.
As with other depictions, there is a DEFAULT response and a FACTORY response. These
are defined when finite element information is loaded into the AUI. There is also a
DEFAULT_( ) response for each response type, for example DEFAULT_LOAD-STEP,
DEFAULT_MODE-SHAPE, etc. These responses provide the defaults for the corresponding
RESPONSE commands as described below. When you update the DEFAULT response, the
6-26
Sec. 6.3 Response data
corresponding DEFAULT_( ) response is automatically updated.

Two responses cannot have the same name, even if the responses are of different types.
When using a response command, if the specified name is of the same type, the attributes of
the name provide the defaults for the remaining command parameters. Otherwise the defaults
are taken from the corresponding DEFAULT_( ) response name.
Auxiliary commands
LIST RESPONSE
Lists all response names currently stored in the database.
LIST RESPONSE NAME
Lists the attributes of the specified response.
DELETE RESPONSE NAME
Deletes the specified response name from the database. The solution data corresponding to
the response is, of course, not deleted.
COPY RESPONSE NAME1 NAME2
Copies the response data of NAME1 to NAME2.
See also
Commands that accept a response name of any type:
MESHPLOT (Section 5.2)
LOADPLOT (Section 5.3)
LINESHOW (Section 5.10)
POINTLIST, POINTEXCEED, POINTMAX, LINELIST, LINEEXCEED,
LINEMAX, ZONELIST, ZONEEXCEED, ZONEMAX (Section 7.2).
Commands that accept a response name of type RESPONSE-SPECTRUM:
FSSHOW (Section 5.10)
Commands that accept a response name of type HARMONIC:
HARMONICSHOW (Section 5.10)
Commands that accept a response name of type RANDOM:
RANDOMSHOW (Section 5.10)
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-27
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP
NAME TIME SEQUENCE
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP associates a name with a load step solution.

NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name to be associated with the response. The same response can be associated with more
than one name. If there is a previously defined response of type load-step with this name,
data entered in this command alters the previously defined response. Otherwise a new
response of type load-step is created by this command.
TIME
[LATEST]
The solution time that specifies the solution response, or the word LATEST. If you specify a
solution time then, when this response is used in a command, this time must lie between the
earliest and latest solution times for which there is data loaded into the database. If you
specify the word LATEST then, when this response is used in a command, the command will
use the latest solution time for which there is displacement or temperature data (ADINA
model), temperature data (ADINA-T model) or velocity data (ADINA-F model) loaded into
the database.
If the solution time does not correspond to a solution time for which results were calculated
by the solution program, the AUI will interpolate the results in time to solution time TIME
using data from the two closest bracketing solution times for which results were calculated by
the solution program.
SEQUENCE
[MAIN]
The sequence number that specifies the solution response, or the word MAIN to specify the
main solution. This parameter is used only when there are multiple solutions loaded for a
solution time, see notes at the end of this command.
LOADPORTHOLE command), then there are additional considerations regarding
interpolation in time, as follows.
All interpolations in time use main solutions. For example, if multiple solutions are stored at
both times 1.0 and 2.0, then, if TIME=1.5, the main solutions from times 1.0 and 2.0 are used
to compute the solution at time 1.5. This interpolation is allowed only when
SEQUENCE=MAIN; it is an error to specify, for example, TIME=1.5, SEQUENCE=0.
6-28
RESPONSE MODE-SHAPE
RESPONSE MODE-SHAPE NAME MODE REFTIME

RESPONSE MODE-SHAPE associates a name with a mode shape solution.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
than one name. If there is a previously defined response of type MODE-SHAPE with this
name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined response. Otherwise a new
response of type MODE-SHAPE is created by this command.
MODE
[1]
The mode shape number corresponding to the response. When this response is used in a
command, there must be data for this mode shape loaded into the database.
REFTIME
[LATEST]
In nonlinear analysis, it is possible to calculate mode shapes corresponding to the structure
characteristics at a reference time. For example, mode shapes from a linearized buckling
analysis are calculated from the structure characteristics at a specified time. You specify the
reference time using this parameter. Either enter the reference time directly or specify the
reference time using the word LATEST.
If you specify the reference time directly then, when this response is used in a command,
there must be mode shape data corresponding to this reference time in the database. If you
specify the word LATEST then, when this response is used in a command, mode shape data
corresponding to the last reference time for which there is data in the database is used.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-29
RESPONSE RESIDUAL
RESPONSE RESIDUAL NAME DIRECTION REFTIME

RESPONSE RESIDUAL associates a name with a residual (static correction) response
computed by ADINA. This response is computed by ADINA in response spectrum analysis
and is used to approximate the structural response not included in any of the modes used in
the response spectrum analysis.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
than one name. If there is a previously defined response of type residual with this name, data
entered in this command alters the previously defined response. Otherwise a new response of
type residual is created by this command.
DIRECTION
The ground motion direction corresponding to this response. {X/Y/Z}
REFTIME
[LATEST]
In nonlinear analysis, it is possible to calculate mode shapes and residual responses
corresponding to the structure characteristics at a reference time. Either enter the reference
time directly or enter LATEST to request the last reference time for which data is stored.
6-30
RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM
RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM NAME METHOD DIRECTION SPECTRUM

DAMPINGTABLE RESIDUAL MSTART
MEND REFTIME DURATION CUTOFF AX
AY AZ RESULTANT
RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM associates a name with a calculation method used by
the AUI to compute responses in response spectrum analysis.
Refer to the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 9.1, for the theory used in
response spectrum analysis.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
than one name. If there is a previously defined response of type response-spectrum with this
name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined response. Otherwise a new
response of type response-spectrum is created by this command.
METHOD
The method used for the combination of the modal responses.
SRSS
Square root of the sum of the squares.
ABS
Absolute sum method.
TENPERCENT
Ten percent method.
DOUBLESUM
Double sum method (with absolute value sign)
DSC
Double sum combination method (without absolute value sign)
ALGEBRAIC
Algebraic sum method.
CQC
Complete-quadratic-combination method.
DIRECTION
The direction in which the ground motion is acting {X / Y / Z / GENERAL}. If
DIRECTION=GENERAL, then use parameters AX, AY, AZ to specify the ground motion
direction.
SPECTRUM
The name of the loading response spectrum. The response spectrum must have been defined
using the SPECTRUM command (see Section 6.5).
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-31
DAMPINGTABLE
The name of the damping table (which specifies the damping for the modes). The damping
table must have been defined using the DAMPINGTABLE command (see Section 6.5).
RESIDUAL
The method used in combining the residual responses with the modal responses.
NO
Residual terms are not included.
[NO]
SRSS The SRSS method is used.

ABS
The absolute values of the residual terms are added to the modal response terms
when METHOD = SRSS, ABS, TENPERCENT, DOUBLESUM, DSC or CQC. The
residual terms are added with the same signs as the modal response terms when
METHOD = ALGEBRAIC.
When residual terms are included, all calculated modes must be included in the response
spectrum calculations (see parameters MSTART and MEND).
MSTART
[LOWEST]
MEND
[HIGHEST]
The first and last mode shapes included in the response spectrum calculations. You can either
enter the mode numbers directly or use the words LOWEST and HIGHEST to indicate the
lowest and highest modes available.
REFTIME
[LATEST]
In nonlinear analysis, it is possible to calculate mode shapes and residual responses
corresponding to the structure characteristics at a reference time. Either enter the reference
time directly or enter LATEST to request the last reference time for which data is stored.
DURATION
The earthquake duration time, used only with METHOD = DOUBLESUM. DURATION must
be greater than zero in this case.
CUTOFF
[0.0]
Factor used to determine which off-diagonal terms are included, used only with METHOD =
CQC. CUTOFF must be between 0.0 and 1.0 inclusive in this case.
AX
[1.0]
AY
[0.0]
AZ
[0.0]
The direction of ground motion loading when DIRECTION=GENERAL. The vector (AX,
AY, AZ) need not be normalized.
6-32
RESULTANT
[BEFORE]
If RESULTANT=BEFORE, the AUI computes resultants before performing responsespectrum calculations, if RESULTANT=AFTER, the AUI computes resultants after
performing response-spectrum calculations. See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide,
Chapter 13, for more information.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-33
RESPONSE HARMONIC
RESPONSE HARMONIC
NAME METHOD FREQUENCY OMEGAT

QUASISTATIC DAMPINGTABLE MSTART MEND
REFTIME RESULTANT
loadcasei sspectrumi factori phaseanglei

RESPONSE HARMONIC associates a name with a calculation method used by the AUI to
compute responses in harmonic analysis.
Refer to the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 9.3, for the theory used in
harmonic analysis.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
than one name. If there is a previously defined response of type harmonic with this name,
data entered in this command alters the previously defined response. Otherwise a new
response of type harmonic is created by this command.
METHOD
The method used in computing harmonic responses.
MAXIMUM
PHASEANGLE
RMS
AMPLITUDE
The maximum amplitude of the response is computed.

The phase angle (in degrees) of the response is computed.
The root-mean-square amplitude of the response is computed.
The (signed) amplitude of the response for angle OMEGAT is
computed. OMEGAT is the quantity t in the harmonic loading
formula bk (t ) = bk 0 sin ( t k ) , see the ADINA Theory and
Modeling Guide, equation (9.3-6).
FREQUENCY
The loading frequency used to compute harmonic responses (entered in cycles/unit time).
Each sweep spectrum is sampled at this frequency. (Note that the FREQUENCY parameter
is ignored when this response is used in the HARMONICSHOW command (see Section
5.10)).
OMEGAT
The angle used when METHOD = AMPLITUDE, entered in degrees.
QUASISTATIC
[NO]
The harmonic response can be normalized by the quasi-static response. {NO / YES}
6-34
RESPONSE HARMONIC
DAMPINGTABLE
MSTART
[LOWEST]
MEND
[HIGHEST]
The numbers of the first and last mode shapes included in the harmonic analysis calculations.
You can either enter the mode numbers directly or use the words LOWEST and HIGHEST to
indicate the lowest and highest modes available.
REFTIME
[LATEST]
characteristics at a reference time. Either enter the reference time directly or enter LATEST
to request the last reference time for which data is stored.
RESULTANT
[BEFORE]
If RESULTANT=BEFORE, the AUI computes resultants before performing harmonic
calculations, if RESULTANT=AFTER, the AUI computes resultants after performing
harmonic calculations. See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Chapter 13, for more
information.
loadcasei
If ground motion calculations were requested in ADINA, then loadcasei specifies the
direction of ground motion, either X, Y, or Z. If applied loading calculations were requested
in ADINA, then loadcasei specifies the ADINA load step number corresponding to the load
vector describing the applied load.
sspectrumi
The sweep spectrum name giving the amplitude of the ground motion or applied loading. A
sweep spectrum is defined by the SSPECTRUM command (see Section 6.5).
factori
The amplitude of the sweep spectrum can be multiplied by factori.
[1.0]
phaseanglei
The phase angle k for this load, entered in degrees.
[0.0]
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-35
RESPONSE RANDOM
RESPONSE RANDOM
NAME METHOD FMIN FMAX FREQUENCY CUTOFF

DAMPINGTABLE MSTART MEND REFTIME
RESULTANT
loadcasei rspectrumi factori

RESPONSE RANDOM associates a name with a calculation method used by the AUI to
compute responses in random analysis.
Refer to the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 9.4, for the theory used in random
analysis.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
than one name. If there is a previously defined response of type random with this name, data
entered in this command alters the previously defined response. Otherwise a new response of
type random is created by this command.
METHOD
The method used in computing random responses. This parameter must be specified.
RMS
PSD
The root-mean-square amplitude of the response is computed.

The power-spectral-density of the response is computed for frequency
FREQUENCY.
(This parameter is ignored when this response is used in the RANDOMSHOW command (see
Section 5.10).)
FMIN
FMAX
The frequency limits used in computing the RMS response. Either enter the frequencies
directly (in cycles/unit time) or use the word INFINITY to specify an infinite frequency. (In
all cases, the actual frequency range used by this command is the intersection of this
frequency range with the frequency ranges from the random spectra.) (Note that these
parameters are ignored when this response is used in the RANDOMSHOW command (see
Section 5.10).)
FREQUENCY
The loading frequency used to compute the power-spectral-density of the response (entered in
cycles/unit time). This parameter is only used when METHOD=PSD. Each random
spectrum is sampled at this frequency. (Note that the FREQUENCY parameter is ignored
when this response is used in the RANDOMSHOW command (see Section 5.10).)
6-36
RESPONSE RANDOM
CUTOFF
[0.0]
A factor used to control which off-diagonal terms are used in calculating the random
response, between 0.0 and 1.0 inclusive.
DAMPINGTABLE
MSTART
[LOWEST]
MEND
[HIGHEST]
The numbers of the first and last mode shapes included in the harmonic analysis calculations.
You can either enter the mode numbers directly or use the words LOWEST and HIGHEST to
indicate the lowest and highest modes available.
REFTIME
[LATEST]
characteristics at a reference time. Either enter the reference time directly or enter LATEST
to request the last reference time for which data is stored.
RESULTANT
[BEFORE]
If RESULTANT=BEFORE, the AUI computes resultants before performing random
calculations, if RESULTANT=AFTER, the AUI computes resultants after performing random
calculations. See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Chapter 13, for more
information.
loadcasei
If ground motion calculations were requested in ADINA, then loadcasei specifies the
direction of ground motion, either X, Y, or Z. If applied loading calculations were requested
in ADINA, then loadcasei specifies the ADINA load step number corresponding to the load
vector describing the applied load.
rspectrumi
The random spectrum name giving the power-spectral-density of the amplitude of the ground
motion or applied loading. A random spectrum is defined using the RSPECTRUM command
(see Section 6.5).
[1.0]
factori
The power-spectral-density of the amplitude of the random spectrum can be multiplied by
factori.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-37
RESPONSE RESPONSE-COMBINATION
NAME FACTOR METHOD

RESULTANT
responsei factori methodi

RESPONSE RESPONSE-COMBINATION associates a name with a combination of
previously defined responses. The previously defined responses can be of type load-step,
mode-shape, residual, response-spectrum, harmonic or random, but cannot be of type
response-combination or envelope. Any mixture of the allowed response types can be used.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
than one name. If there is a previously defined response of type response-combination with
this name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined response. Otherwise a
new response of type response-combination is created by this command.
FACTOR
The default value of the factor data input line column.
[1.0]
METHOD
[ALGEBRAIC]
The default value of the method data input line column. {ALGEBRAIC / ABS / SRSS
/ SIGNED1 / SIGNED2}
RESULTANT
[BEFORE]
If RESULTANT=BEFORE, the AUI computes resultants before performing responsecombination calculations, if RESULTANT=AFTER, the AUI computes resultants after
performing response-combination calculations. See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide,
Chapter 13, for more information.
responsei
The name of a previously defined response, of type load-step, mode-shape, residual,
response-spectrum, harmonic or random.
factori
The result is multiplied by factori after evaluation using responsei.
[FACTOR]
methodi
The method used to combine the result with the accumulated result. {ALGEBRAIC / ABS
/ SRSS / SIGNED1 / SIGNED2}. See notes below.
6-38
Notes:
The algorithm used for the combinations is
accum=0.0
for (each data input line) {
value = (the result for responsei)*factori
if (methodi = algebraic) {
accum=accum + value
}
else if (methodi = abs) {
accum=abs(accum) + abs(value)
}
else if (methodi = srss) {
accum=sqrt(accum**2 + value**2)
}
else if (methodi = signed1) {
if (value >= 0.0) {
accum=value + abs(accum)
}
else {
accum=value - abs(accum)
}
}
else if (methodi = signed2) {
if (accum >= 0.0) {
accum=accum + abs(value)
}
else {
accum=accum - abs(value)
}
}
}
Observe that the order of the data input line rows is important when you use different
methods for the data input lines.
Examples showing the use of methods signed1 and signed2:
RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM XDIR ...
RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM YDIR ...
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP STATIC_STEP ...
'XDIR' 1.0 SRSS
'YDIR' 1.0 SRSS
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-39
'STATIC_STEP' 1.0 SIGNED1

DATAEND
The responses XDIR and YDIR are combined using the SRSS method. The result is then
combined with the static response STATIC_STEP in such a way as to increase the magnitude
of the total response. But the sign of the response value is determined by the sign of the value
for response STATIC_STEP.
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP XLOAD ...
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP YLOAD ...
RESPONSE RANDOM ACOUSTIC ...
'XLOAD' 1.0 ALGEBRAIC
'YLOAD' 1.0 ALGEBRAIC
'ACOUSTIC' 1.0 SIGNED2
DATAEND
The responses XLOAD and YLOAD are combined algebraically. Response ACOUSTIC is
added to this in such a way as to increase the magnitude of the total response.
6-40
RESPONSE ENVELOPE
RESPONSE ENVELOPE
NAME TYPE OPTION TSTART TEND INCREMENT

TINCREMENT NSTEP INTERPOLATE NSKIP
responsei factori
RESPONSE ENVELOPE associates a name with a calculation method in which, for each
calculated value, several responses are evaluated.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name to be associated with the response. If there is a previously defined response of type
envelope with this name, data entered in this command modifies the response. Otherwise a
new response of type envelope is created by this command.
TYPE
The type of value to calculate.
MAXIMUM
The maximum
ABSMAX
The maximum absolute value
MINIMUM
The minimum
DIFFERENCE
The difference between the maximum and minimum values.
TIME_INTEGRAL The time integral

t2
v(t) dt
t1
TIME_AVERAGED The time-averaged value

t2
vtav =
v(t) dt
t1
t2 t1
TIME_MEAN-SQUARE The time mean-square value

t2
vtms =
v(t)
dt
t1
t2 t1
TIME_ROOT-MEAN-SQUARE The time root-mean-square value
ADINA R & D, Inc.
vtms
6-41
RESPONSE ENVELOPE
TIME_VARIANCE The time variance

t2
( v(t) v )
tav
vtvar =
dt
2
= vtms vtav
t1
t2 t1
TIME_STANDARD_DEVIATION The time standard deviation vtsd =

TIME_RVARIANCE
vtvar
The time relative variance

2
v(t ) v
t vtav tav dt v
= 1
= tvar
2
t2 t1
vtav
t2
vtrvar
TIME_RSTANDARD_DEVIATION
The time relative standard deviation
vtrsd = vtrvar
The sample sum
SAMPLE_SUM
N
v
i =1
SAMPLE_AVERAGED
The sample average
vsav =
v
i =1
SAMPLE_MEAN-SQUARE The sample mean-square

N
vsms =
v
i =1
2
i
SAMPLE_ROOT-MEAN-SQUARE The sample root-mean-square
6-42
vsms
RESPONSE ENVELOPE
SAMPLE_VARIANCE The sample variance

N
vsvar =
( v v )
i =1
sav
2
2
= vsms vsav
SAMPLE_STANDARD_DEVIATION The sample standard deviation vssd
= vsvar
SAMPLE_RVARIANCE The sample relative variance

2
vi vsav
vsav vsvar
i =1
=
= 2
N
vsav
N
vsrvar
SAMPLE_RSTANDARD_DEVIATION
The sample relative standard deviation
vsrsd = vsrvar
In the time values,
values,
vi
v(t) is the time history of a solution quantity, and in the sample
is the solution quantity evaluated at a specific time or other response.
OPTION
RANGE
[RANGE]
The value is evaluated for a range of load-steps and the extreme value
returned. TSTART, TEND, INCREMENT, TINCREMENT, NSTEP,
INTERPOLATE and NSKIP are used to specify the range. (These are the
same options as are used in the RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP command (see
Section 6.4).)
SELECTED The value is evaluated at each specified response and the extreme value
returned. The data input lines are used to specify the responses.
The time-based types, such as TIME_INTEGRAL, cannot be used when
OPTION=SELECTED. Other types, such as MAXIMUM or SAMPLE_SUM, can always be
used.
TSTART
[EARLIEST]
Used when OPTION = RANGE. The solution time that specifies the first solution response in
the range, including EARLIEST, LATEST.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-43
RESPONSE ENVELOPE
If you specify a solution time then, when this response is used, this time must lie between the
earliest and latest solution times for which there is data loaded into the database.
If you specify EARLIEST then, when this response is used, the command will use the earliest
solution time for which there is data loaded into the database. If you specify LATEST then,
when this response is used, the command will use the latest solution time for which there is
data loaded into the database.
TEND
[LATEST]
Used when OPTION = RANGE. The solution time that specifies the last solution response in
the range, including EARLIEST, LATEST and TSTART.
If you specify a solution time then, when this response is used, this time must lie between the
earliest and latest solution times for which there is data loaded into the database.
If you specify EARLIEST then, when this response is used, the command will use the earliest
solution time for which there is data loaded into the database. If you specify LATEST then,
when this response is used, the command will use the latest solution time for which there is
data loaded into the database. If you specify (the word) TSTART, then TEND will be set
equal to TSTART.
INCREMENT
[AVAILABLE]
Used when OPTION = RANGE. Specifies which solution responses between TSTART and
TEND will be included in the response.
TINCREMENT
The value will be evaluated at all solution times TSTART, TSTART +

TINCREMENT, ..., TEND. TINCREMENT must be specified. The
program will interpolate the available solution results to the times given
by this formula.
NSTEP
The value will be evaluated at all solution times TSTART, TSTART +

DT, ..., TEND, in which DT = (TEND - TSTART)/NSTEP. NSTEP
must be specified. The program will interpolate the available solution
results to the times given by this formula.
AVAILABLE
The value will be evaluated at all solution times for which the value is
available, as chosen using parameters INTERPOLATE and NSKIP.
TINCREMENT
Used when OPTION = RANGE and INCREMENT = TINCREMENT. The solution time
increment for the range.
6-44
RESPONSE ENVELOPE
NSTEP
Used when OPTION = RANGE and INCREMENT = NSTEP. The number of steps for the
range.
INTERPOLATE
[NO]
Used when OPTION = RANGE and INCREMENT = AVAILABLE. If INTERPOLATE =
YES, the AUI uses interpolation when possible to compute results that were not saved by the
solution program. Otherwise the AUI does not use interpolation. See the example at the end
of the RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP command in Section 6.4. {YES / NO}.
NSKIP
Used when OPTION = RANGE and INCREMENT = AVAILABLE. Controls the solution
times between TSTART and TEND for which the value is calculated as follows: between two
times for which the value is calculated, NSKIP times are skipped. For example, if NSKIP =
1, the value is calculated for the first, third, fifth, ..., times for which it is available. NSKIP =
0 means that no results are skipped.
responsei
Used when OPTION = SELECTED. The name of a previously defined response, of type
load-step, mode-shape, residual, response-spectrum, response-combination, harmonic or
random Responses are defined by response commands in this section.
factori
The value is multiplied by factori after evaluation using responsei.
Example
*
* List the average velocities of all nodes in the model
* over the entire time history of the analysis
*
RESPONSE ENVELOPE TYPE=TIME_AVERAGED OPTION=RANGE
ZONELIST RESPOPTION=RESPONSE,
VAR=X-VELOCITY Y-VELOCITY Z-VELOCITY
Note
When using an envelope response to evaluate a resultant, the envelope operates on the
resultant, not on the individual variables in the resultant.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-45
Response range data Introduction

For listings and some graphs, it is convenient to refer to a range of responses. The AUI
provides response-range definitions so that you can name and refer to ranges of responses.
There are currently two types of response-range available in the AUI, each with its own
command.
RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP: range of load-step (time step) responses
RESPRANGE MODE-SHAPE: range of mode shape responses
These commands are discussed in this section.
When there are results from more than one finite element program stored in the database, you
may need to set the current finite element program before you use one of the response-range
commands using the FEPROGRAM command in Section 3.4.
As with other depictions, there is a DEFAULT response and a FACTORY response. These
are defined when finite element information is loaded into the AUI. There is also a
DEFAULT_( ) response for each response type, for example DEFAULT_LOAD-STEP,
DEFAULT_MODE-SHAPE. These responses provide the defaults for the corresponding
RESPRANGE commands as described below. When you update the DEFAULT responserange, the corresponding DEFAULT_( ) response-range is automatically updated.
Two response-ranges cannot have the same name, even if the response-ranges are of different
types.
When using a response-range command, if the specified name is of the same type, the
attributes of the name provide the defaults for the remaining command parameters.
Otherwise the defaults are taken from the corresponding DEFAULT_( ) response-range
name.
Auxiliary commands
LIST RESPRANGE
Lists all response-range names.
LIST RESPRANGE NAME
Lists the attributes of the specified response-range.
DELETE RESPRANGE NAME
Deletes the specified response-range name.
6-46
Sec. 6.4 Response range data
COPY RESPRANGE NAME1 NAME2

Copies the response-range data of NAME1 to NAME2.
See also
Commands that accept a response-range name:
RESPONSESHOW, FTSHOW, FOURIERSHOW (Section 5.10)
LINEMAX, ZONELIST, ZONEEXCEED, ZONEMAX (Section 7.2)
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-47
RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP
RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP NAME TSTART TEND INCREMENT TINCREMENT

NSTEP INTERPOLATE NSKIP
RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP associates a name with a range of load step solutions.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name to be associated with the response range. If there is a previously defined response
range of type load-step with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously
defined response range. Otherwise a new response range of type load-step is created by this
command.
TSTART
[EARLIEST]
The solution time that specifies the first solution response in the response range, including
EARLIEST, LATEST.
If you specify a solution time then, when this response range is used in a command, this time
must lie between the earliest and latest solution times for which there is data loaded into the
database.
If you specify EARLIEST then, when this response range is used in a command, the
command will use the earliest solution time for which there is data loaded into the database.
If you specify LATEST then, when this response range is used in a command, the command
will use the latest solution time for which there is displacement data (ADINA model),
temperature data (ADINA-T model) or velocity data (ADINA-F model) loaded into the
database.
TEND
[LATEST]
The solution time that specifies the last solution response in the response range, including
EARLIEST, LATEST and TSTART.
If you specify a solution time, then, when this response range is used in a command, this time
must lie between the earliest and latest solution times for which there is data loaded into the
database.
If you specify EARLIEST, then, when this response range is used in a command, the
command will use the earliest solution time for which there is data loaded into the database.
If you specify LATEST, then, when this response range is used in a command, the command
will use the latest solution time for which there is data loaded into the database. If you
specify the word TSTART, then TEND will be set to TSTART. In this case, the response
range will contain a single response, corresponding to time TSTART.
INCREMENT
[AVAILABLE]
Specifies which solution responses between TSTART and TEND will be included in the
response range.
6-48
RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP
If INCREMENT = TINCREMENT, then the response range will be all solution times
TSTART, TSTART + TINCREMENT, ..., TEND
and TINCREMENT must be specified. The program will interpolate the available solution
results to the times given by this formula.
If INCREMENT = NSTEP, then the response range will be all solution times
TSTART, TSTART + DT, ..., TEND ; DT=(TEND - TSTART)/NSTEP,
and NSTEP must be specified. The program will interpolate the available solution results to
the times given by this formula.
If INCREMENT = AVAILABLE, then the response range will be all solution times T(i) for
which the requested results are available, as chosen using parameters INTERPOLATE and
NSTEP.
TINCREMENT
The solution time increment for the response-range. This is used only if INCREMENT =
TINCREMENT.
NSTEP
The time step for the response-range. This is used only if INCREMENT = NSTEP.
INTERPOLATE
[NO]
Used when INCREMENT = AVAILABLE. If INTERPOLATE = YES the AUI uses
interpolation when possible to compute results that were not saved in the porthole. Otherwise
the AUI does not use interpolation. See the example at the end of this command.
Notice that this parameter has no effect if results are saved on the porthole for each solution
time.
NSKIP
[0]
Used when INCREMENT = AVAILABLE. NSKIP controls the solution times between
TSTART and TEND for which results are plotted and listed as follows: between two times
for which the results are output, NSKIP times are skipped. For example, if NSKIP = 1, the
results are output for the first, third, fifth, . . . times for which they are available. NSKIP = 0
means that no results are skipped.
Notes for the INTERPOLATE parameter
Suppose that in an ADINA run, the time step is 2.0 and nodal results were saved for steps 0, 3
and 5, and element results were saved for steps 2 and 4. If stresses are listed with
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-49
RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP
INTERPOLATE = NO, only results for times 4.0 and 8.0, corresponding to steps 2 and 4, will
be obtained. If stresses are listed with INTERPOLATE = YES, results for time 6.0
corresponding to step 3 will also be obtained. If displacements are listed with
INTERPOLATE = NO, only results for times 0.0, 6.0 and 10.0 will be obtained. If
displacements are listed with INTERPOLATE = YES, results for times 2.0, 4.0 and 8.0 will
also be obtained.
Of course, the interpolated results are only estimates of the true computed solution.
LOADPORTHOLE command), then there are additional considerations for the
INCREMENT and INTERPOLATE parameters, as follows.
When INCREMENT=AVAILABLE, all solutions are listed, otherwise only main solutions are
listed.
When INTERPOLATE=YES, interpolation is always performed using main solutions.
6-50
RESPRANGE MODE-SHAPE
NAME MODESTART MODEEND REFTIME
RESPRANGE MODE-SHAPE associates a name with a range of mode shape solutions.

The range of mode shape solutions are the mode shapes with numbers MODESTART,
MODESTART+1, ..., MODEEND, where MODESTART and MODEEND are specified in
this command. All of the mode shapes have the reference time REFTIME, which is also
specified in this command.
When this response range is used in a command, there must be data for each mode shape in
the response range loaded into the database.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name to be associated with the response range If there is a previously defined response
range of type mode-shape with this name, data entered in this command alters the previously
defined response range. Otherwise a new response range of type mode-shape is created by
this command.
MODESTART
The first mode shape in the response range, including LOWEST and HIGHEST.
[1]
If you specify LOWEST then, when this response range is used in a command, the command
will use the lowest mode shape for which there is data loaded into the database.
If you specify HIGHEST then, when this response range is used in a command, the command
will use the highest mode shape for which there is data loaded into the database.
MODEEND
[HIGHEST]
The last mode shape in the response range, including LOWEST, HIGHEST and MODESTART.
If you specify LOWEST then, when this response range is used in a command, the command
will use the lowest mode shape for which there is data loaded into the database.
If you specify HIGHEST then, when this response range is used in a command, the command
will use the highest mode shape for which there is data loaded into the database.
If you specify MODESTART then MODEEND will be set to MODESTART.
REFTIME
[LATEST]
characteristics at a reference time. For example, mode shapes from a linearized buckling
analysis are calculated from the structure characteristics at a specified time.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-51
You specify the reference time for the response-range using this parameter. Either enter the
reference time directly or specify the reference time LATEST.
If you specify the reference time directly then, when this response range is used in a
command, there must be mode shape data corresponding to this reference time in the
database.
If you specify LATEST then, when this response is used in a command, mode shape data
corresponding to the last reference time for which there is mode shape data in the database is
used.
6-52
Spectrum definitions Introduction
Sec. 6.5 Spectrum definitions

This section describes commands used to define loading spectra:
SPECTRUM: defines a response spectrum
SSPECTRUM: defines a sweep spectrum
RSPECTRUM: defines a random spectrum
This section also describes commands used in the spectrum definitions and in spectrum
analysis:
DAMPINGTABLE: defines a damping table (which specifies the damping of modes)
FREQCURVE: defines a frequency curve (which provides amplitude vs. frequency
information)
FREQTABLE: defines a frequency table (which specifies frequencies and peak
broadening factors)
Auxiliary commands
The SPECTRUM command has the following auxiliary commands (there are similar auxiliary
commands for the other commands in this section):
LIST SPECTRUM
Lists all spectrum definitions.
LIST SPECTRUM NAME
Lists the attributes of the specified spectrum.
DELETE SPECTRUM NAME
Deletes the specified spectrum.
COPY SPECTRUM NAME1 NAME2
Copies the spectrum definition from NAME1 to NAME2.
See also
Commands that use a SPECTRUM definition:
SPECTRUMSHOW (Section 5.10)
RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM (Section 6.3)
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-53
Commands that use an SSPECTRUM definition:

SSPECTRUMSHOW (Section 5.10)
RESPONSE HARMONIC (Section 6.3)
Commands that use an RSPECTRUM definition:
RSPECTRUMSHOW (Section 5.10)
RESPONSE RANDOM (Section 6.3)
Commands that use a DAMPINGTABLE definition:
FSSHOW, FTSHOW (Section 5.10)
RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM, RESPONSE HARMONIC,
RESPONSE RANDOM (Section 6.3)
Commands that use a FREQCURVE definition:
SPECTRUM, SSPECTRUM, RSPECTRUM, DAMPINGTABLE (this section)
Commands that use a FREQTABLE definition:
FSSHOW, FTSHOW (Section 5.10)
6-54
SPECTRUM
SPECTRUM
NAME VALUETYPE FACTOR INPUT-AXES TITLE
freqcurvei dampingi factori

SPECTRUM defines a response spectrum, which gives the maximum responses of SDOF
systems to ground motions. The response spectrum is used by the RESPONSE
RESPONSE-SPECTRUM command in the definition of a response-spectrum response (see
Section 6.3).
A response spectrum is defined by providing the responses of SDOF systems at different
frequencies and different damping values. The responses of all SDOF systems with the same
damping value is provided via a frequency curve. Thus the response spectrum is defined by
several frequency curves, one for each damping value. Spectrum curves for intermediate
damping values are automatically calculated by linear interpolation when the response
spectrum is used.
You can plot a response spectrum using the SPECTRUMSHOW command (see Section
5.10).
NAME
The name of a response spectrum. If the response spectrum is already defined, data entered
in this command modifies the response spectrum, otherwise a new response spectrum is
defined.
VALUETYPE
DISPLACEMENT
[ACCELERATION]
Values in the frequency curves are interpreted as displacements.
VELOCITY
Values in the frequency curves are interpreted as velocities.
ACCELERATION
Values in the frequency curves are interpreted as accelerations.
FACTOR
[1.0]
This command parameter provides a default for the data input line parameter factori, see
below.
INPUT-AXES
[LOGLOG]
Successive values in the frequency curves are assumed to be connected with straight lines
when they are plotted using the axis types specified by this parameter.
LINLIN Linear frequency axis, linear value axis.
LOGLIN Logarithmic frequency axis, linear value axis.
LINLOG Linear frequency axis, linear value axis.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-55
SPECTRUM
LOGLOG Logarithmic frequency axis, logarithmic value axis.

TITLE
[]
The response spectrum can have a title (up to 80 characters) or no title. The title is used only
when the response spectrum is listed or plotted.
freqcurvei
The frequency curve giving the variation of the response value (either displacement, velocity
or acceleration) with the frequency. Use the FREQCURVE command in this section to
define frequency curves.
dampingi
The damping value associated with the frequency curve (specified as percent of critical
damping).
(from command parameter FACTOR)
factori
Values in frequency curve i are multiplied by factori to obtain the response spectrum values.
For example, if the frequency curve has acceleration values specified in gs, specify factor =
the numerical value of g.
Notes:
The ZPA value (zero-period acceleration value) for the defined spectrum is calculated as the
spectrum acceleration for the highest frequency for which spectrum values are provided. If
the input highest frequencies differ, or if the spectrum accelerations differ for the highest
frequency, the ZPA value is not calculated, and residual calculations are not possible when
this response spectrum is used.
6-56
SSPECTRUM
SSPECTRUM
NAME FREQCURVE VALUETYPE FACTOR INPUT-AXES TITLE
SSPECTRUM defines a sweep spectrum, which gives the amplitude of sinusoidal ground
motions or applied forces for given frequencies. The sweep spectrum is used by the
RESPONSE HARMONIC command in the definition of a harmonic response (see Section
6.3).
Ground motions can be considered only if ADINA computed the modal participation factors
for ground motions, and applied forces can be considered only if ADINA computed the
modal participation factors for applied forces (command ANALYSIS
MODAL-PARTICIPATION-FACTORS EXCITATION=GROUND-MOTION or
APPLIED-LOAD).
If the sweep spectrum is to be used to describe ground motions, the ground motions can be
specified in terms of displacements, velocities or accelerations.
You can plot a sweep spectrum using the SSPECTRUMSHOW command (see Section 5.10).
NAME
The name of a sweep spectrum. If the sweep spectrum is already defined, data entered in this
command modifies the sweep spectrum, otherwise a new sweep spectrum is defined.
FREQCURVE
The frequency curve giving the variation of the response value (either displacement, velocity,
acceleration or load) with the frequency. Use the FREQCURVE command in this section to
define frequency curves.
VALUETYPE
[DISPLACEMENT or FORCE]
If the sweep spectrum is to be used to describe ground motions, the following choices are
allowed:
DISPLACEMENT
Values in the frequency curves are interpreted as displacements.
VELOCITY
Values in the frequency curves are interpreted as velocities.
ACCELERATION
Values in the frequency curves are interpreted as accelerations.
If the sweep spectrum is to be used to describe applied loads, the following choice is allowed:
FORCE
Values in the frequency curve are used to scale the applied loads.
FACTOR
[1.0]
Values in the frequency curve are multiplied by FACTOR to obtain the sweep spectrum
values. For example, if the frequency curve has acceleration values specified in gs, specify
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-57
SSPECTRUM
FACTOR = the numerical value of g.

INPUT-AXES
[LOGLOG]
TITLE
[]
The sweep spectrum can have a title (up to 80 characters) or no title. The title is used only
when the sweep spectrum is listed or plotted.
6-58
RSPECTRUM
RSPECTRUM NAME FREQCURVE VALUETYPE FACTOR REFDB

INPUT-AXES TITLE
RSPECTRUM defines a random spectrum, which gives the power-spectral-density of the
amplitude of random ground motions or applied loads. The random spectrum is used by the
RESPONSE RANDOM command in the definition of a random response (see Section 6.3).
Ground motions can be considered only if ADINA computed the modal participation factors
for ground motions, and applied forces can be considered only if ADINA computed the
modal participation factors for applied forces (command ANALYSIS
MODAL-PARTICIPATION-FACTORS EXCITATION=GROUND-MOTION or
APPLIED-LOAD).
If the random spectrum is to be used to describe ground motions, the power-spectral-density
of the ground motion can be specified in terms of displacements, velocities or accelerations.
If the random spectrum is to be used to describe applied loadings, the power-spectral-density
of the applied loading can be specified in terms of load or decibels (db). These options are
described in more detail in the notes at the end of this command.
You can plot a random spectrum using the RSPECTRUMSHOW command (see Section
5.10).
NAME
The name of a random spectrum. If the random spectrum is already defined, data entered in
this command modifies the random spectrum, otherwise a new random spectrum is defined.
FREQCURVE
The frequency curve giving the power-spectral-density of the response value (either
displacement, velocity, acceleration load or db) as a function of frequency. Use the
FREQCURVE command to define frequency curves.
VALUETYPE
[DISPLACEMENT or FORCE]
DISPLACEMENT / VELOCITY / ACCELERATION
The random spectrum can be used to describe ground motions.
FORCE / DB
The random spectrum can be used to describe the intensity of applied loads.
See the notes at the end of this command for further details.
FACTOR
[1.0]
Values in the frequency curve are multiplied by FACTOR to obtain the random spectrum
values. For example, if the frequency curve has acceleration values specified in (g**2/Hz),
specify FACTOR = the numerical value of g**2.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-59
RSPECTRUM
REFDB
[2.E-5]
The reference value used to compute the load multiplier power-spectral-density from a value
specified in db. The default value corresponds to the value used for acoustical analysis in air
when SI units are used.
INPUT-AXES
[LOGLOG]
This assumption is used when interpolating within the frequency curve.
TITLE
[]
The random spectrum can have a title (up to 80 characters) or no title. The title is used only
when the random spectrum is listed or plotted.
Notes
When the random spectrum is used to describe ground motions, the acceleration powerspectral-density b ( f ) is calculated as
b ( f ) = v ( f ) FACTOR
(VALUETYPE = ACCELERATION)
b ( f ) = v ( f ) FACTOR ( 2 f
b ( f ) = v ( f ) FACTOR ( 2 f
(VALUETYPE = VELOCITY)
(VALUETYPE = DISPLACEMENT)
where v ( f ) is the value for frequency f in the frequency curve.

When the random spectrum is used to describe applied loads, the load multiplier powerspectral-density b ( f ) is calculated as
b ( f ) = v ( f ) FACTOR
(VALUETYPE = FORCE)
b ( f ) = ( REFDB 2 10 (0.1v ( f )) ) FACTOR
(VALUETYPE = DB)
where v ( f ) is the value for frequency f in the frequency curve.
6-60
DAMPINGTABLE
DAMPINGTABLE NAME OPTION FREQCURVE FACTOR

modei dampingi
(if OPTION = MODE)
DAMPINGTABLE defines a damping table. A damping table associates a damping value

with the frequency or mode number of a mode.
Damping tables are used by several commands, including RESPONSE
RESPONSE-SPECTRUM, RESPONSE HARMONIC, RESPONSE RANDOM (see Section
6.3).
A damping table can be defined either by a frequency curve, in which case the damping is a
function of frequency, or by a list of modes, in which case the damping is assigned to each
mode individually.
NAME
The name of the damping table. If there is a previously defined damping table with this
name, data entered in this command modifies the damping table, otherwise a new damping
table is created.
OPTION
LINEAR
Damping is defined by a frequency curve and the damping for

frequencies between two given frequencies in the frequency curve is
determined by linear frequency interpolation.
LOGARITHMIC Damping is defined by a frequency curve and the damping for

frequencies between two given frequencies in the frequency curve is
determined by logarithmic frequency interpolation.
MODE
Damping is defined for each mode by the data input lines and the
damping is undefined for other frequencies.
FREQCURVE
FACTOR
[1.0]
The name of the frequency curve giving the damping/frequency relationship. A frequency
curve is defined by the FREQCURVE command in this section. The values of the frequency
curve are multiplied by FACTOR to determine the damping values (entered as percent of
critical damping). FREQCURVE and FACTOR are used only if OPTION = LINEAR or
LOGARITHMIC.
modei
dampingi
The mode numbers and associated damping values (entered as percent of critical damping).
These parameters are used only if OPTION = MODE.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-61
FREQCURVE
FREQCURVE NAME FREQOPTION FREQLABEL VALUELABEL TITLE

freqi valuei
(if FREQOPTION = FREQUENCY)
periodi valuei
(if FREQOPTION = PERIOD)
FREQCURVE defines a frequency curve. A frequency curve is a list of frequencies and

values. Several commands require frequency curves as input; these commands are
DAMPINGTABLE, RSPECTRUM, SPECTRUM, SSPECTRUM (in this section).
The values in a frequency table are interpreted by the command that uses the frequency table.
For example, a value of 1.0 is interpreted by the DAMPINGTABLE command as 1% of
critical damping and is interpreted by the SPECTRUM command as a displacement, velocity
or acceleration of 1.0.
NAME
The name of the frequency curve. If there is a previously defined frequency curve with this
name, data entered in this command alters the previously defined frequency curve. Otherwise
a new frequency curve is created.
FREQOPTION
[FREQUENCY]
Frequencies in the frequency curve can be specified either in terms of frequencies (cycles/unit
time) or in terms of periods (time/cycle). {FREQUENCY/PERIOD}
FREQLABEL
[]
You can assign a label (up to 80 characters) to the frequencies, or you can assign no label.
The label, if any, is used only when the frequency curve is listed or plotted; the label is not
used by commands that use the frequency curve.
VALUELABEL
[]
You can assign a label (up to 80 characters) to the values, or you can assign no label. The
label, if any, is used only when the frequency curve is listed or plotted; the label is not used
by commands that use the frequency curve.
TITLE
[]
You can assign a title (up to 80 characters) to the frequency table, or you can assign no table.
The title, if any, is used only when the frequency curve is listed or plotted; the title is not used
by commands that use the frequency curve.
frequencyi
periodi
valuei
A frequency (or period) and its associated value.
6-62
FREQTABLE
FREQTABLE
NAME MODES DELTAF
frequencyi deltafi
Defines a frequency table, which is a list of frequencies and peak broadening factors that is
used by the FSSHOW and FTSHOW commands (see Section 5.10).
The frequencies listed in a frequency table are used in addition to frequencies given by the
frequency range parameters of the FSSHOW and FTSHOW commands. For example, you
can specify structural natural frequencies as frequencies in a frequency table to force the
FSSHOW and FTSHOW commands to evaluate the SDOF system response at the structural
natural frequencies.
In addition, if you select the option PEAKBROADENING=YES of these commands, the
frequencies in the frequency table are treated as peak frequencies and you also supply the
peak broadening factors in the frequency table. (Note that peak broadening is only applied to
those frequencies in the frequency table for which the response curve is at a local maximum.)
NAME
The name of the frequency table. If there is a previously defined frequency table with this
name, data entered in this command modifies the frequency table, otherwise a new frequency
table is created.
MODES
[NO]
DELTAF
[0.0]
If MODES = YES, all structural modes, if any, are automatically included in the frequency
table, with peak broadening factor given by DELTAF. If MODES = NO, structural modes
are not automatically included in the frequency table and DELTAF is ignored.
frequencyi
Frequency included in the frequency table. The dimensions of frequencyi are cycles/unit
time.
[0.0]
deltafi
Used only for peak broadening, option YES. If deltafi is less than 0.0, then frequencyi is not
considered to be a peak frequency (but the response is still evaluated for frequencyi). If
deltafi = 0.0, then frequencyi is considered to be a peak frequency but the minimum amount of
peak broadening is used. If deltafi is greater than 0.0, then frequencyi is considered to be a
peak frequency and the peak is broadened by an amount (deltafifrequencyi) so that the peak
extends from frequency frequencyi(1.0 - deltafi) to frequencyi(1.0 + deltafi). It is necessary
for deltafi to be less than 1.0.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-63
Result control definitions Introduction

This section describes the following commands:
SMOOTHING: specifies how to smooth results
RESULTCONTROL: specifies other options used in calculating results
MASS-SELECT: determines how total mass/volume calculations are performed
RESULTGRID: specifies where results are calculated when they are listed using zone
listing commands
The SMOOTHING, RESULTCONTROL and RESULTGRID commands control the
corresponding depictions. As with other depictions, each of these commands associates a
depiction name with attributes.
The MASS-SELECT command directly controls the total mass/volume calculations and no
depiction name is involved.
Auxiliary commands
The SMOOTHING command has the following auxiliary commands (there are similar
auxiliary commands for RESULTCONTROL and RESULTGRID):
LIST SMOOTHING
Lists all smoothing names.
LIST SMOOTHING NAME
Lists the attributes of the specified smoothing depiction name.
DELETE SMOOTHING NAME
Deletes the specified smoothing depiction.
COPY SMOOTHING NAME1 NAME2
Copies the smoothing depiction specified by NAME1 to NAME2.
The MASS-SELECT command has the following auxiliary command:
LIST MASS-SELECT
Lists the current settings of the MASS-SELECT command.
6-64
Sec. 6.6 Result control definitions
See also
Commands that use a smoothing depiction:
CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE (Section 5.2)
RESPONSESHOW, LINESHOW, HARMONICSHOW, RANDOMSHOW,
FOURIERSHOW (Section 5.10)
Commands that use a result control depiction:
MESHPLOT, CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE (Section 5.2)
FSSHOW, FTSHOW, FOURIERSHOW (Section 5.10)
Commands that use a result grid depiction:
ZONELIST, ZONEEXCEED, ZONEMAX (Section 7.2)
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-65
SMOOTHING
SMOOTHING
NAME TYPE ERRORREF ZONENAME BLOCKING
SMOOTHING associates a name with a smoothing technique.

NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name to be associated with the smoothing technique. If there is a previously defined
smoothing technique with this name, data entered in this command modifies that smoothing
technique, otherwise a new smoothing technique is created by this command.
TYPE
[NONE]
The type of smoothing to be performed. Within each element, a requested variable is
extrapolated to the node points. At each node point, the extrapolated values are combined
into a single value. The combination rule is controlled by the value of TYPE.
NONE
No smoothing is performed.
AVERAGED
The extrapolated values are averaged.
MINIMUM
The minimum extrapolated value is taken.
MAXIMUM
The maximum extrapolated value is taken.
DIFFERENCE
The difference between the maximum and minimum extrapolated values

is taken.
EXTREME
The most extreme value (value furthest from 0.0) is taken.
ERROR
The difference between the maximum and minimum extrapolated values

is taken at the corner nodes and divided by ERRORREF. The resulting
variable values can be interpreted as error indicators.
ERRORREF
When TYPE = ERROR, the error difference is divided by the value of ERRORREF.
ERRORREF cannot be equal to 0.0.
[1.0]
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The smoothing technique is applied to all applicable elements and radiosity surfaces within
the specified zone. The zone name must have been previously defined by a zone definition
BLOCKING
[0]
The value of blocking influences the number of database records that are used during
smoothing. In general, a larger value of BLOCKING causes the program to use fewer
database records; this means that the time needed to construct the smoothing data structures is
reduced, but that memory requirements are increased when commands that compute
6-66
SMOOTHING
smoothed data run. A value of zero indicates that the program computes the blocking factor
automatically.
Notes for ERRORREF
ERRORREF can be automatically determined by clicking the Error Plots icon. The value
used is max(abs(min value),abs(max value)), where min value, max value are taken from the
current band plot or element vector plot.
This value of ERRORREF is however not updated when the solution time is changed, for
example when the Next Solution icon is clicked.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-67
RESULTCONTROL
RESULTCONTROL
NAME EXTRAPOLATION SHELLMIDSURFACE

SHELLLAYER SHELLT MODEFACTOR LEVERXREF
LEVERYREF LEVERZREF LEVEREXPONENT
LEVERCONFIGURATION RESULTSYSTEM
ZEROREACTION OMEGAT
RESULTCONTROL allows you to control the way in which the AUI computes results. The
parameters of this command can be grouped as follows:
Rules for interpolating element data within elements:
EXTRAPOLATION
Calculation of shell element results onto midsurface:
SHELLMIDSURFACE
SHELLLAYER
SHELLT
Scaling of modal results:
MODEFACTOR
Calculation of lever variables:
LEVERXREF
LEVERYREF
LEVERZREF
LEVEREXPONENT
LEVERCONFIGURATION
Transformation of stresses and strains to a user-defined coordinate system:
RESULTSYSTEM
Calculation of reactions:
ZEROREACTION
Calculation of quantities in electromagnetic harmonic analysis:
OMEGAT
6-68
RESULTCONTROL
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result control depiction. If there is a previously defined result control
depiction with this name, data entered in this command modifies that result control depiction,
otherwise a new result control depiction is created by this command.
EXTRAPOLATION
[RST]
If EXTRAPOLATION = RST, the AUI uses linear interpolation within elements to compute
stresses and other element quantities at a given point within the element.
If EXTRAPOLATION = FACE, the AUI uses the results at center of the nearest face.
If EXTRAPOLATION = CENTROID, the AUI uses the results at the element centroid.
If EXTRAPOLATION = INTPT, the AUI uses the results from the closest integration point.
SHELLMIDSURFACE
[YES]
If SHELLMIDSURFACE = YES, the AUI plots and lists results from the specified shell layer
and shell t value on the shell midsurface. If SHELLMIDSURFACE = NO, the AUI plots
results evaluated at the shell midsurface on the shell midsurface.
This control is most useful when plotting bands or element vectors on a mesh plot in which
the shells are drawn using a midsurface depiction.
SHELLLAYER
[TOP]
SHELLT
[1.0]
Used only if SHELLMIDSURFACE = YES. These parameters specify the shell layer number
and t coordinate value within the shell layer from which results are extracted for plotting or
listing onto the shell midsurface. For example, for single layer shells, t = -1.0 corresponds to
the bottom surface of the shell, t = 0.0 corresponds to the shell midsurface and t = 1.0
corresponds to the top surface of the shell. SHELLLAYER can also be one of the words
BOTTOM or TOP.
MODEFACTOR
[1.0]
The scaling factor applied to all modal results, including eigenvectors, modal stresses and
modal reactions.
LEVERXREF
LEVERYREF
LEVERZREF
The reference values used in definition of the LEVER variables, see notes below.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[0.0]
[0.0]
[0.0]
6-69
RESULTCONTROL
LEVEREXPONENT
[1]
The exponent used in the definition of the LEVER variables, see notes below. Note that the
exponent must be an integer greater than or equal to 1.
LEVERCONFIGURATION
[ORIGINAL]
The lever variables either use the coordinates corresponding to the original configuration of
the model or the coordinates corresponding to the current deformed configuration of the
model {ORIGINAL / DEFORMED}.
RESULTSYSTEM
[0]
The coordinate system used when computing transformed stress and strain variables
STRESS-11, STRESS-22, STRESS-33, STRESS-12, STRESS-13, STRESS23, STRAIN-11, STRAIN-22, STRAIN-33, STRAIN-12, STRAIN-13,
STRAIN-23. Use the SYSTEM command to define a coordinate system (the SYSTEM
command is described in the AUI Command Reference Manual, Volume I). Coordinate
system 0 is the global Cartesian coordinate system.
ZEROREACTION
[NO]
Normally ADINA does not save reactions if they are numerically close to zero. When
ZEROREACTION=NO, ADINA-PLOT returns not found when a reaction is not saved.
When ZEROREACTION=YES, ADINA-PLOT returns 0" when a reaction is not saved.
ZEROREACTION=YES is useful when making a graph in which one of the variables is a
reaction.
OMEGAT
The value of t for electromagnetic harmonic analysis.
[0.0]
Notes
1) Parameters LEVERXREF, LEVERYREF, LEVERZREF, LEVEREXPONENT,
LEVERCONFIGURATION control the evaluation of the variables X-LEVER, Y-LEVER,
Z-LEVER. X-LEVER is defined as
X-LEVER = (X - LEVERXREF)**(LEVEREXPONENT)
with similar definitions for the other variables. X is a coordinate either in the original or
deformed configuration of the model.
2) Predefined resultants SURFACE_MOMENT-X, SURFACE_MOMENT-Y,
SURFACE_MOMENT-Z, REACTION_MOMENT-X, REACTION_MOMENT-Y,
REACTION_MOMENT-Z rely upon the LEVER variables.
3) Parameter RESULTSYSTEM is used to control the coordinate system used when
evaluating transformed variables STRESS-11, STRESS-22, STRAIN-11, STRAIN-22,
6-70
RESULTCONTROL
1-DISPLACEMENT, 2-DISPLACEMENT, etc. These variables can be used to obtain the

stresses and strains in a local coordinate system that you choose.
You use the SYSTEM command to define the local coordinate system. The system can be
Cartesian, cylindrical or spherical. The origin of the system can be displaced from the origin
of the global coordinate system and the local coordinate system axes can be rotated from the
global coordinate system axes.
Directions 1, 2, 3 are interpreted as follows:
System type
Cartesian
Cylindrical
Spherical
Direction 1
XL
R
R
Direction 2
YL
THETA
THETA
Direction 3
ZL
XL
PHI
Thus, by default, STRESS-11 = STRESS-XX, STRESS-22 = STRESS-YY, 1DISPLACEMENT=X-DISPLACEMENT, etc.

Here is an example involving output of displacements, stresses and strains in a local
coordinate system:
SYSTEM 1 TYPE=CYLINDRICAL
RESULTCONTROL RESULTSYSTEM=1
ZONELIST VAR=STRESS-11 STRESS-22 STRESS-33,
STRESS-12 STRESS-13 STRESS-23
ZONELIST VAR=STRAIN-11 STRAIN-22 STRAIN-33,
STRAIN-12 STRAIN-13 STRAIN-23
ZONELIST VAR=1-DISPLACEMENT 2-DISPLACEMENT 3-DISPLACEMENT
In this example, STRESS-11 is the radial stress, STRESS-22 is the tangential stress,
STRESS-33 is the axial stress (equal to STRESS-XX) and STRAIN-33 is equal to
STRAIN-XX. Note that the off-diagonal strain components (STRAIN-12, STRAIN-13,
STRAIN-23) are engineering quantities, not tensorial quantities. Also 1-DISPLACEMENT
is the radial displacement, 2-DISPLACEMENT is the tangential displacement and 3DISPLACEMENT is the axial displacement (equal to X-DISPLACEMENT).
A convenient way to view the transformation corresponding to parameter RESULTSYSTEM
is to plot the mesh with element triads and with ELDEPICTION TRIADTYPE=RESULTTR
(see Section 5.2). Then the plotted triad directions correspond to the local coordinate system
chosen by parameter RESULTSYSTEM.
Note that the original (not the deformed) coordinates of the model are used in calculating the
locations of points, and therefore the local coordinate system directions.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-71
RESULTCONTROL
4) RESULTSYSTEM controls STRESS-11, STRESS-22, 1-DISPLACEMENT, etc

through the special variable COORDINATE_SYSTEM_NUMBER; the value of
COORDINATE_SYSTEM_NUMBER is the value of parameter RESULTSYSTEM. The
resultants STRESS-11, STRESS-22, 1-DISPLACEMENT, etc all depend upon variable
COORDINATE_SYSTEM_NUMBER.
6-72
MASS-SELECT
MASS-SELECT ELEMENTS NODES ZONE

MASS-SELECT determines which elements and nodes contribute to the total mass/volume
calculations performed when mass/volume variables are listed using, for example, the
MASSINFO command (see Section 7.1).
Note that mass/volume calculations are possible only when requested in ADINA-IN.
Note: mass/volume calculations are performed by ADINA element group by element group,
that is, only the mass/volume information for each element group is output by ADINA and is
available to the AUI.
Hence, an element contributes to the total mass/volume calculations only if all elements in the
elements element group are in the specified zone.
ELEMENTS
[YES]
The elements in the zone contribute to the total mass/volume calculations. {YES / NO}
NODES
Concentrated masses for all nodes in the zone contribute to the total mass/volume
calculations. {YES / NO}
[YES]
ZONE
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The zone used for determining which elements and/or nodes contribute to the total
mass/volume calculations. See the zone commands in Section 6.2. Note that the zone given
here is not used when the ZONEMAX, ZONELIST or ZONEEXCEED commands are used
to list mass variables. Instead, the zone given in these listing commands is used. However,
the zone given here is used when the MASSINFO command is used.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-73
RESULTGRID
RESULTGRID NAME TYPE NGRIDR NGRIDS NGRIDT

RESULTGRID allows you to control the locations where the AUI computes results.
NAME
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result grid depiction. If there is a previously defined result grid depiction
with this name, data entered in this command modifies that result grid depiction. If there is
no previously defined result grid depiction with this name, a new result grid depiction is
TYPE
[PORTHOLE]
NGRIDR
[1]
NGRIDS
[1]
NGRIDT
[1]
The values of TYPE are:
PORTHOLE
The AUI computes results where they were computed by the solution
program (and made available to the AUI in the porthole file). For
example, element results are output at the integration points.
NODES
The AUI computes results at the node points. Element and element
section results are computed at the node points if smoothing is activated.
ELGRID
Each element is conceptually divided into a grid with NGRIDR,

NGRIDS and NGRIDT divisions and results are computed at these
locations. Lower-dimensional elements ignore NGRIDs for the
coordinates that the elements do not possess.
SECTGRID
Each element section is conceptually divided into a gird with NGRIDR,

NGRIDS and NGRIDT divisions, and results are computed at these
locations.
ELNODES
The AUI computes results at the element local nodes.
SECTNODES
The AUI computes results at the section local nodes.
NGRIDR, NGRIDS and NGRIDT must be less than 10.
6-74
Model points Introduction
Sec. 6.7 Model points

The commands for associating a single point in the model with a model point are
NODEPOINT
node point
ELPOINT
element/layer point
SECTPOINT
section point
CSPOINT
contact segment point
RADPOINT
radiosity segment point
VSPOINT
virtual shift point
LCPOINT
J-integral line contour point
DBPOINT
drawbead point
BOLTPOINT
bolt point
ELESETPOINT
element edge-set point
ELFSETPOINT
element face-set point
The commands for associating several points in the model with a model point name are
NODECOMBINATION node point
ELCOMBINATION
element/layer point
SECTCOMBINATION section point
CSCOMBINATION
contact segment point
RADCOMBINATION
radiosity segment point
VSCOMBINATION
virtual shift point
LCCOMBINATION
J-integral line contour point
DBCOMBINATION
drawbead point
BOLTCOMBINATION bolt point
You can also define a model point in terms of other model points:
POINTCOMBINATION
There are also several special commands that create model points:
GNCOMBINATION
all nodes on the specified general selection
MESHINTEGRATION faces of a mesh plot and rule for integration
MESHMAX
faces of a mesh plot and rule for searching for extreme value
REACTIONSUM
all nodes with reactions
These commands are described in detail in this section.
General information
Two result model points cannot have the same name, even if the result points are of different
types.
The SUBSTRUCTURE and REUSE parameters of these commands are used only for an
ADINA model as follows:
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-75
If the model has substructures, use these numbers to specify the desired substructure and
reuse.
If the model has cyclic parts, use the reuse number to specify the desired cyclic part.
By default, the value of a variable evaluated as a combination point is the sum of the
variable's value at each of the points in the combination multiplied by the weighting factor at
each of the points. However the TYPE parameter can be used to choose a different
combination type.
Auxiliary commands
For each of these commands, the following auxiliary commands are available:
LIST ( )
Lists all names of the specified type.
LIST ( ) NAME
Lists data for the specified name.
DELETE ( ) NAME
Deletes the name.
COPY ( ) NAME1 NAME2
Copies the data for name NAME1 to name NAME2.
Here ( ) can be NODEPOINT, ELPOINT, SECTPOINT, CSPOINT, RADPOINT,
VSPOINT, LCPOINT, DBPOINT, BOLTPOINT, POINTCOMBINATION,
GNCOMBINATION, MESHINTEGRATION, MESHMAX, REACTIONSUM.
For commands NODECOMBINATION, ELCOMBINATION, SECTCOMBINATION,
CSCOMBINATION, RADCOMBINATION, VSCOMBINATION, LCCOMBINATION,
DBCOMBINATION, BOLTCOMBINATION, use the corresponding POINT command, i.e.,
LIST NODEPOINT lists all model points defined using NODEPOINT or
NODECOMBINATION.
See also
A model point name defined by any of these commands can be used by the following
commands:
RESPONSESHOW, HARMONICSHOW, RANDOMSHOW, FSSHOW, FTSHOW,
POINTMAX, POINTEXCEED, POINTLIST (Section 7.2).
6-76
NODEPOINT
NODEPOINT
NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE NODE
NODEPOINT assigns a name to a node point.

When there are results from more than one finite element program loaded into the database,
you may need to set the current finite element program (see the FEPROGRAM command in
Section 3.4). NODEPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the node point.
SUBSTRUCTURE
REUSE
The substructure and reuse numbers of the node point in the model.
[0]
[1]
NODE
The label number of the node.
[1]
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-77
ELPOINT
ELPOINT
NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP ELEMENT LAYER

OPTION GRID LABEL NODE R S T
ELPOINT assigns a name to a point within an element or element layer.

The point can be specified in one of four ways:
Grid location
The element (or element layer) is conceptually divided into an evenly

spaced grid, see figure. You select a location on the grid by giving a
two, four or six digit grid number.
Label location
Results calculated by ADINA, ADINA-T or ADINA-F are saved at

label locations. You select a label location by giving a label location
number.
RST location
You can choose a location by directly specifying the isoparametric rst

coordinates of the location, see figure.
Node location
You can specify the number of one of the nodes in the element.
Section 3.4). ELPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the element point.
SUBSTRUCTURE
REUSE
The substructure and reuse numbers of the element point in the model.
[0]
[1]
GROUP
The label number of the element group that contains the element point.
[1]
ELEMENT
[1]
LAYER
[1]
The element label number. If the element is a multilayer element, the layer number must also
be specified.
OPTION
[GRID]
The element point can be specified using one of four options. Each option requires additional
input of at least one of the remaining parameters.
6-78
ELPOINT
GRID
The parameter GRID is used to specify the element point within an evenly
spaced grid.
LABEL
The parameter LABEL is used to specify the labelled element point.
NODE
The parameter NODE is used to specify the global node number of a node
attached to the element.
RST
The parameters R, S and T are used to specify the isoparametric coordinates of

the element point.
GRID
[0]
Used when OPTION = GRID. The element or element layer conceptually contains an evenly
spaced grid in the element's isoparametric system. The grid can be 1-D, 2-D or 3-D
depending upon the element type. To specify a grid location using a 1-D grid, give a two
digit number AB: digit A gives the total number of grid divisions and digit B gives the
desired grid location. To specify a grid location using a 2-D grid, give a four digit number
ABCD: digit A gives the total number of grid divisions in the r direction, digit B gives the
desired grid location in the r direction, digit C gives the total number of grid divisions in the s
direction and digit D gives the desired grid location in the s direction. To specify a grid
location using a 3-D grid, give a six digit number ABCDEF: digit A gives the total number of
grid divisions in the r direction, digit B gives the desired grid location in the r direction, digit
C gives the total number of grid divisions in the s direction, digit D gives the desired grid
location in the s direction, digit E gives the total number of grid divisions in the t direction
and digit F gives the desired grid location in the t direction. You can also specify the element
centroidal location by giving a grid value of 0.
LABEL
[1]
Used when OPTION = LABEL. The element or element layer contains various locations
where ADINA, ADINA-T or ADINA-F calculated the results. If the results were calculated
at integration points, then LABEL is a 1, 2 or 3 digit number giving the integration point
location, see table. If the results were calculated at the element local nodes, then LABEL is
the local node number.
NODE
[1]
Used when OPTION = NODE. You enter the label number (global node number) of a node
connected to the element. It is an error to specify a node that is not connected to the element.
R
[0.0]
S
[0.0]
T
[0.0]
Used when OPTION = RST. You directly enter the isoparametric coordinates r, s, t of the
desired location. If the element is 1-D, only R needs to be entered, if the element is 2-D, only
R and S need to be entered.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-79
ELPOINT
Notes:
1) For an ADINA shell element, you can specify that the element point lies on the shell
midsurface using the following options:
Specify the node number of a midsurface node

Specify a grid location of 0, or a grid location in which the 5th and 6th digits are
equal to 1.
When the element point lies on the shell midsurface, when results are evaluated at the
point, the t coordinate and layer used for the evaluation are taken from the result control
depiction being used for the evaluation. See the RESULTCONTROL command in
Section 6.6 for further details.
2) If the results were calculated at the integration points, then the label is a 1, 2, 3 or 4 digit
number giving the integration point as shown in the following tables:
ADINA:
Element type
Truss
2-D solid or fluid
3-D solid or fluid
Hermitian beam
Iso-beam (3-D)
Iso-beam (2-D)
Plate
Shell (rectangular)
Shell (triangular)
Pipe
Spring
General
6-80
Result location
Int. pts.
Int. pts.
Int. pts.
Int. pts.
Int. pts.
Int. pts.
Int. pts.
Int. pts.
Int. pts.
Int. pts.
---Stress
transformation
matrix
Label number
(INR)
10(INR) + (INS)*
100(INR) + 10(INS) + (INT)*
100(INR) + 10(INS) + (INT)
100(INR) + 10(INS) + (INT)
10(INR) + (INS)
(ITRI)
100(INR) + 10(INS) + (INT)
10(ITRI) + (INT)
1000(INA) + 100(INB) + (INC)
1
(J)
ELPOINT
ADINA-T:
Element type
1-D
2-D conduction
3-D conduction
Shell conduction
Result
location
Int. pts.
Int. pts.
Int. pts.
Int. pts.
Label number
(INR)
10(INR) + (INS)*
100(INR) + 10(INS) + (INT)*
100(INR) + 10(INS) + (INT)
ADINA-F:
Element type
2-D fluid
3-D fluid
Result
location
Int. pts.
Int. pts.
Label number
10(INR) + (INS)*
100(INR) + 10(INS) + (INT)*
Each quantity in parentheses represents one integer:

(ITRI) integration point number in triangular integration
(ITET) integration point number in tetrahedral integration
(INR), (INS), (INT) integration point numbers for r, s and t
coordinates
(INA), (INB), (INC) integration point numbers for a, b and c
coordinates
(J) stress component number
*) If the element is triangular, the label number is (ITRI); if the element is tetrahedral, the
label number is (ITET).
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-81
6-82
ELPOINT
SECTPOINT
SECTPOINT
NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP ELEMENT OPTION

GRID LABEL NODE R S T
SECTPOINT assigns a name to a point within an element section. Currently the only element
types with sections are the ADINA shell element when section results are saved and the
ADINA beam element when stress resultants are saved.
The element section point can be specified in one of four ways:
Grid location
The element section is conceptually divided into an evenly spaced grid,

see the figure in the ELPOINT command. You select a location on the
grid by giving a two or four digit grid number.
Label location
Results calculated by the finite element programs are saved at label

locations. You select a label location by giving a label location number.
RST location

coordinates of the location.
Node location
You can specify the number of one of the nodes in the element section.
Section 3.4). SECTPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the element section point.
SUBSTRUCTURE
REUSE
The substructure and reuse numbers of the element point.
[0]
[1]
GROUP
The label number of the element group that contains the element section point.
[1]
ELEMENT
The label number of the element.
[1]
OPTION
[GRID]
The element section point can be specified using one of four options. Each option requires
additional input of at least one of the remaining parameters.
GRID
The parameter GRID is used to specify the element section within an evenly
spaced grid.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-83
SECTPOINT
LABEL
The parameter LABEL is used to specify the labelled element section point.
NODE
attached to the element section.
RST

the element section.
GRID
[0]
Used when OPTION = GRID. The element section conceptually contains an evenly spaced
grid in the section's isoparametric coordinate system. The grid can be 1-D or 2-D depending
upon the element section type. To specify a grid location using a 1-D grid, give a two digit
number AB: digit A gives the total number of grid divisions and digit B gives the desired grid
location. To specify a grid location using a 2-D grid, give a four digit number ABCD: digit A
gives the total number of grid divisions in the r direction, digit B gives the desired grid
location in the r direction, digit C gives the total number of grid divisions in the s direction
and digit D gives the desired grid location in the s direction. You can also specify the section
centroidal location by giving a grid value of 0.
LABEL
[1]
Used when OPTION = LABEL. The element section contains integration point locations
where the finite element program calculated the results. LABEL is a 1 or 2 digit number
giving the integration point location.
NODE
[1]
connected to the section. It is an error to specify a node that is not connected to the section.
R
[0.0]
S
[0.0]
T
[0.0]
desired location. If the element is 1-D, only R needs to be entered, if the element is 2-D, only
R and S need to be entered. (T is not required in this version of the AUI but is present for
possible future updates.)
6-84
CSPOINT
CSPOINT
NAME GROUP SURFACE SEGMENT
CSPOINT assigns a name to a contact segment "point". It is possible to obtain results only at
contact segments attached to contactor contact surfaces.
Section 3.4). CSPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the contact segment point.
GROUP
The contact group label number of the contact segment.
[1]
SURFACE
[1]
The contact surface label number that contains the contact segment. This contact surface
must be used as a contactor contact surface.
SEGMENT
The contact segment number.
[1]
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-85
RADPOINT
RADPOINT NAME GROUP SURFACE SEGMENT OPTION GRID LABEL NODE

R S T
RADPOINT assigns a name to a point within a radiosity surface segment. The point can be
specified in one of 4 ways:
Grid location
The segment is conceptually divided into an evenly spaced grid, see the
figure in the ELPOINT command. You select a location on the grid by
giving a two or four digit grid number.
Label location
Results calculated by ADINA-T are saved at label locations. You select

a label location by giving a label location number.
RST location

coordinates of the location.
Node location
You can specify the number of one of the nodes in the segment.
Section 3.4). RADPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the radiosity segment point.
GROUP
[1]
The label number of the radiosity surface group that contains the radiosity segment point.
SURFACE
SEGMENT
The label numbers of the radiosity surface and segment.
[1]
[1]
OPTION
[GRID]
The radiosity segment point can be specified using one of four options. Each option requires
additional input of at least one of the remaining parameters.
GRID
The parameter GRID is used to specify the radiosity segment point within an
evenly spaced grid.
LABEL
The parameter LABEL is used to specify the labelled radiosity segment point.
NODE
attached to the radiosity segment.
6-86
RADPOINT
RST

the radiosity segment point.
GRID
[0]
Used when OPTION = GRID. The radiosity segment conceptually contains an evenly spaced
grid in the segment's isoparametric system. The grid can be 1-D or 2-D depending upon the
segment type. To specify a grid location using a 1-D grid, give a two digit number AB: digit
A gives the total number of grid divisions and digit B gives the desired grid location. To
specify a grid location using a 2-D grid, give a four digit number ABCD: digit A gives the
total number of grid divisions in the r direction, digit B gives the desired grid location in the r
direction, digit C gives the total number of grid divisions in the s direction and digit D gives
the desired grid location in the s direction. You can also specify the segment centroidal
location by giving a grid value of 0.
LABEL
[1]
Used when OPTION = LABEL. The radiosity segment contains integration point locations
where ADINA-T calculated the results. LABEL is a 1 or 2 digit number giving the
integration point location.
NODE
[1]
connected to the segment. It is an error to specify a node that is not connected to the segment.
R
[0.0]
S
[0.0]
T
[0.0]
desired location. If the segment is 1-D, only R needs to be entered, if the segment is 2-D,
only R and S need to be entered. (T is not required in this version of the AUI, but is present
for possible future updates.)
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-87
VSPOINT
VSPOINT
NAME SHIFT
VSPOINT assigns a name to a virtual shift, used in fracture mechanics analysis when virtual
shifts are defined for evaluation of the J-integral.
Section 3.4). VSPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the virtual shift point.
SHIFT
The label number of a virtual shift.
6-88
[1]
LCPOINT
LCPOINT
NAME CONTOUR
LCPOINT assigns a name to a line contour, used in fracture mechanics analysis when line
contours are defined for evaluation of the J-integral.
Section 3.4). LCPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the line contour point.
CONTOUR
The label number of a line contour.
[1]
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-89
DBPOINT
DBPOINT
NAME GROUP DRAWBEAD SEGMENT
DBPOINT assigns a name to a drawbead segment.

Section 3.4). DBPOINT defines the model result point based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the drawbead point.
GROUP
The contact group label number of the drawbead segment.
[1]
DRAWBEAD
The drawbead label number that contains the drawbead segment.
[1]
SEGMENT
The drawbead segment number.
[1]
6-90
BOLTPOINT
BOLTPOINT
NAME BOLT
BOLTPOINT assigns a name to a bolt point. A bolt point represents the results for a bolt
element group.
NAME
The name of the bolt point.
BOLT
[1]
The label number of the bolt. This is the same as the BOLT-NUMBER parameter of the
EGROUP command used to define the bolt group.
Example:
Pre-processing:
EGROUP THREEDSOLID 5 ... OPTION=BOLT BOLT-NUMBER=17
Post-processing:
BOLTPOINT B17 BOLT=17
POINTLIST B17 VAR=BOLT-FORCE
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-91
ELESETPOINT
ELESETPOINT NAME ELEDGESET

ELESETPOINT assigns a name to an element edge-set. Use the ELEDGESET command (in
the AUI Command Reference Manual, Volume I) to define an element edge-set.
NAME
The name of the element edge-set point.
ELEDGESET
The element edge-set number.
[1]
Note
Only element face variables can be evaluated at an element edge-set point. The specified
element face variable is summed over all element edges in the element edge-set point.
6-92
ELFSETPOINT
ELFSETPOINT NAME ELFACESET

ELFSETPOINT assigns a name to an element face-set. Use the ELFACESET command (in
the AUI Command Reference Manual, Volume I) to define an element face-set.
NAME
The name of the element face-set point.
ELFACESET
The element face-set number.
[1]
Note
Only element face variables can be evaluated at an element face-set point. The specified
element face variable is summed over all element faces in the element face-set point.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-93
NODECOMBINATION
NODECOMBINATION
NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE NODE FACTOR TYPE

NODECOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of node points.
Section 3.4). NODECOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the current
finite element program.
NAME
The name of the node combination point.
SUBSTRUCTURE
REUSE
NODE
FACTOR
The default values of the data input line columns.
[0]
[1]
[1]
[1.0]
TYPE
[SUM]
The combination method used to combine results. See notes at the end of this command
description. {SUM / AVERAGE / MAXIMUM / ABSMAX / MINIMUM / MEANSQUARE / ROOT-MEAN-SQUARE / VARIANCE / STANDARD_DEVIATION /
RVARIANCE / RSTANDARD_DEVIATION}
substructurei
reusei
nodei
A node point. See the NODEPOINT command in this section for the conventions used to
specify a node point.
factori
Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the node point.
Notes for the TYPE parameter
The combination type is specified by the TYPE parameter as follows,
SUM
6-94
NODECOMBINATION
AVERAGE
MAXIMUM
vav =
N
max(vi )
i
ABSMAX
max( vi )
i
MINIMUM
min(vi )
i
MEAN-SQUARE
2
i
2
i
ROOT-MEAN-SQUARE
VARIANCE
vvar =
STANDARD_DEVIATION
(v
vav )
vvar
RVARIANCE (Relative variance)
vrvar
v v
i i v av
= av
N
RSTANDARD_DEVIATION (Relative standard deviation)
vrvar
in which
N is the number of result points in the combination and vi is the value at the ith
result point in the combination (multiplied by factori if necessary). Note that the relative
standard deviation is also sometimes referred to as the coefficient of variation.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-95
ELCOMBINATION
ELCOMBINATION
NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP ELEMENT

LAYER OPTION GRID LABEL NODE R S T FACTOR
TYPE
substructurei reusei groupi elementi layeri optioni gridi labeli nodei ri si ti factori
ELCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of element points.
Section 3.4). ELCOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the current finite
element program.
NAME
The name of the element combination point.
SUBSTRUCTURE
REUSE
GROUP
ELEMENT
LAYER
OPTION
GRID
LABEL
NODE
R, S, T
FACTOR
[0]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[GRID]
[0]
[1]
[1]
[0.0]
[1.0]
TYPE
[SUM]
The combination method used to combine results. See notes at the end of the
NODECOMBINATION command description. {SUM / AVERAGE / MAXIMUM /
ABSMAX / MINIMUM / MEAN-SQUARE / ROOT-MEAN-SQUARE / VARIANCE /
STANDARD_DEVIATION / RVARIANCE / RSTANDARD_DEVIATION}
substructurei
reusei
groupi
elementi
layeri
optioni
gridi
labeli
6-96
ELCOMBINATION
nodei
ri
si
ti
An element point. See the ELPOINT command in this section for the conventions used to
specify an element point.
factori
Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the element point.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-97
SECTCOMBINATION
SECTCOMBINATION NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP ELEMENT

OPTION GRID LABEL NODE R S T FACTOR TYPE
substructurei reusei groupi elementi optioni gridi labeli nodei ri si ti factori
SECTCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of section points.
Section 3.4). SECTCOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the current
finite element program.
NAME
The name of the section combination point.
SUBSTRUCTURE
REUSE
GROUP
ELEMENT
OPTION
GRID
NODE
R, S, T
FACTOR
[0]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[GRID]
[0]
[1]
[0.0]
[1.0]
TYPE
[SUM]
substructurei
reusei
groupi
elementi
optioni
gridi
labeli
nodei
ri
si
ti
A section point. See the SECTPOINT command in this section for the conventions used to
6-98
SECTCOMBINATION
specify a section point.

factori
Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the section point.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-99
CSCOMBINATION
CSCOMBINATION
NAME GROUP SURFACE SEGMENT FACTOR TYPE
groupi surfacei segmenti factori

CSCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of contact segment points.
Section 3.4). CSCOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the current finite
element program.
NAME
The name of the contact segment combination point.
GROUP
SURFACE
SEGMENT
FACTOR
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1.0]
TYPE
[SUM]
groupi
surfacei
segmenti
A contact segment point. See the CSPOINT command in this section for the conventions
used to specify a contact segment point. Remember that it is possible to obtain results only at
factori
Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the contact segment point.
6-100
RADCOMBINATION
RADCOMBINATION NAME GROUP SURFACE SEGMENT OPTION GRID

LABEL NODE R S T FACTOR TYPE
groupi surfacei segmenti optioni gridi labeli nodei ri si ti factori
RADCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of radiosity segment points.
Section 3.4). RADCOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the current finite
element program.
NAME
The name of the radiosity segment combination point.
GROUP
SURFACE
SEGMENT
OPTION
GRID
LABEL
NODE
R, S, T
FACTOR
[1]
[1]
[1]
[GRID]
[0]
[1]
[1]
[0.0]
[1.0]
TYPE
[SUM]
groupi
surfacei
segmenti
optioni
gridi
labeli
nodei
ri
si
ti
A radiosity segment point. See the RADPOINT command in this section for the conventions
used to specify a radiosity segment point.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-101
RADCOMBINATION
factori
Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the radiosity segment point.
6-102
VSCOMBINATION
VSCOMBINATION
NAME SHIFT FACTOR TYPE
shifti factori
VSCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of virtual shift points. Virtual shift
points are used in fracture mechanics analysis when virtual shifts are used to evaluate the Jintegral.
Section 3.4). VSCOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the current finite
element program.
NAME
The name of the virtual shift combination point.
SHIFT
FACTOR
[1]
[1.0]
TYPE
[SUM]
shifti
A virtual shift point. See the VSPOINT command in this section for the conventions used to
specify a virtual shift point.
factori
Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the virtual shift point.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-103
LCCOMBINATION
LCCOMBINATION
NAME CONTOUR FACTOR TYPE
contouri factori
LCCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of line contour points. Line contour
points are used in fracture mechanics analysis when line contours are used to evaluate the Jintegral.
Section 3.4). LCCOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the current finite
element program.
NAME
The name of the line contour combination point.
CONTOUR
FACTOR
[1]
[1.0]
TYPE
[SUM]
contouri
A line contour point. See the LCPOINT command in this section for the conventions used to
specify a line contour point.
factori
Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the line contour point.
6-104
DBCOMBINATION
DBCOMBINATION
NAME GROUP DRAWBEAD SEGMENT FACTOR TYPE
groupi drawbeadi segmenti factori

DBCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of drawbead segment points.
Section 3.4). DBCOMBINATION defines the model result point based on the current finite
element program.
NAME
The name of the drawbead segment combination point.
GROUP
DRAWBEAD
SEGMENT
FACTOR
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1.0]
TYPE
[SUM]
groupi
drawbeadi
segmenti
A drawbead segment point. See the DBPOINT command in this section for the conventions
used to specify a drawbead segment point.
factori
Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the drawbead segment point.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-105
BOLTCOMBINATION
BOLTCOMBINATION
NAME BOLT FACTOR TYPE
bolti factori
BOLTCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of bolt points.
NAME
The name of the bolt combination point.
BOLT
FACTOR
[1]
[1.0]
TYPE
[SUM]
bolti
A bolt point. See the BOLTPOINT command in this section for the conventions used to
specify a node point.
factori
Multiplying factor that weights the contribution from the bolt point.
6-106
POINTCOMBINATION
POINTCOMBINATION NAME FACTOR

pointnamei factori
The POINTCOMBINATION command creates a model point based upon previously defined
model points. When the model point is used by another command, such as the POINTLIST
command in Section 7.2, the AUI evaluates the results at each of the model points and
outputs the sum.
NAME
The name of the pointcombination point.
FACTOR
[1.0]
The default value for the multiplying factor used to multiply the results from each of the data
input line model points.
pointnamei
The name of a model point to be included in the sum. The model point can be defined by any
model point definition command except the POINTCOMBINATION command.
[value of command line parameter FACTOR]
factori
The result from the model point pointnamei are multiplied by factori before inclusion in the
sum.
Notes
1) As an example, this command can be used to determine the difference in volume flux
between two sections in a pipe:
CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE SECTION_1 OPTION=XCOORD VALUE=1.0
MESHPLOT SECTION_1
MESHINTEGRATION SECTION_1
CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE SECTION_2 OPTION=XCOORD VALUE=2.0
MESHPLOT SECTION_2
MESHINTEGRATION SECTION_2
POINTCOMBINATION SECTION_DIFF
'SECTION_1'
'SECTION_2'
DATAEND
POINTLIST SECTION_DIFF VAR=VOLUME_FLUX_SURFACE
(since the normals to each surface point in the same direction, there is no need to negate the
results from SECTION_2).
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-107
GNCOMBINATION
GNCOMBINATION NAME PROGRAM TYPE

selectioni
GNCOMBINATION assigns a name to a combination of node points. You specify general
selections and the AUI chooses all nodes that belong to at least one of the general selections.
If the selections refer to geometry, the database must contain geometry information before
you use this command. See the example below for the typical usage of this command.
NAME
The name of the gncombination point.
PROGRAM
The AUI selects nodes from the PROGRAM that belong to the geometry that you specify.
TYPE
[SUM]
selectioni
A selection string. When using the command-line interface, you must enclose the selection in
quotes so that the AUI does not interpret the selection as a command. When using the dialog
box, you do not need to enclose the selection in quotes.
CONTACT SURFACE
CONTACT GROUP
ELFACESET
ELEDGESET
6-108
GNCOMBINATION
NODESET
ELEMENTSET
valid objects:
'LINE 1'
'LINES 2 TO 4'
Notice that you specify a range of numbers using the keyword TO.
When a single object is not sufficient to entirely specify the desired selection, use the OF
keyword. For example, if there is more than one body in the model, use
'EDGE 1 OF BODY 2'
to specify edge 1 of body 2.
You can type selections in either upper, lower or mixed case and you can abbreviate object
names. For example
'line 1'
'Vol 2'
The AUI chooses those nodes that belong to at least one of the geometry selections.
Example
In the following example, we determine the total reaction force acting on the nodes on
geometry lines 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7.
ADINA-IN input:
(commands to define the model)
ADINA FILE=test.dat
DATABASE SAVE test.idb
QUIT
ADINA-PLOT input:
DATABASE OPEN test.idb
LOADPORTHOLE CREATE test.port
GNCOMBINATION TEST1
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-109
GNCOMBINATION
'LINE 1 TO 5'
'LINE 7'
DATAEND
POINTLIST TEST1 VAR=X-REACTION Y-REACTION Z-REACTION
QUIT
Note that you can achieve the same result using the NODECOMBINATION command in this
section, but then you would have to determine the nodes that lie on the geometry lines
yourself.
6-110
MESHINTEGRATION
MESHINTEGRATION
NAME MESHPLOT ZONENAME OPTION TYPE

FACTOR ORDER CONFIGURATION
MESHINTEGRATION creates a model point based upon the element faces or element edges
of the given mesh plot. This model point represents the domain over which a numerical
integration will be performed. However MESHINTEGRATION does not actually perform
the numerical integration. When the model point is used by another command, such as the
POINTLIST command in Section 7.2, the AUI performs a numerical integration over the
selected element faces or element edges and outputs the integral.
NAME
The name of the meshintegration point.
MESHPLOT
[PREVIOUS]
The name of the mesh plot from which the element faces or element edges are taken. See
Section 5.2 for more information about mesh plots.
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
An element face or edge is selected if it is present in the mesh plot as described in the
MESHPLOT parameter description and if the element is present in the zone specified by this
parameter. The zone specified in this parameter need not be the same zone as was specified
when creating the mesh plot. See Section 6.2 for more information about zones.
ZONENAME is not used when the mesh plot plots an element face-set or element edgeset.
OPTION
[SURFACES]
If OPTION=SURFACES, then element faces are selected from the mesh plot. If
OPTION=LINES, then element edges are selected from the mesh plot. See the notes at the
end of this command description for more information about which element faces/edges are
selected.
TYPE
[INTEGRAL]
Various types of integrations can be performed when the meshintegration point is used. The
integration type is specified by the TYPE parameter as follows:
INTEGRAL
z dS
S
AVERAGED
ADINA R & D, Inc.
z av =
zdS
S
6-111
MEAN-SQUARE
ROOT-MEAN-SQUARE
z ms =
MESHINTEGRATION
dS
z ms
(z z )
av
VARIANCE
STANDARD_DEVIATION
z var =
dS
z var
2
RVARIANCE (Relative variance) z rvar
zz
S zav av dS
=
S
RSTANDARD_DEVIATION (Relative standard deviation)
z rvar
in which z is the integrand and S is the domain. Note that the relative standard deviation is
also sometimes referred to as the coefficient of variation.
FACTOR
After the indicated integration is performed, the result is multiplied by FACTOR.
[1.0]
ORDER
[0]
The numerical integration order used for the integrations. Rectangular element faces are
integrated using N N Gauss integration where N is the order specified by this parameter
value. For ORDER = 0, the integration order is based on the element face order (2 for linear
faces, 3 for quadratic faces, etc.). For ORDER > 10, N = 10 is used.
6-112
MESHINTEGRATION
Triangular element faces are integrated as follows:

ORDER
0
1
2
3
>=4
Number of sampling points

4 for linear faces,
7 for quadratic faces,
13 for cubic faces
1
4
7
13
When cutting surfaces are employed, the integration is performed over each facet generated
by the cutting surface calculation. For ORDER = 0, 2 2 Gauss integration is employed for
rectangular facets and 4-point Gauss integration is employed for triangular facets.
CONFIGURATION
[DEFORMED]
The numerical integration is performed over either the original configuration of the model or
over the deformed configuration of the model {ORIGINAL / DEFORMED}.
The time corresponding to the deformed configuration is determined when the mesh
integration point is employed; the time is taken from the response used to evaluate the
integrand, as follows. For response type load-step, the time is the requested solution time.
For response types mode-shape, residual, harmonic or random, the time is the reference time.
For response type response-combination, the time is taken from the first response used in the
definition of the response-combination.
Notes
1) When the domain of integration is SURFACES, and the mesh plot does not include any
cutting surfaces, the element faces in the domain of integration are those that are potentially
visible. These are the element faces on the skin of the mesh plot.
2) When the domain of integration is SURFACES, and the mesh plot includes cutting
surfaces, the element faces in the domain of integration are those that are
a) on the cutting surface intersection, or
b) on the skin of any opaque part of the mesh plot (if CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE
OPAQUEOPTION=ALL or CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE OPAQUEOPTION=ALL).
3) When the domain of integration is LINES, and the mesh plot does not include any cutting
surfaces, the element edges in the domain of integration are those that are on the boundary of
the mesh plot.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-113
MESHINTEGRATION
4) When the domain of integration is LINES, and the mesh plot includes cutting surfaces, the
element edges in the domain of integration are those that are
a) on the cutting surface intersection, or
b) on the boundary of any opaque part of the mesh plot (if CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE
OPAQUEOPTION=ALL or CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE OPAQUEOPTION=ALL).
5) When the domain of integration is SURFACES, the domain of integration can be checked
by plotting bands on the mesh plot. The colored part of the mesh plot is the domain of
integration.
6) When the domain of integration is LINES, the element thickness is included. In other
words, the differential surface area dS is equal to the differential edge length dl times the
element thickness.
For non-axisymmetric elements, the element thickness is the original element thickness.
For axisymmetric elements, the element thickness is taken as the y coordinate. In this
way, the axisymmetric effect is included, in which one radian of the model is assumed.
7) The integrand ONE, which is a constant that is numerically equal to 1, can be used to
determine the surface area of the domain:
MESHINTEGRATION MODEL_SKIN
POINTLIST MODEL_SKIN VAR=ONE
8) Variables SURFACE_NORMAL-X, SURFACE_NORMAL-Y, SURFACE_NORMAL-Z and
resultants based upon these variables can be used in conjunction with mesh integration points.
For example, to calculate the volume of a closed domain, the following commands can be
used:
MESHINTEGRATION MODEL_SKIN
RESULTANT DVOL '<X-COORDINATE>*<SURFACE_NORMAL-X>'
POINTLIST MODEL_SKIN VAR=DVOL
Here the divergence theorem provides the theory behind the choice of integrand.
9) When you use the mesh integration point to evaluate the results at a given load step, the
integration domain only includes elements that are alive for the load step.
6-114
MESHMAX
MESHMAX
NAME MESHPLOT ZONENAME OPTION TYPE FACTOR GRID

CONFIGURATION
MESHMAX creates a model point based upon the element faces or element edges of the
given mesh plot. This model point represents the domain over which a search for an extreme
value will be performed. However MESHMAX does not actually perform the search. When
the model point is used by another command, such as the POINTLIST command in Section
7.2, the AUI performs a search for an extreme value over the selected element faces or
element edges and outputs the extreme value.
NAME
The name of the meshmax point.
MESHPLOT
[PREVIOUS]
The name of the mesh plot from which the element faces or edges are taken. See Section 5.2
for more information about mesh plots.
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
An element face or edge is selected if it is present in the mesh plot as described in the
MESHPLOT parameter description and if the element is present in the zone specified in this
parameter. The zone specified in this parameter need not be the same zone as was specified
when creating the mesh plot. See Section 6.2 for more information about zones.
ZONENAME is not used when the mesh plot plots an element face-set or element edgeset.
OPTION
[SURFACES]
If OPTION=SURFACES, then element faces are selected from the mesh plot. If
OPTION=LINES, then element edges are selected from the mesh plot. See the notes at the
end of the MESHINTEGRATION command description for more information about which
element faces/edges are selected.
TYPE
[ABSMAX]
Various types of extreme values can be searched for when the meshmax point is used. The
extreme value type is specified by the TYPE parameter as follows:
ABSMAX
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
value with the largest absolute value

value with the largest value
value with the smallest value
FACTOR
After the indicated search is performed, the result is multiplied by FACTOR.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[1.0]
6-115
MESHMAX
GRID
The number of sampling points in each element face is governed by GRID.
[0]
For rectangular element faces, if GRID = 1, the face is sampled at its centroid, if GRID = 2,
the face is sampled at the corners (2 points in each direction), if GRID > 2, the face is
sampled at ORDER points in each direction (a total of GRIDGRID points).
For triangular element faces, if GRID = 1, the face is sampled at its centroid, if GRID = 2,
the face is sampled at the corners, if GRID > 2, the face is sampled at GRID points in each
direction (a total of GRID(GRID + 1)/2 points).
In both cases, if GRID = 0, GRID = 2 is used for linear faces, GRID = 3 is used for quadratic
faces, etc.
When cutting surfaces are employed, the search is performed over each facet generated by the
cutting surface calculation. For GRID = 0, GRID = 2 is used.
CONFIGURATION
[DEFORMED]
The search is performed over either the original configuration of the model or over the
deformed configuration of the model {ORIGINAL / DEFORMED}. The time
corresponding to the deformed configuration is determined when the mesh max point is
employed; it is the same time as is used to evaluate the integrand (see the
CONFIGURATION parameter of the MESHINTEGRATION command for further
information).
For searching, the value of CONFIGURATION is used only to evaluate the surface normal
when the surface normal is part of the integrand.
Notes
1) The same variables and predefined resultants that can be used with the
MESHINTEGRATION command can also be used with the MESHMAX command.
2) When you use the mesh max point to evaluate the results at a given load step, the search
domain only includes elements that are alive for the load step.
6-116
REACTIONSUM
REACTIONSUM NAME ZONENAME FACTOR TYPE

REACTIONSUM creates a model point based upon the nodes at which reactions were
calculated. This model point represents the nodes over which model results, typically
reactions, will be evaluated and combined. However REACTIONSUM does not actually
perform the combination. When the model point is used by another command, such as the
POINTLIST command in Section 7.2, the AUI combines the results over all of the nodes
selected within the model point and outputs the combination.
Although the name of this command is REACTIONSUM, the combination can be a sum,
an average, etc.
NAME
The name of the reaction sum point.
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
A node is selected if it is in the given zone and if reactions were calculated by the solution
program during at least one time step. See the zone definition commands in Section 6.2.
FACTOR
[1.0]
The result from each node in the reactionsum is multiplied by FACTOR before the results are
combined.
TYPE
[SUM]
Notes
1) To obtain the total reaction forces over the entire model, the following commands can be
used:
REACTIONSUM TOTAL_REACTION_SUM
POINTLIST TOTAL_REACTION_SUM,
VAR=X-REACTION Y-REACTION Z-REACTION
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-117
Model lines Introduction

The commands for grouping several points in the model into a model point line are
NODELINE
line of node points
ELLINE
line of element/layer points
SECTLINE
line of section points
CSLINE
line of contact segment points
RADLINE
line of radiosity segment points
VSLINE
line of virtual shift points
LCLINE
line of J-integral line contour points
GNLINE
line of node points selected by general selections
DBLINE
line of drawbead segment points
BOLTLINE
line of bolt points
ELESETLINE line of element edges
ELFSETLINE line of element faces
These commands are described in detail in this section.
General information
Two model lines cannot have the same name, even if the model lines are of different types.
All of these commands, except for GNLINE, ELESETLINE and ELFSETLINE, have the
same organization. Each row of the data input lines is used to enter one point in each line.
The default values of the data input line columns are specified using the corresponding
command parameters, for example the default value for the data input line column nodei is
specified by the command parameter NODE.
The SUBSTRUCTURE and REUSE parameters of these commands are used only for an
ADINA model as follows:
If the model has substructures, use these numbers to specify the desired substructure and
reuse.
If the model has cyclic parts, use the reuse number to specify the desired cyclic part.
The result at each point can be multiplied by a weighting factor, which you specify within
these commands. Whether any entered weighting factor is actually used depends upon the
command that uses the model line name. For example, the LINESHOW command in Section
5.10 has parameters that allow you to choose whether the weighting factors are applied.
6-118
Sec. 6.8 Model lines
Auxiliary commands
For each of these commands, the following auxiliary commands are available:
LIST ( )
Lists all names of the specified type.
LIST ( ) NAME
Lists data for the specified name.
DELETE ( ) NAME
Deletes the name.
COPY ( ) NAME1 NAME2
Copies the data for name NAME1 to name NAME2.
See also
A model line name defined by any of these commands can be used by the following
commands:
LINESHOW (Section 5.10)
LINEMAX, LINEEXCEED, LINELIST (Section 7.2)
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-119
NODELINE
NODELINE NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE NODE FACTOR

NODELINE assigns a name to a line of node points.
Section 3.4). NODELINE defines the model result line based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the node line.
SUBSTRUCTURE
REUSE
NODE
FACTOR
The default values of the data input lines columns.
substructurei
Label number of the substructure for the node.
reusei
Label number of the reuse for the node.
nodei
Label number of the node.
[SUBSTRUCTURE]
[REUSE]
[NODE]
factori
Multiplying factor, weighting the contribution from "nodei".
6-120
[0]
[1]
[1]
[1.0]
[FACTOR]
ELLINE
ELLINE NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP ELEMENT LAYER OPTION

GRID LABEL NODE R S T FACTOR
substructurei reusei groupi elementi layeri optioni gridi labeli nodei ri si ti factori
ELLINE assigns a name to a line of element points. The line can contain points from
different layers within an element, different elements, element groups, substructures, reuses
or cyclic parts.
Section 3.4). ELLINE defines the model result line based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the element line.
SUBSTRUCTURE
REUSE
GROUP
ELEMENT
LAYER
OPTION
GRID
LABEL
NODE
R,S,T
FACTOR
substructurei
Label number of a substructure.
[0]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[GRID]
[0]
[1]
[1]
[0.0]
[1.0]
[SUBSTRUCTURE]
reusei
Label number of a substructure reuse.
[REUSE]
groupi
Label number of an element group.
[GROUP]
elementi
Label number of an element.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[ELEMENT]
6-121
layeri
Layer number within element.
[LAYER]
optioni
Point definition option see command ELPOINT in Section 6.7.
gridi
Grid location of element point, if optioni = GRID.
labeli
Label for element point, if optioni = LABEL.
nodei
Node number for element point, if optioni = NODE.
ri
si
ti
Parametric coordinates of element point, if optioni = RST.
factori
Multiplying factor, indicating weighting for the element result point.
6-122
ELLINE
[OPTION]
[GRID]
[LABEL]
[NODE]
[R]
[S]
[T]
[FACTOR]
SECTLINE
SECTLINE NAME SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP ELEMENT OPTION GRID

LABEL NODE R S T FACTOR
substructurei reusei groupi elementi optioni gridi labeli nodei ri si ti factori
SECTLINE assigns a name to a line of element section points. The line can contain points
from different segments, surfaces and groups. For details concerning the specification of an
element section point, see the SECTPOINT command in Section 6.7.
Section 3.4). SECTLINE defines the model result line based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the element section line.
SUBSTRUCTURE
REUSE
GROUP
ELEMENT
OPTION
GRID
LABEL
NODE
R,S,T
FACTOR
substructurei
Label number of a substructure.
[0]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[GRID]
[0]
[1]
[1]
[0.0]
[1.0]
[SUBSTRUCTURE]
reusei
Label number of a substructure reuse.
[REUSE]
groupi
Label number of an element group in which element section results are saved.
[GROUP]
elementi
Label number of an element.
optioni
Point definition option. {GRID / LABEL / RST / NODE}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[ELEMENT]
[OPTION]
6-123
gridi
Grid location of element section point, if optioni = GRID.
SECTLINE
[GRID]
labeli
Label location of element section point, if optioni = LABEL.
[LABEL]
nodei
Node number for element section point, if optioni = NODE.
[NODE]
ri
si
ti
Isoparametric coordinates of element section point, if optioni = RST.
[R]
[S]
[T]
[FACTOR]
factori
Multiplying factor, indicating weighting of the results from the element section point.
6-124
CSLINE
CSLINE NAME GROUP SURFACE SEGMENT FACTOR

groupi surfacei segmenti factori
CSLINE assigns a name to a line of contact segments. It is possible to obtain results only at
Section 3.4). CSLINE defines the model result line based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the contact segment line.
GROUP
SURFACE
SEGMENT
FACTOR
groupi
Contact group label number.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1.0]
[GROUP]
surfacei
Contact surface label number.
[SURFACE]
segmenti
Contact surface segment number.
[SEGMENT]
factori
Multiplying factor, indicating weighting for the contact segment result point.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[FACTOR]
6-125
RADLINE
RADLINE
NAME GROUP SURFACE SEGMENT OPTION GRID LABEL NODE

R S T FACTOR
groupi surfacei segmenti optioni gridi labeli nodei ri si ti factori

RADLINE assigns a name to a line of radiosity surface points. The line can contain points
from different segments, surfaces and groups. For details concerning the specification of a
radiosity segment point, see the RADPOINT command in Section 6.7.
Section 3.4). RADLINE defines the model result line based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the radiosity segment line.
GROUP
SURFACE
SEGMENT
OPTION
GRID
LABEL
NODE
R,S,T
FACTOR
[1]
[1]
[1]
[GRID]
[0]
[1]
[1]
[0.0]
[1.0]
groupi
Label number of a radiosity surface group.
[GROUP]
surfacei
segmenti
Label numbers of a radiosity surface and segment.
optioni
Point definition option. {GRID / LABEL / NODE / RST}
gridi
Grid location of the radiosity segment point, if optioni = GRID.
labeli
Label location of the radiosity segment point, if optioni = LABEL.
6-126
[SURFACE]
[SEGMENT]
[OPTION]
[GRID]
[LABEL]
RADLINE
nodei
Node number for the radiosity segment point, if optioni = NODE.
ri
si
ti
Isoparametric coordinates of the radiosity section point, if optioni = RST.
[NODE]
[R]
[S]
[T]
[FACTOR]
factori
Multiplying factor, indicating weighting of the results from the radiosity segment point.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-127
VSLINE
VSLINE NAME SHIFT FACTOR

shifti factori
VSLINE assigns a name to a line (sequence) of virtual shift points. Virtual shift points are
used in fracture mechanics analysis when virtual shifts are used to evaluate the J-integral.
Section 3.4). VSLINE defines the model result line based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the virtual shift line.
SHIFT
FACTOR
shifti
Label number of a virtual shift.
[SHIFT]
factori
Multiplying factor, indicating weighting of the results from the virtual shift.
6-128
[1]
[1.0]
[FACTOR]
LCLINE
LCLINE NAME CONTOUR FACTOR

contouri factori
LCLINE assigns a name to a line (sequence) of line contour points. Line contour points are
used in fracture mechanics analysis when line contours are used to evaluate the J-integral.
Section 3.4). LCLINE defines the model result line based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the line contour line.
CONTOUR
FACTOR
contouri
Label number of a line contour.
factori
Multiplying factor for weighting the results from the line contour.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[1]
[1.0]
[CONTOUR]
[FACTOR]
6-129
DBLINE
DBLINE NAME GROUP DRAWBEAD SEGMENT FACTOR

groupi drawbeadi segmenti factori
DBLINE assigns a name to a line of drawbead segments.
Section 3.4). DBLINE defines the model result line based on the current finite element
program.
NAME
The name of the drawbead segment line.
GROUP
DRAWBEAD
SEGMENT
FACTOR
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1.0]
groupi
Contact group label number.
drawbeadi
Drawbead label number.
[GROUP]
[DRAWBEAD]
segmenti
Drawbead segment number.
[SEGMENT]
factori
Multiplying factor, indicating weighting for the drawbead segment result point.
6-130
[FACTOR]
BOLTLINE
BOLTLINE NAME BOLT FACTOR

bolti factori
BOLTLINE assigns a name to a line of bolt points.
NAME
The name of the bolt line.
BOLT
FACTOR
The default values of the data input lines columns.
bolti
Label number of the bolt.
factori
Multiplying factor, weighting the contribution from "bolti".
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[1]
[1.0]
[BOLT]
[FACTOR]
6-131
ELESETLINE
ELESETLINE NAME ELEDGESET

ELESETLINE assigns a name to a line of element edges. The line of element edges are the
edges in the specified element edge-set. Use the ELEDGESET command (in the AUI
Command Reference Manual, Volume I) to define an element edge-set.
NAME
The name of the element edge-set line.
ELEDGESET
The element edge-set number.
[1]
Note
Only element face variables can be evaluated on an element edge-set line. The specified
element face variable is listed at all element edges in the element edge-set line.
6-132
ELFSETLINE
ELFSETLINE
NAME ELFACESET
ELFSETLINE assigns a name to a line of element faces. The line of element faces are the
faces in the specified element face-set. Use the ELFACESET command (in the AUI
Command Reference Manual, Volume I) to define an element face-set.
NAME
The name of the element face-set line.
ELFACESET
The element face-set number.
[1]
Note
Only element face variables can be evaluated on an element face-set line. The specified
element face variable is listed at all element faces in the element face-set line.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-133
GNLINE
GNLINE NAME PROGRAM

selectioni sensei
GNLINE assigns a name to a line of node points. You specify geometry lines, edges, points
contact surfaces, nodes, etc., and the AUI chooses all nodes on the selection.
If the selection refers to geometry, the database must contain geometry information before
you use this command. See the example below for typical usage of this command.
NAME
The name of the gnline.
PROGRAM
The AUI selects nodes from the PROGRAM that belong to the geometry that you specify.
selectioni
A selection string. When using the command-line interface, you must enclose the selection in
quotes so that the AUI does not interpret the selection as a command. When using the dialog
box, you do not need to enclose the selection in quotes.
GEOMETRY BODY or BODY (only used after the OF keyword)
CONTACT SURFACE
NODE
ELFACESET
ELEDGESET
NODESET
ELEMENTSET
valid objects:
'LINE 1'
6-134
GNLINE
'LINES 2 TO 4'
Notice that you specify a range of numbers using the keyword TO.
When a single object is not sufficient to entirely specify the desired selection, use the OF
keyword. For example, if there is more than one body in the model, use
'EDGE 1 OF BODY 2'
to specify edge 1 of body 2.
You can type selections in either upper, lower or mixed case and you can abbreviate object
names. For example
'line 1'
'Edg 2'
sensei
[0]
The AUI constructs a list of nodes from the selections as follows. For each selection, if
sensei=1, the AUI constructs the list of nodes in the parametric direction of the selection. If
sensei=-1, the AUI constructs the list of nodes in the opposite direction of the parametric
direction of the selection. If sensei=0, the AUI constructs the list of nodes in the parametric
direction of the selection, unless the node with highest parametric coordinate corresponds to
the last node from the previous selection, in which case the AUI constructs the list of nodes in
the opposite direction of the parametric direction.
The intent of sensei=0 is to allow the AUI to choose the direction that allows the line to
connect with the previous line.
sensei is not used for geometry point selections, node selections, element edge-set or element
face-set selections. For contact surface selections, sensei =0 or 1 means in increasing segment
number order, sensei =-1 means in decreasing segment number order.
For element edge-set and face-set selections, the nodes are sorted in increasing order and
sensei is not used.
In all cases, the AUI merges the first node of the current selection with the last node of the
previous selection when these nodes are the same.
Example
In the following example, we list the velocities for the nodes on geometry lines 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-135
GNLINE
ADINA-IN input:
(commands to define the model)
ADINA FILE=test.dat
DATABASE SAVE test.idb
QUIT
ADINA-PLOT input:
DATABASE OPEN test.idb
LOADPORTHOLE CREATE test.port
GNLINE TEST1
'LINE 1 TO 5'
'LINE 7'
DATAEND
LINELIST TEST1 VAR=X-VELOCITY Y-VELOCITY Z-VELOCITY
QUIT
Note that you can achieve the same result by defining a NODELINE, but then you would
have to determine the nodes that lie on the geometry lines yourself.
6-136
Variables Introduction
Sec. 6.9 Variables
Variables Introduction
For general information about variables, refer to Chapter 13 in the ADINA Theory and
Modeling Guide.
The following commands define variables:
ALIAS
assigns an abbreviation (alias) to a variable
CONSTANT
defines a variable to have a constant value
RESULTANT
defines a variable as an arithmetic expression possibly using other

variables
To obtain a listing of all variables, use the VARIABLEINFO command in Section 7.1.
Auxiliary commands
The ALIAS command has the following auxiliary commands (there are similar auxiliary
commands for CONSTANT and RESULTANT):
LIST ALIAS
Lists all aliases.
LIST ALIAS NAME
Lists the attributes of the specified alias.
DELETE ALIAS NAME
Deletes the specified alias.
COPY ALIAS NAME1 NAME2
Copies the alias specified by NAME1 to NAME2.
See also
The following commands accept variables:
CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE (Section 5.2)
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-137
ALIAS
ALIAS
NAME VARIABLE
ALIAS associates an alternate name (or alias) with the name of a resultant, constant or
predefined variable. You can use ALIAS to define a short name for a frequently used
variable.
NAME
The name of the alias variable.
VARIABLE
The variable name being aliased. The variable can be predefined, a constant or a resultant.
6-138
CONSTANT
CONSTANT
Sec. 6.9 Variables
NAME CONSTANT
CONSTANT defines a variable to have constant real value.

NAME
The name of the constant variable. If there is a previously defined constant variable with this
name, data entered in this command overwrites the constant variable data. If there is no
previously defined constant variable with this name, a new constant variable is created by this
command.
CONSTANT
The value of the constant. If you specify an integer value, it is converted into a real number.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-139
RESULTANT
RESULTANT
NAME RESULTANT
RESULTANT defines a variable using an arithmetic expression, possibly involving other

variables. The variable defined by this command is termed a resultant variable. The resultant
variable is evaluated by evaluating the variables in the resultant and then computing the
arithmetic expression. All the variables in the resultant are evaluated at the same solution
point. It is permitted for a variable in the resultant expression to be a resultant itself.
NAME
The name of the resultant variable.
RESULTANT
The arithmetic expression is specified as a string with at most 256 characters. Remember to
enclose the expression in single quotes when using the command-line interface.
The resultant string can include the following items:
The arithmetic operators +, -, *, /, ** (exponentiation)
Numbers (either real numbers or integers)
Variables (either predefined variables, aliases, constants or other resultants).
The following functions:
ABS(x)
absolute value
ACOS(x)
arccosine
AINT(x)
truncation
ANINT(x)
nearest whole number
ASIN(x)
arcsine
ATAN(x)
arctangent
ATAN2(x,y)
arctangent(x/y)
COS(x)
cosine
COSH(x)
hyperbolic cosine
DIM(x,y)
positive difference
EXP(x)
exponential
LOG(x)
natural logarithm
LOG10(x)
common logarithm
LSTRETCH3(X11,X12,X13,X21,X22,X23,X31,X32,X33,i)
component i of the left stretch tensor V, as
computed from the deformation gradient Xij ,
where i=1 returns V11, i=2 returns V22, i=3 returns
V33, i=4 returns V12, i=5 returns V13, i=6 returns
V23.
6-140
RESULTANT
Sec. 6.9 Variables
MAX(x,y,...)
MAXSHEAR(11,22,33,12,13,23)
MIN(x,y,...)
MOD(x,y)
NOCS(x)
largest value
maximum shear stress
smallest value
remaindering
function giving the number of cracks when the
variable CRACK_FLAG is substituted for x
RSTRETCH3(X11,X12,X13,X21,X22,X23,X31,X32,X33,i)
component i of the right stretch tensor U, as
computed from the deformation gradient Xij ,
where i=1 returns U11, i=2 returns U22, i=3 returns
U33, i=4 returns U12, i=5 returns U13, i=6 returns
U23.
SIGN(x,y)
transfer of sign
2-norm of the 3 3 symmetric tensor
SIGNORM2(11,22,33,12,13,23)
SIGP1(11,22,33,12,13,23)
maximum principal value
SIGP1DX(11,22,33,12,13,23)
X direction cosine of maximum principal value
SIGP1DY(11,22,33,12,13,23)
Y direction cosine of maximum principal value
SIGP1DZ(11,22,33,12,13,23)
Z direction cosine of maximum principal value
SIGP2(11,22,33,12,13,23)
intermediate principal value
SIGP2DX(11,22,33,12,13,23)
X direction cosine of intermediate principal value
SIGP2DY(11,22,33,12,13,23)
Y direction cosine of intermediate principal value
SIGP2DZ(11,22,33,12,13,23)
Z direction cosine of intermediate principal value
SIGP3(11,22,33,12,13,23)
minimum principal value
SIGP3DX(11,22,33,12,13,23)
X direction cosine of minimum principal value
SIGP3DY(11,22,33,12,13,23)
Y direction cosine of minimum principal value
SIGP3DZ(11,22,33,12,13,23)
Z direction cosine of minimum principal value
SIG2P1(11,22,12)
maximum principal value of 2 2 symmetric
tensor
minimum principal value of 2 2 symmetric
SIG2P2(11,22,12)
tensor
SIN(x)
sine
SINH(x)
hyperbolic sine
SQRT(x)
square root
STEP(x)
the unit step function:
0.0 if x 0.0
1.0 if x > 0.0
STRETCHMA(X11,X12,X13,X21,X22,X23,X31,X32,X33)
maximum angular distortion, as computed from
the deformation gradient
STRETCHP1(X11,X12,X13,X21,X22,X23,X31,X32,X33)
maximum principal stretch, as computed from the
deformation gradient
ADINA R & D, Inc.
6-141
RESULTANT
intermediate principal stretch, as computed from

the deformation gradient
minimum principal stretch, as computed from the
deformation gradient
TAN(x)
tangent
TANH(x)
hyperbolic tangent
TF(i,t)
Time function i evaluated at time t
TRANS3DT(xx,yy,zz,xy,xz,yz,x,y,z,isyst,i)
component i of the transformed stress tensor, as
computed from the global stress tensor ,
coordinate (x,y,z) and transformation number
isyst, where i=1 returns 11, i=2 returns 22, i=3
returns 33, i=4 returns 12, i=5 returns 13, i=6
returns 23.
component i of the transformed vector, as
TRANS3DV(vx,vy,vz,,x,y,z,isyst,i)
computed from the global vector v, coordinate
(x,y,z) and transformation number isyst, where i=1
returns v1, i=2 returns v2, i=3 returns v3.
VONMISES(11,22,33,12,13,23)
von Mises effective stress function
Notes:
Variables with dashes: Variables with dashes need to be enclosed in <>, so that the dash is
not interpreted as a minus sign, e.g. <STRESS-XX>.
Trigonometric functions: All trigonometric functions operate on or return angles in radians.
Function TF: The typical use of function TF is to evaluate the time function for the time
shifted by an arrival time. E.g.
CONSTANT ARTM 3.45
RESULTANT T1SHIFT TF(1,(TIME - ARTM))
RESPONSESHOW TIME,, T1SHIFT
plots time function 1 for solution times shifted by the arrival time 3.45.
6-142
Chapter 7
Results listing
MODELINFO
MODELINFO
Sec. 7.1 Model information
SUMMARY
MODELINFO produces a listing giving information about the finite element model loaded
into the database.
SUMMARY
[YES]
If summary is YES, then summary information is listed. Summary information includes the
number of substructures, reuses, cyclic parts, nodes and element groups.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
7-1
Chap. 7 Results listing
RESPONSEINFO
RESPONSEINFO SUMMARY TABLE

RESPONSEINFO produces a listing giving information about the response solutions for the
finite element model loaded into the database.
SUMMARY
[YES]
If SUMMARY is YES, then summary information is listed. Summary information includes
the number of load steps, the range of load steps for each type of result, the number of mode
shapes, the range of mode shapes for each type of result, etc.
TABLE
[NO]
If TABLE is YES, then the solution table for the current FE program is listed. This table is
useful when multiple solutions for a solution time are loaded. See the multiple solutions
notes at the end of the LOADPORTHOLE command description.
7-2
VARIABLEINFO
VARIABLEINFO
SUMMARY
VARIABLEINFO produces a listing giving information about the variables that you can use
to plot and list results.
SUMMARY
[YES]
If summary is YES, then summary information is listed. Summary information includes the
name of each variable which can be evaluated in the finite element model. The variables are
listed by variable category; within categories, variables are listed in alphabetical order.
A variable given in this listing may not be evaluatable at all points in the finite element
model, but will be evaluatable at least one point in the model.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
7-3
MASSINFO
MASSINFO
MASSINFO lists the total mass, volume and other related information for that part of the
model selected by the MASS-SELECT command in Section 6.6.
It is also possible to list this information using the listing commands (such as ZONELIST in
Section 7.2) and the mass/volume variables (such as MASS).
Note that mass/volume information is available only when requested in ADINA-IN.
7-4
MPFINFO
MPFINFO
MPFINFO lists the following information associated with the ground motion modal
participation factors:
1) Ground motion modal participation factors for each mode i and direction k, ik .
2) Squares of the ground motion modal participation factors for each mode i and direction
k,
( )
k
i
. The square of the ground motion modal participation factor can be
interpreted as a modal mass.

3) The squares of the ground motion modal participation factors divided by the total mass
( )
of the model,
k
i
100% . This can be interpreted as the percent of the model mass
contained in mode i.
4) The sum of the squares of the ground motion modal participation factors from modes 1
( )
i
to i,
j =1
k
j
. This can be interpreted as the mass contained in modes 1 to i.
5) The sum of the squares of the ground motion modal participation factors from modes 1
( )
i
to i, divided by the total mass of the model,
k
j
j =1
100% . This can be interpreted
as the percent of the model mass contained in modes 1 to i.

For theoretical information about the ground motion modal participation factors, see the
ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 9.1.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
7-5
CGINFO
CGINFO GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE RESPONSE

CGINFO produces a listing giving information about a contact group. Information listed
includes:
Type of contact group (2D or 3D)
The formulation used (constraint function or segment method)
Whether the group is segment or node-node.
The contact surfaces defined in the group
The contact pairs defined in the group
The drawbead lines defined in the group
GROUP
The contact group label number.
[1]
SUBSTRUCTURE
The substructure number of the contact group in the model. Currently this is always 0.
[0]
REUSE
The reuse number of the contact group in the model. Currently this is always 1.
[1]
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
Specifies the response used to obtain information about the contact group. RESPONSE is
important if the contact group information changes during the solution. Use the RESPONSE
LOAD-STEP command (in Section 6.3) to specify the solution time.
7-6
CPINFO
CPINFO CONTACTPAIR SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP RESPONSE

CPINFO produces a listing giving information about a contact pair. Information listed
includes
The contact surfaces (segment contact)
The friction model and the coefficient of friction (segment contact)
The contactor and target nodes (node-node contact)
CONTACTPAIR
The label number of the contact pair.
[1]
SUBSTRUCTURE
[0]
REUSE
[1]
GROUP
[1]
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
important if the contact pair information changes during the solution. Use the RESPONSE
ADINA R & D, Inc.
7-7
CSINFO
CSINFO SURFACE SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP RESPONSE

CSINFO produces a listing giving information about a contact surface. Information listed
includes
The number of segments and number of nodes.
The node numbers for each segment
The contact pairs that use the surface
The drawbead lines that use the surface
SURFACE
The label number of the contact surface.
[1]
SUBSTRUCTURE
[0]
REUSE
[1]
GROUP
[1]
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
important if the contact surface information changes during the solution. Use the
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP command (in Section 6.3) to specify the solution time.
7-8
DRAWBEADINFO
DRAWBEADINFO INFO GROUP NAME

DRAWBEADINFO produces a listing giving information about the drawbead lines.
Information listed includes
How the drawbead is defined (geometry lines or nodes)
The number of segments in the drawbead line (when defined by nodes)
The nodes in the drawbead line (when defined by nodes)
The geometry lines in the drawbead line (when defined by geometry lines)
The contact surface that the drawbead line is attached to
The drawbead height, restraining force and uplifting force
The birth and death times
INFO
Options for drawbead line information.
SUMMARY
List summary of all drawbead lines
INPUT
List the detailed information of a drawbead line.
[SUMMARY]
GROUP
The contact group label number. This parameter is used only when INFO=INPUT.
[1]
NAME
The label number of the drawbead. This parameter is used only when INFO=INPUT.
[1]
ADINA R & D, Inc.
7-9
EGINFO
EGINFO GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE RESPONSE

EGINFO produces a listing giving information about an element group. Information listed
includes
The type of the element group
The kinematic formulation used in the element group
The material model used in the element group
The numbers of the elements in the group
GROUP
The element group label number.
[1]
SUBSTRUCTURE
The substructure number of the element group in the model.
[0]
REUSE
The reuse number of the element group in the model.
[1]
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
Specifies the response used to obtain information about the element group. RESPONSE is
important if the element group information changes during the solution. Use the RESPONSE
7-10
ELINFO
ELINFO ELEMENT GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE RESPONSE

ELINFO produces a listing giving information about an element. Information listed includes
Information about the element group in which the element is defined
Nodes in the element
ELEMENT
The element label number.
[1]
GROUP
The element group label number.
[1]
SUBSTRUCTURE
The substructure number of the element group in the model.
[0]
REUSE
The reuse number of the element group in the model.
[1]
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
Specifies the response used to obtain information about the element. RESPONSE is
important if the element information changes during the solution. Use the RESPONSE
ADINA R & D, Inc.
7-11
NODEINFO
NODEINFO
NODE SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE RESPONSE
NODEINFO produces a listing giving information about a node. Information listed includes
The nodal coordinates, current displacements and current position (coordinates +
displacements)
The boundary conditions
The elements, contact surfaces and drawbead lines that use the node
The skew system used at the node
Whether the node is a 5 DOF or a 6 DOF node (considering the rotational dofs
assigned for shell elements)
Concentrated masses and dampers at the node, if any
NODE
The node label number.
[1]
SUBSTRUCTURE
The substructure number of the node in the model.
[0]
REUSE
The reuse number of the node in the model.
[1]
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
Specifies the response used to obtain information about the node. RESPONSE is important if
the node information changes during the solution. Use the RESPONSE LOAD-STEP
command (in Section 6.3) to specify the solution time.
7-12
Variables listing Introduction
Sec. 7.2 Variables listing
Variables listing Introduction

The following commands list extreme values of variables. You can choose either the
maximum, minimum or the absolute value of the maximum and you can select the number of
extreme values to list.
POINTMAX
lists extreme values of variables at a point
LINEMAX
lists extreme values of variables along a line
ZONEMAX
lists extreme values of variables within a zone
The following commands list variables that numerically exceed a prespecified value (that is,
the commands apply a filter to the variables).
POINTEXCEED lists filtered variables at a point
LINEEXCEED
lists filtered variables along a line
ZONEEXCEED
lists filtered variables within a zone
The following commands list variables without any filter.

POINTLIST
lists variables at a point
LINELIST
lists variables along a line
ZONELIST
lists variables within a zone
All of these commands operate on up to six variables. Each variable can be a predefined
variable, an alias, a constant or a resultant.
All of these commands evaluate the variables either for a single response (if parameter
RESPOPTION = RESPONSE) or for a response-range (if parameter RESPOPTION =
RESPRANGE). See Section 6.3 for information about responses and Section 6.4 for
information about response-ranges.
All of these commands allow you to specify a smoothing definition and a result control
depiction for control of the evaluation of the variables. See Section 6.6 for information about
smoothing definitions and result control depictions.
The zone listing commands allow you to specify a result grid depiction (to specify the
location within the elements where variables are evaluated). See Section 6.6 for information
about result grid depictions.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
7-13
POINTMAX
POINTMAX
POINTNAME TYPE NUMBER SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL

POINTMAX scans the values of up to six variables at the specified point and lists the most
extreme values.
POINTNAME
The name of the model point at which the variables are evaluated. The point name must have
been defined using a model point definition command, see Section 6.7.
TYPE
[ABSMAX]
The type of extreme value to be listed, either the absolute value of the maximum, the
maximum or the minimum. {ABSMAX / MAXIMUM / MINIMUM}
NUMBER
The NUMBER most extreme values are listed for each specified variable.
[1]
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the smoothing definition used when evaluating the variables. A smoothing
definition is defined by the SMOOTHING command, see Section 6.6.
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result control depiction. A result control depiction is defined by the
RESULTCONTROL command, see Section 6.6.
RESPOPTION
[RESPRANGE]
Specifies whether to evaluate the variables for a single response (RESPOPTION =
RESPONSE) or for a range of responses (RESPOPTION = RESPRANGE).
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
Used when RESPOPTION = RESPONSE. Specifies the response for which the variables are
evaluated. A response name is defined by a response command, see Section 6.3.
RESPRANGE
[DEFAULT]
Used when RESPOPTION = RESPRANGE. Specifies the response-range for which the
variables are evaluated. A response range name is defined by a response-range command, see
Section 6.4.
VARIABLE1 . . . VARIABLE6
The names of the variables to be scanned. Variables are defined by variable commands, see
Section 6.9.
7-14
LINEMAX
LINEMAX LINENAME TYPE NUMBER SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL

LINEMAX scans the values of up to six variables along the specified line and lists the most
extreme values.
LINENAME
The name of the model line along which the variables are evaluated. The line name must
have been defined using a model line definition command, see Section 6.8.
TYPE
[ABSMAX]
NUMBER
[1]
The NUMBER most extreme values are listed for each specified variable. NUMBER is
ignored when RESPOPTION=RESPALL.
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
RESPOPTION
[RESPRANGE]
RESPONSE) or for a range of responses (RESPOPTION = RESPRANGE). If
RESPOPTION=RESPALL, then LINEMAX lists the extreme values for each response in the
response-range.
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
RESPRANGE
[DEFAULT]
Used when RESPOPTION = RESPRANGE or RESPALL. Specifies the response-range for
which the variables are evaluated. A response range name is defined by a response-range
command, see Section 6.4.
Section 6.9.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
7-15
ZONEMAX
ZONEMAX
ZONENAME RESULTGRID TYPE NUMBER SMOOTHING

RESULTCONTROL RESPOPTION RESPONSE RESPRANGE
VARIABLES...
ZONEMAX scans the values of up to six variables in the specified zone and lists the most
extreme values. The variables are evaluated at all points specified by the RESULTGRID
parameter within the zone specified by the ZONENAME parameter (see the notes at the end
of the ZONELIST command in this section).
Section 3.4). ZONEMAX evaluates data only at points within the current finite element
program.
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
The name of the zone in which the variables are evaluated. The zone name must have been
defined using a zone command, see Section 6.2.
RESULTGRID
[DEFAULT]
The name of the result grid that specifies where in the zone the variables are evaluated. The
result grid name must have been defined using the RESULTGRID command, see Section 6.6.
TYPE
[ABSMAX]
NUMBER
[1]
The NUMBER most extreme values are listed for each specified variable. NUMBER is
ignored when RESPOPTION=RESPALL.
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
RESPOPTION
[RESPRANGE]
RESPONSE) or for a range of responses (RESPOPTION = RESPRANGE). If
RESPOPTION=RESPALL, then ZONEMAX lists the extreme values for each response in
the response-range.
7-16
ZONEMAX
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
RESPRANGE
[DEFAULT]
Used when RESPOPTION = RESPRANGE or RESPALL. Specifies the response-range for
which the variables are evaluated. A response range name is defined by a response-range
command, see Section 6.4.
Section 6.9.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
7-17
POINTEXCEED
POINTEXCEED
POINTNAME TYPE VALUE SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL

POINTEXCEED scans the values of up to six variables at the specified point and lists the
values that exceed a prespecified value.
POINTNAME
TYPE
[ABSMAX]
VALUE
[0.0]
If TYPE = ABSMAX, a value is listed if its absolute value is greater than or equal to VALUE.
If TYPE = MAXIMUM, a value is listed if it is greater than or equal to VALUE. If TYPE =
MINIMUM, a value is listed if it is less than or equal to VALUE.
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
RESPOPTION
[RESPRANGE]
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
RESPRANGE
[DEFAULT]
Section 6.4.
Section 6.9.
7-18
LINEEXCEED
LINEEXCEED
LINENAME TYPE VALUE SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL

LINEEXCEED scans the values of up to six variables along the specified line and lists the
values that exceed a prespecified value.
LINENAME
TYPE
[ABSMAX]
VALUE
[0.0]
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
RESPOPTION
[RESPRANGE]
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
RESPRANGE
[DEFAULT]
variables are evaluated A response range name is defined by a response-range command, see
Section 6.4.
Section 6.9.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
7-19
ZONEEXCEED
ZONEEXCEED
ZONENAME RESULTGRID TYPE VALUE SMOOTHING

RESULTCONTROL RESPOPTION RESPONSE RESPRANGE
VARIABLES...
ZONEEXCEED scans the values of up to six variables in the specified zone and lists the
values that exceed a prespecified value. The variables are evaluated at all points specified by
the RESULTGRID parameter within the zone specified by the ZONENAME parameter (see
the notes at the end of the ZONELIST command in this section).
Section 3.4). ZONEEXCEED evaluates data only at points within the current finite element
program.
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
RESULTGRID
[DEFAULT]
TYPE
[ABSMAX]
VALUE
[0.0]
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
RESPOPTION
[RESPRANGE]
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
7-20
ZONEEXCEED
RESPRANGE
[DEFAULT]
Section 6.4.
Section 6.9.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
7-21
POINTLIST
POINTLIST
POINTNAME SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL RESPOPTION

RESPONSE RESPRANGE VARIABLES...
POINTLIST produces a listing giving the values of up to six variables at the specified point.
POINTNAME
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
RESPOPTION
[RESPRANGE]
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
RESPRANGE
[DEFAULT]
Section 6.4.
The name of the variables to be listed. Variables are defined by variable commands, see
Section 6.9.
7-22
LINELIST
LINELIST
LINENAME SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL RESPOPTION

RESPONSE RESPRANGE VARIABLES...
LINELIST produces a listing giving the values of up to six variables at points within the
specified line.
LINENAME
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
RESPOPTION
[RESPRANGE]
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
RESPRANGE
[DEFAULT]
Section 6.4.
The name of the variables to be listed. Variables are defined by variable commands, see
Section 6.9.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
7-23
ZONELIST
ZONELIST ZONENAME RESULTGRID SMOOTHING RESULTCONTROL

ZONELIST lists the values of up to six variables for all elements in a zone. The variables are
evaluated at all points specified by the RESULTGRID parameter within the zone specified by
the ZONENAME parameter (see the notes at the end of this command).
Section 3.4). ZONELIST evaluates data only at points within the current finite element
program.
ZONENAME
[WHOLE_MODEL]
RESULTGRID
[DEFAULT]
SMOOTHING
[DEFAULT]
The name of the smoothing technique that specifies whether to smooth certain variables and
how they are smoothed. A smoothing definition is defined by the SMOOTHING command,
see Section 6.6.
RESULTCONTROL
[DEFAULT]
RESPOPTION
[RESPRANGE]
RESPONSE
[DEFAULT]
RESPRANGE
[DEFAULT]
Section 6.4.
7-24
ZONELIST
VARIABLES...
The names of the variables to be listed. Variables are defined by variable commands, see
Section 6.9.
Notes
The locations where the variables are listed is determined using the following algorithm:
Determine the allowable result location types for the variables to be listed by applying Table
1 for each variable and intersecting.
If (all variables are location-independent), evaluate the variables.
Otherwise
If the result grid type is porthole,
If one of the allowable result location types is node, evaluate the variables at the
nodes. Otherwise, choose another allowable result location type and evaluate the
variables.
If the result grid type is nodes, evaluate the variables at the nodes if one of the allowable
result location types is node.
If the result grid type is element grid or element nodes, evaluate the variables at the
requested locations if one of the allowable result location types is element/layer rst.
If the result grid type is section grid or section nodes, evaluate the variables at the
requested locations if one of the allowable result location types is section rst.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
7-25
ZONELIST
Table 1: Allowable result location types for a variable

Variable type
Result location types
Location-independent All
Nodal field
Node, element/layer labeled, element/layer rst, section labeled,
section rst, contact segment labeled, contact segment rst, radiosity
labeled, radiosity rst
Element/layer field
Node (smoothing only), element/layer labeled, element/layer rst,
section labeled, section rst
Contact segment
Contact segment labeled, contact segment rst
Section field
Node (smoothing only), section labeled, section rst
Radiosity field
Node (smoothing only), radiosity labeled, radiosity rst
Line contour
Line contour
Virtual shift
Virtual shift
Node discrete
Node
Element local node
Element local node
Element local node field Element/layer labeled, element/layer rst, section labeled, section rst,
element local node
Coordinate
Node, element/layer labeled, element/layer rst, section labeled,
section rst, element local node, contact segment labeled, contact
segment rst, radiosity labeled, radiosity rst
Element face
Element face-set or element edge-set
Bolt
Bolt
7-26
Chapter 8
Graphics device control
Graphics device control Introduction
Chap. 8 Graphics devices
Graphics device control Introduction

The AUI can use the following plotting systems for graphics interaction and display.
Name
Adobe Illustrator
Windows GDI
HP-GL
HP-GL/2
OpenGL
PostScript
X Window
File
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Interactive
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Under normal use, the AUI displays graphics to you using an interactive plotting system.
The AUI chooses the interactive plotting system based on the capabilities of your computer.
When you want to save a graphics image displayed on the screen, you specify one of the filebased plotting systems as one of the parameters of the MOVIESAVE or SNAPSHOT
commands (see Section 3.3). For Windows versions of the AUI, when you are running in
user interface mode, you can also use the SAVEAVI or SAVEBMP commands (see Section
3.3) to save graphics.
The AUI also contains a plotting system for which graphics are not displayed; this is called
the null plotting system. The null system is used to suppress graphics output, which can be
useful in batch scripts. See Section 1.11 for an example.
You use the PLSYSTEM command, described in this section, to select the interactive plotting
system.
The PLCONTROL commands allow you to control the behaviors of the plotting systems.
There is one PLCONTROL command for each plotting system. See the command pages in
this section for detailed information.
Auxiliary commands
LIST PLSYSTEM
Lists the current plotting system and some diagnostic information.
LIST PLCONTROL ( )
Lists the settings for the selected plotting system.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-1
PLSYSTEM
PLSYSTEM SYSTEM
PLSYSTEM specifies the current plotting system, which the AUI uses to draw to the graphics
window. The system specified by the PLSYSTEM command is not saved in the database.
SYSTEM
The name of the plotting system. Valid names are installation-dependent, but are selected
from the following list:
GDI
OPENGL
XWINDOW
NULL
The initial value of SYSTEM is also installation-dependent.
8-2
PLCONTROL AI
PLCONTROL AI
FILENAME PROMPT PAGEOPTION ORIENTATION

PAGESIZE PAGEWIDTH PAGEHEIGHT SIZE WIDTH
HEIGHT XOFF YOFF LINEWIDTH FONT BACKGROUND
VERSION RESOLUTION XPIXFC YPIXFC COUNT
CARRIAGECONTROL REMOVEPARENTHESES UNITPWIDTH
UNITPHEIGHT UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFF
UNITYOFF UNITRESOLUTION UNITLINEWIDTH
PLCONTROL AI specifies the parameters associated with the Adobe Illustrator plotting
system driver.
FILENAME
PROMPT
[NO]
Determines whether or not the program will display a prompt before writing a new frame.
{YES / NO}
PAGEOPTION
[0]
If PAGEOPTION = 0, parameters ORIENTATION, PAGESIZE, etc., are used to determine
the plot size. For other values of PAGEOPTION, the plot size is set in terms of pixels as
follows:
1 320 200
2 640 480
3 800 600
4 1024 768
This option is provided for convenience when the plot destination is the PC screen.
ORIENTATION
[LANDSCAPE]
Determines whether the program will use the page in portrait mode or landscape mode. (See
figure.) {PORTRAIT / LANDSCAPE}
PAGESIZE
[DIRECT]
Specifies the page size. {A, B, C, D, E (for US paper sizes)}, {A0,
A1, A2, A3, A4, A5 (for ISO paper sizes)}. You can also set PAGESIZE =
DIRECT and specify the page size using parameters PAGEWIDTH, PAGEHEIGHT.
PAGEWIDTH
PAGEHEIGHT
Specify the width and height of the page when PAGESIZE = DIRECT.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
[8.5]
[11]
8-3
PLCONTROL AI
SIZE
[PAGE]
Determines whether the placement of the plotting surface on the page coincides with the page
or is directly determined by parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF and YOFF. {PAGE /
DIRECT}
WIDTH
[100.0]
HEIGHT
[100.0]
XOFF
[0.0]
YOFF
[0.0]
Specify the size and location of the plotting surface on the page when SIZE = DIRECT.
LINEWIDTH
Line width that the driver uses when drawing its thinnest possible line.
[0.007]
FONT
[Helvetica]
Specifies the font used for plotting character strings. FONT is case-sensitive, so you must
use the proper lower and upper-case characters in the font name.
BACKGROUND
[WHITE]
The AI driver will fill the plotting surface with this color before drawing anything else.
VERSION
[AI3]
Specifies the Adobe Illustrator version, either Adobe Illustrator 88 or Adobe Illustrator 3.
{AI88 / AI3}
RESOLUTION
[0.003]
RESOLUTION is used as a program tolerance for such tasks as area fill, hidden line removal,
etc. It should be set to the width of the thinnest line that the output device can display.
RESOLUTION cannot be set to zero.
XPIXFC
[19.685]
YPIXFC
[19.685]
The number of pixels per centimeter in the X and Y directions. These parameters need to be
set only if you want to enter coordinates and lengths using a unit of PIXELS.
COUNT
[100]
CARRIAGECONTROL
[NO]
If CARRIAGECONTROL = YES, the driver does not write into column 1 of the graphics
file. The reason for this option is to avoid writing into column 1 when the computer
interprets column 1 as a Fortran carriage control column. {YES / NO}
8-4
PLCONTROL AI
REMOVEPARENTHESES
[NO]
The AI driver can remove all parentheses from plotted text strings. This option is provided to
avoid a bug in the AI import feature of CorelDraw 3.0. {NO / YES}
UNITPWIDTH
[INCHES]
UNITPHEIGHT
[INCHES]
UNITWIDTH
[PERCENT]
UNITHEIGHT
[PERCENT]
UNITXOFF
[PERCENT]
UNITYOFF
[PERCENT]
UNITRESOLUTION
[INCHES]
UNITLINEWIDTH
[INCHES]
These parameters specify the unit of parameters PAGEWIDTH, PAGEHEIGHT, WIDTH,
HEIGHT, XOFF, YOFF, RESOLUTION and LINEWIDTH. {CM / INCHES / PIXELS
(if XPIXFC and YPIXFC are also defined) / POINTS} (A point is 1/72
inch.) You can also specify a unit of PERCENT for parameters UNITWIDTH,
UNITHEIGHT, UNITXOFF, UNITYOFF.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-5
8-6
PLCONTROL AI
PLCONTROL GDI
PLCONTROL GDI
BACKGROUND PROMPT COLOR SIZE WIDTH HEIGHT

XOFF YOFF RESOLUTION PICKRADIUS XPIXFC YPIXFC
PUSHKEYSYM PULLKEYSYM PUSHLENGTH
UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFF UNITYOFF
UNITRESOLUTION UNITPICKRADIUS
UNITPUSHLENGTH
PLCONTROL GDI specifies the parameters associated with the Microsoft Windows GDI
plotting system.
BACKGROUND
The background color of the graphics window.
[BLACK]
PROMPT
COLOR
SIZE
WIDTH
HEIGHT
XOFF
YOFF
These parameters are currently unused.
RESOLUTION
[1]
etc. It should be set to the width of the thinnest line that the workstation can display.
RESOLUTION cannot be set to 0.
PICKRADIUS
[5]
PICKRADIUS is used as a program tolerance for deciding when a graphics structure has
been picked.
XPIXFC
[AUTOMATIC]
YPIXFC
[AUTOMATIC]
Specify the number of pixels per centimeter of the workstation screen in the X (width) and Y
(height) directions. The program will calculate XPIXFC and/or YPIXFC automatically if you
enter AUTOMATIC for XPIXFC and/or YPIXFC.
PUSHKEYSYM
PULLKEYSYM
PUSHLENGTH
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-7
PLCONTROL GDI
UNITWIDTH
[PIXELS]
UNITHEIGHT
[PIXELS]
UNITXOFF
[PIXELS]
UNITYOFF
[PIXELS]
UNITRESOLUTION
[PIXELS]
UNITPICKRADIUS
[PIXELS]
These parameters specify the unit of parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF, YOFF,
RESOLUTION, PICKRADIUS and UNITPUSHLENGTH. {CM / INCHES / PIXELS
/ POINTS}.
UNITPUSHLENGTH
8-8
PLCONTROL HPGL
PLCONTROL HPGL FILENAME PROMPT DEVICE DEVOPTION PAGEOPTION

ORIENTATION PAGESIZE PAGEWIDTH PAGEHEIGHT
SIZE WIDTH HEIGHT XOFF YOFF BACKGROUND
ESCAPECODES POLYGONFILL CARRIAGECONTROL
RESOLUTION XPIXFC YPIXFC UNITPWIDTH
UNITPHEIGHT UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFF
UNITYOFF UNITRESOLUTION
numberi colori
PLCONTROL HPGL specifies the parameters associated with the HP-GL plotting system
driver.
FILENAME
PROMPT
[NO]
Determines whether or not the program will display a prompt before creating a new frame.
{YES / NO}
DEVICE
[7475]
DEVOPTION
[1]
The plotter device number and device option number, see table at the end of this command
for valid choices.
PAGEOPTION
[0]
follows:
1 320 200
2 640 480
3 800 600
4 1024 768
ORIENTATION
[LANDSCAPE]
Determines whether the program will use the page in portrait mode or landscape mode (see
figure). {PORTRAIT / LANDSCAPE}
PAGESIZE
[AUTOMATIC]
Specifies the page size. If PAGESIZE = AUTOMATIC, the program uses the page size
corresponding to the given plotter device and plotter device option. If PAGESIZE =
DIRECT, you set the page size using parameters PAGEWIDTH and PAGEHEIGHT.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-9
PLCONTROL HPGL
PAGEWIDTH
PAGEHEIGHT
[8.5]
[11]
SIZE
[DIRECT]
DIRECT}
WIDTH
[80.0]
HEIGHT
[80.0]
XOFF
[10.0]
YOFF
[10.0]
BACKGROUND
The color of the background, usually WHITE.
ESCAPECODES
The HP-GL driver can optionally supply escape codes to turn the plotter on or off.
NONE
No escape codes are supplied.
[WHITE]
[NONE]
INITIALIZATION
Escape codes are supplied when the plotter is initialized.
ALL
Escape codes are supplied before and after every graphics

function.
POLYGONFILL
[AUTOMATIC]
YES
The device driver uses the polygon fill command when outputting filled
areas.
NO
The device driver uses moves and draws when outputting filled areas.
AUTOMATIC The device driver uses the polygon fill command if the command is
supported by the plotter entered for the DEVICE parameter.
If the plot is to be read by another program, use POLYGONFILL = YES.
CARRIAGECONTROL
[NO]
interprets column 1 as a FORTRAN carriage control column. {YES / NO}
8-10
PLCONTROL HPGL
RESOLUTION
[0.03]
Used as a program tolerance for such tasks as area fill, hidden line removal, etc. It should be
set to the width of the thinnest line that the output device can display. RESOLUTION cannot
be set to zero.
XPIXFC
[19.685]
YPIXFC
[19.685]
The number of pixels per centimeter in the X and Y directions. The default value
corresponds to 50 pixels/inch. These parameters need to be set only if you want to enter
coordinates and lengths using a unit of PIXELS, or if the plot size is specified in terms of
pixels.
UNITPWIDTH
[INCHES]
UNITPHEIGHT
[INCHES]
UNITWIDTH
[PERCENT]
UNITHEIGHT
[PERCENT]
UNITXOFF
[PERCENT]
UNITYOFF
[PERCENT]
UNITRESOLUTION
[CM]
HEIGHT, XOFF, YOFF and RESOLUTION. {CM / INCHES / PIXELS (if
XPIXFC and YPIXFC are also defined) / POINTS} (A point is 1/72 inch).
For UNITWIDTH, UNITHEIGHT, UNITXOFF, UNITYOFF you can also specify a unit of
PERCENT.
numberi
colori
The pen number (corresponding to the location in a pen carousel or to a color number on a
CRT screen) and associated color.
If you will read the HP-GL file into MS-Word and MS-Word is configured to read HP-GL
files, then use the following pen/color table:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BLACK
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
BLUE
MAGENTA
CYAN
ORANGE
Valid device and option numbers are given in the following table.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-11
HP plotter number
7090
7440, 7470
7475
7510
7510 (cont.)
7550
7570
8-12
PLCONTROL HPGL
Plotter optional switch

settings and/or paper
size/type
ANSI (A-size)
ANSI (B-size)
ISO (A4-size)
ISO (A3-size)
US (A-size)
A4 (A4-size)
US/A4 (A-size)
US/A3 (B-size)
MET/A4 (A4-size)
MET/A3 (A3-size)
STANDARD (35 mm)
STANDARD (Polaroid)
STANDARD (Preview)
PAPER (A-size)
PAPER (B-size)
PAPER (A4-size)
PAPER (A3-size)
PAPER (8 10)
A-size
B-size
A4-size
A3-size
NORMAL (C-size)
NORMAL (D-size)
NORMAL (A2-size)
NORMAL (A1-size)
NORMAL (Arch. C-size)
NORMAL (Arch. D-size)
EXPAND (C-size)
EXPAND (D-size)
EXPAND (A2-size)
EXPAND (A1-size)
EXPAND (Arch. C-size)
EXPAND (Arch. D-size)
Device number
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PLCONTROL HPGL
7580
7585, 7586
7586 (roll paper)
ADINA R & D, Inc.
NORMAL (A-size)
NORMAL (B-size)
NORMAL (C-size)
NORMAL (D-size)
NORMAL (A4-size)
NORMAL (A3-size)
NORMAL (A2-size)
NORMAL (A1-size)
EXPAND (A-size)
EXPAND (B-size)
EXPAND (C-size)
EXPAND (D-size)
EXPAND (Arch. C-size)
EXPAND (Arch. D-size)
EXPAND (A4-size)
EXPAND (A3-size)
EXPAND (A2-size)
EXPAND (A1-size)
NORMAL (A-size)
NORMAL (B-size)
NORMAL (C-size)
NORMAL (D-size)
NORMAL (E-size)
NORMAL (A4-size)
NORMAL (A3-size)
NORMAL (A2-size)
NORMAL (A1-size)
NORMAL (A0-size)
EXPAND (A-size)
EXPAND (B-size)
EXPAND (C-size)
EXPAND (D-size)
EXPAND (E-size)
EXPAND (A4-size)
EXPAND (A3-size)
EXPAND (A2-size)
EXPAND (A1-size)
EXPAND (A0-size)
NORMAL (36 in.)
NORMAL (24 in.)
NORMAL (11 in.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
8-13
7595, 7596
7595, 7596 (cont.)

7596 (roll paper)
PLCONTROL HPGL
NORMAL (A-size)
NORMAL (B-size)
NORMAL (C-size)
NORMAL (D-size)
NORMAL (E-size)
NORMAL (A4-size)
NORMAL (A3-size)
NORMAL (A2-size)
NORMAL (A1-size)
NORMAL (A0-size)
EXPAND (A-size)
EXPAND (B-size)
EXPAND (C-size)
EXPAND (D-size)
EXPAND (E-size)
EXPAND (A4-size)
EXPAND (A3-size)
EXPAND (A2-size)
EXPAND (A1-size)
EXPAND (A0-size)
NORMAL (36 in.)
NORMAL (24 in.)
NORMAL (11 in.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
from the HP-GL Product Comparison Guide, Part No. (11)5954-7124, February 1987.
8-14
PLCONTROL HPGL
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-15
PLCONTROL HPGL2
PLCONTROL HPGL2
FILENAME PROMPT DEVICE DEVOPTION

PAGEOPTION ORIENTATION PAGESIZE PAGEWIDTH
PAGEHEIGHT SIZE WIDTH HEIGHT XOFF YOFF
LINEWIDTH BACKGROUND COLORS COLORMAX
ENCODEBITS CARRIAGECONTROL RESOLUTION
XPIXFC YPIXFC UNITPWIDTH UNITPHEIGHT
UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFF UNITYOFF
UNITRESOLUTION UNITLINEWIDTH
numberi colori
PLCONTROL HPGL2 specifies the parameters associated with the HP-GL/2 plotting system
driver.
FILENAME
PROMPT
[NO]
{YES / NO}
DEVICE
[5]
DEVOPTION
[1]
The plotter device number and device option number, see table at the end of this command
for valid choices.
PAGEOPTION
[0]
follows:
1 320 200
2 640 480
3 800 600
4 1024 768
ORIENTATION
[LANDSCAPE]
8-16
PLCONTROL HPGL2
PAGESIZE
[AUTOMATIC]
Specifies the page size.
AUTOMATIC
The program uses the page size corresponding to the given plotter
device and plotter device option.
DIRECT
You set the page size using parameters PAGEWIDTH and

PAGEHEIGHT.
PAGEWIDTH
PAGEHEIGHT
[8.5]
[11]
SIZE
[DIRECT]
DIRECT}
WIDTH
[80.0]
HEIGHT
[80.0]
XOFF
[10.0]
YOFF
[10.0]
LINEWIDTH
The line width that the driver uses when drawing its thinnest possible line.
[0.02]
BACKGROUND
[WHITE]
The color of the background, usually WHITE. For certain raster-based plotters, if the
background is not WHITE, the HP-GL/2 driver will fill the page with the background color
before plotting.
COLORS
[AUTOMATIC]
COLORMAX
[2]
If COLORS = AUTOMATIC, the HP-GL/2 driver automatically defines a color palette using
COLORMAX colors and data input lines are not used. If COLORS = PEN, the HP-GL/2
driver defines a color palette using the information given in the data input lines.
ENCODEBITS
[7]
For efficiency, the HP-GL/2 driver uses the PE (polyline encode) command to draw lines and
fill areas. If ENCODEBITS = 7, 7-bit mode is used for the encoding. If ENCODEBITS = 8,
8-bit mode is used. Use 8-bit mode if your system can send or transfer 8 bits of data without
parity. Otherwise, use 7-bit mode. If you are unsure, use 7-bit mode.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-17
PLCONTROL HPGL2
CARRIAGECONTROL
[NO]
interprets column 1 as a FORTRAN carriage control column. {YES / NO}
RESOLUTION
[0.02]
Used as a program tolerance for such tasks as area fill, hidden line removal, etc. It should be
set to the width of the thinnest line that the output device can display. RESOLUTION cannot
be set to zero.
XPIXFC
[19.685]
YPIXFC
[19.685]
The number of pixels per centimeter in the X and Y directions. The default value
corresponds to 50 pixels/inch. These parameters need to be set only if you want to enter
coordinates and lengths using a unit of PIXELS, or if the plot size is specified in terms of
pixels.
UNITPWIDTH
[INCHES]
UNITPHEIGHT
[INCHES]
UNITWIDTH
[PERCENT]
UNITHEIGHT
[PERCENT]
UNITXOFF
[PERCENT]
UNITYOFF
[PERCENT]
UNITRESOLUTION
[CM]
UNITLINEWIDTH
[CM]
HEIGHT, XOFF, YOFF, RESOLUTION and LINEWIDTH. {CM / INCHES / PIXELS
(if XPIXFC and YPIXFC are also defined) / POINTS} (A point is 1/72
inch). For UNITWIDTH, UNITHEIGHT, UNITXOFF, UNITYOFF you can also specify a
unit of PERCENT.
numberi
colori
The pen number (corresponding to the location in a pen carousel or to a color number on a
CRT screen) and associated color. The data input lines are used and read only if COLORS =
PEN.
8-18
PLCONTROL HPGL2
Valid device and option numbers are given in the following table.
Paper size/type
Device Device option
HP plotter number
number
number
HP 7600 Model 240D D
1
1
HP 7600 Model 240E E
1
2
HP 7600 Model 250
D
2
1
HP 7600 Model 255
E
2
2
HP 7600 Model 355
E
2
3
DraftMaster SX,RX,MX A (vert.)
3
1
(normal margins)
A (horiz.)
3
2
B (vert.)
3
3
C (horiz.)
3
4
D (vert.)
3
5
D (horiz.)
3
6
E (vert.)
3
7
Arch. C (horiz.)
3
8
Arch. D (vert.)
3
9
Arch. D (horiz.)
3
10
Arch. 30 42 (vert.)
3
11
Arch. 30 42 (horiz.)
3
12
Arch. E (vert.)
3
13
A4 (vert.)
3
14
A4 (horiz.)
3
15
A3 (vert.)
3
16
A2 (horiz.)
3
17
A1 (vert.)
3
18
A1 (horiz.)
3
19
A0 (vert.)
3
20
(expanded margins)
A (vert.)
3
21
A (horiz.)
3
22
B (vert.)
3
23
C (horiz.)
3
24
D (vert.)
3
25
D (horiz.)
3
26
E (vert.)
3
27
Arch. C (horiz.)
3
28
Arch. D (vert.)
3
29
Arch. D (horiz.)
3
30
Arch. 30 42 (vert.)
3
31
3
32
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-19
PLCONTROL HPGL2
Arch. E (vert.)
A4 (vert.)
A4 (horiz.)
A3 (vert.)
A2 (horiz.)
A1 (vert.)
A1 (horiz.)
A0 (vert.)
PaintJet XL (with
A (vert.)
HP-GL/2 font cartridge), B (vert.)
PaintJet XL300
A4 (vert.)
A3 (vert.)
LaserJet III
Letter (vert.)
Letter (horiz.)
Legal (vert.)
Legal (horiz.)
Exec. (vert.)
Exec. (horiz.)
A4 (vert.)
A4 (horiz.)
COM-10 (vert.)
COM-10 (horiz.)
Monarch (vert.)
Monarch (horiz.)
C5 (vert.)
C5 (horiz.)
DL (vert.)
DL (horiz.)
HP DesignJet
A (vert.)
(normal margins)
A (horiz.)
B (vert.)
C (horiz.)
D (vert.)
D (horiz.)
E (vert.)
Arch. C (horiz.)
Arch. D (vert.)
Arch. D (horiz.)
Arch. 30 42 (vert.)
Arch. E (vert.)
A4 (vert.)
8-20
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
PLCONTROL HPGL2
(expanded margins)
A4 (horiz.)
A3 (vert.)
A2 (horiz.)
A1 (vert.)
A1 (horiz.)
A0 (vert.)
A (vert.)
A (horiz.)
B (vert.)
C (horiz.)
D (vert.)
D (horiz.)
E (vert.)
Arch. C (horiz.)
Arch. D (vert.)
Arch. D (horiz.)
Arch. 30 42 (vert.)
Arch. E (vert.)
A4 (vert.)
A4 (horiz.)
A3 (vert.)
A2 (horiz.)
A1 (vert.)
A1 (horiz.)
A0 (vert.)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Notes on the use of HP-GL/2 with the HP LaserJet III or higher printer:
1) Use the following parameter settings:
DEVICE = 5, DEVOPTION = (from table), PAGEOPTION = 0, PAGESIZE =
AUTOMATIC, LINEWIDTH = 0.02, BACKGROUND = WHITE, COLORS =
AUTOMATIC, COLORMAX = 2, ENCODEBITS = 7, CARRIAGECONTROL = NO,
RESOLUTION = 0.02, UNITRESOLUTION = CM, UNITLINEWIDTH = CM
Some or all of these parameters may be already set correctly.
2) The printer should be configured with the Page Protection option (see the printer user's
manual). Configuring the printer with Page Protection may be possible only if your
printer has optional memory installed. If you do not use Page Protection, you will
probably get the printer message "21 PRINT OVERRUN" when you send the graphics
file to the printer.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-21
PLCONTROL HPGL2
3) All lines and characters are drawn in black, including line contours. The only graphics
that are drawn with gray scales are fill areas, including filled bands.
4) On the PC, DOS operating system, a convenient way of printing the HP-GL/2 file is to
use the DOS PRINT command, as if you were going to print an ordinary text file using
DOS.
8-22
PLCONTROL NULL
PLCONTROL NULL WIDTH HEIGHT UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT

PLCONTROL NULL specifies the parameters associated with the NULL plotting system.
You use this plotting system when you don't want plots to be produced each time you enter a
plotting command. One example of when you might use the NULL plotting system is when
you are running the program in batch mode and you want only hard copies of plots. In this
case, you specify the PLSYSTEM to be NULL and use SNAPSHOT to make the plots. See
the example in Section 1.11.
WIDTH
HEIGHT
The size of the plotting surface.
[800]
[600]
UNITWIDTH
[PIXELS]
UNITHEIGHT
[PIXELS]
Units of parameters WIDTH and HEIGHT. {CM / INCHES / POINTS / PIXELS}
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-23
PLCONTROL OPENGL
PLCONTROL OPENGL BACKGROUND PROMPT DOFF11 DOFF10 SIZE

WIDTH HEIGHT XOFF YOFF RESOLUTION
PICKRADIUS XPIXFC YPIXFC HIDDEN UNITWIDTH
UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFF UNITYOFF
UNITRESOLUTION UNITPICKRADIUS
PLCONTROL OPENGL specifies the parameters associated with the OpenGL plotting
system.
BACKGROUND
[BLACK]
PROMPT
[NO]
Determines whether or not the program will display a prompt before opening, clearing or
closing the graphics window. {YES / NO}
DOFF11
[1.0]
DOFF10
[1.0]
These parameters provide control over the depth buffer. Increasing these values increases the
distance between two successive values in the depth buffer. A value of 1.0 corresponds to the
smallest distance that is resolvable by the depth buffer.
If a bandplot appears speckled when using OpenGL graphics and the positions of the speckles
changes as you rotate the plot out of plane, it is likely that one of these parameters needs to be
increased. If you are using OpenGL 1.1 or later, increase DOFF11; if you are using OpenGL
1.0, increase DOFF10. Use trial and error to find the smallest value of the parameter needed
to avoid the speckles.
SIZE
[AUTOMATIC]
Determines whether you specify the size and location of the plotting window using the
parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF and YOFF, the program automatically selects the size
and location of the plotting window, or the program draws in the window specified by the
user interface. {DIRECT / AUTOMATIC / INTERFACE}
WIDTH
HEIGHT
XOFF
YOFF
Specifies the size and location of the plotting window when SIZE=DIRECT. However the
window manager may override these preferences. See the figure in the PLCONTROL
XWINDOW command description in this section.
8-24
PLCONTROL OPENGL
RESOLUTION
[1]
PICKRADIUS
[5]
been picked. It also determines the minimum mouse motion before the AUI redraws the
model during dynamic model transformation.
XPIXFC
[AUTOMATIC]
YPIXFC
[AUTOMATIC]
Specifies the number of pixels per centimeter of the workstation screen in the X (width) and
Y (height) directions. The program will calculate XPIXFC and/or YPIXFC automatically if
you enter AUTOMATIC for XPIXFC and/or YPIXFC.
HIDDEN
[HARDWARE]
Specifies whether or not to use hardware hidden line removal (typically with a depth buffer).
We recommend that you use HARDWARE unless specifically advised otherwise.
{HARDWARE / SOFTWARE}
UNITWIDTH
[PIXELS]
UNITHEIGHT
[PIXELS]
UNITXOFF
[PIXELS]
UNITYOFF
[PIXELS]
UNITRESOLUTION
[PIXELS]
UNITPICKRADIUS
[PIXELS]
These parameters specify the units of parameter WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF, YOFF,
RESOLUTION and PICKRADIUS. {CM / INCHES / PIXELS / POINTS}.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-25
PLCONTROL POSTSCRIPT
PLCONTROL POSTSCRIPT FILENAME PROMPT ORIENTATION PAGEOPTION

COLOR PAGESIZE PAGEWIDTH PAGEHEIGHT
SIZE WIDTH HEIGHT XOFFSET YOFFSET
LINEWIDTH FONT BACKGROUND VERSION
ENCAPSULATED BOUNDINGBOX PAGEFLAG
FOLDING RESOLUTION XPIXFC YPIXFC COUNT
CARRIAGECONTROL UNITPWIDTH UNITPHEIGHT
UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT UNITXOFFSET
UNITYOFFSET UNITRESOLUTION
UNITLINEWIDTH
PLCONTROL POSTSCRIPT specifies the parameters associated with the PostScript plotting
system driver.
FILENAME
PROMPT
[NO]
{YES / NO}
ORIENTATION
[PORTRAIT]
PAGEOPTION
[-1]
the plot size. For positive values of PAGEOPTION, the plot size is set in terms of pixels as
follows:
1 320 200
2 640 480
3 800 600
4 1024 768
If PAGEOPTION=-1, then PAGEOPTION is set differently depending upon whether the
SNAPSHOT command is used or the MOVIESAVE command is used. When the
SNAPSHOT command is used, then PAGEOPTION=-1 is the same as PAGEOPTION=0.
When the MOVIESAVE command is used, then PAGEOPTION=-1 is the same as
PAGEOPTION=4. In addition, XPIXFC and YPIXFC are reset as described below.
The intent of PAGEOPTION=-1 is to provide a reasonable default for both the SNAPSHOT
and MOVIESAVE commands.
8-26
COLOR
[RGB]
Determines whether the program will produce graphics output in color or convert all colors to
gray-scales. {RGB / GRAY}
PAGESIZE
[A]
Specifies the page size. {A, B, C, D, E (for US paper sizes)}, {A0,
A1, A2, A3, A4, A5 (for ISO paper sizes)}. You can also set PAGESIZE =
DIRECT and specify the page size using parameters PAGEWIDTH, PAGEHEIGHT.
PAGEWIDTH
PAGEHEIGHT
[8.5]
[11]
SIZE
[DIRECT]
or is directly determined by parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFFSET and YOFFSET.
{PAGE / DIRECT}
WIDTH
[80.0]
HEIGHT
[80.0]
XOFFSET
[10.0]
YOFFSET
[10.0]
Specify the size and location of the plotting surface when SIZE=DIRECT (see figure).
LINEWIDTH
[0.007]
Line width that the PostScript driver will use when drawing its thinnest possible line.
FONT
[Helvetica]
Specifies the PostScript font that is used for plotting character strings. Note that the
PostScript driver does not check if this font is actually present on the device that is being used
to make the plot. The FONT parameter is case-sensitive, so you must use the proper lower
and upper-case characters in the font name.
BACKGROUND
The background color of the plotting paper or terminal screen.
[WHITE]
VERSION
[ADOBE3]
Specifies whether the PostScript driver will use Adobe PostScript version 1, Adobe
PostScript version 2 or ADOBE PostScript version 3. {ADOBE1 / ADOBE2 / ADOBE3}
ENCAPSULATED
[NO]
Determines whether or not the encapsulated PostScript format (EPSF format) is used. Note
that the encapsulated PostScript format should be used in conjunction with VERSION =
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-27
ADOBE2 or ADOBE3. {YES / NO}

BOUNDINGBOX
[TOP]
Determines whether the BoundingBox comment will be written and where in the file it will
be placed (i.e., at the beginning of the file or at the beginning of each page). Some PostScript
devices require the BoundingBox comment. {NO / TOP / PAGE}
PAGEFLAG
[NO]
Some PostScript printers that support Adobe PostScript version 2 and higher require the page
size to be specified with a '<< /PageSize [A B] >> setpagedevice' line, where A and B give
the page size in points. The PostScript driver will write this line if VERSION = ADOBE2 or
ADOBE3 and PAGEFLAG = YES.
FOLDING
[0]
The PostScript driver can fold its output so that each line of output contains up to FOLDING
characters. This option is useful when you want to transfer the PostScript file using a
fixed-record format. If FOLDING = 0, folding is disabled and each line of the PostScript file
will contain a single PostScript command.
RESOLUTION
[0.0033]
etc. It should be set to the width of the thinnest line that the terminal can display.
RESOLUTION cannot be set to zero.
XPIXFC
[19.685]
YPIXFC
[19.685]
The number of pixels per centimeter in the X and Y directions. These parameters need not be
defined in general. They are only used so that you can enter coordinates and lengths on the
plotting surface using a unit of PIXELS.
Note that 19.685 = 50/2.54, so 19.685 corresponds to 50 pixels/inch.
In the special case when PAGEOPTION=-1 and the MOVIESAVE command is used, then
XPIXFC and YPIXFC are set to 28.346 = 72/2.54 (28.346 corresponds to 72 pixels/inch).
Then one pixel = one point (since one point = 1/72 inch).
COUNT
[4096]
The maximum number of moves and draws in a path is set by parameter COUNT. When the
number of moves and draws exceeds COUNT, the driver draws the current path and moves to
the last plotted location. Increasing COUNT slightly improves the efficiency of the driver but
may cause the PostScript device to run out of memory.
8-28
CARRIAGECONTROL
Determines whether or not the driver will use column 1 of the PostScript output as a
FORTRAN carriage control column. {YES / NO}
[NO]
UNITPWIDTH
[INCHES]
UNITPHEIGHT
[INCHES]
UNITWIDTH
[PERCENT]
UNITHEIGHT
[PERCENT]
UNITXOFFSET
[PERCENT]
UNITYOFFSET
[PERCENT]
UNITRESOLUTION
[INCHES]
UNITLINEWIDTH
[INCHES]
HEIGHT, XOFFSET, YOFFSET, RESOLUTION and LINEWIDTH. {CM / INCHES /
PIXELS (if XPIXFC and YPIXFC are also defined) / POINTS} (A point
is 1/72 inch). For UNITWIDTH, UNITHEIGHT, UNITXOFFSET, UNITYOFFSET you can
also specify a unit of PERCENT.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-29
8-30
PLCONTROL XWINDOW
PLCONTROL XWINDOW
BACKGROUND PROMPT COLOR SIZE WIDTH

HEIGHT XOFF YOFF RESOLUTION PICKRADIUS
XPIXFC YPIXFC PUSHKEYSYM PULLKEYSYM
PUSHLENGTH UNITWIDTH UNITHEIGHT
UNITXOFF UNITYOFF UNITRESOLUTION
UNITPICKRADIUS UNITPUSHLENGTH
PLCONTROL XWINDOW specifies the parameters associated with the X Window plotting
system.
BACKGROUND
[BLACK]
PROMPT
[NO]
Determines whether or not the program will display a prompt before opening, clearing or
closing the graphics window. {YES / NO}
COLOR
SIZE
[AUTOMATIC]
Determines whether you specify the size and location of the plotting window using the
parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF and YOFF, the program automatically selects the size
and location of the plotting window, or the program draws in the window specified by the
program interface. {DIRECT / AUTOMATIC / INTERFACE}
WIDTH
HEIGHT
XOFF
YOFF
Specify the size and location of the plotting window when SIZE = DIRECT (see figure).
However, the window manager may override these preferences.
RESOLUTION
[1]
PICKRADIUS
[5]
been picked.
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-31
PLCONTROL XWINDOW
XPIXFC
[AUTOMATIC]
YPIXFC
[AUTOMATIC]
Specify the number of pixels per centimeter of the workstation screen in the X (width) and Y
(height) directions. The program will calculate XPIXFC and/or YPIXFC automatically if you
enter AUTOMATIC for XPIXFC and/or YPIXFC.
PUSHKEYSYM
PULLKEYSYM
PUSHLENGTH
UNITWIDTH
[PIXELS]
UNITHEIGHT
[PIXELS]
UNITXOFF
[PIXELS]
UNITYOFF
[PIXELS]
UNITRESOLUTION
[PIXELS]
UNITPICKRADIUS
[PIXELS]
These parameters specify the unit of parameters WIDTH, HEIGHT, XOFF, YOFF,
RESOLUTION, PICKRADIUS and UNITPUSHLENGTH. {CM / INCHES / PIXELS
/ POINTS}.
UNITPUSHLENGTH
8-32
PLCONTROL XWINDOW
ADINA R & D, Inc.
8-33
PLCONTROL XWINDOW
This page intentionally left blank.
8-34
Command index
Command index
A
ACTIVEZONE, 6-23
ALIAS, 6-138
ANIMATE, 5-238
AXIS, 5-219
B
BANDANNOTATION, 5-96
BANDPLOT, 5-80
BANDRENDERING, 5-92
BANDSTYLE, 5-83
BANDTABLE AUTOMATIC, 5-85
BANDTABLE CUSTOM, 5-88
BANDTABLE REPEATING, 5-91
BOLTCOMBINATION, 6-106
BOLTLINE, 6-131
BOLTPOINT, 6-91
BOUNDEPICTION, 5-47
CSZONE, 6-18
CURVEDEPICTION, 5-223
CUTSURFACE CUTPLANE, 5-58
CUTSURFACE ISOSURFACE, 5-63
CUTSURFACE NONE, 5-66
D
DAMPINGTABLE, 6-61
DATABASE ATTACH, 3-4
DATABASE DETACH, 3-5
DATABASE MOVIESAVE, 3-6
DATABASE NEW, 3-1
DATABASE OPEN, 3-2
DATABASE SAVE, 3-3
DBCOMBINATION, 6-105
DBLINE, 6-130
DBPOINT, 6-90
DRAWBEADINFO, 7-9
BOXZONE, 6-15
ECHO, 3-35
CGINFO, 7-6
CGZONE, 6-16
COLORTABLE, 5-253
COLORZONE, 6-24
COMBZONE, 6-17
COMMANDFILE, 3-27
CONSTANT, 6-139
CONTROL, 6-1
CPINFO, 7-7
CSCOMBINATION, 6-100
CSINFO, 7-8
CSLINE, 6-125
CSPOINT, 6-85
ADINA R & D, Inc.
EGINFO, 7-10
EGZONE, 6-19
ELCOMBINATION, 6-96
ELDEPICTION, 5-38
ELESETLINE, 6-132
ELESETPOINT, 6-92
ELFSETLINE, 6-133
ELFSETPOINT, 6-93
ELINEANNOTATION, 5-123
ELINEPLOT, 5-116
ELINESTYLE, 5-119
ELINERENDERING, 5-121
ELINFO, 7-11
Index-1
Command index
ELLINE, 6-121
GSDEPICTION, 5-24
ELPOINT, 6-78
GVDEPICTION, 5-26
ELZONE, 6-20
END, 3-36
EVECTORGRID, 5-109
HARMONICSHOW, 5-189
HIGHLIGHT, 4-11
EVECTORPLOT, 5-102
EVECTORQUANTITY, 5-108
EVECTORRENDERING, 5-111
LCCOMBINATION, 6-104
EVECTORSTYLE, 5-106
LCLINE, 6-129
EXIT, 3-36
LCPLOT, 5-161
EXPORT STL, 3-28
LCPOINT, 6-88
F
FEPROGRAM, 3-30
FILEECHO, 3-19
FILELIST, 3-18
FILELOG, 3-20
FILEREAD, 3-16
FILESESSION, 3-17
FOURIERSHOW, 5-206
FRAME, 5-2
LCSTYLE, 5-162
LINEEXCEED, 7-19
LINELIST, 7-23
LINEMAX, 7-15
LINESHOW, 5-181
LOADPLOT, 5-71
LOADPORTHOLE, 3-7
LOADRENDERING, 5-73
LOADSTYLE, 5-72
LOCATOR, 4-6
FREQCURVE, 6-62
FREQTABLE, 6-63
FSSHOW, 5-196
MASSINFO, 7-4
FTSHOW, 5-200
MASS-SELECT, 6-73
G
GEDRAWING, 5-67
GLDEPICTION, 5-22
GNCOMBINATION, 6-108
GNLINE, 6-134
GPDEPICTION, 5-20
GRAPHDEPICTION, 5-216
GRAPHLIST, 5-215
GRAPHPLOT, 5-213
GRAPHSTYLE, 5-214
Index-2
MATERIALSHOW STRAIN, 5-169

MATERIALSHOW TIME, 5-172
MESHANNOTATION, 5-45
MESHINTEGRATION, 6-111
MESHMAX, 6-115
MESHPLOT, 5-13
MESHRENDERING, 5-30
MESHSTYLE, 5-17
MESHWINDOW, 5-56
MODE, 3-29
MODELDEPICTION, 5-27
Command index
MODELINFO, 7-1
POINTLIST, 7-22
MOVIEFRAME, 5-236
POINTMAX, 7-14
MOVIESAVE, 3-23
MOVIESHOOT CUTPLANE, 5-233
QUIT, 3-36
MOVIESHOOT ISOSURFACE, 5-234

MOVIESHOOT LOAD-STEP, 5-228
MOVIESHOOT MODE-SHAPE, 5-229
RADCOMBINATION, 6-101
MOVIESHOOT ROTATE, 5-231
RADGZONE, 6-21
MOVIESHOOT TRACEPLOT, 5-235
RADLINE, 6-126
MPFINFO, 7-5
RADPOINT, 6-86
N
NODECOMBINATION, 6-94
NODEDEPICTION, 5-34
NODEINFO, 7-12
NODELINE, 6-120
NODEPOINT, 6-77
RADZONE, 6-22
RANDOMSHOW, 5-193
REACTIONPLOT, 5-127
REACTIONSTYLE, 5-130
REACTIONSUM, 6-117
READ, 3-15
REDO, 4-2
REFRESH, 5-240
PAN, 4-9
REGENERATE, 5-1
PARAMETER, 3-32
RESET MESHWINDOW, 4-5
PAUSE, 3-31
RESPONSE ENVELOPE, 6-41
PICKED DELETE, 4-3
RESPONSE HARMONIC, 6-34
PICKED MESHWINDOW-NORMAL, 4-4
RESPONSE LOAD-STEP, 6-28
PLCONTROL AI, 8-3
RESPONSE MODE-SHAPE, 6-29
PLCONTROL GDI, 8-7
RESPONSE RANDOM, 6-36
PLCONTROL HPGL, 8-9
RESPONSE RESIDUAL, 6-30
PLCONTROL HPGL2, 8-16
RESPONSE RESPONSE-COMBINATION, 6-38
PLCONTROL NULL, 8-23
RESPONSE RESPONSE-SPECTRUM, 6-31
PLCONTROL OPENGL, 8-24
RESPONSEINFO, 7-2
PLCONTROL POSTSCRIPT, 8-26
RESPONSESHOW, 5-178
PLCONTROL XWINDOW, 8-31
RESPRANGE LOAD-STEP, 6-48
PLOTAREA, 5-51
RESPRANGE MODE-SHAPE, 6-51
PLSYSTEM, 8-2
RESULTANT, 6-140
POINTCOMBINATION, 6-107
RESULTCONTROL, 6-68
POINTEXCEED, 7-18
RESULTGRID, 6-74
ADINA R & D, Inc.
Index-3
Command index
RSPECTRUM, 6-59
UNDO, 4-1
RSPECTRUMSHOW, 5-187
USERDATA, 5-175
USERNODALDATA, 5-250
USERSEGMENT, 5-249
SAVEAVI, 3-25
USERSHOW, 5-176
SAVEBMP, 3-26
USERTEXT, 5-245
SECTCOMBINATION, 6-98
SECTLINE, 6-123
SECTPOINT, 6-83
VARIABLEINFO, 7-3
SMOOTHING, 6-66
VIEW, 5-53
SNAPSHOT, 3-21
VSCOMBINATION, 6-103
SPECTRUM, 6-55
VSDEPICTION, 5-44
SPECTRUMSHOW, 5-183
VSLINE, 6-128
SSPECTRUM, 6-57
VSPOINT, 6-88
SSPECTRUMSHOW, 5-185
STOP, 3-36
ZONE, 6-11
SUBFRAME, 5-6
ZONEEXCEED, 7-20
ZONELIST, 7-24
TEXT, 5-241
ZONEMAX, 7-16
TFSHOW, 5-211
ZOOM, 4-8
TRACEANNOTATION, 5-156
TRACECALCULATION, 5-152
TRACEPLOT, 5-140
TRACERAKE COORDINATES, 5-146
TRACERAKE GNODES, 5-148
TRACERAKE GRIDS, 5-149
TRACERAKE NODES, 5-147
TRACERENDERING, 5-155
TRACESHOW, 5-208
TRACESTEP, 5-158
TRACESTYLE, 5-142
TRACETYPE PARTICLE, 5-144
TRACETYPE RIBBON, 5-145
U
UDRAW, 5-246
Index-4

ADINA User Interface Command Reference Manual: Utomatic

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

ADINA User Interface Command Reference Manual: Utomatic

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

UTOMATIC

ADINA User Interface

ADINA User Interface

Report ARD 11-6

for the ADINA system version 8.8

ADINA R & D, Inc.

ADINA R & D, Inc.

5.13 Plotting definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-253

AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. V Display Processing

Sec. 1.1 Program execution

1.1 Program execution

1.2 Command syntax

COMMAND[1] PARAM1 PARAM2[2]...

ADINA R & D, Inc.

AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. V Display Processing

Sec. 1.2 Command syntax

taken from the setting of another (different) command parameter.

ADINA R & D, Inc.

list object definitions

Brief command descriptions are provided for the auxiliary commands.

1.3 Input details

AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. V Display Processing

Sec. 1.3 Input details

ADINA R & D, Inc.

AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. V Display Processing

Sec. 1.3 Input details

Termination of data line input - string values in data input lines

ADINA R & D, Inc.

AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. V Display Processing

Sec. 1.5 File input/output

ADINA R & D, Inc.

1.5 File input/output

ADINA-IN batch command input

1.6 The AUI database

AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. V Display Processing

Sec. 1.7 Listings

Display another line of the listing.

1.8 Plotting length units

ADINA R & D, Inc.

1.9 Plotting symbols

1.10 Plotting colors

AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. V Display Processing

Sec. 1.12 Tips for writing batch files

1.12 Tips for writing batch files

ADINA R & D, Inc.

1.13 New features in AUI 8.8

AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. V Display Processing

Sec. 1.14 ADINA System documentation

EVECTORRENDERING FILTER: Allows plotting of only positive or negative tensor

1.14 ADINA System documentation

ADINA R & D, Inc.

AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. V Display Processing

Sec. 1.14 ADINA System documentation

You will also find the following book useful:

ADINA R & D, Inc.

Chap. 2 Quick index

MOVIESAVE, saves all of the graphics

Section 3.3: Auxiliary files

ADINA R & D, Inc.

Chapter 4: Editing commands

Chap. 2 Quick index

Section 4.2: Graphics interaction

Chapter 5: Display Control